549300IC82VDT8CYDH512024-04-012025-03-31549300IC82VDT8CYDH512023-04-012024-03-31549300IC82VDT8CYDH512025-03-31549300IC82VDT8CYDH512024-03-31549300IC82VDT8CYDH512023-03-31549300IC82VDT8CYDH512025-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512024-04-012025-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512025-03-31ifrs-full:StatutoryReserveMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512024-04-012025-03-31ifrs-full:StatutoryReserveMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512025-03-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512024-04-012025-03-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512024-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512024-03-31ifrs-full:StatutoryReserveMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512024-03-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512023-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512023-03-31ifrs-full:StatutoryReserveMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512023-03-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512023-04-012024-03-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512023-04-012024-03-31ifrs-full:StatutoryReserveMember549300IC82VDT8CYDH512023-04-012024-03-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMemberiso4217:GBPiso4217:GBPxbrli:shares
Graphics
2024/25 Group Annual Report
and Financial Statements

Graphics
Our Business
*
We supply top quality drinking water to 2.3 million customers in the south east of England. Through our
network of 9,000 miles of pipes, we deliver around 543 million litres of water every day. The skill and expertise
of our colleagues ensure our customers’ water meets the highest of standards.
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
2 South East Water Limited
Our Area
We operate our supply system across three operational regions:
South East Water is made up of three operating areas – the Western region, Sussex and Kent.
Each of our regions has specific characteristics, determined by different river catchments, geology,
topography, ecology, land use and, importantly, history. The investment needed to maintain a resilient
supply system will therefore be different in each region.
Western
Sussex
Kent
* The values quoted are for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/investors
We supply around
543 million litres
of water a day
that’s how much water
we supply to around
2.3 million people
9,000 miles of
underground pipes
that’s how we get
fresh drinking water
direct to your tap
1,173 employees
that’s how we make
sure your water supply
runs 24 hours a day,
365 days a year
198 kgCO
2
e/Ml
that’s the level of
Greenhouse gas
emissions we emit
across the company,
to supply water to
your tap
Contents
Key facts
Our performance 4
How we invest in your water 4
Strategic Report 5-129
Chair and CEO joint report 6
Our purpose 14
Our culture 15
Our business model 16
Our strategy 22
Our business environment 48
Risk management and principal risks 50
Business performance 66
Group structure and financing 72
Financial performance 74
Responsible business 80
Non-financial and sustainability
information statement 96
Long-term viability statement 118
Going concern statement 128
Governance 130-189
Corporate governance statement 132
Remuneration report 164
Financial Statements 200-283
Directors’ report 202
Independent auditors’ report 206
Group income statement 216
Group statement of other
comprehensive income 216
Company income statement 217
Company statement of other
comprehensive income 217
Group statement of financial position 218
Company statement of financial position 219
Group statement of changes in equity 220
Company statement of changes in equity 221
Group statement of cash flows 222
Company statement of cash flows 223
Notes to the financial statements 224
Our Vision
Our vision is to be the water company people want to be supplied by and want to work for. Everything we do
is underpinned by technical excellence.
southeastwater.co.uk 3
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report

Graphics
4 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Drinking water
supplied
543 million
Litres each day
(2023/24: 544.3 million)
Revenue
£285.5 million
Increase of 1.7 per cent
on last year
Greenhouse gas
emissions
198
kgCO
2
e/MI
(2023/24:203 kgCO
2
e/MI)
Loss
before tax
£19.8 million
Last year loss before tax
of £36.7 million
Operational highlights
Financial highlights
Our performance
How we invest in your water
Customer
services
Interest
and tax
Water
treatment
Water
extraction
Dividends
allocated
*
41%
7%
29%
13%
10%
0%
Number of
employees
1,173
(2023/24: 1,106)
Capital
expenditure
£157.3 million
Increase of 27.1 per cent
on last year
Cash generated
from operations
£128.4 million
Increase of 8.1 per cent
on last year
2023/24: 0%2023/24: 17%
2023/24: 24%
2023/24: 7%
2023/24: 42%
2023/24: 10%
Getting
water to you
* Dividends allocated to the appointed business

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 5
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Strategic Report
Contents
Chair and CEO joint report 6
Our purpose 14
Our culture 15
Our business model 16
Our strategy 22
Implementation of our strategy 44
Our business environment 48
Risk management and principal risks 50
Business performance 66
Group structure and financing 72
Financial performance 74
Responsible business 80
Non-financial and sustainability
information statement 96
Climate-related disclosures 98
Long-term viability statement 118
Going concern statement 128

Graphics
6 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
We have continued to invest significantly in new
and existing infrastructure and environmental
projects while dealing with the day-to-day
operational challenges associated with providing a
first-class drinking water service to our 2.3 million
customers. We have brought forward and prioritised
investment in important engineering projects to
restore resilience and boost flexibility in the parts of
our supply system that are most under stress. We’re
doing more than ever to support our customers,
especially those in our society who are vulnerable, and
to protect and enhance the environment through
our proactive, industry-leading environmental
programme. More information about this can be
found later in our report. However, we know we need
to go further and faster to tackle the challenges we
face now and those that lie ahead, most notably the
accelerated impact of climate change.
Competition and Markets Authority
– Review of Final Determination
That’s why we submitted our boldest and most
ambitious business plan ever to Ofwat for the new
2025 to 2030 business plan period (AMP 8). This
proposed a headline investment of £2.1 billion
over the next five years to improve customer
service, reduce customer supply interruptions and
strengthen network resilience through investment
in critical infrastructure (including the acceleration
of the new Broad Oak reservoir). Ofwat’s Final
Determination on our plan was published in
December. This was 13 per cent or £0.3 billion less
than we proposed in our business plan and that is
one of the reasons why we have asked Ofwat to
refer its Final Determination to the Competition and
Markets Authority (CMA) for a new, independent
review in the best interest of customers.
Chair and CEO joint report
Welcome to our group annual report and the audited financial statements for the
year ended 31 March 2025.
David Hinton
CEO
Chris Train OBE
CHAIR
This joint Chair/CEO statement reflects on our performance over the final year of our 2020 to 2025
business plan period (AMP 7) and looks ahead to the new 2025 to 2030 business period (AMP 8). Our
team has made considerable progress on delivering on the commitments we set out in our five-year
plan but we have been severely stretched by unprecedented operational challenges along the way.
The impact of these is ongoing and further challenges lie ahead. However, we remain determined
to do everything we can to secure the future of water resources in the South East while protecting
and improving the environment.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 7
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
This was not a decision we took lightly but is
absolutely necessary if we are to meet the resilience
and investment challenges facing the South East.
We provided a Statement of Case in March for
this review and we hope for a decision by the end
of 2025 to enable us to reflect any changes to our
investment plans and customer charging in Year
2 of AMP 8 (2026/27). In our view, in its current
form, the Final Determination does not adequately
address our company-specific circumstances and
external challenges and undermines our plans
to improve operational resilience now and in the
future. We do not consider that the AMP 8 Final
Determination provides the right foundations for
the long-term investability of the water sector.
Therefore, it threatens water security in the South
East in the short and longer term. See below for
more information about our new business plan.
Challenges ahead
The biggest challenge we face remains the
accelerated impact of climate change and how we
tackle this. It is causing more frequent and severe
weather events, such as prolonged hot periods
and heatwaves that cause sudden and substantial
increases in peak demand. Climate change is also
causing unpredictable rainfall, flooding and storms
as well as rapidly fluctuating temperatures. These
impact raw water quality and availability, and the
operation of our assets. For example, freeze-thaw
events lead to widespread leaks and bursts of water
mains whereas severe storms cause power cuts,
which can impair operations.
In the past year, we’ve continued to experience
weather extremes. We had the disruptive Storm
Bert in November and, in the south-east of England,
the first six months of 2025 have been unusually
warm, sunny and dry, including the driest March
since 1961, with only 12 per cent of the long-term
average rainfall recorded. The trend has continued
with England experiencing its warmest June on
record, with heatwaves continuing into July. As a
result, we started our operational readiness as well
as water efficiency communications earlier than
usual to ask customers to use water wisely as we
prepare for the summer ahead.
As this report is being published, record breaking
demand for drinking water is putting significant
strain on water resources, which impacts the
company’s ability to provide the public water service.
With a prolonged dry period (recognised by the Met
Office as the driest Spring in the region since 1893),
and an approaching third heatwave of the summer,
we have moved to implement a Temporary Use Ban
for our household customers in Kent and Sussex from
11 July and we are closely monitoring the situation in
our Western Region, to ensure that we can protect
the environment and keep everyone supplied.
Despite these challenges, we have taken positive
action during AMP 7 to strengthen resilience, boost
the flexibility of our network and protect water
supplies for customers We have invested £567
million in the water infrastructure of the South East
of England, compared to an allowance in comparable
prices of £513 million in the Ofwat determination
for 2020 to 2025. You can read more about what
we’ve done, below.
Weather-related events cause millions of pounds of
impact and they demonstrate the real hurdles we
face in providing a public water supply in the South
East – a designated area of severe water stress. We
would like to thank everyone in our business for
tackling head-on every challenge we’ve faced over
the last five years. Our contractors and partners
have also played their part in ensuring we’ve been
able to keep taps flowing for the vast majority of our
customers, even during extreme weather events.
Of course, we know there have been times when
supplies have been interrupted, and we apologise
unreservedly to customers who’ve been without
running water for any length of time. We always do
our best to resolve issues as quickly as possible and
to keep customers informed during incidents. Our
new AquAlerter messaging system helps us to do
that, and has been well received by customers.
The biggest challenge we face remains the accelerated impact of
climate change and how we tackle this
“

Graphics
8 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Our customers want, and rightly expect, better
service and lasting environmental improvements
and we need to improve resilience, adapt to climate
change, and work towards net zero emissions. We
don’t shy away from any of these obligations as a
responsible company. While planning for AMP 8,
we continued to make solid progress across our six
priority business areas this year:
Chair and CEO joint report continued
Ofwat investigation into supply resilience
Ofwat launched an investigation into our supply resilience in November 2023. This came on the back
of four extreme weather events in 2022 combined with the hottest June on record in 2023, which
led to a record demand for water. We’ve taken significant action to improve our short-term supply
resilience, our operational response to supply events, to the information and support we provide
to our customers, learning lessons from previous events and collaborating closely with regulators,
stakeholders and the communities we serve. We’re continuing to do everything we can to improve
our operational response. For instance, at the start of this year we took delivery of the first of 10 new
water tankers which will enable us to increase our flexibility so we can get water to where it’s needed,
faster. Some of these have already been deployed during supply incidents and reduced the need to
rely on bottled water during interruptions. Our new five-year business plan (for AMP 8) addresses the
root causes of our supply resilience issues but it is vital we secure the necessary level of funding for
the next five years to deliver this longer-term investment programme. The investigation is ongoing at
the time of publication of this report and no formal decisions have been made by Ofwat.
▶  Flexible, resilient infrastructure and service
▶  Securing the future of water
▶  A trusted and affordable service supporting
customers and society
▶  Thriving environment
▶  Low carbon sustainable business
▶  Future-ready business

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 9
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Improving infrastructure and service
Strengthening our resilience remains critical to
maintaining supplies. Over the past year, work has
continued to strengthen our network resilience
and protect and improve water supplies for our
customers. We’ve invested £80 million into our
infrastructure in East Sussex, including a critical
upgrade to Barcombe WTW (water treatment
works) and Bewl WTW. A pipeline project at Bewl
will also increase the amount of water we can treat
and supply to the area. Work on a state-of-the-art
WTW on the site of the old Aylesford Newsprint in
Maidstone is nearing completion too. This is the first
new WTW to be built in Kent for 18 years. Across
East Kent, we’re investing £12 million in targeted
infrastructure improvements in areas which have
experienced supply interruptions in recent years
during the record-breaking summers. That said, we
recognise that there is more to do, as reflected in
our plans for the period ahead.
Surveys and assessments are continuing for the new
Broad Oak Reservoir scheme near Canterbury. This
major investment will not only help meet the future
demand for drinking water in East Kent, but the
major investment creates new habitats, increases
biodiversity and provides social benefits for the
local community. A new Broad Oak Reservoir
Stakeholder Advisory Group will help us shape
the project. However, the review of our Final
Determination – described above – remains critical
to secure the funding necessary to accelerate
this scheme successfully through Ofwat’s RAPID
gated process (Regulators’ Alliance for Progressing
Infrastructure Development).
Whatever we’re working on, health and safety remains
our top priority. We take a proactive approach.
Building resilience in our teams is also important and
our Mental Health First Aiders are always available to
help colleagues with wellbeing issues.
Cyber threats are on the rise but so is our
determination to help protect our country’s critical
national infrastructure by strengthening our security
and safeguarding our cyber security resilience.
We are using industry-leading cyber security tools
and other means, to comply with the Network and
Information Systems regulations (NIS).
Securing future water supplies
In October we published our Water Resources
Management Plan 2024 (WRMP24). This explains
how we’ll provide a reliable and resilient supply of
top-quality drinking water over the next 50 years.
We know we need to balance this with the challenge
of protecting and enhancing the environment
around us for generations to come. We aim to do
this by investing in new infrastructure (including
the new Broad Oak reservoir), reducing leakage
and encouraging water efficiency. However, we
await the outcome of a review of our Final
Determination by the CMA to know if we’ll have the
funding we need to achieve the stretching targets
set out in WRMP24. See below for more information
about PR24.
We share our customers’ frustrations in seeing
drinking water lost to leaks and reducing leakage
remains a high priority for us. Although we are
still playing catch-up from the impact of extreme
weather events in recent years, we’ve repaired 12
per cent more leaks in the last year, compared to
the three-year average, and have a leakage recovery
plan in place. We spend around £40 million a year on
finding and fixing leaks across our network and our
planned investment in a smart network programme
will help us to run a more efficient leakage reduction
programme in the future.
As a company, we’re participating in The Cunliffe
Review, which is the Independent Water Commission
review into England’s water industry. Through this,
we’ll be making the case that we need to balance the
need for growth with the challenge of securing the
water resources to cope with that growth, without
detrimentally impacting the environment.
We’ve invested £80 million
into our infrastructure in
East Sussex
“

Graphics
10 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Financial performance
The economic environment remains difficult with
the inflationary effect of continued high energy
prices, driving costs of power, services and supplies,
such as chemicals. Additionally, staff costs, increased
by £4.9 million due to wage inflation and increased
headcount as the business prepared for a step up in
activity within AMP 8 in order to enhance network
resilience. Operating profit was, therefore, lower
than the previous year at £54.5 million compared
to £63.8 million, despite an increase in revenue of
£4.9 million to £285.5 million. Although operating
conditions remain challenging, investment in our
assets in the year increased by over 27 per cent
compared to the previous year. Our investment
programme is discussed in more detail in our
strategic report on page 44 to 47.
However, the financial performance of the group
has improved in the year, with the loss before tax
reducing to £19.8 million compared to £36.7 million
in the previous year. This is due to decreased finance
costs with lower inflation reducing the charges on
our index linked borrowing.
The group has improved its liquidity position in the
last year. £50 million of index linked debt was raised
in August 2024 and in December 2024 the maturity
date of the £120 million loan was extended to June
2026, from December 2025. Also in December, our
shareholders invested £75 million of equity, bringing
gearing to c.75 per cent at March 2025. In May 2025,
our shareholders invested a further £200 million of
equity, bringing gearing to c.65 per cent and further
reinforcing the liquidity and financial stability of
South East Water. The investment by shareholders
in the company reflects the desire to maintain an
investment grade credit rating, but does not alter
our conclusion as set out in our Statement of Case
presented to the CMA that we do not consider that
the AMP 8 Final Determination provides the right
foundations for the long-term investability of the
water sector.
We are currently in discussions with lenders
regarding the renewal of our revolving credit
facility that matures in September 2026. Further
information on this and the impact on going
concern is on pages 128 to 129, including the related
material uncertainty.
Supporting customers and society
We aim to provide a trusted and affordable service
that meets the needs of all our customers including
the most vulnerable in our society. We are proud
of our industry-leading approach to supporting
vulnerable customers, which has been recognised
with the gold-standard BSI Kitemark certification
in March. We have surpassed our target for our
Priority Services Register with more than 29,500
more customers joining this year. This represents
14.12 per cent of all customers and is nearly 1.5 per
cent above target. It’s encouraging that 2025/26
has also started strongly, and we expect to have a
Chair and CEO joint report continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 11
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
similar performance in the following year. We
published our new Vulnerability Strategy in June
after receiving praise from Ofwat on our “exemplary”
approach in some key areas. Our new social tariff
structure, which we launched in April to replace
the previous capped approach, will enable us to
help more customers than ever before, while a new
trusted partnership with Kidney Care UK will ensure
we can provide enhanced support to the 76,000
people with chronic kidney disease in our area.
Our commitment to stewardship and local
engagement remains strong. In the last year, we’ve
actively promoted water efficiency by providing
water butts for customers and distributing
nearly 200,000 water-saving devices and our
annual £20,000 Community Chest scheme directly
supported local projects.
The number of customers registering for our
online self-serve portal, MyAccount, continues to
rise. By the end of March, there were more than
535,000 customers signed up – that’s 58 per cent
of customers. We are delighted to have received
the Institute of Customer Service ServiceMark
accreditation in recognition of our high customer
service standards.
Protecting and enhancing the environment
We need to make sure there’s enough water for
future generations. We aim to minimise the effect
on the environment from our own operations and
actively improve the environment, as per our 25
Year Environment Plan, which we launched last
year. We work in close partnership with farmers,
landowners, conservation groups, stakeholders,
local communities and other partners to do this and
our catchment management programme continues
to go from strength to strength. Proactive
engagement through tests and trials, steering
groups and through our capital grants scheme,
has resulted in us outperforming our five-year
landowner engagement ODI target.
We’ve also outperformed our five-year biodiversity
ODI target and now manage 77 per cent of our land
for biodiversity, compared to 54 per cent in 2020. In
October we were delighted to reach an important
milestone in our environmental stewardship,
with 73 per cent of our company-owned Sites of
Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) now managed to
a favourable condition, compared to the industry
average of 16.4 per cent. Our work supports many
species and we are excited that our proactive habitat
management and protected species monitoring
survey at our Offham WTW has revealed a thriving
population of slow worms.
Future-ready business
Our people are an integral part of our business.
They enable us to provide the best possible service
for our customers today, and in the future. That’s
why we are committed to recruiting, training and
developing talent in our business, and making our
company a great place to work. During the year we’ve
launched our new HR IT system that will connect
all our business areas, drive efficiency and improve
employee services, and we’ve been awarded Gold
membership of The 5% Club in recognition of how we
encourage colleagues to earn and learn at the same
time. Our comprehensive apprenticeship programme
continues to grow and we’ve increased the number
of apprenticeship standards we offer from five to 20.
This will help us secure the next generation of talent.
We’ve also seen a 31 per cent increase in colleagues
undertaking internal upskilling opportunities to help
us meet our business’s future and changing needs
through our Aspire, Inspire and Lead programmes. We
are now preparing to shape our company for future
challenges including the delivery of our new business
plan for the next five years – see below. This has seen
the creation of two new directorates; for Technology
and Information and Investment Delivery. A specialist
external change team will ensure we set the business
up for future success, and as a legacy ensure that this
function is embedded in the business.
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/25yp

Graphics
12 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Preparing for the future also involves a commitment
to innovation and adaptability as well as transitioning
to become a low carbon sustainable business.
We hope to announce details of our first power
purchase agreement (PPA) for 40 per cent of our
energy needs in the near future. This is an excellent
carbon zero project and should spearhead the next
stage to organise another possible PPA and on-site
solar projects for the remainder of our energy. We’re
also continuing to invest in our electric vehicle (EV)
infrastructure and have increased the number of EV
vans in our commercial fleet.
More information about the specific progress we’ve
made in each of these priority areas can be found
later in this report.
The next five years – Price Review 24
(2025 to 2030)
Price Review 24 (PR24) sets the price, investment
and service package for the next five-year business
period (2025 to 2030). Huge effort has gone into
planning for the new business period to enable us
to meet the operational and resilience challenges
we face and secure a safe and reliable supply of
high-quality drinking water for years to come, while
protecting and enhancing the environment.
Our plan has a regional focus aimed at improving
operational resilience through use of localised water
storage and better network connectivity.
We developed the new business plan after
conducting our largest ever customer engagement
programme to better understand our customers’
priorities. Using feedback from customers and
stakeholders, and collaborating with independent
experts and external assurers to ensure our
engagement was effective, we built a plan around
a programme of supply-side (enhancement)
and demand-side investments such as leakage
reduction, water efficiency initiatives, smart
networks and smart metering, all aimed at improving
water security. This plan will reduce the likelihood,
extent and duration of supply interruptions caused
by high-demand climate change events over the
next five years and also lay the groundwork for our
longer-term resilience investment. Our approach to
improving resilience and water security has been
broadly welcomed by our customers.
Our plan focuses on investing in sustainable water
resources, improving network resilience and
increasing drinking water storage capacity to
reduce supply interruptions. We’ll install 275,000
smart meters, implement a full smart network
roll-out, help customers use less water and reduce
leakage by 11 million litres of water a day. Working
with partners, we’ll aim to improve raw water quality
within our catchments, allocate extra resources
for unplanned supply disruptions and maintain our
exceptional drinking water standards. Tackling
climate change remains a priority for us and our
plan includes commitments to reduce greenhouse
emissions, strengthen environmental resilience,
and address future challenges such as droughts,
floods, raw water quality decline, invasive non-
native species impact, and land use change. We’re
also expanding support for vulnerable customers
through a six-point plan which includes a new social
tariff, targeted assistance for those facing water
poverty, and increased non-financial support during
service interruptions.
Our plan is bold but provides the opportunity for a
much-needed reset following the unprecedented
challenges of the last five years and the urgent
threat to water security in the South East. However,
our plan is only deliverable if we secure the necessary
funding to match the scale of the challenges we face
and our ambition to go further and faster to address
these. Ofwat’s Final Determination, announced in
December 2024, set out the prices we can charge our
customers and what we must deliver over the five-
year period. As explained earlier in this report, it fell
short of the funding we require to meet the unique
challenges in our area and we remain concerned
that the Final Determination doesn’t address our
company-specific circumstances and the external
challenges we face in a severely water-stressed area
with a growing population and increasing impacts of
climate change.
Bill increases
In the meantime, as a result of Ofwat’s Final
Determination in December, bills increased in
April 2025 on average by 20 per cent (14p a day).
Our plan focuses on investing
in sustainable water resources,
improving network resilience
and increasing drinking water
storage capacity to reduce
supply interruptions
“
Chair and CEO joint report continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 13
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
This means the average daily household bill for
water for the next five years will be 81p per day,
which we believe is excellent value for money. We
know that bill increases are never welcome but they
are necessary to drive a more secure future.
Work is under way
Work has already begun on implementing our new
five-year business plan (PR24) while we await the
outcome of the referral of the Final Determination
by the CMA. We remain hopeful that our bold and
ambitious plans, which have been shaped with
the support of customers and stakeholders, will
be matched by the necessary funding to secure
the future of water resources in the South East.
Setting our business up for future success is really
important and, as part of our preparations, we’re
creating two new directorates, the Investment
Delivery Directorate (IDD) and the Technology and
Insight Directorate (TID), to help us deliver our
most ambitious business plan ever. The recruitment
process to appoint two new directors to oversee
these directorates is already under way. A Change
team is in place to prioritise, manage and deliver
the important initiatives we need to make the next
five-year period (AMP 8) a success. Our new five-
year people plan will play a key role in this as we
support and guide staff through the process. This
is an exciting time to be part of our team as we
seek to continue to improve the service we offer to
customers and communities by delivering a reliable,
affordable and resilient supply of top-quality
drinking water while protecting and enhancing the
environment for generations to come.
Chris Train OBE David Hinton
CHAIR CEO
14 JULY 2025 14 JULY 2025
New reservoir
at Broad Oak
Increased drinking
water storage
Improve quality
of raw water
Improved network
resilience
Smart meter roll out
and smart network
More support for
unplanned interruptions
Improved network
connections
Reduce leakage
by 26 per cent
Reduce water
poverty by 2030
Business plan summary

Graphics
14 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Our purpose

Our purpose is embedded in our articles of association and centred on our public
service duty as a water company.
It emphasises the importance of our broader
responsibility to the environment and society. It expresses our commitment
to inclusive engagement and collaboration with customers and stakeholders and
to achieving a fair balance between the interests of customers, the environment
and society.
Working with others
Stakeholder inclusiveness,
engagement and collaboration help
us find new ways of understanding
and facing challenges and make the
most of opportunities.
Our core purpose
As well as our core functions and public service responsibilities, our second
core mission is to plan for future water resources and develop our water
supply system. Our solutions include a variety of approaches such as
leakage and demand reduction, service innovation, nature-based catchment
management, new water sources, technology and infrastructure.
Fairly and responsibly
We address social issues such as
affordability and vulnerability and try to
achieve the right balance between the
interests of the different customers we
serve now (and in the future), our other
stakeholders, society and the environment.
It is essential we generate and maintain
trust to strengthen the legitimacy of our
licence to operate.
We act responsibly by helping tackle
societal and global challenges such as
climate change, biodiversity loss, and the
challenges of ecological overshoot and
staying within planetary boundaries.
Our wider purpose
We find opportunities to
bring shared societal and
environmental benefits that
go beyond delivering the
public water service.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 15
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Our culture
Our vision, guiding principles and core values shape our culture. They reflect who we
are and what we are all about.
Purpose-led
Our strategy is guided by our purpose and public
value principles.
Safe in Every Way
The health, safety and wellbeing of our employees,
contractors, suppliers, customers and neighbours
is of paramount importance to us.
Responsible business
“Doing the right thing” is central to the choices
we make to meet the high standards that are
expected of us as a provider of an essential
public service.
Balancing investment and affordability
We must invest today and over the next decades
and we must balance this imperative with keeping
our service affordable.
Regional approach
We develop solutions that address the issues
specific to each of our three regions.
Fairness and equity
We achieve a fair balance between the interests
of our customers, society, and the environment.
Fairness also means supporting customers who
need extra help.
Social benefit
We aim to deliver broader social value and benefits
to our local communities.
Natural capital
We protect and enhance our natural capital to
preserve water resources for people and the
environment. We act to improve natural habitats
and biodiversity.
Partnership working
We cannot meet our challenges on our own. We
work with others and learn from them to improve
the effectiveness of our actions.
System thinking and adaptive planning
We must understand the interdependencies
between our different challenges and create
cost-effective solutions that address them all. We
plan for different possible futures and must be
ready to adapt and implement the right solutions
at the right time.
Innovation
We promote a culture of excellence where we
value and encourage ideas and exploration. We
need new skills, innovation and technology to
meet our priorities.
Trust
Dependable, safe and sound, as a team always
delivering on our commitments. Guardians of
the environment.
Excellence
Striving at all times to be the best and deliver
the best.
Agility
Responsive, flexible and adapting quickly
to change.
Passion
Dedicated to delivering a safe, reliable service,
always caring for our customers and each other.
Creativity
Fresh thinking, improving, never standing still.
Our Values
Our Vision
To be the water company people want to be supplied by and want to work for.
Our guiding principles

Graphics
16 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Raw water
reservoir
River
abstraction
£
Capital programme
We invest to improve,
renew and expand
our water supply
system and keep it
fit for the future
Groundwater
abstraction
Recreational
facilities
Non-household
customers
Household
customers
Wholesale
Non-regulated business New
connections
Non-regulated business
Bulk supplies
Laboratory
Other
water
companies
DevelopersSelf-lay providers
Water Treatment
Works
Water resources
Operational
depots
Control
centre
Contact centre
Public
authorities
Private
customers
Other water
companies
Businesses
Public authorities Businesses Private customers
Critical facilities
We manage water resources and plan the long-
term investment in water resources required
for future generations in our water resources
management plan
Network
Waterlink
Plumbing and other water related services
South East Water
Scientific Services
Water Analysis Services
Household retail
We read meters, bill and collect payments,
respond to billing and service enquiries
and deal with complaints doing our best
to keep customer satisfaction high
We ensure the quality
and safety of water
in our entire system
from source to tap
New appointees
New appointees
Wastewater
companies
Billing and customer
management services
We have plans to ensure
the water supply to critical
facilities such as hospitals
We manage our network and
invest to maintain its capacity,
we repair burst mains, we
detect and repair leaks, we
plan for and respond to
incidents to maintain supplies
and limit interruptions
Water treatment and
network management
We provide new
connections to supply
new premises built by
developers and offer
new connection services
to self-lay providers
and new appointees.
We also provide
wholesale supplies
to new appointees
Market
operatorRetailers
We provide priority
services and support for
customers who have
specific needs or face
financial difficulties
Non-regulated
business
We manage protected sites
and improve biodiversity, we
work with farmers to reduce
water pollution, we minimise
the impact of our activities
on the environment, deliver
an ambitious environmental
programme, and invest to
reduce our emissions
Wastewater
Treatment
Works
(Wastewater
companies)
Waterlink
Plumbing services
Household
retail
Non-household
services
Wholesale service
desk
We provide wholesale
supplies and
wholesale services to
retailers following
market rules
Wholesale
supplies
Our business model
We are the regulated statutory water-only company in our exclusive supply area.
We operate in three operational regions – Western region (geographically separate
from the others), Kent and Sussex regions (adjacent to each other).
We operate across the full water value chain:
▶  We carry out all wholesale
activities, managing water
resources, treatment works and
the distribution network to bring
safe drinking water to all premises.
▶  We provide wholesale water
supplies to retailers in the non-
household retail market and to
new appointee water companies
that supply premises on certain
new developments located within
our geographic area.
▶  We provide new connection
services to developers, self-lay
providers and new appointees
to connect new premises.
▶  We provide all retail services to
end-user customers in household
premises in our area of supply.
This includes meter reading,
billing, payment collection,
service and billing enquiries
and dealing with complaints.
▶  Separate water retail companies
provide retail services to eligible
businesses, public sector and
third sector organisations in
our area of supply.
▶  We also provide non-regulated
commercial laboratory services,
billing and other retail services
and plumbing services.
▶  We only provide water services.
Separate companies across our
area provide wastewater services.
Wholesale activities account for 88 per
cent of total income; retail activities
for 7 per cent and non-regulated
activities for 5 per cent.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 17
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Raw water
reservoir
River
abstraction
£
Capital programme
We invest to improve,
renew and expand
our water supply
system and keep it
fit for the future
Groundwater
abstraction
Recreational
facilities
Non-household
customers
Household
customers
Wholesale
Non-regulated business New
connections
Non-regulated business
Bulk supplies
Laboratory
Other
water
companies
DevelopersSelf-lay providers
Water Treatment
Works
Water resources
Operational
depots
Control
centre
Contact centre
Public
authorities
Private
customers
Other water
companies
Businesses
Public authorities Businesses Private customers
Critical facilities
We manage water resources and plan the long-
term investment in water resources required
for future generations in our water resources
management plan
Network
Waterlink
Plumbing and other water related services
South East Water
Scientific Services
Water Analysis Services
Household retail
We read meters, bill and collect payments,
respond to billing and service enquiries
and deal with complaints doing our best
to keep customer satisfaction high
We ensure the quality
and safety of water
in our entire system
from source to tap
New appointees
New appointees
Wastewater
companies
Billing and customer
management services
We have plans to ensure
the water supply to critical
facilities such as hospitals
We manage our network and
invest to maintain its capacity,
we repair burst mains, we
detect and repair leaks, we
plan for and respond to
incidents to maintain supplies
and limit interruptions
Water treatment and
network management
We provide new
connections to supply
new premises built by
developers and offer
new connection services
to self-lay providers
and new appointees.
We also provide
wholesale supplies
to new appointees
Market
operatorRetailers
We provide priority
services and support for
customers who have
specific needs or face
financial difficulties
Non-regulated
business
We manage protected sites
and improve biodiversity, we
work with farmers to reduce
water pollution, we minimise
the impact of our activities
on the environment, deliver
an ambitious environmental
programme, and invest to
reduce our emissions
Wastewater
Treatment
Works
(Wastewater
companies)
Waterlink
Plumbing services
Household
retail
Non-household
services
Wholesale service
desk
We provide wholesale
supplies and
wholesale services to
retailers following
market rules
Wholesale
supplies
Wholesale
Household retail
Non-regulated business
Wholesale services
Our treated water
Key
Wastewater
companies

Graphics
18 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Key resources
Our assets and networks built over generations
The performance, condition and operation of our
water resources, water treatment works, and our
network built over generations, which require
continuous maintenance, development and the
adoption of new technology, are the most essential
elements of our business. Regular investment
in our infrastructure and operations determines
our performance and our ability to deliver the
public water service and to fulfil our purpose in the
long-term.
Fresh water and the environment
Our business model is intrinsically linked to natural
capital and to the availability, sustainability, and
quality of freshwater. We rely on the environment
and the ecological services of catchments,
which filter, store, and transport freshwater for our
water resources.
Financial capital
We must finance the investment in our infrastructure
and operations upfront, as successive generations
of customers pay in instalments over the life of the
assets. We need access to competitive financing
to succeed and our financial resilience determines
this. The outcomes of price reviews influence our
financial resilience. These outcomes determine our
revenue allowance, allowed return and appropriate
calibration of incentives and regulatory mechanisms.
We must maintain a minimum investment grade
credit rating under our licence.
Our human and intellectual capital
We rely on the collective skills and expertise within
our business in the management of the public water
service and the unique knowledge of our water
supply system. Our key suppliers and partners bring
specific experience and knowledge of the water
industry which is essential to our success.
Key relationships
Our customers and communities
We provide an essential public service to our
customers and the communities we serve. Their
water use and behaviours impact our operational
plans on a daily basis. The quality of our service
determines the trust and satisfaction of our
customers and those who rely on our service and, in
turn, their support for our strategy. We must build
collaborative relationships with them to obtain
support for our demand reduction strategy to help
minimise our collective impact on the environment
as we plan for future water resources in our regions.
Our people and culture
Everything we achieve as a business is through our
people and the culture we promote and bring to
life. We directly employ 1,173 people and hundreds
more make our service possible through our supply
chain. Many employees are long-serving, and their
knowledge and experience, often specific to our
company and industry, is important in helping us
plan for the future as well as delivering the service
customers and stakeholders expect today.
Our suppliers and partners
We work with more than 200 suppliers and partners
locally and internationally to deliver our service. This
includes procuring chemicals and power to operate
our treatment works and expertise to maintain and
operate our networks or to deliver our investment
programmes. Our key suppliers provide engineering
and technical skills that complement those of our
employees. We also receive bulk supplies of water
from some neighbouring water companies, and we
work closely with them on a regional basis to plan for
long-term water resources.
Our regulators
Our activities are regulated by Ofwat, the
Environment Agency, the Drinking Water
Inspectorate (DWI), CCW and Natural England.
Maintaining good working relationships with them
is part of our day-to-day activities and important
for our future success. We are accountable to them
for our performance in their area of responsibility.
Constructive relationships help us contribute to
the development of regulatory policies and help
promote changes where regulatory mechanisms
need to evolve or to address misalignment between
different policy areas.
Our business model continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 19
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
How we create economic value
We generate revenue through:
▶  Billing in accordance with our price controls
and charging rules for (i) water supplies
to household end-user consumers based
predominantly on metered consumption,
with an overall level of metering of c.90 per cent
of household premises and (ii) wholesale water
supplies to retailers on the non-household
retail market and new appointees.
▶  We also provide new water mains and
connections to developers to supply new
premises and similar new connection services
to self-lay providers or new appointees. Our
charges for new connection services are set in
accordance with charging rules defined
by Ofwat.
▶  Non-regulated activities (laboratory services,
water and sewerage billing and retail
services as well as plumbing and water
management services).
Everything we achieve as a business is through our people and the
culture we promote and bring to life
“
The turnover and profit from operations of the
regulated business equates to approximately 98 per
cent and 83 per cent of the company’s total turnover
and profit from operations respectively. After
allowing for finance income and costs, the regulated
business made a loss of £25.9 million before tax.
Revenue from the regulated business
Price controls set by Ofwat every five years define
revenue allowances for relevant segments of
the value chain: water resources, network and
household retail. The cost of capital, which includes
an allowance for shareholder returns, is also
determined by Ofwat.

Graphics
20 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Factors impacting revenue and profit
Price controls set our revenue allowance based on
Ofwat’s assessment of efficient costs to operate
and of our proposed investment programme.
This revenue allowance is adjusted during
regulatory periods through rewards or penalties,
calculated by reference to targets set by Ofwat in
price determinations in respect of a range of
performance commitments.
The calibration of these rewards and penalties
and the level of investment recognised in price
determinations influence our short-term operational
and financial performance, and in the medium to
long-term our ability to maintain levels of service
which requires appropriate regular investment in
our water supply system.
Our short-term financial performance and
profitability can be impacted by operational
events, such as the supply interruptions caused by
an exceptional combination of extreme weather
events that we experienced in 2022 and 2023
(heatwaves, storms, flooding and freeze-thaw
event). Such events result in higher operating costs
with no increase to our revenue allowance. They also
lead to us incurring penalties in respect of several
performance commitments (e.g. direct impact on
the supply interruption ODI and indirect impact on
the customer metric) which reduce the amount we
may recover from bills in subsequent years.
The management of payment collection and bad
debt, as well as the level of support provided to
customers with financial difficulties, also influence
profitability, as we must maintain our essential
service even in the case of non-payment.
Revenue from the non-regulated business
Our commercial activities are developed on our
core business strength and technical know-how.
We provide billing, debt collection and related
customer services to the wastewater companies
that operate in our area. This provides the
convenience of a single bill to our common
customers and to new appointees.
Our accredited laboratory provides analytical
scientific services to other water companies,
public authorities, businesses, and private clients,
building on the expertise and technical capabilities
developed to meet our own water analysis
requirements. Our Waterlink business offers a range
of plumbing and water infrastructure services.
We are a major employer
in our three regions
offering stable, continuous
employment and financial
security to our employees
“
Our business model continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 21
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
How we create value for others
Value to society
Public trust in the safety of water is an essential
value we generate with our regulator, the Drinking
Water Inspectorate. This is our first priority.
Households and all sectors of the economy and
society use our water supply. They rely on it for daily
life or for their business and expect it to be available
where and when needed. We ensure they can all
benefit from the value that water itself brings to
them. We also plan and invest to ensure our service
will continue to be available to them and meet their
expectations in the future.
We provide priority services to customers whose
circumstances make them more vulnerable and
provide a range of different types of support for
those with affordability challenges.
How responsibly we carry out our business, how we
manage our impact on others and the environment,
and how we engage with customers and stakeholders
are also key drivers of our legitimacy as an essential
service provider.
Supporting the local economy and communities
Our service is a key input for many organisations,
businesses, and public services, which we provide all
year round. We generate economic activity for our
supply chain through investment in our operations
and infrastructure. We also support housing growth
by providing the required water infrastructure.
We are a major employer in our three regions, offering
stable, continuous employment and financial
security to our employees. We provide training and
career development opportunities and we promote
the wellbeing of our employees. We provide
learning and development opportunities in a wide
range of disciplines.
We also support our communities through
community donations and staff volunteering. Our
water reservoirs at Ardingly and Arlington provide
recreational facilities to the public.
Supporting the economy
Our service is a key input for many organisations,
including public services and businesses and we also
supp
ort housing growth. We continuously invest
in our assets
, generating economic activity for our
supply chain, and the taxes we pay contribute to the
wider economy.
Responsible impact on the environment
We need to take water from the environment
to provide our essential service and we must
minimise our impact on water bodies and the
wider environment. Ensuring the sustainability of
our water abstraction, reducing leakage and the
demand for water are central to the sustainability of
our business model in the context of climate change
and population growth.
We also work with farmers and other third parties to
minimise their impact on the water catchments we
rely on, reduce the level of pollutants in raw water
that we need to remove in our treatment works, or
encourage sustainable abstractions.
We carry out a significant programme of environment
work through the Water Industry National
Environment Programme (WINEP). We manage more
than 30 protected sites and invest to improve their
environmental condition and biodiversity.
We are working to achieve operational net zero by
2030, a 98 per cent reduction in our operational
direct carbon emissions, with the remaining two
per cent requiring insetting or offsetting. By 2050
we will achieve net zero for our whole business,
including embedded carbon.
Shareholder value
Shareholders and debt providers provide the financial
resources needed to invest in our infrastructure.
They must be provided a reasonable return for this.
Regulatory mechanisms at price reviews determine
their return and this may be optimised through
efficient operations and potential outperformance
against regulatory metrics.
We create value for our investors beyond pure
financial return. Our principal owners are signatories
of the United Nations Principles of Responsible
Investment (UN PRI) and are committed to strong
environmental, social and governance performance.
They recognise this protects the long-term value
and sustainable success of the company and
strengthens our licence to operate.

Graphics
22 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Long-term trends, challenges, and priorities
We have set out what we want to achieve over the next 25 years and how we will fulfil our purpose between
2025 and 2050 in our strategic direction statement. It describes the major trends affecting the water sector
and our company more specifically, the main challenges we face, the strategic priorities and targets we have
set in our long-term strategy and 2025 to 2030 business plan.
▶ Population growth, housing developments,
changes to land use and economic activities
in the south east of England.
▶ Increasing pressure on biodiversity
and the environment.
▶ The impact of climate change.
▶ The urgency to decarbonise.
▶ Raw water quality deterioration.
▶ Increasing expectations of customers
about our services.
▶ Evolving expectations of society about
the environment and our role as a
corporate citizen.
▶ Changing demographics:
ageing population with more vulnerable
customers, and smaller households.
▶ More assets that need to be replaced.
▶ Increasing use of technology.
▶ New skills needed to innovate and
adopt technology.
▶ Obligations and standards becoming
more complex and wide ranging.
▶ We must adapt to climate change and
rapidly reduce our carbon footprint
and impact.
▶ We must play our part in restoring
and enhancing the environment
and biodiversity.
▶ We must meet the growing demand
for drinking water despite increasing
water scarcity.
▶ We must increase the resilience, capacity,
and flexibility of our water supply system.
▶ We must continue to improve our service
to meet the evolving expectations of
customers and society.
▶ We must balance the need for
long-term investment with keeping
our service affordable.
▶ A safe and healthy working environment.
▶ Effective governance, processes,
and controls.
▶ Innovation and technology.
▶ Our culture, people skills and talent.
▶
Supportive and consistent regulation
and policies.
▶ Partnerships and collaboration.
▶ Financial resilience.
Major challenges
Our strategy
Climate change, biodiversity loss and human impact on the planet make us rethink how we should provide
the public water service far into the future in a way that values water and is truly sustainable.
We explain below how we are defining our strategy
by presenting our strategic priorities to 2050 in the
context of our long-term challenges and how we intend
to achieve our objectives in the next regulatory period.
Ensuring the long-term sustainable success of the
company is the main objective of our governance
and strategy.
Find out more
about our corporate governance framework and
how governance contributes to our strategy
southeastwater.co.uk/about/who-we-are/governance
Major trends
Enablers

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 23
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
A trusted and
affordable service
supporting
customers and
society
Securing the
future of water
Flexible, resilient
infrastructure
and service
Low carbon
sustainable business
Future-ready
business
Find out more
Our strategic direction statement, our strategic priorities and how we will deliver them
southeastwater.co.uk/sds
Our priorities and vision from now to 2050
▶  A top-quality water supply and efficient service
consistently delivered to all.
▶  A business that provides support to all customers as they
need it, when they need it and in the way they choose.
▶  A full range of financial and non-financial support that
always suits those who need it.
▶    Social and community benefits that go beyond our
water service.
▶   Supply system resilience delivered in step with increasing
challenges from climate change, new developments,
population growth, sustainable abstraction, and raw
water deterioration.
▶   Minimal supply interruptions with high network
connectivity and flexibility.
▶    A supply system able to withstand extreme weather
caused by climate change and to recover rapidly.
▶  Water resources resilient to climate change and droughts.
▶    Network flexibility enables sustainable
abstraction and conjunctive use of sources.
▶  Leakage at least halved.
▶    Leakage detection and water efficiency through
smart networks.
▶  Work with customers to help them use water wisely and
manage their demand with smart meters.
▶   Recognised experts in science-based catchment and
environmental management who deliver biodiversity
gains, enhanced habitats, and environmental resilience.
▶  Sharing our data and working with others on
nature-based solutions for mutual benefits.
▶ Operational net zero by 2030 (direct emissions).
▶   Net Zero, including embedded emissions by 2050.
▶   A truly sustainable business that is part of the
circular economy and uses sustainable,
renewable resources.
▶  Real time network management and conjunctive use of
sources enabled by technology and specialist skills.
▶  A culture of high performance, excellence, and innovation.
▶  A diverse and inclusive workforce.
Thriving
environment

Graphics
▶ Our Priority Services Register (PSR) numbers
have risen strongly again with 130,452
customers on the PSR by 31 March – that’s 14.12
per cent of customers. This compares with
100,869 (11.03 per cent) on the PSR in 2023/24.
Our community work, data sharing with energy
companies, and trusted partnerships with
organisations such as Scope and Golding Homes
are helping us to reach more customers who
need support.
▶ Our services for vulnerable customers have
been recognised again with the prestigious
BSI Inclusive Service Kitemark certification,
with zero non-conformities for the second
consecutive year. We passed our annual
assessment of the gold-standard Kitemark,
following a rigorous review in January.
▶ We’ve introduced company-wide vulnerability
training for colleagues to equip them with the
tools and knowledge they need to support
customers. Bite-size training modules are
being rolled out too on specific issues including
chronic kidney disease (CKD). This coincides
with the launch of our new trusted partnership
with Kidney Care UK to help the 76,000 people
with CKD in our supply area benefit from a
range of services, including enhanced support
via our PSR.
▶ Our annual Vulnerability Stakeholder
Conference in East Grinstead in February
attracted 61 attendees from 45 separate
organisations across the charity, utility,
housing, financial and community sectors.
▶ Our Vulnerability Strategy was published
following positive feedback from the regulator
Ofwat and the CCW. Ofwat classed the strategy
as “exemplary” in three of five assessment
areas. We’re also continuing to grow our
Vulnerability team underlining our commitment
to this focus area. A new Vulnerability Manager
has also been recruited.
▶ More support than ever before is available
for customers who need help paying their
bill. We’ve just launched the new social tariff
structure, which applies a tiered discount
based on household income. By raising the
upper income threshold we will be able to help
more customers. This grants scheme is funded
by donations from us and offers financial
assistance to customers who demonstrate they
are taking steps to achieve financial stability
but need help clearing water bill debt which has
built up over the years.
A trusted and affordable service
supporting customers and society
We want to do our best to meet the current and future needs of all
our customers and to make a difference to the communities we serve.
This includes supporting all those who may need extra help and going the
extra mile to make every contact with our customers count.
24 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Priority
Our strategy continued

Graphics
▶ We’re ramping up our home water efficiency
audits to our customers. During the audits, we
discuss water usage, fit water-saving devices
and fix any internal leaks we find. These
visits allow us to also promote a package of
support to our vulnerable customers and those
struggling to pay their bills by making them
aware of our PSR and affordability tariffs.
▶ In a partnership wth Ashford Borough Council,
we’ve actively promoted water efficiency by
providing 500 water butts for customers on
the PSR. We’ve also launched a campaign to
sell water butts at subsidised prices via the
Save Water Save Money website, with 600
snapped up at the time of writing. Every month
from October to March we gave away five
water butts as part of a wider communications
campaign related to water efficiency.
▶ By year end, we’d given out 198,555
water-saving devices, including leaky loo
detection strips and water-saving shower
heads, compared to 180,495 in 2023/24.
▶ There has been a further increase in numbers
registering for our online account portal,
MyAccount. By 31 March, 535,957 customers
had registered. This represents 58 per cent
of customers, up from 484,053 customers
(52 per cent) in 2023/24. Customers complete
on average 28,000 self-serve transactions a
month via My Account.
▶ During 2024/25, we have continued to
engage our My Account customers, with a
monthly newsletter – Behind the Tap. This
helps customers understand what we’re doing
to provide the public water service and also
delivers helpful, topical water efficiency advice,
hints and tips. The newsletter is sent to more
than 500,000 customers a month and enjoys a
strong digital engagement rate.
southeastwater.co.uk 25
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report

Graphics
▶ We strive to give our customers the best
service at every interaction. In 2024/25 our
contact centre staff, based at our head office
in Snodland in Kent, answered 98 per cent of
the 30,000 customer telephone calls we receive
on average every month within 30 seconds. We
are pleased to report that written complaints
have reduced by 30 per cent this year as a result
of trying to resolve customer issues in the first
contact with us and through our proactive
messaging during supply interruptions via the
AquAlerter system. We are very proud to have
been awarded The Institute of Customer Service
ServiceMark accreditation in recognition
of our customer service standards and our
commitment to upholding those high standards.
We’ve reached the milestone of awarding our
1,000th reward badge to customer service
agents delivering a 10 out of 10 service. To
receive a reward badge, colleagues have to
achieve a minimum of 25 scores of 10 out of
10 in customer surveys, or show exceptional
service demonstrating our core values – passion,
trust, excellence, creativity, and agility.
▶ We have reduced the number of void properties
(those not charged for water because they
are believed to be empty) to 1.76 per cent,
outperforming our 2024/25 target of
2.1 per cent.
▶ The second phase of our internal Incident
Management System is in the pipeline. This will
help us manage our bottled water deliveries
during incidents more efficiently via better
route optimisation planning and improved
customer communication.
▶ We continue to make improvements to
our customer incident messaging system
AquAlerter. Customers can now report leaks
themselves through the system and we’ll
automatically keep affected customers
updated on progress.
▶ We partnered with East Sussex County Council
in March to do a door drop of nearly 190,000
properties with cards containing water
efficiency tips.
A trusted and affordable service supporting customers and society continued
26 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Our strategy continued

Graphics
▶ We’ve achieved 9th on the C-MeX (Customer
Measure of Experience) Q4 table, our highest
position since 2017, when there was a
different performance system in place.
This puts us 12th overall for the year.
▶ During 2024/25 we’ve engaged with
customers and stakeholders, including nine
Members of Parliament, and been involved
in 71 separate events, including engineering
project drop-in sessions, council meetings,
site visits, open days and a virtual Q&A
session – “Behind the tap: Your drinking
water questions answered.” Modelled on the
Your Water, Your Say sessions of 2023/24,
the independently chaired sessions gave
customers and stakeholders the chance to
speak directly with members of the Executive.
Over 200 people attended the session in
November. Other events included the launch
of our 25 Year Environment Plan (H252) in
Sussex, an open day at Bewl WTW, an open
discussion with stakeholders in East Sussex
about our next draft WRMP29, Kent County
Show and Eastbourne Airborne Show.
▶ Through our annual Community Chest scheme,
we’ve supported local charities and community
groups again, distributing £20,000 to good
causes over the year. These included schools,
a community garden, bowling club, a drop-in
centre and a nature-based charity that helps
vulnerable children.
▶ We’ve started our summer demand campaign
earlier than ever before this year due to the
exceptionally dry and warm spring weather.
The focus has been on encouraging customers to
make simple changes to use water wisely, such
as doing water-intensive jobs at home before
the summer peak demand season. More visual
content using videos and online content, such
as GIFs, is helping to drive engagement in
the campaign.
southeastwater.co.uk 27
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/businessplan

Graphics
28 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/businessplan
▶ We’ve invested £80 million into the water
network in East Sussex, upgrading our
infrastructure to provide greater flexibility to
move water around the network and ensure we
maintain the quality of our drinking water.
Work has included completing a £7 million
upgrade to Barcombe WTW in Sussex.
▶ The upgrade to Bewl WTW and the Bewl pipeline
project, which will increase the amount of water
we can treat and supply to the area, are both
progressing well, with the mains upgrade on
track for commissioning in the summer.
▶ Work on a £51.8 million WTW on Maidstone’s old
Aylesford Newsprint site is nearing completion.
The first new WTW to be built in Kent for
18 years will allow us to treat and pump up to
20 million extra litres of water a day to the
local community.
▶ We’re investing £12 million in a two-phase
project to install a new water main in
areas of East Kent which experienced
supply interruptions during recent record-
breaking summers.
▶ Ground investigation works will start soon
for the new Broad Oak Reservoir scheme
near Canterbury. In February we set up the
Stakeholder Advisory Group to help us shape
the project further.
▶ The first of our 10 new water tankers have
already been used during supply incidents,
reducing the need to rely on bottled water and
improving our support for customers during
outages and interruptions. The tankers will also
enable us to inject water into the network to
return critical supplies of water as quickly as
possible and keep the network up and running
during key maintenance programmes. Linked
to the new tankers, we’ve opened up a central
logistics/alternative water response hub at
Morley Road in Tonbridge.
▶ To further improve our response during
incidents, a new curtainsider vehicle to move
bottled water around our area more efficiently
is on its way and more vehicles are in the
pipeline. Additional bottled water station
locations have been proactively identified in key
locations using web-based mapping software in
readiness for any incident.
Flexible, resilient infrastructure
and service
Strengthening our network security, resilience and flexibility is critical
to maintaining water supplies and improving our service to customers.
Priority
Our strategy continued

Graphics
▶ Supply interruption contingency plans have
been extended and we’re working with our
supply chain partners to source additional
alternative water supply options for major
incidents while increasing our internal
alternative water team. We’ve also identified
and tested additional network hydrant tanker
injection points to support customers and
protect reservoir storage during interruptions.
▶ We now reach 70 per cent of customers
impacted by an incident via our new AquAlerter
messaging system. Feedback on the system,
which keeps customers updated on incidents,
remains very positive.
▶ Health and safety is always our top priority.
This year we had two RIDDORS reported and
a lost time injury frequency rate (LTIFR) of 4.4
against a target of 5. We are working with the
British Safety Council on a formal auditing and
certification process to ensure we continuously
improve our approach.
▶ We’re working with the Institute of Advanced
Motorists on driver safety training and,
following staff feedback, ergonomics specialists
have helped us improve our vehicles for comfort
and access.
▶ Our easy online reporting tool ANMEL
(Accident, Near Miss and Environmental Log)
has driven a five-fold increase in proactive
safety observations by colleagues which we
can now resolve faster.
▶ An operational shift pattern review is ongoing
to improve working practices, reduce fatigue
and enhance wellbeing, while our Mental Health
First Aiders continue to support colleagues all
year round.
▶ Recent news underlines the threat to
organisations and critical infrastructure from
cyber criminals. We are using industry-leading
tools and techniques to constantly improve
our cyber security resilience, resulting in us
achieving the Drinking Water Inspectorate’s
standard for compliance with the Network
and Information Systems regulations (NIS).
We also have comprehensive staff training
which is underpinned by rigorous and
robust policies and procedures. Our supply
chain partners and stakeholders share our
commitment to the highest security standards.
▶ We are still playing catch-up on our flushing
programme since the extreme weather
experienced in 2023/24. During 2024/25,
we’ve flushed 900 km of pipes to remove
deposits which build up over time and safeguard
water quality.
▶ We are continuing to perform strongly against
the water quality target and industry average in
the DWI’s Compliance Risk Index performance
measure. This considers water quality
compliance failures at WTWs, service reservoirs
and in domestic households. Our performance
was 1.09 against an Ofwat deadband of 2.00 and
an industry average of 5.20.
▶ Event Risk Index (ERI) measures the company’s
response to unplanned events impacting water
quality and supply resilience. The company
performed strongly, showing a significant
improvement on the previous year with a score
of 28, against a company target of 50 and an
industry average of 2,229. The improvements
shown are as a direct result of the investment
at our treatment works and the improved
procedures for managing loss of supply events.
southeastwater.co.uk 29
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report

Graphics
30 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
▶ The Secretary of State approved our Water
Resources Management Plan 2024 (WRMP24)
before we published the plan in October. This
details how we’ll provide a reliable and resilient
water supply over the next 50 years by investing
in new infrastructure, reducing leakage and
encouraging water efficiency. Adequate funding
for our PR24 business plan is vital to achieve the
WRMP24’s stretching targets.
▶ The Water Industry National Improvement
Programme (WINEP) requires us to deliver
improvement schemes that protect and
enhance the natural environment with
sustainability at their heart. New water
sources and water transfer schemes are
necessary as abstraction licences will be
fewer and more tightly controlled in the future
(see ‘Thriving Environment’).
▶ Preparatory work for the Broad Oak reservoir
scheme, near Canterbury is under way and we
will carry out further feasibility studies on a
New Arlington reservoir option in East Sussex
to find the best solution. We discussed our
strategy for this part of Sussex with regulators
and stakeholders during a workshop at
Newhaven in October.
▶ We have continued to liaise closely with Water
Resources South East to ensure our WRMP24
aligns with the regional plan. Stakeholder
engagement and technical work has already
started as part of the planning for our next
draft plan (dWRMP29).
▶ On the supply side, work is nearing completion
on our new resource at the Butler water
treatment works on the former Aylesford
Newsprint site in Maidstone. We are improving
resilience by ensuring our existing sources, such
as Coggins Mill WTW in Sussex, are optimising
their outputs.
▶ We’re doing everything we can to protect our
existing groundwater sources from pollution.
A rise in nitrates caused by the impacts of
climate change (heavy rainfall/very wet winters)
and land management practices can affect raw
water quality in some areas. Our Environment
team is working with landowners to protect
groundwater quality via our award-winning
catchment management programme
(see ‘Thriving Environment’).
A resilient and sustainable water supply is more important than ever due
to the challenges of population growth, climate change and the need to
protect and enhance our natural environment.
Priority
Securing the
future of water
Our strategy continued

Graphics
▶ Reducing leakage is a high priority for us and
our customers. During the year we’ve continued
to find and fix leaks across our network to
protect water supplies and make them resilient
for the future. At the start of the 2020 to
2025 business period (AMP 7), our leakage
performance was in a strong position. However,
the performance has been impacted in recent
years by priorities having to be devoted
elsewhere as a result of extreme weather
events. Nevertheless, we have completed
18,501 network leaks repairs during 2024/25
– an increase of 12 per cent on the three-year
average – and repaired over 6,000 customer-
side leaks. As part of our leakage recovery
strategy, we are increasing the number of staff
out finding and fixing leaks, and we’ve invested
in new leak detection technology and systems
to improve the visibility of our pipeline network.
We work with industry-leading specialists in
leakage identification and management to
continually improve our data for better leak
repair and prioritisation. This helps to
mitigate interruptions risk and improve
network resilience.
▶ Satellite technology and no-dig repairs are two
ways we’re using innovation to find and fix leaks
while minimising interruptions to customer
supplies. We’re also starting to use fibre optic
cable networks to identify leaks and we’re
collaborating with industry partners on a new
National Leakage Research and Test Centre
where new technologies can be developed
and tested out without disrupting customers’
supplies or affecting water quality.
▶ Helping customers to use less water is another
priority to secure the future of water. We
arrange audits in customers’ homes and in
businesses to find leaks and provide water
efficiency advice. We also engage with schools
to raise awareness of water efficiency.
As part of our leakage
recovery strategy, we are
increasing the number of
staff out finding and fixing
leaks, and we’ve invested
in new leak detection
technology and systems
“
southeastwater.co.uk 31
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/businessplan

Graphics
32 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
▶ At the start of the year we launched H25
2
, our
ambitious 25 Year Environment Plan which sets
out how we will protect and enhance the natural
environment for future generations through
investment, innovation, engagement and
partnerships. More than 50 of our partners and
stakeholders joined us in Sussex to hear more
about our plan, which involved two years of
consultation with customers, stakeholders and
employees. Attendees learned about our River
Stour chalk stream project and our involvement
in the creation of the super National Nature
Reserve (sNNR) near Eastbourne – the first NNR
to protect raw groundwater quality.
▶ We’ve outperformed our year five target for
biodiversity and improved another 23 hectares
of company-owned land to benefit wildlife and
biodiversity in 2024/25. This brings the total
area now proactively managed for biodiversity
to 1,673 hectares, or 77 per cent of company
land – that’s up from 54 per cent of land
managed for biodiversity at the start of AMP 7
in 2020. This means we have exceeded our
five-year target by 213 hectares, an area equal
to the size of around 300 football pitches.
We are proud to have achieved all the targets
set in this challenging project and to have
implemented management plans for 214 sites
and a range of habitats.
▶ As part of the statutory Water Industry National
Environment Programme (WINEP), we have
continued to deliver on our commitments to
enhance the natural environment and ensure
any water we abstract does not have a negative
impact on the environment.
We are aware there is always a delicate balance
between securing the future of water supplies
and protecting the rivers and streams we rely
on. A key part of our work during 2024/25 has
focused on delivering our Restoring Sustainable
Abstraction (RSA) schemes and carrying out
investigations into the sustainability of some
of them. We remain in dialogue with the
Environment Agency about this as our views
differ about the future sustainability of some
abstractions (as a result of climate change
assumptions). Our detailed data, monitoring
and management over many years clearly
demonstrates that turning off some existing
abstractions could have a negative impact,
rather than a positive one, on stretches
of rivers. For instance, turning off some
abstractions could lead to a higher risk of
flooding or threaten water quality.
A thriving environment is essential to protecting our valuable water sources.
As guardians of the environment, we work hard to protect and enhance it for
future generations.
Priority
Thriving
environment
Our strategy continued

Graphics
▶ In 2024/25, we delivered two RSA investigation
schemes at Bisham Brook, related to our
Hurley and Cookham sources, and a second at
our Crowhurst Bridge source. Investigations
found that these sources were sustainable at
Recent Actual abstraction volumes and water
body failures were largely attributed to other
pressures, such as straightened rivers and road
run-off. We also successfully delivered two river
restoration/adaptive management schemes
on the Maidenhead Ditch, in Maidenhead, and
the Itchel Brook, a tributary to the River Hart.
We are in discussion with the Environment
Agency and Natural England around the
sustainability of some of our other sources. We
have, however, delivered 12 ground and surface
water catchment management schemes – see
below. For our bespoke WINEP ODI for the 2020
to 2025 period, we have delivered 58 schemes,
with five schemes extended into 2025/26,
and two schemes not delivered (65 schemes in
total). One of the non-delivery schemes relates
to abstraction reductions at our Itchel source.
We have not been able to apply for this because
of outages at other sources due to pollution
from third party sources. We are putting in
treatment solutions at these other sources and,
once completed, these will enable us to take the
abstraction reductions at Itchel.
We were due to switch off a raw water transfer
between Darwell reservoir and Hazards Green
WTW due to the risk of transferring invasive
non-native species (INNS). Building additional
resilience into the infrastructure required
to replace the raw water main led to delays
to delivery. We are working closely with our
regulators to explore additional monitoring and
mitigation to minimise the risk from invasive
species posed by the raw water transfer until
the replacement schemes can be completed.
▶ We have delivered six groundwater catchment
management schemes to reduce pollution
within the groundwater aquifers this year
as part of WINEP. In our Pembury catchment
we’ve removed an old farm waste pile and are
monitoring the impact of this on pollutants in
the catchment. In our Tonbridge catchment
we’ve installed an innovative treatment, in the
form of a pilot permeable barrier in the aquifer
to reverse historic contamination within
the catchment.
southeastwater.co.uk 33
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report

Graphics
▶ Our work in the Woodgarston catchment
has continued and we’ve worked closely with
farmers and land managers on interventions to
reduce nutrient leaching to groundwater. Over
90 per cent of farmers in the catchment are
now engaged with us through tests and trials,
steering groups or through our capital grants
scheme. Our innovative trials in this catchment
mean that our company is one of only three
water companies with an Advance WINEP for
2025 to 2030, allowing us to innovate further
in this area and share findings with the water
industry and the agricultural sector.
▶ We’ve presented training to five local
authorities in 2024/25 on the importance of
Source Protection Zones (SPZ), which protect
groundwater sources used to supply drinking
water, from pollution. We have done this due to
an increase in housing development in SPZs in
some of our groundwater catchments.
▶ Proactive work with farmers and landowners
has resulted in us outperforming our five-year
Landowner ODI target of 14,217 hectares by
successfully engaging with landowners who
manage 15,098 hectares within our target
catchments. In 2024/25 we’ve engaged with 43
farm businesses within ODI target areas. We’ve
supported a Hampshire hop producer to reduce
artificial fertiliser use by up to 50 per cent and
to trial biological pest control, which resulted
in 50 per cent of the crop requiring no chemical
treatment. We also provided technical advice
and grant support to enable a livestock farm in
the River Teise catchment to fit 90,000 litres
of rainwater harvesting equipment. This helps
to reduce the farm’s reliance on mains water
supply, provide water to cattle and sheep where
supply is temporarily lost, helps to lower the
farm’s water bill, and can help reduce demand
on our mains supplies to our customers.
Thriving environment continued
Our strategy continued
34 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/businessplan

Graphics
▶ There are also wider environmental benefits
to our catchment management programme
under the Landowner Engagement ODI. As
well as managing the risks of deteriorating
water quality, measures also benefit a range of
other ecosystem services (benefits provided
to people by the natural environment) such as
air quality, climate regulation and biodiversity.
We’ve found that some of the most impactful
measures among all the ecosystem services
assessed were undersowing maize with grass,
arable reversion, woodland management
and silvopasture. Our study also found
that catchment management measures
implemented between 2020 and 2024 are
estimated to sequester an additional 1,001
tonnes of carbon through changes in land
use type or habitat type, compared to the
baseline farm management regime. The total
monetary value to society from all catchment
management measures implemented as part
of this performance commitment has been
estimated at £459,045 per year. This is the
combined total of all ecosystem services
benefits and disbenefits, and excludes any
measures undertaken in the financial
year 2024/25.
▶ We have continued working with partners
including the South Downs National Park,
University of Brighton, Environment Agency
and Ouse and Adur Rivers Trust to develop an
INNS strategy for the River Ouse which includes
installing boot wash facilities at key sites and
signage promoting good biosecurity practices.
▶ In October we reached an important milestone
in our environmental stewardship, with 73 per
cent of our company-owned Sites of Special
Scientific Interest (SSSI) land now managed to
a favourable condition, surpassing the industry
average of 16.4 per cent.
▶ We’re working with the Longbridge
Regenerative grazing project to use Exmoor
ponies in a nature-based solution to manage
181 hectares of invasive tor grassland in
East Sussex.
▶ Common reptile numbers at our Offham WTW
site are thriving thanks to our proactive habitat
management and protected species monitoring.
We found no less than 14 slow worms under a
single survey mat, and 24 slow worms and two
common lizards in total, warming up under the
survey mats during the survey, near specially
constructed hibernacula.
We have continued
working with partners
including the South Downs
National Park, University
of Brighton, Environment
Agency and Ouse and Adur
Rivers Trust to develop
an INNS strategy for the
River Ouse
“
southeastwater.co.uk 35
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report

Graphics
Our strategy continued
36 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
▶ Our goal is to secure long-term renewable
energy supply to cover all our electricity
requirements by entering into power purchase
agreements (PPA). Entering into a long-term
PPA will directly contribute to the development
of new renewable energy capacity and enable
further decarbonisation at a UK level. We hope
to announce details of our first PPA for 40 per
cent of our energy needs in the near future. This
is an excellent carbon zero project and should
spearhead the next stage to organise a second
PPA for another 40 per cent of our energy needs.
▶ We aim to cover the remaining 20 per cent
with our own on-site solar projects. We have
an agreement with a third-party investor to
install renewable solar energy on 20 sites, mainly
water treatment works sites. In the future we
may be able to work with local communities to
use some of our solar projects to provide wider
community benefit.
▶ Where appropriate, we also want to consider
combining onsite battery storage alongside
solar generation. This would allow us to extend
solar energy beyond daylight hours and would
also give sites more resilience in the event of
grid outages. A pilot project is currently running
at Ospringe where we are using a battery to
replace a diesel generator.
▶ A new company-wide electric vehicle (EV) salary
sacrifice scheme for employees, allowing them
to lease an electric vehicle at a significantly
reduced cost, is nearing sign-off. This will
reduce the carbon footprint of the journeys
they make for work while supporting our
environmental ambitions.
▶ We’re continuing to invest in our own EV
infrastructure. During the year we’ve increased
the number of EV charging points across
company sites by 10 per cent. We are also
planning a power capacity upgrade investment
at our head office site at Snodland to
accommodate more charging points.
As a responsible company we want to improve the sustainability of our
business by becoming operational net zero carbon by 2030. We remain
committed to tackling the causes of climate change and transitioning to
low-carbon operations.
Priority
Low carbon
sustainable business

Graphics
▶ We now have 16 EV vans in our fleet, having
added six vans to the fleet in 2024/25 – that’s
a 60 per cent increase. 100 per cent of our
company car fleet is now either electric
or hybrid. We are currently working with
a specialist EV consultant who is using our
tracking system and other information to map
out a comprehensive EV strategy for us before
we can finalise a plan to increase our EV fleet
further. Battery range, the current cost of EVs
compared to diesel versions and the battery
charging infrastructure on site and at home are
all issues we need to assess and resolve as part
of our strategy. We need to ensure that any
future investment in EVs does not compromise
our frontline operational capability due to
the 24/7 nature of our business. We remain
involved with a UK-wide utility fleet forum which
regularly meets to discuss these issues as well
as sharing insight, ideas and best practice. The
result of the review of the Final Determination
by the CMA may also impact on the investment
in this area as we plan to decarbonise our
commercial fleet by 70 per cent by 2030, subject
to funding. The transition to EVs will continue
throughout this five-year business period but
we need to await the CMA review before we
know to what level we’ll be able to progress
the transition.
southeastwater.co.uk 37
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/businessplan
We now have 16 EV vans in our fleet, having added six vans to the
fleet in 2024/25 – that’s a 60 per cent increase. 100 per cent of
our company car fleet is now either electric or hybrid
“

Graphics
As a future-ready business, we are committed to providing our customers with
the best service possible, now and in the future. Our people are key to this. By
attracting and retaining top talent and equipping our diverse teams with the
training and the tools they need to meet the current and future needs of all our
customers, we can continuously improve our service and make our company a
high performing, inclusive place to work.
Priority
Future-ready
business
Our strategy continued
38 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
▶ Our new HR IT system (HRIS) went live on
schedule in March to future proof our business
with a more user friendly, intuitive system that
will connect all business areas. The system,
which includes employee services such as
recruitment, onboarding, payroll and a self-
serve portal, will improve efficiency and give
greater visibility of workflows while providing
users with a better experience.
▶ Our recent focus has been on helping to shape
our company for future challenges including the
delivery of our ambitious new corporate plan.
Two new directorates will be created to help us
deliver our most ambitious business plan ever,
the Investment Delivery Directorate (IDD) and
Technology and Insight Directorate (TID). A
Change team will be in place to ensure we set
the business up for future success. Our new
five-year people plan will play a key role
in this as we support and guide staff through
the process.
▶ We are very proud of our growing and
comprehensive apprenticeship programme.
At any one time, we now have between 60
and 70 apprentices in the business. We’ve
also increased the number of apprenticeship
standards we offer from five to 20, helping us
to secure the next generation of talent through
investment in new and emerging talent and
home-grown skills. Apprentices currently
account for 7 per cent of employees. Women
account for more than half of all applicants
for our new apprenticeships, with 33 per cent
subsequently being recruited. Our collaboration
with Thames Water on a joint operations
apprenticeship programme continues to
work well.
▶ Our company has been awarded Gold
membership of The 5% Club for 2024/25
after an official audit. We believe we are the
first water-only company to have achieved this
accolade. The 5% Club recognises companies
where at least five per cent of colleagues earn
and learn at the same time.
▶ This year 89 current colleagues have undertaken
internal upskilling programmes to help us
meet our business’s future and changing needs
through our Aspire, Inspire and Lead routes. This
is a 31 per cent increase compared to 2023/24.
Overall, 42 per cent on upskilling programmes
have again been women. Women make up 50 per
cent of our Aspire programme participants. We
are currently taking nine colleagues through our
Preparing for Senior Leadership programme,
having identified them for future senior roles
through our succession planning activities.

Graphics
▶ Work is continuing on putting together a new
shift pattern and standby (on-call) structure
following a review aimed at encouraging more
people into operational roles. The goal is to
offer more choice and greater flexibility in
operational roles, as these frontline positions
have traditionally required unsociable working
hours which can deter some people from
applying for them. Discussions are ongoing
with employees about the best approach for
the new structure.
▶ We always aim to treat colleagues, customers
and partners fairly and respectfully so that
they feel included and supported. Colleagues
received mandatory training in equity,
diversity and inclusion in June as part of
this responsibility.
▶ Staff engagement remains high at 91 per cent
according to our last pulse survey in November.
There were improvements in all areas surveyed.
We also improved in specific focus areas –
culture and diversity and senior management
– performing above the external benchmark
on culture and diversity. We continue to build
and support a pipeline of diverse, talented
colleagues. Our mental wellbeing scores remain
high but we continue to support any staff who
are struggling or are unwell and use insight
from the survey to do this. The results are
testament to all the hard work that goes on
throughout the company to make our company
a great place to work.
▶ The latest gender pay gap report (April 2024
data) shows an improvement in the gender
pay gap of 0.5 per cent to 21.1 per cent. This is
another small step in the right direction but we
know there is more to do. We will continue to
focus on the best ways to make a lasting
change in how women are represented within
our company.
▶ We are still outperforming our industry on
gender diversity, employing 40 per cent of
women against an industry average of 33 per
cent. Of those applying for our vacancies, 39
per cent were women, with 39 per cent of these
going on to join the company.
▶ Grief can affect people in different ways and
we remain sensitive to the individual needs
of colleagues experiencing a loss. Therefore,
we have extended the leave available to those
suffering a bereavement and also extended
the eligibility to include a broader definition of
‘family’, those who’ve suffered a miscarriage
and the policy now includes one day’s paid leave
for the loss of a pet.
southeastwater.co.uk 39
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/businessplan

Graphics
40 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Integrated thinking
To fulfil our purpose
in the long-term we
must understand the
combined impact of
climate change, population
growth, sustainable water
abstraction, demand and
leakage management,
customers’ behaviours, the
need to enhance habitats
and biodiversity, and the
availability and maturity
of relevant technology.
We must also consider the
impact of policies set by
regulators and government
on us and on other sectors.
The assessment and
mitigation of climate-
related risks is a key aspect
of our long-term planning
which guides our investment.
However, focusing on these
risks in isolation would not
recognise the fact that our
future challenges will result
from multiple factors.
We promote integrated
thinking by co-ordinating
our actions across our long-
term plans and developing
our understanding of future
challenges through scenario
analysis.
The relations between our challenges
Climate change
and urgency to
decarbonise
Population growth stronger
in the south east of England
with housing developments,
changes to land use and
economic activities
Evolving
expectations
of society
about the
environment
and our role as a
corporate citizen
Increasing
expectations
of customers
about our
service
and social
changes
We must continue to
improve our service
to meet the evolving
expectations of
customers and
society
We must balance the need for
long-term investment with
keeping our service affordable
An ageing
population will
mean an increase
in vulnerable
customers
We must adapt
to the impact of
climate change
More water resources
will be needed to improve
resilience to droughts
Our supply system will
have to work harder
Our incident
management
capabilities will
be tested
Extreme weather will
disrupt our service,
our energy supply and
our supply chain
Our strategy continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 41
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Global driving forces
such as climate change,
staying within planetary
boundaries, population
growth, geopolitical
tensions, macroeconomic
conditions, technological
developments will
influence national
policies and regulations,
the conditions in which
we operate and society’s
expectations about our
role as water company
Increasing pressure on
biodiversity and the
environment in our regions
We must rapidly
reduce our carbon
footprint and impact
We must meet the
growing demand for
drinking water despite
increasing water scarcity
We must play our part in
protecting and restoring the
environment and biodiversity
We must increase the
resilience, capacity
and flexibility of our
water supply system
Rising temperature, hotter, drier
summer and more frequent heatwaves
will increase peaks in demand
Less water can be taken from the
environment and deterioration in
raw water quality
Water resources management,
treatment and network operations
will become more complex
Obligations and standards
becoming more complex and
wide ranging to deal with
increasing challenges will
introduce more requirements
and constraints on our operations
and for delivering investment
Compliance in the round
to meet a wider range of
overlapping requirements will
become more complex: water
quality and environmental
requirements, biodiversity gains,
decarbonisation, adaptation to
climate change, sustainability
and resource efficiency
CO
2
Developing new sources and changing how
we operate our water sources, treatment
and network to balance surface and ground
water, to keep our abstractions sustainable
or to meet future water quality standards
despite deterioration in raw water quality
will make our operations more complex
Additional pressure on
our assets and more
of them needing to be
replaced

Graphics
42 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Planning for the future
Planning for the future is a very important part of what we do as a water company. “To create tomorrow’s
water supply solutions” is a key part of our purpose; it is also one of our main statutory duties. We update
several long-term strategies and plans every five years to anticipate and prepare for what the future holds.
Our strategy continued
2025 to 2030
2045 to 2050
2030 to 2035
2040 to 2045 2040 to 2045
2035 to 2040
Find out more
about our long-term plans
southeastwater.co.uk/ourplans
Five yearly business plan
Our priorities
Strategic Direction Statement
Long-Term Delivery Strategy
Our detailed long-term planning
– Water Resources Management Plan
– 25 Year Environment Plan
– Water Industry National Environmental Plan
– Climate Change Adaptation Report &
Task Force on Climate-related Financial
Disclosure (TCFD)
– Drought plan
KEY

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 43
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Water Resources Management Plan
▶  Forecasts the impact of population growth, housing developments and climate change and how
we can ensure our water resources are sufficient and water abstraction is sustainable over the
next 50 years, based on different adaptive pathways.
▶  Is part of a regional plan, developed with all water companies in the south east of England following
guidance from government and regulators, which selects the optimal water resources options for
the region.
▶  Ensures that future water supplies will meet the demand for water and be resilient to climate change
by developing new sources, transferring water within our area and between water companies,
reducing leakage, and encouraging customers to use water wisely.
25 Year Environment Plan
▶  Sets out our ambitions and environmental management principles.
▶  Defines how to improve and enhance the environment, deal with sustainable abstraction, raw
water quality deterioration, and biodiversity loss. It does this through nature-based solutions
such as catchment management or the management of natural sites that we are responsible for.
Water Industry National Environment Programme (WINEP)
▶  Is a programme of actions (included in our business plan) to protect, restore, and enhance the water
and wider environment and to meet existing and new environmental outcomes.
Adaptation report, net zero routemap and Task Force on Climate-related Financial
Disclosures (TCFD) reporting
▶  Identifies and assesses our climate-related risks, and the actions we need to take to adapt to the
impact of climate change and reduce our business emissions.
Drought plan
▶  Sets out the range of management, operational and communications actions we will take to manage
the water supply in drought conditions. This includes the permits, orders and other authorisations
needed to implement drought management actions, and related monitoring, mitigation, and
prevention measures.
Long-term delivery strategy and asset management strategy
▶   Set out the performance and service improvements we want to achieve, the levels of performance
we target and how we will prioritise and phase investment.
▶   Uses different adaptive pathways (combining climate change impacts with other factors) to
maintain the resilience of our assets and services.

Graphics
44 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Our main investment in water resources over the first 15 years (2025 to 2040) through our water resources
management plan comprises:
▶  A new reservoir at Broad Oak (Kent) by 2033 –
providing an extra 22 million litres of water a
day while reducing abstractions of groundwater.
▶  A new groundwater source, via a licence trade
near Maidstone (Kent) by 2040.
▶  Sub-zonal schemes to improve our local
network connectivity and reduce abstractions
that could impact the environment.
▶  Further development work and early feasibility
studies on schemes such as a new Arlington
reservoir, Peacehaven recycling and Reculver
desalination to ensure we are ready, if needed,
to adapt to future uncertainty.
East
Grinstead
Royal
Tunbridge
Wells
Haywards
Heath
Brighton
Bognor Regis
Eastbourne
Hastings
Canterbury
Snodland HQ
Farnham
Basingstoke
Ashford
Cranbrook
Maidstone
Frimley
Crawley
Chichester
Worthing
Margate
Maidenhead
Bracknell
Wokingham
Camberley
Sevenoaks
Ardingly
Reservoir
Barcombe
Reservoir
Bewl
Reservoir
To Southern Water
From SES Water
Petersfield
Reduce existing Affinity Water
transfer by 10 Ml/d by 2026
Heathfield
Folkestone
Arlington
Reservoir
From Thames to
Southern Strategic
Transfer
New reservoir at Broad Oak, Canterbury
Water transfers
Licence trade and site improvements
Key
Reducing leakage
by 40% by 2040
*
Reducing customer demand
to 118 litres a day by 2040
Reducing business demand
by 9% by 2040
*
* based on 2017/18 levels.
Find out more
about our Water Resources Management Plan
southeastwater.co.uk/wrmp
Implementation of our strategy
Our Water Resources Management Plan
▶  Leak reduction and water efficiency activities –
saving an extra 34 million litres of water a day.
▶  A new smart meter installation programme with
trials starting in 2025 and a full roll-out from
2027 onwards, with the goal of providing smart
meters across 90 per cent of our households
by 2035.
▶  Reducing non-household consumption with
measures such as business smart meters and
water efficiency audits.
▶  New pipelines to increase the amount of water
moving between water companies and within
supply area.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 45
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Our Business Plan – 2025 to 2030
During our extensive engagement, customers
confirmed they supported our business plan
proposals to invest in regional resilience. They
highlighted the need to address both short and
long-term resilience challenges and understood the
impact of population growth and extreme weather
on the water supply.
To mitigate the impact on bills, we are proposing an
even more ambitious plan to support customers who
need financial help. This includes nearly doubling
the numbers on our social tariff by 48,000 to a total
of 104,000 customers, and increasing the qualifying
threshold by 17 per cent.
Receiving an uninterrupted water supply is
customers’ top priority, together with affordable
bills. Customer satisfaction is rooted in a resilient
infrastructure, and we must continue to deliver
improvements in performance and service quality.
Our business plan for 2025 to 2030 includes
significant investment to reduce supply
interruptions and strengthen network resilience.
Over the next five years we propose to invest nearly
£2.1 billion into our network. This is a significant
increase compared with recent regulatory periods.

Graphics
46 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
A trusted and affordable service supporting customers and society
To support our customers and deliver a reliable service for all, we will:
▶ Implement a six point plan to reduce water poverty by 2030 comprising:
▶ A comprehensive package of financial support.
▶   Improving take up of the support we offer customers through targeted
engagement and by raising awareness.
▶  A broad suite of non-financial support services.
▶  More use of data, and data share agreements with local authorities.
▶  An inclusive approach to water efficiency.
▶  New tools and systems that empower our teams to improve our customers’
experience and give them the support they need.
▶  Increase our capacity to respond to interruptions of supply and provide support
to more customers.
▶ Use new technology and channels for customer interactions.
▶ Automate our back-office systems to improve service.
Flexible, resilient infrastructure and service
To provide a flexible, resilient infrastructure and high-quality service, we will:
▶  Improve network resilience:
▶  Upgrade to the Barcombe WTW (water treatment works) improving resilience
for 172,190 customers (Haywards Heath area).
▶  Deliver new mains transfers and interconnectivity schemes; and extra drinking
storage capacity.
▶   Increase treatment works capacity at Bewl, Pembury and Tonbridge WTW, and
improve flood defences at Tonbridge, improving resilience in the Tonbridge /
Tunbridge Wells area.
▶    Start the construction of a new 4 million litres per day company transfer from
Blackhurst to Bewl, to be completed by 2033.
▶  Implement a full smart network roll-out, to include installing pressure loggers, flow
meters, water quality monitors, and 275,000 smart meters (reaching 90 per cent of
households by 2035).
▶  Maintain excellent water quality and build three new nitrate treatment plants in
our western region.
▶  Increase our incident preparedness and alternative water capability to support up
to 100,000 customers (from 30,000).
Thriving environment
To protect and improve our environment, we will:
▶ 
 
Adopt a holistic approach to make the right, long-term, well-balanced
decisions that:
▶ Plan and adapt for climate change on a local level.
▶ Manage catchments holistically.
▶  Encourage collaborating with partners wherever possible.
▶ Develop more resilient use of water across our customer base.
▶  Deliver 73 environment schemes as part of our environment programme (WINEP):
▶  Work with partners to improve the quality of raw water entering our catchments.
▶ Improve biodiversity to support an abundance of wildlife.
▶ Reduce, monitor, and prevent invasive species from entering our environment.
▶ Ensure no deterioration in surface water quality and improve river flows.
▶ Invest in nature-based solutions.
Implementation of our strategy continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 47
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Low carbon sustainable business
We will undertake the following to play our part in tackling the cause of climate change
and meeting the UK’s emissions reduction targets:
▶  Increase our use of green electricity, ensuring value for money and generating
renewable electricity at our sites.
u Offset carbon through tree planting.
▶  Replace 70 per cent of our fleet with low-carbon alternatives.
▶  Initiate pilot projects to switch our backup electricity generators from diesel to
alternatives like battery, hybrid (diesel/electric), or hydrotreated vegetable oil
(HVO) generators.
Securing the future of water
To secure the future of water, we will:
▶ Increase future water supplies:
▶    Start work on a new reservoir at Broad Oak, near Canterbury, due to be completed
in 2033.
▶    Develop seven new sub-zonal schemes, and complete six by 2030 to improve local
connectivity and enable abstraction reductions.
▶    Undertake early work and feasibility studies on a new Arlington reservoir,
Peacehaven recycling and Reculver desalination schemes so we are ready to
implement these solutions when needed.
▶  Reduce bursts and leakage by 11 million litres of water a day by 2030 by investing in
technology which help us:
▶   Find leaks quicker and reduce fluctuations in pressure, which is a major cause
of leaks.
▶   Better understand the condition of mains and prioritise their replacement.
▶ Help customers to use less water:
▶    Visit customers’ homes and businesses to find leaks on their plumbing
and provide water efficiency advice.
▶    Engage with schools to raise awareness of water efficiency.
▶       Implement a water efficiency tariff: lower usage = lower bills.
Future-ready business
▶  As a future-ready business, our commitment to innovation and adaptability keeps
us on the path of consistent progress. To rebuild trust, we are improving how we
keep all our customers thoroughly informed and updated.
▶  Roll out the technology, information systems and data analysis to support smart
networks and smart meters that will give us real time and precise insight into
supply status.
▶  Introduce the second phase of AquAlerter to allow us to provide customer updates
at street level and improve leak reporting.
▶  Increase our capabilities and bring in new skills to use new technology and deliver
investment in long-term resilience.
Find out more
about our business plan
southeastwater.co.uk/businessplan

Graphics
48 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Our business environment
Natural environment
Key characteristics
▶  We rely on, and must protect, the quantity and quality of the freshwater we take from the environment which
will be impacted by climate change.
▶ 
Rainfall in the south east of England is lower than in other parts of the country and the region is an area of
serious water stress.
▶ 
Due to our geography and history, we use many small groundwater sources compared with other water
companies, many of which with water that is difficult to treat and corrosive to equipment.
▶ 
We are a significant landowner, managing 33 Sites of Special Scientific Interest, including the national nature
reserve at Lullington Heath in East Sussex, two nature reserves at Arlington Reservoir and Ardingly Reservoir in
Sussex as well as other sites within Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty.
Key trends Principal risks impacted by these trends |1 | 4 | 5 | 7 |
▶  Climate change is already impacting on our operations with more frequent severe weather which has exceeded
what was anticipated in climate projections.
▶ 
Changes in requirements to ensure our abstraction is sustainable will impact how we manage our existing
sources of water, especially chalk streams.
▶ 
New environmental obligations (e.g. biodiversity net gains), stronger scrutiny on compliance with abstraction
licences and discharge permits, and more enforcement action by regulators.
▶ 
Greater expectation on us to extend the range of our interventions under WINEP to enhance the environment,
e.g. addressing environmental issues caused by third parties.
Social environment
Key characteristics
▶  Everyone relies on our essential service. This has a huge influence on our work and requires regular engagement
with customers and stakeholders.
▶
  An uninterrupted water supply is customers’ top priority, together with affordable bills. They expect us to
reduce leakage and, if we are not successful, this makes our messaging on the importance of using water wisely
less effective.
▶
  We have a comparatively high percentage of older residents in our region who need our support on a day-to-day
basis and during incidents.
Key trends Principal risks impacted by these trends |1 | 4 | 5 | 7 |
▶  Water use has increased and usage patterns have changed since the pandemic, with more people working from
home having an impact on peaks in demand and supply resilience.
▶ 
Recent water supply interruptions in our area have damaged customer satisfaction and their perception
of us. There is also widespread criticism of the sector, fuelling distrust and influencing the political and
regulatory environment.
▶ 
Customers support our business plan proposals to invest in regional resilience and expect us to address both
short and long-term resilience challenges.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 49
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Political and regulatory environment
Key characteristics
▶  We operate within a strict regulatory environment (See key relationships on page 18).
▶  Changing obligations including regulatory and environmental, changes in policies and potential misalignment
between policy areas or regulators, impact our performance and our ability to meet long-term challenges.
▶ 
We influence future policy through direct engagement with regulators and political representatives, our
participation in consultations and as members of the water industry trade body, Water UK.
Key trends Principal risks impacted by these trends | 7 | 8 | 12 |
▶  Scrutiny of the sewerage sector and criticism about storm overflows is extending to the whole water sector,
with increasing challenges about the performance and ownership model of water companies, dividends,
and executive pay.
▶ 
Increasing public and political scrutiny of the sector influences regulation and the enforcement practices
of regulators.
▶ 
In our view, Ofwat’s PR24 final determination has increased the uncertainty associated with the price
review process.
▶ 
The interim report of the Cunliffe Review has presented an accurate assessment of the shortcomings of the
current regulatory framework and its recommendations, if followed, could significantly improve the regulation
of the water sector.
Economic environment
Key characteristics
▶  Macroeconomic conditions impact our costs, those of our supply chain and our customers’ ability to pay their
bills, and our levels of bad debt.
▶ 
We have significant funding requirements to carry out our investment programme; inflation and related interest
rate rises have a significant impact on our cost of debt.
▶ 
Electricity and chemicals are essential to our operations; their prices are sensitive to macroeconomic conditions
and global events.
▶ 
Combined with regulatory risks resulting from price reviews and the political environment, the economic
environment influences our ability to access capital on favourable terms.
▶ 
The south east of England is a relatively affluent part of the UK, but there are pockets of deprivation and a
comparatively larger number of pensioners are affected by cost-of-living increases.
Key trends Principal risks impacted by these trends | 2 | 3 |
▶  Inflation has stabilised but the cost-of-living impacts customers’ ability to pay their bills which have increased in
2025 to reflect the need for significant additional investment in our supply system. Our social tariff and financial
support to vulnerable household customers will increase to support those who need it.
▶ 
In 2025 to 2023, the significant increase in investment in the water sector and other sectors is likely to put
pressure on input costs.
Innovation and technology
Key characteristics
▶  Innovation and technology enable us to work more safely and efficiently and to keep up with regulatory and
consumer expectations.
▶ 
Greater reliance on information and communication technology increases the risk of disruption from cyber-attacks.
Key trends Principal risks impacted by these trends | 6 | 7 | 9 |
▶  Technological development (network automation, Artificial Intelligence (AI), machine learning) are increasingly
relevant for meeting leakage and demand reduction targets and improve operational performance with smart
networks and metering.
▶ 
Customers expect us to adopt digital technology for their interactions with us and to enable self-service.
We provide explanations on the long-term trends and challenges which determine our strategy on
pages 22 and 24.
We provide more details below on how our business environment influences our principal risks and our
assessment of the year-on-year trend for each risk.

Graphics
50 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Risk management and
principal risks
How we manage risks
We have comprehensive internal control and
risk management systems, and we monitor their
effectiveness regularly in compliance with the
principles of our corporate governance code.
We maintain a risk register for the identification,
evaluation, and mitigation of risks. Our risk
management model uses standardised risk
descriptions (cause, event, effect) and scores based
on impacts and likelihood. Risk scores reflect current
controls and mitigation measures. A target risk score
is also calculated based on planned improvements
to controls and mitigation. We also assess emerging
and future risks, broadly targeting a rolling 10-plus
year time horizon.
Risk management is integral to the delivery and
monitoring of performance and compliance with
our statutory obligations. It informs our day-to-
day operation and is informed by it. Individual
managers and heads of department are responsible
for identifying risks relevant to their area of
responsibility and defining and implementing
mitigations. We also take advantage of the
potential for business improvement that arises
from risk management and the implementation
of mitigations.
We maintain a company monitoring framework. This
includes a risk assessment to ensure the information
we publish is accurate and reliable. External
assurance of our performance reporting provides
additional controls. We provide more details on the
assurance of our performance and other regulatory
data in the annual performance report.
Risk management is also integral to how we manage
our infrastructure and to our long-term planning,
which is based on our assessment of future risks
and how they will be mitigated. Investing regularly
to meet our long-term challenges ensures we can
maintain and improve service levels and continue to
meet our obligations.
This model allows the board to assess and manage
risks at a strategic level and the executives to manage
risks at an operational level. The board defines our
risk management framework and reviews the risks
on the register and the effectiveness of the relevant
mitigation measures at least once a year.
The board and the audit and risk committee review
our material financial, operational and compliance
controls through regular or specific updates. The
board reviews monthly, quarterly, and annual
performance reports which highlight risks as
they arise and mitigation that are put in place. An
additional board session dedicated specifically
to the consideration of strategic risks has been
introduced this year in the board schedule.
The executive team monitors and reviews relevant
risks on a monthly basis.
The risk management systems described here have
been in place for the year under review and up to
the date of approval of the annual report and
financial statements.
Risk management is integral to
the delivery and monitoring of
performance and compliance
with our statutory obligations
“

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 51
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Our principal risks
We describe our principal risks, their potential
impact and how they are managed on the following
pages. Principal risks are those which, due to their
likelihood or magnitude, can significantly impact
our company’s long-term success. We consider
their impact on our business model, strategy, future
performance, solvency, and liquidity, and assess
them in the context of our business environment.
The board carried out a review of our principal and
strategic risks and the high impact and emerging
risks on our risk register. Principal risks represent
an aggregation of individual underlying risks in our
risk register. Their current risk exposure and trend
reflect the risk levels and trends of the related
underlying individual risks in our risk register.
This review found no significant change this year
to the definitions and presentation of our principal
risks other than the updated assessment of trends
to reflect changes in our environment.

Graphics
52 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
A trusted and
affordable service
supporting
customers and
society
Thriving
environment
Key
enabler
Flexible, resilient
infrastructure and
service
Low carbon
sustainable
business
Securing the
future of
water
Future-ready
business
Likelihood
Principal
risk
Potential
exposure
1. Climate change
¿
M
2. Financial resilience
¿
M
3. Macroeconomic risks
¿
H
4. Failure to meet the peak demand
for water
¿
H
5. Strategic asset failure and major
operational incident
¿
H
6. Failure to deliver business plan
and meet regulatory outcomes
¿
H
7. Regulatory, environmental and
legal compliance
¿
H
8. Adverse policies or political
& social environment
¿
H
9. Security of assets, systems and data
¿
H
10.
Water quality incident
¿
M
11. Health, safety and wellbeing
¿
M
12. People and culture
¿
M
Link to our strategy
¿
11
¿
10
¿
1
¿
12
Low
Impact
High
¿
4
¿
5
¿
6
¿
7
¿
8
¿
9
¿
2
Potential
exposure risk
E
Key
Overview of our principal risks
The potential exposure indicator reflects our
assessment of the overall net risk exposure,
taking account of individual underlying risks in
our risk register. The colour of the risk on the
matrix indicates potential exposure. The risk
score shown in the diagram above reflect the
current pre-mitigation assessment of the risk.
¿
M
¿
H
¿
M
¿
L
Potential exposure Risk trend
Major ModerateHigh Low Increasing Stable Decreasing
p 
p
q
q
tu
Low
High
¿
3
Risk management and principal risks continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 53
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Overall assessment of our
principal risks
The categorisation of potential exposure to our
principal risks is comparable to that of 2023/24 but
with year-on-year movements in trends.
The financial resilience risk is stabilising. Our
liquidity position has improved following a first
equity injection of £75 million in December 2024,
and further £200 million of equity provided in
May 2025, bringing our gearing to c.65 per cent
at the beginning of the current regulatory period
(2025 to 2030). We have also retained investment
grade credit ratings. However, areas of uncertainty
remain, as the refinancing revolving credit facility
is still ongoing, and the outcome of the CMA
redetermination will not be known until the end
of the calendar year, at the earliest. A revised
regulatory settlement will only apply from the
second year of the current regulatory period.
Macroeconomic risks are stabilising with a relative
slowdown of inflation and four successive rate cuts
by the Bank of England. However, inflation remains
well above the Bank’s 2 per cent target without
sustained reduction in recent months. There are
also several factors of uncertainty, such as the
impact of tariffs or trade deals on the UK economy,
or tensions in the Middle East which could result in
pressure on costs including energy and chemicals.
The significant increase in investment in 2025 to
2030 across the water sector is likely to lead to
further pressure on our input costs.
Our assessment of Ofwat’s PR24 final determination
and Ofwat’s ongoing investigation into our supply
resilience is reflected in our assessment of risk
relating to the delivery of future business plan
outcomes and regulatory compliance.
We have prioritised short-term resilience investment
in 2020 to 2025 and our significant investment
programme in 2025 to 2030 will progressively
improve the resilience of our supply system against
extreme weather and reduce supply interruptions in
vulnerable parts of our system. The benefits of this
investment are reflected in a stable trend for the
most directly related risks relating to meeting peak
demand and major operational incident. These risks
are still assessed as high due to the unpredictability
of the impact of climate change in the short-term and
the risk of extreme weather before completion of our
programme of resilience investment over the next
five years.
The public and political scrutiny of the water
sector and the challenges faced by Thames Water
has continued to influence our political and social
environment, and a willingness to fund and invest in
the water sector.
The interim report of the Cunliffe Review has
presented an assessment of systemic issues in the
current regulatory regime and made suggestions
for change, to be detailed further in its final report,
currently expected in September 2025. It is assumed
that any potential suggestions, if implemented,
could alter conditions and enable companies
to improve their performance and services to
customers and society.
We have prioritised short-term
resilience investment in
2020 to 2025 and our
significant investment
programme in 2025 to 2030
“

Graphics
54 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
We have already been affected by more frequent
and severe weather exceeding climate projections.
Failure to adapt our infrastructure, improve its
resilience and reduce demand will result in service
disruptions, missing regulatory performance
targets, additional penalties and costs which could
affect financial resilience.
A failure to adapt or deliver our net zero
commitments would affect customer satisfaction
and cause reputational damage.
Our ability to invest in adaptation and mitigation
depends on the outcome of successive price
determinations and government and regulatory
policies (See risk 8 – adverse policies or political and
social environment).
Risk trend
▶  In 2022 and 2023, we experienced an
exceptional combination of severe weather
events driven by climate change (Storm
Eunice, drought, heatwaves, flooding) and a
freeze-thaw event which resulted in supply
interruptions.
▶  Met Office climate summaries show that the
UK’s climate is changing (the 10 warmest years
on record have occurred since 2002; 2022
was the UK’s warmest year on record). Severe
weather is already more likely but remains
unpredictable. It will become increasingly
frequent in the medium and long-term.
▶  Reports from the IPCC and the UN Environment
Programme conclude that emissions are not
reducing fast enough. The Paris goals are
unlikely to be met and there are concerns about
the potential effects of tipping points in the
climate system.
¿
M
p 
p
1. Climate change
Global warming will lead to hotter drier summers and wetter winters and to more frequent and severe
acute weather events (floods, storms, droughts and heatwaves). This will impact the quantity and quality
of water resources and disrupt our operations and our supply chain (e.g. electricity suppliers). This will
increase the likelihood and impact of our main operational risks.
Mitigation
▶  Our Water Resources Management Plan,
drought plan and long-term delivery strategy,
based on climate projections to determine the
most appropriate solutions to develop water
resources, improve the resilience of our supply
system and manage demand.
▶  A significant programme of investment in
resilience and water security in 2025 to 2030 to
continue in subsequent regulatory periods.
▶  A significant programme of environmental
schemes (e.g. managing the impact of our water
abstraction and improving the resilience of our
water resources to climate change).
▶  Scenario analysis for the assessment of
climate-related risks (TCFD) and adaptation
reports regularly updated.
▶  Greenhouse gas (GHG) emission reduction
targets supported by wind/solar (PPA) and
onsite solar generation.
Climate-related disclosures
Read more on our climate-related
disclosures on page 98.
Risk management and principal risks continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 55
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
2. Financial resilience
We have a significant ongoing funding requirement for our operational costs, capital programme and
to refinance maturing debt. We must maintain key ratios to comply with covenants in our agreements
with debt providers and credit rating agencies ratios. Failure to do this could lead to events of default,
restricting further borrowing and credit rating downgrade. This would affect our ability to raise funds.
Our licence requires us to maintain an investment
grade credit rating. Failure to do this would result in
cash lock up under our licence, restricting our ability
to pay dividends and impact our ability to raise funds
on favourable terms.
The outcome of successive price determinations
influences our financial resilience including allowed
return and the calibration of penalties and rewards
associated with performance commitments (See risk 8
– adverse policies or political and social environment).
Risk trend
▶  Following challenging operational conditions
(affecting operating costs and in-period ODI
penalties) and macro-economic conditions
between 2020 and 2025, additional equity of
£75 million in December 2024 and £200 million
in May 2025 has brought our gearing to c.65 per
cent, improving our financial resilience.
▶  Following credit rating agencies’ assessment
that the PR24 final determination increased
sector risk and the downgrade of the sector,
our current credit rating of BBB-/Baa3 remains
below the revised cash lock-up trigger in our
licence that came into effect on 1 April 2025.
▶  The PR24 final determination still represents
a significant financeability challenge due to a
low cost of capital and the risk of significant
in-period penalties. The outcome of our
appeal of Ofwat’s price determination before
the Competition and Markets Authority,
including with regard to allowed return and
financeability, is not yet known.
▶  Public and political scrutiny of the water
industry, including concerns relating to
investment in the sector exacerbated by the
difficulties experienced by Thames Water,
impact the confidence of investors and
potential lenders and our ability to raise debt
and future equity.
▶  The fact that the Cunliffe review is considering
how to restore the stability and predictability
of the regulatory system, which is necessary to
attract investors is a positive development.
Mitigation
▶  Continuous monitoring and regular reporting
to our board on compliance with our financial
covenants and on our credit rating. We
maintained compliance with our financial
covenants in 2024/25.
▶  Regular engagement with credit rating agencies
to understand how they will interpret the
position of water companies.
▶  Robust and comprehensive financeability
testing for our business plan, corporate plan
and annual budget and corporate plan updates,
and for our long-term viability statement.
▶  Requesting a redetermination of Ofwat’s PR24
final determination to achieve a regulatory
settlement that secures sufficient projected
cashflows to achieve Baa1 credit rating
thresholds for each year of the PR24 price
control period under core rating agency
methodologies and based on Ofwat’s notional
capital structure; and that the company would
be able to maintain target credit ratings at
least one notch above the minimum investment
grade (strong Baa2) based on its actual
capital structure.
¿
M
Long-term viability statement
Read more on our long-term viability
statement on page 118.
E
tu

Graphics
56 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Increases in our costs may be greater than the
increase in our wholesale revenue, which is indexed
on November CPIH, eroding financial resilience
and profitability.
Challenging economic conditions may negatively
affect revenue from our non-regulated activities
and the level of new connections and contributions
from housing developments.
Risk trend
▶  Inflation and interest rates have stabilised
but significant increase in investment in the
water sector, including our own investment
programme, and in other sectors could
potentially put pressure on input costs in
2025 to 2030.
▶  Cost-of-living challenges remain for domestic
and business customers.
▶  Our costs of supporting vulnerable household
customers will increase to mitigate the impact
of a significant increase in investment on bills in
2025 to 2030.
▶  Uncertainty in the water sector or associated
with global tensions and microeconomic
conditions may still impact our operating costs
(especially energy and chemical costs), and the
cost and availability of debt.
Mitigation
▶  A mix of long-term financing arrangements,
including fixed, variable and index-linked
interest rates and partial refinancing,
facilitated by recent additional equity
(totalling £275 million).
▶  Monitoring the impact of macroeconomic
factors on our business and on our
credit ratings.
▶  Robust and challenging budgeting process to
ensure clearly identified and controlled costs
during the financial year.
▶  Effective debt collection processes and
support to our most vulnerable customers
(with significantly expanded social tariff and
affordability initiatives in 2025 to 2030) to
improve the business’s cash position.
▶  Long-term pension strategy, implemented in
consultation with the Pension Trustees, that has
delivered the full insurance buy-out of one of
our defined benefit schemes and the buy-in of
the other as a first step towards a full buy-out.
3. Macroeconomic risks
Increases in our input costs and cost of debt due to inflation and rising interest rates make delivering our
services and investment within our totex allowance more challenging.
tu
E
¿
H
Risk management and principal risks continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 57
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
These incidents lead to additional production and
distribution costs, compensation payments to
customers, and ODI penalties for exceeding our
targets on supply interruption and under the metric
for customer experience (C-MeX) and leakage.
Our supply area is an area of serious water stress
and densely populated. Restrictions on water
abstraction to protect the environment and the
effects of climate change on the availability and
quality of raw water will result in additional stress on
the water resources needed to meet demand from
a growing population. This may also lead to higher
risks of over abstraction and related prosecution
and fines.
Risk trend
▶  Changes in consumption patterns since the
Covid-19 pandemic allied with population
growth continue to result in higher peak
demand. When exacerbated by severe weather,
high demands can cause supply interruptions
especially in some parts of our Eastern region.
▶  The weather we have experienced was more
frequent and severe than anticipated even
under high emission scenarios. There is
therefore significant uncertainty about the
impact of climate change in the short-term and
weather variability remains unpredictable.
▶  Due to the increasing likelihood but
unpredictability of severe weather, and even
after completion of the short-term investment
we prioritised in the past few years, the risk
of high demand events in certain parts of
our network will remain until delivery of our
2025 to 2030 resilience investment which will
progressively improve the mitigation of
this risk.
Mitigation
▶  Bringing forward and prioritising investment
to restore resilience in the parts of our supply
system that are most under stress including
15 new resilience schemes and 2 accelerated
PR24 schemes for a total of £18.9 million.
▶  Investment planning that addresses the specific
characteristics and challenges of our regions,
a significant increase in resilience investment
in our business plan for 2025 to 2030 and our
decision to request a redetermination of the
PR24 final determination to protect water
security especially in our Eastern region.
▶  Our water resources management plan which
defines investment in future water resources
and production capacity. Our drought plan,
including clear steps for managing demand and
securing resources in drought conditions.
▶  Reducing demand through metering, with
90 per cent of properties already metered.
Increasing our preparedness to meet summer
demand and updated communication plans
to alert customers on the need to use water
responsibly during peak periods.
▶  Working with regulators to ensure the
regulatory regime addresses local resilience
issues including through the development of
forward-looking resilience standards.
▶  Mitigations relating to risk 5 (Strategic asset
failure and major operational incident) also
relate to the management of this risk.
4. Failure to meet the peak demand for water
Dry weather and prolonged periods of high temperatures may lead to peaks in demand that could exceed
our ability to produce and distribute enough water in certain parts of our supply system. Freeze-thaw
events can also result in sudden surges in leakage on our pipes and customers’ with similar effects.
¿
H
tu

Graphics
58 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
¿
H
We also rely on other utilities, especially electricity
providers, to operate our facilities. Repeated blips or
prolonged electricity outages can have a significant
impact on our operations. These incidents lead
to additional costs, compensation payments to
customers, and ODI penalties for exceeding our
targets on supply interruption and under the metric
for customer experience (C-MeX). They may also
lead to liabilities to third parties due to damage to
their equipment.
We must ensure that our response to incidents
always puts the safety of our workforce first.
Risk trend
▶  The general condition of our assets is stable,
but some areas of our network remain more
vulnerable to supply interruptions during
operational incidents.
▶  The increasing likelihood of severe weather, and
frequency of named storms (e.g. Storm Eunice
2022) can result in widespread and repeated
electricity outages.
▶  Repairs and construction of alternative storage
and a temporary WTW following the loss of a
major service reservoir in Aylesford, bringing
forward and prioritising investment to improve
resilience in the parts of our supply system
that are most under stress, the completion of a
new water treatment work in Kent in 2025, and
additional tankers are improving the mitigation
of this risk.
Mitigation
▶  Dedicated role for the management of bottled
water distributions, preparation of plans
for emergency supplies to critical sites (e.g.
hospitals), increasing our incident response
capacity to deal with incidents affecting up
to 100,000 customers (from 30,000), and
improving real-time customer communication.
▶  Significant investment in resilience planned
in 2025 to 2030 and our decision to request
a redetermination of the PR24 final
determination to protect water security.
▶  Planned maintenance scheduled to achieve
minimum outages during peak times.
▶  Pre-emptive management of weather-related
operational challenges based on weather
forecasts, network modelling capability to
manage incidents, and emergency plans
and procedures regularly tested and
independently audited.
▶  Formal lessons learned process followed after
each significant incident. Implementation of
action plans to improve our readiness, resilience
and response capabilities.
▶  Resilience maturity assessment, improved
horizon scanning and adaptation to climate
change. Mitigation of key low likelihood but
high impact risks (including for critical sites),
risk-based prioritisation of maintenance with
customer impact a primary consideration.
5. Strategic asset failure and
major operational incident
Strategic asset failures and major operational incidents may cause unplanned outages that affect our
ability to deliver a safe and uninterrupted water supply to a large number of customers. These risks may
affect our own water infrastructure or those of other water companies who provide us with a bulk supply
of treated water.
tu
Risk management and principal risks continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 59
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
¿
H
Imbalances between allowed expenditure and
investment, risks and regulatory penalties can make
it challenging for us to deliver our business plans and
meet regulatory outcomes.
We must efficiently deliver the investment necessary
to maintain and improve our services to customers
and to meet our future long-term obligations.
The risks affecting our investment delivery are
internal and external. Internal risks relate to the
management of the programme delivery. External
risks include extreme weather conditions, incidents
affecting works, supply chain risks or significant
events affecting the economy.
6. Failure to deliver business plan
and meet regulatory outcomes
There are financial and reputational risks associated with a failure to deliver our business plan commitments.
Our position at the next price determination may also be impacted.
p 
p
Risk trend
▶  The period from 2020 to 2025, has seen a
challenging PR19 price determination and
unprecedented operational events due to
changes in water usage post Covid-19 in our
supply area and extreme weather between 2020
and 2023 resulting in high costs, significant
ODI penalties and liquidity challenges. We took
significant actions to strengthen resilience,
reprioritising investment and introducing new
schemes and actions. This has meant exceeding
our expenditure allowance.
▶  In our view, in its current form, the Final
Determination does not adequately address
our company-specific circumstances and
external challenges and undermines our plans
to improve operational resilience now and in the
future. We do not consider that the AMP 8 Final
Determination provides the right foundations
for the long-term investability of the water
sector. As such, we have reflected on whether it
leaves a funding gap.
▶  Moody’s has assessed our PR24 final
determination was “one of the most challenging
determinations in the sector for AMP 8.
Mitigation
▶  Detailed processes to ensure we operate
within the price determination parameters
(including ODIs and investment) and to
ensure we plan and deliver projects on time
and budget.
▶  Review project scopes and planned
efficiencies with our engineering partner.
Involving our framework contractors early to
identify risks and savings opportunities.
▶  Steering groups monitor key measures
e.g. interruption, water quality, customer
services, customer perception and leakage,
and implementation of resilience actions.
▶  Processes to continuously monitor and report
regularly on our compliance with regulatory
obligations at senior management and board
levels and corrective actions taken.
▶  Our decision to request a redetermination of
the PR24 final determination to protect water
security, restore the balance between risk and
return and ensure financeability
and investability.
▶  Mitigations relating to risks 4 (Failure to meet
the peak demand for water) and 5 (Strategic
asset failure and major operational incident)
also relate to the management of this risk.

Graphics
60 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
¿
H
Failure to ensure compliance with regulatory,
environmental, and other legal requirements may
lead to regulatory enforcement actions, business
disruption, loss of management time, and to criminal
or civil liability.
Material failure to comply with our licence
obligations and duties as a water undertaker may
result in an enforcement order and a fine of up to 10
per cent of appointed turnover. Persistent material
non-compliance could ultimately lead to special
administration and the revocation of our licence.
Underperformance or failure to comply with our
obligations damages the perception of South East
Water by customers, regulators, and stakeholders.
Risk trend
▶  Our supply resilience and performance
against regulatory target, especially on supply
interruptions, has been adversely impacted by
high demand events between 2020 and 2023.
This has led Ofwat to open an investigation in
November 2023 into our supply resilience which
is still ongoing.
▶  Increasing public and political scrutiny of the
sector influences regulation and regulators’
enforcement practices and has led to the
introduction of additional obligations under
the Water (Special Measures) Act 2025 and
associated rules.
▶  There is greater scrutiny of environmental
performance, with more stringent enforcement
of abstraction licences, discharge consents and
other environmental permits.
▶  The Environment Act 2021 introduces long-
term binding environmental targets for air
quality, water, biodiversity, and resource
efficiency/waste reduction and environmental
principles. There is an increasing expectation
on us to widen our environmental programme
beyond what had previously been deemed to be
the core responsibility of water companies.
Mitigation
▶  Long-term planning to define the investment
in our water supply system necessary to meet
our future challenges and maintain or
improve performance.
▶  Policies, processes and controls to ensure we
meet our duties and obligations. Enhanced
emergency plans and procedures for managing
incidents of greater scale (i.e. affecting up to
100,000 customers) and implementation of
improvement plans to address lessons learned.
▶  Subject matter experts available to advise
colleagues and inform them of changes in
requirements and recommend
process improvements.
▶  Review processes to reflect changes to relevant
market arrangements, rules and guidance;
performance monitoring against market
metrics and implementation of improvement
action plans.
▶  Internal processes and external assurance to
ensure reporting accuracy and mitigating
risks of incorrect reporting (company
monitoring framework).
▶  A culture of integrity and transparency,
supported by a clear whistleblowing process.
Regulatory mandatory awareness training for
key compliance issues e.g. anti-bribery and data
protection. Regular updates to the audit and risk
committee and to the board on these matters.
▶  Mitigations relating to risks 4 (Failure to meet
the peak demand for water) and 5 (Strategic
asset failure and major operational incident)
also relate to the management of this risk.
7. Regulatory, environmental,
and legal compliance
Our main regulators – Ofwat, the Drinking Water Inspectorate (DWI), the Environment Agency, Natural
England and CCW – set standards and monitor our compliance.
p 
p
Risk management and principal risks continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 61
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
¿
H
There is a risk that Ofwat’s assessment of the amount
and timing of expenditure may differ from ours at price
reviews. This could result in investment underfunding,
assumptions on base costs and efficiency that do not
fully recognise actual cost pressures, and incorrectly
calibrated performance penalties. This may make
it more challenging to maintain performance
in the short-term and contribute to delays in
implementing the solutions required to meet our
long-term challenges. Unfavourable price reviews and
regulatory mechanisms, and political scrutiny of the
sector reduce the confidence of investors and debt
providers. It can also make it harder for us to raise
equity and access debt financing on favourable terms.
The implementation of supportive and aligned
policies by different regulators and policy makers
is crucial to help us deliver cost-effective solutions
and achieve our outcomes.
We are also exposed to risks from the social and
political environment, such as the challenges to the
ownership model of water companies, and reputational
challenges associated with the scrutiny of the
sewerage sector, and the difficulties experienced by
Thames Water which impact the whole water sector.
Risk trend
▶  PR19 was challenging for the sector. As almost
all other companies, we have spent more
than our allowance and incurred significant
performance penalties. Ofwat’s PR24 final
determination did not either adequately
address our company-specific circumstances
and external challenges.
▶  Reliance on significant demand reduction, in
accordance with water resources planning
guidance, will require supportive government
policies and may require us to bring forward
alternative options if the assumed reductions
cannot be achieved in practice. Reductions in
leakage will require significant investment and
operating expenditure.
▶  The extent and timing of restrictions on water
abstraction to protect the environment, can
present significant challenges to water security
if they do not take account of the cost and
delivery time required to develop alternative
sources, the necessary network infrastructure
and interconnectivity.
▶  The interim report of the Cunliffe Review
has presented an assessment of systemic
issues in the current regulatory regime and
made suggestions for change, to be detailed
further in its final report, currently expected
in September 2025. It is assumed that the
changes, if implemented, could alter
conditions and enable companies to improve
their performance and services to customers
and society.
▶  The recommendations of the Cunliffe Review
to reduce the complexity of price reviews
and ensure that Ofwat takes account of
the specific characteristics of companies
in its determination with less reliance on
econometric models, to develop asset
health and resilience standards and adopt
a supervisory approach that supports
improvements where necessary have the
potential to improve the economic regulation of
the sector leading to improved performance.
Mitigation
▶  A long-term delivery strategy and business plan
that demonstrates to our regulator the need to
invest regularly in enhancing resilience to match
the specific characteristics and challenges of
each of our regions (West, Sussex and Kent) as
necessary to maintain or improve service levels,
and our decision to request a redetermination
of Ofwat’s PR24 final determination to protect
water security.
▶  Working with regulators to address local
resilience issues appropriately in the WRMP and
business plan and to develop forward-looking
resilience standards.
▶  Working with the industry and stakeholders
to contribute to the definition of policies,
anticipate the potential effects of proposals,
and ensure we identify and consider risks.
▶  Keeping our commercial strategy and our
business structure under review to deliver
efficiencies, adapt to changes and take
advantage of new opportunities.
8. Adverse policies or political
& social environment
Successive price reviews substantially determine our ability to make the investment necessary to maintain
an efficient and resilient water supply system and prepare to meet our future challenges.
p 
p

Graphics
62 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
¿
H
We increasingly rely on information and communication
technology to manage our operations, and any
downtime or cyber-attack potentially affects all
aspects of our business.
We must keep customers’ data up-to-date and safe
from unauthorised access. Security or data breaches
can disrupt our operations and may lead to fines,
enforcement actions and legal actions. They would
also cause significant reputational damage.
We must ensure compliance with the requirements
of the General Data Protection Regulation as
retained in the UK (UK GDPR) and the Network and
Information Systems Regulations 2018.
Risk trend
▶  We maintain this risk as high due to the
constant emergence of new cyber threats
and the risk of exploitation of vulnerabilities
that may not have yet been fixed by software
providers. There is also an increase in cyber-
attacks using AI which can more easily be
deployed at larger scales.
▶  The overall level of alert relating to potential
cyber-attacks on the company and other
utilities, e.g. electricity companies has been
elevated since Russia’s invasion of Ukraine.
▶  Physical security and the risk of theft or
other interference with our assets remains a
constant risk.
▶  Our reliance on information and communication
technology will increase as we implement smart
networks and smart meters.
Mitigation
▶  Recognised cyber security certifications and
investment in security measures against
unauthorised access to our systems and in
software to help us monitor activity on our
network and adapt our defences to new threats.
▶  Disaster recovery systems and facilities which
are regularly tested.
▶  Work with relevant external organisations to
test the effectiveness of our resilience and
security measures. Review the maturity of our
security systems and procedures, including
under NIS.
▶  Our corporate security steering group
continuously monitors physical and data
security and data protection matters to identify
new risks and monitor the effectiveness of our
security processes and the implementation of
action plans.
▶  Department champions receive training on
these issues, and we continuously promote
awareness of risks and provide training to
highlight how unsafe behaviour could be
exploited by external threats.
9. Security of assets, systems, and data
We must protect our sites and our water supply against accidental or deliberate security threats.
The physical security of our assets and the resilience of our information and communication infrastructure
is essential to maintaining our service and implementing our business continuity plans.
p 
p
Risk management and principal risks continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 63
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Water quality events may lead to significant costs
being incurred, impacting our revenue and resulting
in penalties for failing to meet relevant performance
commitments. This may also result in investigations
and enforcement actions and potential prosecutions
from the DWI.
Risk trend
▶  Our water quality performance has remained
good throughout the 2020 to 2025 regulatory
period including under new metrics introduced
in 2020 (Compliance Risks Index and Event
Risk Index).
Mitigation
▶  World Health Organization (WHO) water
safety plan. Round the clock monitoring of our
treatment works and distribution network.
▶  Extensive sampling of our water every
day; analysed at our specialised laboratory
audited and accredited by the UK’s national
accreditation body, UKAS.
▶  Emergency plans and procedures for managing
incidents, providing supplies to critical
facilities, and deploying alternative supplies
where necessary.
▶  Active management of catchments and
partnerships to reduce chemical discharges
by third parties.
▶  Programme of flushing, network management
and investment in our treatment works to meet
our water quality standards.
▶  Regular internal review of our processes and
facilities and external audits by the DWI.
▶  Sharing of lessons learned with other
companies, which we use to update and improve
our own practices and procedures.
10. Water quality incident
Our core purpose and most essential duty is to provide a supply of safe and high-quality drinking water.
A water quality incident could lead to a failure to supply wholesome water with implications for public
health. This would significantly harm customer trust. Our treatment works may be impacted by significant
deterioration in raw water quality, pollution by third parties or a failure of our own treatment processes.
Water quality risks relate to our own water supplies and to bulk supplies of treated water we receive from
other water companies.
tu
¿
M

Graphics
64 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Failure to prevent accidents could have tragic
implications for individuals and their families. There
are severe criminal sanctions and civil sanctions for
failing to have appropriate safety measures and
failure to meet health and safety standards.
Risk trend
▶  The underlying risks to health and safety are
stable with a strong safety culture. The health
and safety of our colleagues is our number
one priority.
▶  In 2024/25, there were two RIDDOR injuries
and a lost time injury frequency rate (LTIFR) of
4.4 against a target of 5.
▶  We need to ensure high standards of HSE are
maintained across a more extensive programme
of activity.
Mitigation
▶  Directors review health and safety performance
at each board meeting. Executive team
meetings include regular reviews too.
▶  Our annual incentive plan (AIP) and our senior
managers bonus scheme include health and
safety metrics.
▶  Our Thrive 365! safety strategy supports the
company vision and provides a clear direction
and roadmap for continuous improvement of
our health, safety, and wellbeing performance.
▶  We have comprehensive health and safety
processes, including policies, standard
operating procedures, risk assessments and
toolbox talks involving our employees, partners,
and contractors. There are also a comprehensive
audit programme and systematic reviews of
near misses at panel reviews.
▶  Health & Safety committee monitoring
of the effectiveness of health and safety
practices, policies, procedures, training, and
communication encouraging participation
of employees to raise issues and monitor the
progress of actions.
▶  Joint working groups and other forms of
co-ordination and cooperation with our key
contractors on health and safety to ensure
the highest standards of safety for our entire
workforce (directly and indirectly employed)
and for exchange of best practice and alerts on
potential risks.
▶  Managers receive a monthly manager toolkit,
health and safety briefings and core briefing
slides to encourage dialogue.
▶  Regular training and awareness campaigns to
ensure our employees and contractors always
adopt safe practices.
▶  A dynamic wellbeing and mental health strategy
with 27 Wellbeing Champions and 39 Mental
Health First Aiders.
11. Health, safety, and wellbeing
Safe in Every Way is a key principle of our culture. Our activities and assets present risks to the health and
safety of our employees, contractors, and the public. We must maintain the safety of our workforce during
normal operations and when dealing with emergencies.
tu
E
¿
M
Risk management and principal risks continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 65
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
We must also retain our business know-how. This
presents a challenge in operational areas where
our workforce is more mature and where business
knowledge may have been acquired over many years
in the field. We also rely on key individuals who have
acquired detailed technical and company knowledge.
Therefore, we must manage succession planning to
avoid disruption to the business.
As the expectations of customers, stakeholders and
employees change, we need to promote a culture
that meets those aspirations.
Risk trend
▶  In a tight job market, there are challenges to
attract and retain staff in certain technical and
skilled areas.
▶  The significant increase in our investment
programme during the next AMP means that
we need to increase resources in investment
delivery functions, such as engineering and
asset management, and ensure we attract the
required skills.
▶  The negative perception of the water sector,
linked to considerable media and political
scrutiny and criticism, is likely to impact on
recruitment and retention.
▶  We need to accommodate changing
expectations and changes in legislation
about flexible working arrangements, while
maintaining the cohesiveness and effectiveness
of our organisation.
Mitigation
▶  Our people plan sets out our strategy, including
our strategy on diversity, talent management,
succession planning, and the gender pay gap.
▶  New resource and improvements to our
recruitment process and continuous
development of our successful apprenticeship
scheme across the whole business to facilitate
recruitment, career progression, retention and
contribute to social mobility.
▶  Regular workforce engagement through our
Staff Council, pulse surveys and bi-annual staff
surveys, followed by action plans shared and
implemented with staff support.
▶  Our Speak Up (whistleblowing) Policy allows
colleagues to raise concerns to be investigated,
as appropriate.
▶  Designated independent non-executive director
for employee engagement, giving employees
direct opportunities to share opinions and voice
any concerns directly to the board.
12. People and culture
Our business operates across the entire value chain within a highly regulated and technical environment,
and we rely on our workforce’ skills, technical and business knowledge in a wide range of disciplines.
We need to attract and develop our people and manage talent to achieve our business objectives.
A shortage of skills in some technical disciplines may make it harder to recruit and meet our requirements.
With increasing reliance on technology, we must promote and develop new skills that support our use of
technology and innovation.
¿
M
E
tu

Graphics
66 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Business performance
Operational performance
Ofwat has set out a group of ‘common’ performance measures that it wants all water companies to report
against. In addition to these performance measures, we have developed an additional group of performance
indicators through asking our customers what they feel we should target. While it is important to remember
that no measure can ever capture everything, these metrics reflect the most important aspects of the
service that we provide. If we can perform well against these targets, we will be providing a good service
to all our customers, both current and future. We are always mindful that, as well as being providers of an
essential service, we are also the custodians of a public asset (the water infrastructure).
These targets are referred to as ‘performance commitments’ (PCs).
The following table sets out what these measures are and why they are important.
Performance measures
All the measures in the first table have financial incentives attached to them (also known as Outcome
Delivery incentives or ODIs).
Measure Purpose
Supply interruptions We aim to provide clean, safe water to 2.3 million customers, 24 hours, 365 days of the year.
This measure captures the rare occasions on which supplies are interrupted. Our objective
is to minimise these interruptions.
Mains repairs The number of repairs which we have to carry out on the network is an indicator of the
general health of the network, and this measure should be understood as a measure to
ensure that the health of the network is being maintained. If we keep below our target
(based on number of bursts per 1,000km of main), it shows that the network is being kept
in a good condition for future generations.
CRI The CRI is a measure of water quality compliance. The perfect score is a 0, and our objective
is to keep this as low as possible. It should be noted that in addition to this measure there
is a very strict legal framework, which includes the potential for prosecution if water is
supplied that threatens human health.
Unplanned outage This measures the frequency with which above ground assets (mostly treatment works and
pumps) are out of action. This is also an ‘asset health’ measure. Keeping this low indicates
that these assets are being kept in good health for future generations.
PCC This is a measure of the amount of water consumed by each person in our supply area
(Per Capita Consumption). If we do a good job helping customers to consume water more
efficiently we will reduce the amount consumed and do well on this measure.
Leakage All water networks have distribution losses. We can minimise leakage by keeping the
network in a good condition, by fixing leaks quickly when obvious leaks occur; and by
having effective systems and processes to identify and repair the many smaller leaks that
are not immediately identifiable.
C-MeX This is a comparative measure of customer experience performance designed by Ofwat.
It is based on sample surveys, where a third party specialist company contacts a sample of
customers and asks them about their experience of our service.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 67
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Measure Purpose
D-MeX This is a comparative measure of customer experience performance designed by Ofwat,
which targets developer services customers. Developer services are about connecting
newly built properties to our network. It is based on sample surveys, where a third party
specialist company contacts housing developers who are using our connections service
and asks them about their experience of our service.
AIM The Abstraction Incentive Mechanism is a compound measure that measures how much
water we extract during times of water shortage. This is designed to give us an incentive
not to extract raw water from the environment in a way that might lead to low flows in
rivers and streams.
Appearance of water This is a measure of how many contacts we get from customers to tell us that there is an
issue with the appearance of their water (discolouration). These incidents do not represent
a threat to human health.
Taste and odour of
water
This is a measure of how many contacts we get from customers to tell us that there is an
issue with the taste or odour of their water. These incidents do not represent a threat to
human health.
Properties at risk of
low pressure
This is a measure of how many properties on our network are at risk of receiving low pressure
during times of high demand. Usually such properties are at the end of the network or at
the top of a hill.
Household voids This is a measure of how many properties are empty. If a high number of properties are
empty, then other customers have to pay more to compensate. This measure incentivises
us to keep that number to a minimum by keeping accurate records. A small number of
properties are genuinely empty.
Non-household voids This is a measure of how many business and commercial properties are empty. If a high
number of properties are empty, then other customers have to pay more to compensate.
This measure incentivises us to keep that number to a minimum by keeping accurate
records. There is always a proportion of commercial property that is empty, but this has
increased during the Covid-19 crisis and we are suggesting to Ofwat that this measure
should be adjusted to compensate.
WINEP The Water Industry National Environment Programme is a series of projects designed to
protect and enhance the natural environment. This measures whether or not we deliver
those projects on time.
Engaging and working
with land owners
This measure is designed to protect our raw water resources. By working with land owners
we seek to prevent raw water from being contaminated with chemicals which would
require costly and environmentally inefficient treatment. This is known as ‘catchment
management’ and the incentive is based on the hectarage of land that we applied
catchment management policies to.
Protecting wildlife and
increasing biodiversity
This measures the hectarage of land which we proactively manage and monitor in order to
produce gains in biodiversity through our conservation work.
Sites protected from
flooding
This measures the number of sites that the company has protected against a one in
1,000 flood risk. Although customers will not notice any effect of this work immediately,
its completion will mean that customers are receiving a much more resilient service.

Graphics
68 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Operational performance continued
The rest of the Performance Commitments do not have ODIs attached to them. For ease of reference, they
are grouped into three separate tables below.
Customer satisfaction measures
We have seven measures of customer satisfaction. They are designed to remind us that what we really want
to achieve is customer satisfaction, not just good service levels and metric performance.
If the metrics are well chosen, they will automatically achieve customer satisfaction as they measure the
things that customers care about. However, this is not automatic, especially in a rapidly changing world in
which these performance metrics are only changed once every five years. We therefore think there is value
in measuring customer satisfaction directly.
Measures relating to vulnerable customers
As a company which operates a natural monopoly we have an unusual public service responsibility to
make sure that we take care of vulnerable, or potentially vulnerable, customers within our customer base.
The following measures are designed to measure how effectively we do that:
Measure Purpose
Customer satisfaction
by segment (measures)
This measure is divided into six customer segments. The purpose of these different
segments is to remind us that water customers are not all the same. Different people have
different needs and priorities. This measure therefore identifies the satisfaction levels of
six different groups based on research of our customer base: ‘mindful optimists’; ‘global
advocates’; ‘Just me and mine’; ‘careful neighbours’; ‘busy juggler’; and ‘living for today’.
Value for money This is a measure of customers satisfaction measured via a survey.
Measure Purpose
Satisfaction of
household customers
who are experiencing
payment difficulties
This measure targets a specific group. It measures (via a customer survey) the satisfaction
levels of customers who are finding it hard to pay their bills. This is a group of vulnerable,
or potentially vulnerable people and we need to interact with them with particular care
and empathy.
Satisfaction of
household customers
who are receiving,
or applying for,
non-financial support
This is another measure that is designed to make sure that we pay particular attention to a
group of potentially vulnerable customers. In this case, customers who are on, or applying
to be on our Priority Services Register. Customers can be on this register for a variety of
reasons such as age, health, or disability. Such customers can be prioritised for additional
support in certain circumstances, such as the delivery of bottled water to their homes in
the case of an interruption.
Satisfaction of
household customers
on our vulnerability
schemes during a
supply interruption
This measure is another survey measured metric which specifically measures the
satisfaction of customers on the Priority Services Register with the services that they
receive during a supply interruption. This is designed to measure how well we protect this
vulnerable group during supply interruptions.
Business performance continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 69
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Measures relating to vulnerable customers continued
Other performance measures
Measure Purpose
Gap sites
Gap sites are properties that exist, but are not included in our billing system. Such properties
receive free water at the expense of other customers. This metric incentivises us to find
those properties and add them to our system.
Risk of severe
restrictions in a drought
This is a measure of the percentage of our customers who are exposed to the risk of severe
restrictions during a drought period. Severe restrictions means discontinuity in supply, not
just hosepipe restrictions. Our target is nil.
ERI (Event Risk Index)
This is a composite measure produced by the Drinking Water Inspectorate (DWI). It measures
the risk to customers of water quality events and incentivises us to reduce the risk of
such events.
Delivery of Water
Industry Environment
Programme
requirements (WINEP)
This is a simple measure of whether we have ‘met’ or ‘not met’ all of these requirements.
Greenhouse gas
emissions
This measure commits us to achieving an 80 per cent reduction in greenhouse gas
emissions by 2025 (compared to 2017/18). We have a further commitment to achieve
net zero emissions by 2030. This will reduce and then eliminate the carbon footprint of
our operations.
Engaging and working
with abstractors to
improve catchment
resilience to low flows
This metric encourages us to engage with other abstractors of water (mostly farmers)
to help them find ways to reduce their water use and to thereby help avoid low flows in
the environment. This specifically measures the percentage of a target list that we have
engaged with. The target list is produced in conjunction with the Environment Agency.
Measure Purpose
Household customers
receiving financial
support
This is a measure of the number of customers that are receiving financial support in the
form of bill control or bill reductions. Such reductions are offered to vulnerable customers
and this measure tracks our performance in ensuring that these customers are supported.
Satisfaction of
stakeholders in relation
to assistance offered
This is a measure (based on surveys) of the satisfaction of vulnerable customers and
their representatives.
Priority Services for
customers in vulnerable
circumstances – Reach
This is a measure of the percentage of overall households which appear on our Priority
Services Register. Vulnerable customers can be hard to identify and this metric measures
our effectiveness at reaching out to them.
Priority Services for
customers in vulnerable
circumstances –
Attempted contact
and actual contact
This measures the percentage of customers on our Priority Services Register that we
have attempted to contact over a two year period. This is a measure of how effective our
proactive contact with these customers is. The actual contact part of the metric measures
how many of those customers we have actually made contact with.
Customers can also visit the website discoverwater.co.uk which gives everyone access to comparative
information on the performance of water companies. We believe this is an important tool which enables
customers and stakeholders, in particular our Customer Challenge Group, to compare the progress against
our targets with other water companies to ensure we are striving for continuous improvement and stretching
ourselves to provide the best possible service.

Graphics
70 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Other performance measures continued
The following table shows all of our Performance Commitments, the targets for 2024/25 and the incentives
or penalties earned. Overall, there is a net penalty of £12.8 million (including an estimate of penalties under
C-MeX and D-MeX), compared to a net penalty of £8.5 million in 2023/24 (including the final C-MeX and
D-MeX figures as assessed by Ofwat). Also excluding PCC and Business voids as at the time Ofwat had not
determined these impacts.
In our Final Determination in December Ofwat stated that we have to pay the penalty accrued for Business
Voids and they applied a reduction to our accrued PCC penalty. For this year we have had to submit what
our penalty would be under the per-reduction methodology. These figures are included in the figure above
and the table below. We will be asking Ofwat to review our PCC penalty to bring it in line with the Final
Determination methodology.
The net penalty will be returned to customers in the form of bill reductions in the 2025 to 2030 years.
Performance Commitment Unit
Target in
2024/25
Actual
performance
in 2024/25
Penalty or
Reward (£m)
■
Leakage % reduction 9.7 -8.0 (8.278)
■
Mains repairs Per 1,000km of main 1 164.3 138.2 0.000
■ CRI Score 0 1.09 0.000
■
Unplanned outage % 2.34 2.1 0.000
■
PCC % reduction 7.2 1.0 (1.251)
■
Supply interruptions Min : Sec 00:05:00 00:44:06 (3.373)
C-MeX* Score out of 100 N/A 71.82 (0.388)
D-MeX* Score out of 100 N/A 83.56 (0.634)
■
AIM ML/d 0 -153 0.000
■
Appearance of water Per 10,000 population 0.79 0.92 (0.289)
■
Taste and odour of water Per 10,000 population 0.29 0.36 (0.056)
■
Properties at risk of low pressure Per 10,000 population 0.5 1.9 (0.120)
■
Household voids % 2.1 1.73 0.315
■
Non-Household voids % 8.1 9.47 (0.459)
■
WINEP Schemes 65 58 (0.455)
■ Engaging and working with land owners Hectares 14,217 15,097.6 0.386
■
Protecting wildlife and increasing biodiversity
Hectares 1,460 1,673.0 1.266
■
Sites protected from flooding Number of sites 92 59 (0.024)
■
Strategic main Wellwood to Potters Corner % delivered 0 69 0.597
■
Customer satisfaction by segment 1
– ‘mindful optimists’
Score out of 5 4.5 3.7 **
■
Customer satisfaction by segment 2
– ‘global advocates’
Score out of 5 4.5 3.9 **
■
Customer satisfaction by segment 3
– ‘just me and mine’
Score out of 5 4.5 3.9 **
Business performance continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 71
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
For further information on all of our outcomes and targets please refer to our performance, people
and planet report at performance.southeastwater.co.uk and our annual performance report at
southeastwater.co.uk/about/resources/publications/financial-reports
Performance Commitment Unit
Target in
2024/25
Actual
performance
in 2024/25
Penalty or
Reward (£m)
■
Customer satisfaction by segment 4
– ‘careful neighbours’
Score out of 5 4.5 4.1 **
■
Customer satisfaction by segment 5
– ‘busy juggler’
Score out of 5 4.5 4.0 **
■
Customer satisfaction by segment 6
– ‘living for today
Score out of 5 4.5 3.7 **
■
Value for money Score out of 5 4.0 3.4 **
■
Satisfaction of household customers who are
experiencing payment difficulties
Score out of 5 4.5 4.3 **
■
Satisfaction of household customers who are
receiving, or applying for, non-financial support
Score out of 5 4.5 4.1 **
■
Satisfaction of household customers on our
vulnerability schemes during a supply interruption
Score out of 5 4.1 3.5 **
■
Household customers receiving financial support Number 75,000 72,397 **
■
Satisfaction of stakeholders in relation to
assistance offered
Score out of 5 4.0 3.5 **
■ Priority Services for customers in vulnerable
circumstances – Reach
% 10.8 14.1 **
■
Priority Services for customers in vulnerable
circumstances – Actual Contact
% 35 38.9 **
■
Priority Services for customers in vulnerable
circumstances – Attempted Contact
% 90 90.5 **
■
Gap sites Number of sites 25 40 **
■
Risk of severe restrictions in a drought % 0 17.8 **
■
ERI (Event Risk Index) Score 0 28.1 **
■
Delivery of Water Industry Environment
Programme requirements (WINEP)
Met/Not Met Met Not Met **
■
Greenhouse gas emissions kgCO
2
e/MI 57.6 198.3 **
■
Engaging and working with abstractors to improve
catchment resilience to low flows
% 20 38 **
* These are relative measures and because of Ofwat’s processes, the penalty and reward numbers will not be completely
finalised at the time of publication. (estimates are shown).
** Measures are reputational (i.e. no financial penalty)
■
Target met
■
Target not met

Graphics
72 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Group structure and financing
Group structure
South East Water Limited is the main operating
company in the group of companies headed by
HDF (UK) Holdings Limited (“HDF”). There are two
intermediate holding companies between South
East Water and HDF: South East Water (Holdings)
Limited and Hastings Water (UK) Limited, both
of which, together with HDF, are registered and
resident in the UK.
The ultimate owners of HDF are Utilities of Australia
Pty Ltd (as Trustee of Utilities Trust of Australia),
NatWest Pension Trustee Ltd as trustee for the
NatWest Group Pension Fund (Main Fund Section)
and three entities of the Desjardins cooperative
financial group based in Quebec (Régime de Rentes
du Mouvement Desjardins, Desjardins Financial
Security Life Assurance Company and Certas Home
and Auto Insurance Company).
Group of
companies
Recent debt financing has been arranged directly
through South East Water Limited. Historically,
debt financing of South East Water has been
arranged through our only subsidiary, South East
Water (Finance) Limited. South East Water (Finance)
Limited is a company registered in the Cayman
Islands but does not gain any tax benefit from this as
the company is resident for tax purposes in the UK.
The only further external debt finance in the HDF
group is shareholder loans, which are issued by HDF
(UK) Holdings Limited.
100% shareholding
25%
shareholding
25%
shareholding
50%
shareholding
HDF (UK) Holdings Limited
Hastings Water (UK) Limited
South East Water (Holdings) Limited
South East Water Limited
South East Water (Finance) Limited
100% shareholding
100% shareholding
100% shareholding
Natwest
Pension Trustee Ltd
(as Trustee for
Natwest Group
Pension Fund)
Utilities of
Australia Pty Ltd
(as Trustee of Utilities
Trust of Australia)
UTA International
Holdings 1 Pty Ltd
UTA Hong Kong
Holdings Ltd
Desjardins
Entities
RRMD
12.5%
Certas
6.25%
DFS
6.25%

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 73
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Sustainability finance framework
South East Water has developed a Sustainability
Finance Framework to finance a range of activities,
not only environmental projects but also ones which
will benefit society such as improving drinking
water quality. The framework highlights how our
activities are supporting five of the United Nations
Sustainable Development Goals, including climate
action and sustainable cities and communities.
In order to ensure this Sustainability Finance
Framework is followed correctly, we have set
out that we will comply with the ICMA Green
Bond Principles (GBP), Social Bond Principles
(SBP), Sustainability Bond Guidelines (SBG) and
LMA Green Loan Principles. These principles are
each a set of voluntary guidelines that recommend
transparency and disclosure and promote integrity
in the development of the sustainable finance
market by clarifying the approach for Sustainable
Finance issuance.
ICMA GBP/SBP
category
Brief description of
South East Water eligible
sub-categories list Examples of eligible projects UN SDG*
Sustainable
water and
wastewater
management /
Affordable basic
infrastructure
(Clean drinking
water).
▶ Water demand-side
management and
customer-side growth.
u Water supply schemes.
▶ Water quality.
▶ Raw water
environmental works.
▶ Capital maintenance:
replacement and
enhancement on a
proactive basis of
existing assets.
▶ Network extension: to
provide a sustainable
supply of clean drinking
water to all new
properties.
▶ Resilience.
Investment and operating expenditures in, but
not limited to:
▶ Improved metering for more frequent data to
identify and address issues such as leakage.
u Water efficiency programmes.
▶ Water Resources Management Plan – a twin
track plan to ensure a sustainable supply of
water 60 years into the future, through demand
reduction and new supply options.
▶ Restoring sustainable abstractions.
▶ New infrastructure to replace
unsustainable resources.
▶
New infrastructure to replace ageing water mains.
▶ Groundwater and surface water
catchment management.
▶ Water treatment works refurbishments that
improve efficiency (water/energy/chemicals).
▶ Connections of water supply from network to
new properties.
▶
Flood defences at treatment works, boreholes
and pumping stations to ensure resilience and
maintain a clean water supply at times of flood.
Terrestrial
and aquatic
biodiversity
conservation.
▶ Protecting wildlife and
increasing biodiversity.
Investment and operating expenditures in, but
not limited to:
▶ Invasive Non-Native Species (INNS) projects
included in Water Industry National
Environment Programme (WINEP).
▶ Delivery of biodiversity enhancements on
water company landholdings.
▶ Management of company owned Sites of
Special Scientific Interest (SSSIs).
* United Nations Sustainable Developments Goals
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/sffo.uk

Graphics
74 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Financial performance
During the financial year, we continued to make
progress on the commitments set out in our five-year
plan for AMP 7 in areas such as our local environment,
support for our more vulnerable customers and the
resilience of our network. We have also put in place
arrangements to meet our commitments within our
AMP 8 five-year business plan.
We have been investing in enhancing and renewing
our network infrastructure in the year to meet the
demands of an ever-growing population in our supply
area and improve network resilience to safeguard
future supplies for our customers. We have gone above
and beyond what our regulator, Ofwat, determined
we could spend on infrastructure investment. Over
the five years in AMP 7 we have invested £567 million
on the company’s assets, bringing forward major
projects at Barcombe, Bewl and in East Kent. AMP 8
will see the company embark on its most ambitious
business plan ever, to improve network connectivity
and drinking water storage capacity – all to ensure
that we improve regional water security.
In December 2024 our shareholders injected £75
million of new equity into South East Water, which
brought gearing to 75 per cent at 31 March 2025.
Our shareholders injected an additional £200 million
of equity in May 2025 which reduces gearing to c.65
per cent and further reinforces the financial stability
of the group. The equity injections by shareholders
in the group do not alter our conclusion, as set out in
our Statement of Case presented to the Competition
and Markets Authority, that we do not consider that
the AMP 8 Final Determination provides the right
foundations for the long-term investability of the
water sector.
Discussions with our lenders on the renewal of our
revolving credit facility are at an advanced stage and
we expect this process to conclude over the summer.
Further information on this and its effect on the
going concern assessment, including the related
material uncertainty is set out on pages 128 to 129.
The group uses a number of financial performance
indicators to monitor our business. These are linked
to the key strategic financial requirements of our
instrument of appointment and to those of our
investors, which underpin our capital structure
and the financial governance that we apply to our
business. In addition, we monitor profitability, capital
expenditure and cash performance. The table below
shows these indicators and measures for the 2024/25
and the 2023/24 financial years.
Key Performance Indicator (KPI) Measure 2024/25 2023/24
Credit rating Standard & Poors BBB- BBB
Moody's Baa3 Baa2
Interest Cover multiple 2.66 2.88
Adjusted Interest Cover multiple 1.22 1.20
RCV (Regulated Capital Value) £m 1,816.0 1,736.1
Net debt to RCV % 75.2 77.7
Turnover £m 285.5 280.6
Operating profit £m 54.5 63.8
Adjusted EBITDA
1
£m 119.9 130.2
Loss before tax £m (19.8) (36.7)
Capital expenditure £m 157.3 123.8
Cash generated from operations £m 128.4 118.8
Cash £m 36.1 5.0
1
Adjusted EBITDA is earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation, exceptional items and atypical items. This is reconciled to IFRS
operating profit below.
The financial year ended 31 March 2025 was the final year of the 2020 to 2025 Asset
Management Period (AMP 7). The financial performance of the group has improved
during the year due to a significant reduction in the group’s finance costs. Operating
conditions remain difficult with operating profit falling compared to the previous
year as costs continue to rise faster than revenues.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 75
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
There are a number of covenants placed on the
group as part of our borrowing programme. The
interest cover ratio (ICR), the adjusted interest cover
ratio (AICR) and net debt to Regulatory Capital Value
ratio (RAR) reported in the table shown on previous
page are three key covenants. Breach of the ICR
of 1.4 times would result in an Event of Default.
Breach of the AICR of 1.1 times would result in a
Trigger Event. The RAR covenant limits this ratio to a
maximum of 85 per cent and breach would result in
Dividend Lockup.
The group financial statements are set out on
pages 200 to 283. The financial statements
are prepared under UK-adopted international
accounting standards and report the consolidated
results for the South East Water Limited and its
subsidiary, South East Water (Finance) Limited.
Revenue
The turnover for the year was £285.5 million
compared to £280.6 million in the previous year.
The increase of £4.9 million included an increase in
water revenue of £6.0 million offset by a decrease of
non-water income of £1.1 million.
Under the regulatory price control mechanism, the
tariffs are adjusted annually to reflect the impact
of inflation and changes in projected consumption.
The regulatory model set the inflationary uplift
in this year’s allowed revenue based on CPIH in
November 2023. We also projected marginally lower
consumption and our regulated revenue for the year
consequently included an increase in tariffs of 4.5
per cent. The additional revenue generated from the
price increase was £12.1 million.
Household water revenue was £5.5 million higher
than previous year. This included £9.5 million
additional revenue from the increase in tariffs,
partly offset by £1.4 million falling demand because
of the wetter summer in 2024 compared to 2023. In
addition, there was an increase of £2.6 million in the
amount of revenue considered uncollectable at the
time of billing. Non-household water revenue was
£0.5 million more than previous year, which included
price inflation of £2.6 million, partly offset by a fall
in demand with the wetter summer and challenging
economic conditions for businesses.
Revenue resulting from non-water sales decreased
by £1.1 million in the year to £10.0 million due
primarily to a reduction in developer infrastructure
fee income, owing to an increased impact from
changes to the regulatory regime.
Other income has increased by £1.1 million to £14.5
million during the year. The increase in other income
is due to a mixture of increased laboratory activity
and higher billing and collection commissions.
Operating expenditure
Our operating costs for the year, including charges
for doubtful debts, have increased from £230.2
million to £245.5 million, an increase of £15.3 million.
Operating costs in the year included no atypical
costs relating to exceptional weather events. This
compared to £3.1 million of atypical costs incurred
for extreme weather events in 2023/24.
Staff costs increased by £4.9 million net of capital
recharges, driven by an average company pay award
of 4.5 per cent, increased headcount as we gear
up for AMP 8 and bring in additional resource to
improve resilience. Depreciation and amortisation
increased in the year by £2.1 million, reflecting new
assets brought into operation in the financial year.
Other notable increases in operating costs were
higher operational incident response costs of £2.4
million and higher contractor costs of £2.5 million
relating to increased reactive maintenance, reservoir
cleaning, water efficiency and meter reading
activity. Additionally, we incurred higher computing
costs of £2.6 million as the business continues its
transition to cloud-based arrangements, which
bring higher operating expenditure and lower
capital expenditure, plus we also increased spend
on cyber security measures. Furthermore, we
experienced higher energy costs of £2.3 million
owing predominantly to increased prices, plus other
net increases of £2.5 million, including no covid
insurance cost recovery compared to £0.9 million
received in 2023/24.
The charge for bad debts in the year was £4.1 million
compared to £4.5 million in 2023/24. This is almost
exclusively relating to household debt.

Graphics
76 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Profit from Operations
Operating profit for the period fell from £63.8 million
in the prior year to £54.5 million as detailed above.
Finance income
Finance income for the period, comprising interest
earned on bank deposits and returns on pension
scheme assets, was £2.5 million (2024: £1.7 million)
due to higher average cash balances held.
Alternative performance measure
Adjusted EBITDA is earnings before exceptional items, atypical costs, interest, tax, depreciation and
amortisation. It is a key profit indicator that can be used to assess underlying performance. Our adjusted
EBITDA has decreased in the year, largely due to operating costs rising faster than revenues as detailed
above. A reconciliation to the statutory measure is included below.
2024/25
£m
2023/24
£m
Operating profit (IFRS measure) 54.5 63.8
Add back asset expenses (note 6)
65.4 63.3
EBITDA including exceptional items/atypical costs 119.9 127.1
Add back atypical costs – 2023 heatwave - 3.1
Adjusted EBITDA 119.9 130.2
Finance costs
Finance expenses for the period were £76.8 million
(2024: £102.2 million). The decrease of £25.4 million
reflects lower indexation charges on our index-
linked loans of £26.5 million, due to lower inflation
over the period, partly offset by an increase in
interest on our index-linked loans by £2.0 million
due to the higher balances outstanding including
in respect of the new £50 million index-linked loan
taken out in the year, and £1.8 million higher interest
on our revolving credit facility due to higher average
balances outstanding in the year. Interest capitalised
in the period is £3.2 million higher than in 2024,
reflecting an increase in the capital programme and
more expenditure on projects that meet the criteria
for capitalisation.
In August 2024, we entered into a new £50.0 million
index-linked loan, which was used to part repay
our revolving credit facility (“RCF”). The balance on
the RCF at 31 March 2025 was £69.0 million (2024:
£97.0 million).
Financial performance continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 77
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Pensions
South East Water is the sponsoring employer for the
South East Water and the Mid Kent Water defined
benefit schemes, which both closed on 31 March
2015 to future accrual. During the year the group
paid contributions to the South East Water scheme
of £7.0 million (2024: £6.6 million) in respect of the
actuarial deficits on the scheme. No contributions
were made to the Mid Kent Water scheme during
the current or previous year following the decision
in December 2022 by the trustees of the Mid
Kent Water scheme to enter into an insurance
arrangement to fully insure the future pension
scheme liabilities. In December 2024, the trustees
of the South East Water scheme entered into an
insurance transaction to fully insure the future
pension scheme liabilities of that scheme. No further
deficit contributions will be paid to the South East
Water scheme after 31 March 2025.
Further details on the schemes are set out in note 23
of the accounts.
In addition, the company operates and funds a
stakeholder pension scheme which is a defined
contribution scheme. During the year 1,250
(2024: 1,074) employees contributed to the scheme
and the company made payments of £3.4 million
by way of employer contributions to this scheme
(2024: £3.1 million).
Loss before tax
The loss before tax for the year was £19.8 million
compared to the loss of £36.7 million in the prior
year. The improved result is largely due to the
decrease in finance costs in the year.
Loss after tax
The group returned a loss after tax of £13.5 million
in the year compared to a loss of £28.0 million in the
prior year.
The tax credit in the year of £6.2 million (2024: £8.6
million) comprises:
▶  Current tax credit of £0.04 million (2024: £0.1
million). The current tax credit in the year is in
respect of the research and development claim
received in the year.
▶  Deferred tax credit of £6.2 million (2024: £8.5
million). The deferred tax credit is due to losses
in the year and deferral of capital allowances.
Further details on the current and deferred tax
calculations are set out in note 9 to the accounts.

Graphics
78 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Financial performance continued
Net debt and cash flow
We use a combination of funds from operations,
long-term funding and short-term working capital
funding to finance the capital programme and to
fund the ongoing business operations. During the
year, cash generated from operations was £128.4
million (2024: £118.8 million). Net payments in
respect of capital expenditure in the year totalled
£141.9 million compared to £127.7 million in the
prior year. Net payments in respect of interest and
other finance income and costs were £49.5 million in
the year compared to £45.9 million in 2024.
The higher net interest paid in the year is due
to higher interest rates in the year and higher
borrowings (see below).
The group statement of cash flows on page 222
shows an increase in the cash balance, from £5.0
million at the beginning of the financial year to £36.1
million at the end of the year.
Treasury
Our treasury policy seeks to ensure sufficient funding
is available to meet foreseeable requirements and
maintain appropriate headroom for contingencies.
We manage the financial risks of the business
through a series of hedging policies and ensure our
short and long-term facilities are appropriate to the
business’s strategic objectives. Our policy considers
inflation risk, interest rate risk and investment
criteria set by the board. The obligations of our
securitisation structure underpin the policy. Our
assessment of the associated risks is set out in note
21 and details of our long-term loans are set out in
note 18.
During the year, our use of our £125 million revolving
credit facility comprised drawings of £51 million and
repayments of £79 million. This activity reduced the
total outstanding amount to £69 million by March
31, 2025, compared to £97 million at the same time
in 2024.
The group entered into a new loan arrangement in
the period for £50 million index linked to CPI with
a nominal interest rate of 3.5 per cent. This loan
matures in September 2040.
Dividends
We pay dividends to our shareholders in accordance
with our dividend policy. Under this policy dividends
should provide a suitable return to shareholders for
their investment whilst ensuring the company can
finance its functions and meet its obligations as a
water undertaker without impairing its ability to
meet current and future investment needs or its
long-term financial resilience.
When considering dividends, the board takes account
of a wide range of considerations consistent with
Condition P30 of the company’s licence, including
delivery for customers and the environment,
current and future investment needs, and financial
resilience. It also considers employees’ interests
and other obligations such as health and safety,
the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 including
s172, and other metrics e.g., ESG performance.
Dividends are considered by reference to forecast
financial and operational performance to ensure
they do not compromise the company’s future
performance.
Other factors considered by the board in relation to
proposed dividends include the company’s actual
and forecast level of gearing, the need to maintain
its credit ratings, the allowed cost of capital, and any
outperformance achieved or forecast.
Our policy is that the base level of ordinary dividend
for the appointed business should be set and paid at
a level that is within the allowed returns determined
by Ofwat in the current price determination and
having regard to the reasonable base nominal
yield on equity (currently 4 per cent) within the
relevant parameters set out in that determination
(such as the size of the investment programme or
considerations relating to financial resilience).
Following due consideration of the factors above,
no dividends were paid during the year (2024: £2.25
million). Further details are given in note 10 of the
financial statements. No dividends have been
proposed and unpaid at the balance sheet date.
We provide more information on how the board has
considered compliance with Condition P30 of the
company’s license in our annual performance report
under accounting and performance disclosure.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 79
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Credit rating
Under our instrument of appointment, we must
maintain two investment grade ratings. Our credit
ratings continue to meet investment grade with
both our rating agencies. We are currently rated
BBB- (negative outlook) by Standard and Poor’s
and Baa3 (stable outlook) by Moody’s. We continue
to target solid investment grade credit ratings
going forward.
Gearing
The group operates a securitisation structure.
Our loans and borrowings at the end of March
2025 amounted to £1,395.4 million (2023: £1,348.4
million) (see note 18). Our senior net indebtedness
(loans and borrowings excluding unamortised issue
costs and net of cash) at the end of March 2025 was
£1,365.0 million, which represents c.75 per cent of
our regulated capital value. By May 2025, following
further capital investment, gearing was c.65 per
cent. Our securitisation requirements are that we
should maintain a level of gearing of 85.0 per cent
or less.
Taxation and tax policy
Our taxation policy is set out in the directors’ report
and the regulatory annual performance report.
A more detailed explanation of our tax policy is
available on our website. We continue to have a large
and growing capital investment programme and
therefore expect to have a significant amount of
capital allowances available to offset tax liabilities in
future years.
Find out more
southeastwater.co.uk/governance
We manage our capital
structure in a way that
enables us to retain our
investment grade credit
rating and comply with
our loan covenants
“

Graphics
80 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Responsible business
In this statement we explain:
▶  How the company and the board have considered the environment and key business relationships, and
engaged with employees, customers, and other stakeholders (regulators, communities, environmental
groups, suppliers, political representatives).
▶  How the board had regard to the company purpose, the matters set out in section 172(1) of the
Companies Act 2006, and the interests of stakeholders in reaching key decisions and considering
their impact.
Matters for consideration in section 172(1)
The likely consequences of any decision in the
long-term.
The impact of the company’s operations on the
community and the environment.
The interests of the company’s employees. The desirability of the company maintaining a
reputation for high standards of business conduct.
The need to foster the company’s business
relationships with suppliers, customers and others.
The need to act fairly as between members of
the company.
Purpose led
Fulfilling our purpose, balancing the matters in
s172(1), and maintaining high standards of business
conduct are interconnected. There are numerous
examples throughout this strategic report of how
the board achieves this.
Since the incorporation of our purpose into our
articles of association, the duty of our directors goes
beyond the standard duty set out in section 172(1).
Our directors are required to act in a way that fulfils
our purpose, both for the benefit of shareholders
and to have a positive impact on society and the
environment. In doing so, they must have regard to
the matters set out in s172(1).
This is achieved within a decision framework that
combines governance, internal systems of control
and risk management, and an inclusive approach to
stakeholder engagement.
Decisions taken by the board must balance the
long-term and short-term interests of the company
with the interests of its customers, employees, and
the environment. Decisions must consider how to
maintain key relationships and current and future
regulatory requirements.
All these considerations are integral to strategic
decisions and the monitoring of our performance,
which aims to ensure we deliver targeted outcomes
for customers and the environment, and the
investment in infrastructure required to support
our communities.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 81
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Purpose and high standards of business conduct
Our corporate governance
framework, corporate governance
code, and culture (purpose and
values) and board practices.
▶
  
A corporate governance framework
focused on engagement, stakeholder
inclusiveness, integrated thinking (i.e.
balancing all relevant considerations
in our decision-making including those
in section 172(1) CA06).
▶  
A purpose and values focused on
delivery for customers, planning for
the future, protecting the environment
and contributing to society.
▶  
A corporate governance structure that
ensures all aspects of the business
receive the appropriate scrutiny.
Our corporate governance
framework
southeastwater.co.uk/about/
who-we-are/governance
Our purpose and culture on
pages 14 and 15.
Board leadership and
company purpose on
page 136.
How our board, committees
and executive team operate
on page 142.
Stakeholder participation.
▶
  Engagement which ensures
stakeholders are directly involved in
our decision process: including our
Customer Challenge Group, Water
Horizon Forum and partnerships for
the delivery of our environmental
programme, our employee and
stakeholder engagement programme.
▶
  Extensive engagement programmes
and consultation for all our key plans.
Stakeholder engagement on
page 82.
Systems of risk management and
internal controls.
▶
  Risk management systems that
consider aspects related to or
impacting s172(1) matters.
▶
  Analysis of key trends affecting
our business model, strategy and
performance also related to
s172(1) matters.
Our business environment and
key trends on page 48.
Our principal risks on page 50.
Our non-financial and sustainability information statement on page 96 sets out additional information
on our approach to the environment, employee relations, social matters, as well as human rights, and
anti-bribery and corruption.

Graphics
82 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Focused on the long-term
Consideration of the long-term is an essential component of our purpose, strategy and management of our
infrastructure. Balancing the different matters and interests in s172(1) is an integral and necessary part of
planning for the future.
Stakeholder engagement
Stakeholder engagement is more important than
ever, due to shifting customer expectations, rising
scrutiny and the demand for transparency. Effective
engagement with our stakeholders is therefore
vital to our long-term success. By listening to and
understanding the needs, values and priorities of
stakeholders, we can focus on the issues that matter
most which will enable us to make better decisions.
Undertaking quality engagement helps us to
build strong connections, trust and buy-in for our
initiatives. It also leads to a greater awareness and
understanding of our work. Effective engagement
leads us to set stretching commitments and maintain
accountability while driving innovation. Stakeholders
are experts in their field which means it is crucial
that we listen and collaborate with them when it
comes to strategic planning and decision-making.
Stakeholder engagement is an important part of
everyone’s role, and it is down to our leaders to
make sure all levels of the business understand the
purpose and the significance of engagement and
how it will be undertaken to reach business and
departmental objectives.
Our Stakeholder Engagement Strategy clearly sets
out why, when, and how stakeholder engagement
should take place, as well as how to record feedback
and feed it into business decisions. It sets a direction
of travel to embed best practice engagement
methods throughout the business to enable us to
gather valuable insights. This will create meaningful
Long-term planning and sustainable success
Our business model.
▶
  
A business model focused on value
creation through responsible business,
with a long-term focus and collaborative
engagement with stakeholders.
Our business model on page 16.
Our long-term
planning and
strategy.
▶
  Long-term water resources and drought
planning is a core function to ensure we
can meet future demand for water.
▶
  Our long-term adaptive planning also
seeks to ensure we will be able to provide
our service and that our water supply
system is resilient to future challenges.
Long-term trends, challenges, and priorities
on page 22.
Integrated thinking on page 40.
Planning for the future on page 42.
Our Water Resources Management Plan
on page 44.
Our draft business plan on page 45.
Our climate-related disclosures on page 98.
two-way partnerships with wide-ranging stakeholder
networks, representing all relevant environmental
and societal areas.
The AccountAbility AA1000 Stakeholder Engagement
Standard is recognised as the global benchmark
for high-quality stakeholder engagement. We
are committed to adhering to this standard
which ensures our engagement remains inclusive,
responsive, material and impactful.
We also collaborated with the now former Consultation
Institute to create a robust stakeholder engagement
framework. The Consultation Institute set the
standards for best practice in public engagement and
consultation around the globe. Our standards and
commitments follow the Gunning Principles, Ofwat’s
engagement standards, Consumer Challenge Group
standards and our own requirements. They focus on
engagement with clarity and purpose, inclusive and
accessible stakeholder participation, meaningful and
effective engagement, engagement with integrity,
and how we’ll consider and report back on feedback
received from stakeholder engagement and its
influence on the decisions we make.
Engagement can take many forms, based on how
relationships are mapped on a case-by-case basis.
We monitor stakeholder feedback through our
perceptions audit, undertaken every year. We also
track media coverage, social media, and websites.
Where we consult and involve our stakeholders,
we undertake surveys, focus groups, meetings,
Responsible business continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 83
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
For more about how we engage
southeastwater.co.uk/engagementstrategy
workshops, and panels to create a two-way dialogue,
enabling learning for both stakeholders and the
company. Our aim is that stakeholder engagement
takes the form of collaboration and empowerment.
We continue to monitor and evaluate the
engagement tools available and will test and embed
where appropriate. For example, we have adopted
the robust online EngagementHQ consultation
platform which turns input into actionable insights.
We continue to investigate other tools that may
help manage our relationships with stakeholders in
one complete system. Our insight hub is a key tool
for us to capture learnings in a way that supports the
creation of actionable insight which helps to shape our
Map appropriate
stakeholders, understand
previous company research,
tailor engagement
methods, devise appropriate
feedback channels, create
the engagement plan and
mobilise resources.
Evaluate engagement
outcomes, feed results into
the company Insights Hub,
respond to stakeholder views
and refine plans.
Respond
Establish the purpose
and scope of the
engagement and map
it back to a business
objective/priority.
Set ownership.
Define
Plan
Invite, engage and listen
to stakeholders, document
engagement and outputs,
co-create an action plan and
feedback learnings/results
to stakeholders involved.
Implement
approach. Outcomes from engagement are fed into
the insight hub and then weighted using a consistent
and defined methodology. This enables insight from
different sources to be collated and triangulated
against varied data sources. This actionable insight is
then used to drive our business decisions in the areas
of delivery processes, strategy, planning, company
culture, investment in infrastructure and priorities in
activities. This provides the golden thread from ‘You
said’ to ‘We did’ demonstrating how the views of our
stakeholders are reflected in what we do and why.
See our Engagement Strategy for more information.
More details on our key stakeholders can be found
below in this report.
We follow a process of define – plan – implement – respond. This ensures we consider previous insight/
knowledge, we define the reason why we need to engage, and we use the most appropriate engagement
method to get the best results to inform the business in future planning:

Graphics
84 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Why is this stakeholder group
important to us?
▶ Why we do what we do – we provide an
essential service that is also a human right.
▶ Meeting their expectations is a key condition
of our licence to operate.
▶ Our performance is assessed based on
customers’ feedback.
▶ Customers need to change their behaviours as
water resources become more scarce.
▶ Their feedback helps us develop plans for
the future that they support.
What are the key issues for this
stakeholder group?
▶ A safe, wholesome supply of water.
▶ A reliable water supply and
service performance.
▶ Great customer service.
▶ Affordability and value for money.
▶ Stable bills.
▶ Assistance in times of need.
▶ Well-managed street works.
▶ Local employment.
▶ Proactive role in relevant community issues.
Our customers and communities
How we engage
The development of our plans and strategies always
includes significant engagement with customers to
understand their priorities, expectations, and their
support for our proposals.
Our independent Customer Challenge Group (CCG)
provided challenge to us on our engagement
programme and also on how we reflect findings in
our decisions and in a range of areas during 2024/25.
We are members of the Institute of Customer Service
(ICS) and have been awarded their ServiceMark
accreditation in recognition of our customer service
standards and our commitment to upholding those
standards. Membership of the ICS gives us access
to benchmarking and advice on good practice to
continuously improve our service and demonstrate
objectively high standards of service.
We engage with our My Account customers with a
monthly newsletter – Behind the Tap – which is sent
to more than 500,000 customers a month. This
explains what we’re doing to provide the public
water service and also offers water efficiency tips
and advice. We are conducting more home water
efficiency audits for customers, where we discuss
water usage, fit water-saving devices and fix any
internal leaks we find. These audits also allow us to
promote our package of support to our vulnerable
customers and those struggling to pay their bills by
raising awareness of our PSR and affordability tariffs.
Our customer incident messaging system
AquAlerter allows us to engage with customers
quickly and effectively during incidents. We’ll keep
customers automatically updated on progress
during an incident in their area and customers can
now also report leaks they find themselves through
the system.
We continue to work and share knowledge and
data with several specialist groups such as National
Energy Action, the national charity working to
end fuel poverty, and UK Power Networks, to help
us understand affordability issues in our area.
These partnerships help us understand customers’
changing needs and expectations so we can support
them better in the future.
Responsible business continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 85
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
We value all the partnerships we have with
organisations that can help us support our customers
in relation to customer service, vulnerability,
affordability, and community support. These include
charities, housing associations, local authorities,
government organisations and other utilities. Our
Community Partnership Leads help us to link up
with organisations across our supply area to raise
awareness of our Priority Services Register (PSR) and
build trust through community engagement. They
attend dozens of community events and sessions
promoting other support services for signposting
such as Citizens Advice centres, Jobcentres and
foodbanks. They also help us to develop important
relationships with community groups, councils and
other stakeholders. We teamed up with East Sussex
County Council to do a door drop of nearly 190,000
properties. This helped us to pass on water efficiency
advice and to reach digitally excluded customers.
We have engaged with customers and communities
through a virtual Q&A session – “Behind the tap: Your
drinking water questions answered” which allowed
customers the chance to speak directly with
members of the Executive. We were also at Kent
County Show and Eastbourne Airborne Show.
For all capital programme works we assess the
impact on our customers and communities near the
works. We consult systematically and extensively
with those affected, using a range of methods to
understand views, how we can mitigate disruptions
and to explain the reasons for and benefits of
our works. These include engineering project drop-
in sessions.
In 2024/25 we engaged with CCW and received
feedback on our customer services practices
and performance as well as on some escalated
complaints. We hold events for retailers and
non-household groups, and developers to discuss
and obtain feedback on service improvements and
tariff changes.
Feedback received and action taken
Our PSR numbers have risen strongly again, with
29,583 customers added to reach a total of 130,452.
Now, 14.12 per cent of our customers are on the PSR,
up from 11.03 per cent 12 months previously. We
continue to identify and support more customers
through community outreach and data sharing with
energy companies.
For the second year running, our services for
vulnerable customers have been recognised with
the prestigious BSI Inclusive Service Kitemark with
zero non-conformities after a rigorous review in
January. We’ve received positive feedback on our
Vulnerability Strategy published at the end of June.
Ofwat has classed the strategy as “exemplary” in
three of five assessment areas.
In April, we launched the new social tariff which
applies a tiered discount based on household
income, replacing the previous capped approach.
This structured system was informed by
stakeholder and customer feedback, best practices,
and benchmarking. Our Helping Hands grants
scheme offers financial assistance to customers
who demonstrate they are taking steps to achieve
financial stability but need help clearing water bill
debt which has built up over the years.
In November we launched a new partnership with
Kidney Care UK who will refer people they are
supporting within our supply area directly through
to our vulnerability team so our customers can have
access to better tariffs and any further support we
can provide. Colleagues are receiving training on
issues such as chronic kidney disease so they have
the knowledge and the tools to support customers
more effectively too.
In 2024/25 we gave away 198,555 free water-saving
devices to customers, including leaky loo detection
strips and water-saving shower heads. This is 10 per
cent more than we gave away in the previous year.
The number of customers registering for our
My Account services remains high. By 31 March,
535,957 customers had registered, up from 484,053
in 2023/24. This represents 58 per cent of our
customers, compared to 52 per cent the previous
year. Customers now complete on average 28,000
self-serve transactions a month via My Account.
We’ve achieved 9th on the C-MeX (Customer
Measure of Experience) Q4 table, our highest
position since 2017, when there was a different
performance system in place. This puts us 12th
overall for the year.

Graphics
86 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Why is the environment important to us?
▶ We take raw water from the environment to
provide our service.
▶ We rely on ecological services from
catchments for our water resources.
▶ We operate in an area of serious water stress.
▶ We manage a large number of protected sites.
What are the key environmental issues?
▶ Minimising our impact on water bodies and
the wider environment.
▶ Sustainable abstraction.
▶ Raw water quality deterioration.
u Enhancing biodiversity and restoring habitats.
▶ Mitigating the impact of climate change and
population growth.
The environment
How we engage about environmental issues
Partnerships is one of four key pillars in our 25
Year Environment Plan which was co-created
with stakeholders and customers. Building and
strengthening relationships, positive engagement
and collaborative working are therefore at the
forefront of our approach to environmental issues.
We work with regulatory bodies, industry experts,
academics, environmental organisations, community
groups and other partners and stakeholders to
share information, provide assistance, and to deliver
innovative solutions that will drive long-term
environmental benefits and wider societal change.
However, the way we engage is changing due
to feedback we’ve received – see below. A more
collaborative, catchment-focused approach is
replacing our Environmental Scrutiny Group to
enable us to focus on specific, local issues, challenges
and priorities.
This allows us to build stronger and relevant
relationships on the ground in specific catchments
and obtain a more diverse set of opinions which
can help influence and shape our future water
resource plans.
This approach seeks to build on our successful
catchment management programme where we
have forged positive relationships with farmers
and landowners in specific catchments to improve
raw water quality by stopping soil, fertiliser and
pesticides washing from fields into rivers and
groundwater. The programme also has wider
benefit in terms of air quality, climate regulation
and biodiversity. We have run events and workshops
with farmers and landowners, including an event at
Arlington in June where we raised awareness of our
capital grants programme.
Feedback received, actions and key decisions
We need to make the right, long-term, well-balanced
environmental decisions so that we protect and,
where possible, improve our environment – and
our water supply as a result. Partnership and
collaboration underpin our approach because we
can’t solve the problems by ourselves.
Responsible business continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 87
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
In 2024/25 we engaged with 43 farm businesses
within our ODI target areas – the largest number
we’ve engaged in a single year across our five-year
business plan period. We continue to support and
work in partnership with farmers and other land users
by offering advice, sharing information, providing
financial support and working collaboratively on
rainwater harvesting projects, soil improvement
trials and schemes to reduce chemical use.
Over the last five years, we’ve successfully engaged
with landowners who manage 15,098 hectares
within our target catchments. Our catchment
management programme has brought wider
environmental benefits too. Between 2020 and 2024
the measures implemented are estimated to have
sequestered an additional 1,001 tonnes of carbon
through changes in land use type or habitat type,
worth around £459,045 per year in total to society.
We are developing a new catchment-based
approach to engagement about environmental
issues following feedback from a successful event
we organised with Southern Water and Lewes
District Council in Sussex in October 2024. We
brought together regulators, local authorities
and environmental organisations from across the
Newhaven, Lewes and Eastbourne area for an open
discussion about the future of drinking water in
the area. We aim to adopt a more local approach
as we start preparing our next water resources
management plan which will be published in 2029.
We have been working with
Longbridge Regenerative,
a collection of businesses
that focus on sustainability,
in a nature based solution to
manage 181.3 hectares of
invasive tor grassland in
East Sussex
“
We are now working with South East Rivers Trust
and independent catchment partnerships to
see how we can extend this approach to other
key catchments to involve local communities
and organisations in future discussions about
water resources.
We have showcased our 25 Year Environment
Plan (H25
2
) to more than 50 of our partners and
stakeholders in Sussex, updating attendees on
our plans to protect and enhance the natural
environment for future generations through
investment, innovation, engagement and
partnerships.
A catchment-scale Invasive Non-Native Species
(INNS) strategy to protect the River Ouse from
the introduction and impact of INNS has been
developed alongside partners from the South Downs
National Park Authority, University of Brighton,
Environment Agency and Ouse and Adur Rivers
Trust. The implementation stage will involve more
stakeholder engagement to raise awareness of the
threats posed by INNS. Engaging with landowners
is a vital part of the plan and is fundamental to
the project’s overall success as they can help us
manage INNS and ensure a rapid response to any
new invasive species found in the catchment.
In another valued partnership, we have been working
with Longbridge Regenerative, a collection of
businesses that focus on sustainability, in a nature-
based solution to manage 181.3 hectares of invasive
tor grassland in East Sussex. Exmoor ponies, which
naturally graze on this type of coarse vegetation,
will help manage the conservation of rare chalk
grassland within the South Downs National Park.
This will help increase our groundwater resilience
and also improve biodiversity and nature recovery.
Research has shown that rare chalk grassland is
the best type of material to improve the quantity
and quality of the groundwater below. We’ve again
worked with the South Downs National Park to
plant 3,750 trees over the past year as part of their
Trees for the Downs initiative. This project seeks
to restore community trees that have been lost to
pests and diseases.
In partnership with Kew at Wakehurst Place, we have
installed sand martin nesting banks and tern nesting
rafts on the Wakehurst arm of Ardingly reservoir.
This initiative has seen success with three healthy
tern chicks hatching on the nesting island for the
first time in 2024.

Graphics
88 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Why is this stakeholder group
important to us?
▶ In a 24/7 365-day-a-year service, our people
are our most important asset.
▶ They make our purpose, values, and culture
a reality.
▶ They help develop and implement our strategy.
▶ They drive our progress and innovation.
▶ They are our main source of knowledge
and experience.
▶ They deliver our service 24 hours a day, every
day of the year.
What are the key issues for this
stakeholder group?
▶ Purposeful jobs that make a difference.
▶ Health, safety, and wellbeing.
▶ Diverse and inclusive workplace.
▶ Opportunities to reach full potential.
▶ Open and honest environment.
▶ Fair pay and reward and recognition.
▶ Flexible working and work life balance.
Our People
How we engage
By listening to our colleagues and engaging
positively with them, our Board gains a better
understanding of how our purpose, company
values and business strategy are being embedded.
Effective engagement with colleagues is critical
to our company’s long-term success as it helps us
to understand their needs, concerns and priorities
and to ensure we continually improve the way we do
things to make our company a great place to work
and to deliver the best service for our customers.
Our staff council representatives ensure that
colleagues are directly engaged within our company.
The staff council, as our employee representative
body, encourages and values conversation and the
exploring of ideas with the business and teams.
It helps us to continually improve and to provide a
better working environment.
We run regular company-wide pulse surveys with
colleagues to measure participation, engagement
and obtain valued feedback from colleagues on
key issues. Every view counts in these surveys. The
results are shared with our colleagues, all levels
of management and with our independent non-
executive independent Director Célia Pronto,
Remuneration Committee Chair, who has a keen
focus on general engagement with colleagues. Our
CEO David Hinton presented the latest survey results
(June 2024) to colleagues. This has been followed up
with a ‘You said, We did’ session with all colleagues
to share the action taken as a result of their views.
Colleague engagement remains high at 91 per cent.
There was a seven per cent increase in the number of
colleagues who believe our senior leaders proactively
engage with employees and work to understand their
needs and a six per cent increase in numbers who
say the communications they receive from senior
leaders help them to feel more connected with
the company. These positive increases have in part
been driven by the development of our Leading for
Change development programme, the introduction
of regular roadshow events with our CEO, and visible
leadership tours around the business. In addition, we
engage with colleagues via our employee intranet.
This platform allows us to share important business
updates to everyone within the company but is also
a great way for everyone to exchange news, event
information and key communications.
Responsible business continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 89
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Managers receive a monthly manager toolkit and
health and safety briefings. Every colleague is
actively encouraged to raise any issue or concern,
however small, through our new easy online reporting
tool ANMEL (Accident, Near Miss and Environmental
Log). We have health and safety representatives
throughout our company who attend health and
safety committee meetings to ensure the voices of
our colleagues are heard.
Feedback received and action taken
We pride ourselves on listening to colleagues and
taking action to improve the way we work and the
environment in which we work. This is borne out
by the results of our last pulse survey when 71 per
cent agreed that we took action as a result of survey
findings. We are particularly pleased that this was a
nine per cent increase on the previous survey’s score
for the same question.
We want our colleagues to have a better experience
when they first join the company and throughout
their careers with us. Our new HR IT system (HRIS)
will provide more efficient and accessible services
for colleagues, including recruitment, onboarding
and payroll services, and a self-serve portal. It is
more user-friendly and intuitive and will allow us
to connect all areas of the business to improve
efficiency and give greater visibility of workflows.
We are continuing to discuss plans for a new shift
pattern and standby structure with operational
colleagues to ensure we adopt the best approach,
following a review aimed at improving operational
resilience and encouraging more people into
operational roles. Working patterns was a key topic
raised by colleagues in the open comments section
of our last pulse survey. We want to offer more choice
and flexibility in the future so that people are not
deterred from taking frontline roles in our company
due to the traditionally reactive and unsociable
working hours associated with these roles.
The number of apprenticeship standards we offer has
risen from five to 20 reflecting our commitment to
invest in new and emerging talent and home-grown
skills. Women make up more than half of all applicants
for our new apprenticeships. Apprentices currently
account for seven per cent of our employees.
Colleagues want us to help them develop and reach
their full potential and this is important because this
helps us to retain top talent and enables us to meet
the future and changing needs of our business. In
the last year 89 colleagues have undertaken internal
upskilling programmes through our Aspire, Inspire
and Lead routes, a 31 per cent increase on the
previous year. Nine colleagues are also going through
our Preparing for Senior Leadership programme.
Our commitment to investing in the next generation
and providing opportunities for professional and
personal growth is at the heart of our workforce
strategy and has been recognised with Gold
membership of The 5% Club. This recognises
companies where at least five per cent of colleagues
earn and learn at the same time.
As a result of our new ANMEL reporting tool (see
above), proactive safety observations by colleagues
have increased five-fold. This helps to keep health
and safety front of mind for everyone and is enabling
us to resolve issues much faster. This proactivity
shows colleagues that we take their health and
safety seriously.
We also take wellbeing seriously and we are using
insight from the pulse survey to continue to find
ways to support our colleagues. Our Mental Health
First Aiders are on hand across the business to offer
support to colleagues whenever they need it too.
Following feedback from colleagues, we have
extended the leave available to those suffering a
bereavement and also extended the eligibility to
cover a broader definition of ‘family’, to include
those who’ve suffered a miscarriage, and the policy
now includes one day’s paid leave for the loss of
a pet.

Graphics
90 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Why is this stakeholder group
important to us?
▶ They influence or set policies that determine
our long-term success.
▶ They assess our performance.
▶ They can take actions in case of shortcomings.
▶ They represent the key interests we need
to consider.
▶ They are a source of knowledge and insight.
What are the key issues for this
stakeholder group?
▶ Performance against regulatory outcomes.
▶ Trust and transparency.
▶ Governance and compliance.
▶ Sustainability and protection of
the environment.
▶ Resilience and investment in the future.
Our stakeholders and regulators
How we engage
We maintain close communication and
collaboration with regulatory bodies such as
Ofwat, the Drinking Water Inspectorate (DWI), the
Environment Agency and Natural England, as well
as relevant government departments such as Defra
(Department for Environment, Food and Rural
Affairs) and the independent consumer body, the
Consumer Council for Water (CCW). This involves
direct interaction, participating in consultations
and discussing key issues to find solutions together.
Our independent Customer Challenge Group
(CCG), consisting of representatives from the
CCW, environmental organisations, local councils,
engagement specialists and charities, has continued
to hold us to account for the promises we make to
customers. The CCG has ensured the community
voice has remained at the heart of our decision
making in 2024/25.
We prioritise stakeholder engagement, recognising
the expertise and understanding of local community
needs among the more than 2,500 stakeholders
in our supply area. Their views are central to our
decision-making and strategy-setting processes.
Through Water UK, the trade association for the
water industry, we engage with government,
regulators and other decision-makers to contribute
to policy development.
We organise annual events focused on inclusive and
accessible services, inviting delegates from various
sectors to improve customer support, share best
practices and foster partnerships.
Our non-executive directors attend Ofwat’s annual
engagement session, with outcomes discussed at
subsequent board meetings. The CEO updates the
board on stakeholder activities and feedback at each
meeting. Further, new directors are also interviewed
by Ofwat prior to appointment, and action is taken
on Ofwat’s observations.
We produce a monthly update for regulators and
a quarterly report (The Source) to keep
stakeholders informed of our activities and relevant
issues, maintaining regular communication to
generate feedback.
Customer satisfaction surveys and analysis of
performance data help us understand and adapt to
customer feedback and expectations.
Our insight teams manage regular stakeholder
engagement activities and specific programmes
with customers, local authorities, charities, NGOs,
and regulators for strategic and regulatory planning.
Responsible business continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 91
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Feedback received and action taken
In February we founded the Broad Oak reservoir
stakeholder advisory group, made up of external
professional organisations from the fields of tourism,
business, culture and heritage, environmental bodies,
community groups and residents’ associations,
alongside parish councils and city councillors. Their
role is to help us shape the Broad Oak reservoir project,
submit views on behalf of the wider community,
and to provide in-depth specialist knowledge and
insights, ensuring we mitigate potential issues and
understand local feeling.
Although our last water resources management plan
(WRMP) was only published in October, stakeholder
engagement about our next draft plan (dWRMP29)
has already begun. More than 20 stakeholders
(regulators, local authorities and environmental
organisations) across the Newhaven, Lewes and
Eastbourne area met with us, Southern Water
and Lewes District Council in October for an open
discussion about where drinking water will come
from in the future. Everyone in attendance has
agreed to be part of future conversations to identify
the best way to solve this challenging issue. We plan
to work at a more local level for our next plan.
Our stakeholder perceptions audit has been sent to
545 stakeholders who opted in to undertake surveys.
There was positive feedback from this, highlighting
that stakeholders really value in-person meetings,
workshops and events. We plan to arrange more
in-person meetings going forward. The key areas
stakeholders want to understand more about are
the environment, water resources, water efficiency
and leakage.
We regularly liaise with MPs and value their interest
in our services and the challenges we face. In
November we were pleased to show Nus Ghani, MP
for Sussex Weald, around the site of our £12.1 million
investment project to install 17km of new water
main between our Bewl water treatment works and
our drinking water storage tanks at Wadhurst and
Rotherfield. Visits like this enable us to highlight
key investment in infrastructure being made across
our operating area and also give stakeholders the
opportunity to learn more about our work and to ask
us questions about the service we provide.
In December we met with Kieran Mullan, MP for
Bexhill and Battle, and several local councillors
to discuss our response to supply interruptions
experienced in the Robertsbridge/Hurst Green area
of Sussex in 2024. At the meeting we discussed how
we are developing resilience in our network, how we
are improving our response when incidents do occur
and how we can work closer with local councils to
further improve our alternative water plans. We’ve
discussed the Broad Oak reservoir with Rosie Duffield
(MP for Canterbury) and Sir Roger Gale (MP for
Herne Bay and Sandwich) and facilitated meetings
covering projects, incidents, network resilience,
finance and future water resources with other MPs
over the past year, including James MacCleary, Mike
Martin, Laura Trott and Tom Tugendhat.
We invited all MPs and their staff from across our
supply area to join us for an interactive webinar in
January to explain the customer bill increases. The aim
was to equip MPs and their teams with the information
they need to answer any price increase enquiries they
receive from constituents. We also talked through
the range of financial and non-financial help we
offer our customers. Feedback from this webinar
was universally positive, with all those who attended
telling us they would like to attend future webinars to
better understand the work we do.
Our annual Vulnerability Stakeholder Conference
in February brought together 61 attendees from
45 separate organisations across the charity,
utility, housing, financial and community sectors to
discuss challenges facing vulnerable customers and
access to support. Input from our stakeholders has
helped to inform and shape our final Vulnerability
Strategy which has received positive feedback
from the regulator Ofwat and the CCW, with Ofwat
classing the strategy as “exemplary” in three of five
assessment areas.
In November we invited stakeholders (and
customers) to find out more about our new five-
year investment plan. More than 200 people
attended our independently chaired ‘Behind the
tap: Your drinking water questions answered’
virtual meeting. The meeting gave attendees the
opportunity to ask our Chief Executive and other
senior colleagues questions on any topic and let us
know their priorities. Also in November, we met with
councillors from both East Sussex and Kent County
Council to update them on our WRMP24 and our
latest business plan (PR24).
We gave 50 members of the Kent Ambassador group
a behind-the-scenes glimpse of all the work we do
at our Bewl water treatment works to extract, treat
and pump water to customers’ taps in February.
Kent Ambassadors is a group of business leaders and
influential people who promote the county across
the country and further afield.

Graphics
92 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Why is this stakeholder group
important to us?
▶ The safety of the entire workforce (employed
by us or our contractors).
▶ Achieving our performance commitments.
▶ Delivering our investment programme
and efficiencies.
▶ Technical expertise for our long-term plans.
▶ Maintaining our reputation and high standards
of business conduct.
▶ Ensuring the continuity and resilience of
our operations.
▶ Bringing innovative solutions and
new technologies.
▶ Improving the sustainability of our business.
What are the key issues for this
stakeholder group?
▶ The safety of the entire workforce.
▶ Balanced contractual arrangements.
▶ Profitable business.
▶ Fair payment terms.
▶ Collaborative working.
▶ An equitable supply chain.
▶ Mutually beneficial and predictable
business relationships.
Our suppliers and partners
How we engage
We engage and collaborate with our suppliers
and partners to ensure all our business dealings
are conducted with integrity, fairness and in
compliance of our legal and ethical responsibilities.
Effective engagement and ongoing collaboration
enables us to build mutual trust which helps us all to
maintain the highest standards and to continuously
improve our approach.
This extends to our procurement processes which
include a number of checks and reviews to ensure
the suppliers we engage with can meet our Ethical
Purchasing Policy requirements. These checks
form part of the evaluation and selection criteria
for the goods and services we procure. Our Ethical
Purchasing Policy also incorporates requirements
relating to modern slavery. Alternatively, our
suppliers must have an equivalent policy themselves.
We also have standard contractual provisions to
allow for periodic and targeted compliance audits
and our key suppliers have a duty to notify us of any
non-compliance with our ethical purchasing policy.
Responsible business continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 93
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
We require our supply chain to carry out due
diligence checks and adhere to similar standards as
ourselves in relation to their employees (including
paying a living wage). We also require compliance
with our policies such as data protection and IT
security, as appropriate. We carry out audits of our
suppliers’ compliance and internal control systems
following a risk-based approach.
Regular performance review meetings with
key suppliers help us to monitor performance
against KPIs (which reflect our own performance
commitments). At these meetings, both parties can
raise issues and suggest improvements.
We proactively engage with our suppliers to
address potential supply chain disruptions. This
is particularly the case for essential chemical
supplies that ensure we can maintain water quality.
Such issues are often managed at industry level to
ensure coordination and to facilitate mutual aid
between companies and in liaison with relevant
government departments.
We also engage with our supply chain to promote
innovation and to give them visibility of our
investment plans to help secure sufficient capacity
to deliver our investment.
Feedback received, actions and key decisions
Joint working groups (and other forms of
coordination and cooperation) exist with our key
contractors to ensure the highest standards of
health and safety for our entire workforce (directly
and indirectly employed). These also allow us
to exchange best practice and share alerts on
potential risks.
Partnering arrangements with some key suppliers
enable their teams and ours to work side by side.
We also have forums for early engagement of
construction and engineering partners in the
planning or design of works. These help us to pinpoint
issues early on and to benefit from their input to
identify efficiencies and innovative solutions as
soon as possible.
We have engaged through our trade body, Water
UK, with British Water and the water supply chain to
prepare for the delivery of a much larger investment
programme across the water sector in 2025 to 2030.
We also conducted our own assessment of the
deliverability of our increased engineering and
non-engineering programme of investment for
2025 to 2030 with our supply chain and our key
suppliers, particularly those involved in our capital
programme delivery.
When we agree payment terms with our
suppliers, we have regard to the size and nature of
their businesses.
We also engage with our supply chain to promote innovation and
to give them visibility of our investment plans to help secure
sufficient capacity to deliver our investment
“

Graphics
94 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
PR24 and decision to request a
redetermination
This year was dominated by our response to the
draft determination and our decision to request a
redetermination of Ofwat’s PR24 final determination,
which was published in December 2024.
Following oversight of the preparatory process, the
board took the decision to support a business plan for
2025 to 2030 (AMP 8) focused on the need to invest
in enhancing resilience in a way that matches the
specific characteristics and challenges of each of our
regions (West, Sussex and Kent). The business plan is
predicated on a necessary increase in expenditure
compared with recent regulatory periods including
crucial investment to reduce supply interruptions
and strengthen network resilience.
Drawing on its thorough understanding of our
business plan proposals, the board formed a view
that in its draft determination Ofwat did not
recognise the need for a significant proportion
of the company’s expenditure including for the
enhancements required for resilience. After
consideration of the wider context in which the
company operates, the board supported the
company’s response to the draft determination, in
which we maintained our proposals for investment
and provided more evidence of the need for and
appropriateness of the solutions advanced. Ofwat’s
final determination still did not, in the board’s
view, adequately address our company-specific
circumstances and external challenges. The board
reflected on whether this could leave the company
facing an overall funding gap, including in key areas
of water security (impacting resilience now and in
the future), and a material imbalance in risk and
return (including the risk of significant penalties
for water supply interruptions). The board’s ability
to recognise the seriousness of these risks led to its
decision to seek a redetermination by the CMA.
s172 matters and stakeholders considered
To reach its decision, the board considered a range
of complex short and long-term implications for the
company, its customers and the environment.
In the short-term, requesting a redetermination
could affect the company’s relationship with
Ofwat, which the board acknowledged as a delicate
consideration whilst its investigation into supply
Key decisions in the year
We provide examples below of some key decisions taken by the Board in 2024/25 to illustrate how we
considered stakeholders’ views as well as other s172 matters.
We provide a summary of the board’s activities in 2024/25 on page 145.
Responsible business continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 95
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
resilience was ongoing. The board recognised
that prioritising this for the company would
not appropriately balance the needs of other
stakeholders. Taking a longer-term outlook, the
redetermination process would mobilise significant
management resources in the crucial first year
of AMP 8, requiring a step up in the delivery of
investment and the implementation of an important
change programme. Initiating a redetermination
process would create uncertainty that could
negatively influence the decision of potential lenders
and credit rating agencies at a point when the
company needed to improve its liquidity position.
In the context of heightened public scrutiny of the
sector, a request for a redetermination could cause
negative reputational consequences. Importantly,
the company would incur significant costs to
appeal Ofwat’s final determination and there was
a residual risk that a CMA redetermination could
potentially be less favourable than Ofwat’s final
determination. However, the board also weighed up
the fundamental impacts that it believes the final
determination would have for the company and
all its stakeholders and it formed a view that not
requesting a redetermination would cause more
significant issues for all stakeholders longer-term.
In light of the changes to consumption patterns
experienced since the Covid-19 pandemic and the
more frequent exceptional weather, the board
considers that investment in water security in AMP
8 is essential, and having regard to the long-term,
must be the foundation for further investment in
subsequent regulatory periods to face the challenges
of population growth and climate change.
A central consideration of the board was whether a
redetermination would be likely to be beneficial to
customers. The board formed the strong view that
the company is only likely to be able to deliver for
its customers if its regulatory settlement enables
sufficient resources at a manageable level of
risks. The company had extensively engaged with
customers, who confirmed that they supported
our business plan proposals to invest in regional
resilience. Receiving an uninterrupted water supply
is customers’ top priority, together with affordable
bills. They highlighted they want the company
to address both short and long-term resilience
challenges and showed awareness of the impact
that population growth and extreme weather will
have on the water supply. The board noted that
the company’s proposals to mitigate the impact
of investment on bills through a new social tariff
would be matched to the level of investment
requested by the company in its statement of case
to the CMA.
The prospect of the company and financial resilience
were also key considerations. The board was aware
that there had already been significant uncertainty
among investors and debt providers at a time when
the company had committed to deliver additional
short-term investment in resilience in AMP 7 leading
to an increase in financial requirements. The board
believed that the final determination was seen by
credit rating agencies as unfavourable, representing
a significant increase in sector risks that further
impacted our ability to access debt and equity. A
decision to appeal the final determination would
add to this uncertainty but also potentially remedy
what the board had assessed to be the damaging
imbalance of Ofwat’s final determination.
In this context, the board considered the interest of
ultimate shareholders, who had already contributed
an additional £75 million equity in December 2024
and were in the process of securing £200 million
of further equity in order to preserve the financial
resilience of the company, without the prospect of
a reasonable return under the final determination.
The board also noted Ofwat’s duty to ensure
companies can finance their functions.
Outcome and impact
This led our board unanimously to request a
redetermination to protect water security, restore
a balance between risk and return, take account of
its environmental obligations and ultimately enable
the company to improve service to its customers in
AMP 8 and beyond.
Despite the cost and risks associated with
requesting a redetermination, the board concluded
that a more balanced regulatory settlement was
necessary for the company to be able to fulfill its
purpose as a provider of the public water service
now and in the future, and to be able to carry out
essential work to protect our water resources and
the environment it relies on.
The final decision of the CMA is not known at the
time of writing, and the board remains hopeful
that it has overseen a compelling appeal, so that
the CMA decision will deliver a balanced regulatory
settlement that puts the company on a better
footing in 2025 to 2030 and beyond.

Graphics
96 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Non-financial and sustainability
information statement
This statement provides an overview of the information in the annual report on non-
financial and sustainability matters to help readers understand our development,
performance, position, and the impact of our activity. It includes our climate-related
disclosures on page 98.
Description of our business model
Our business model focuses on value creation through
responsible business, a long-term focus, engagement with
stakeholders and collaboration.
Our business model on page 16
Our strategy and our 2025 to 2030 business plan on
pages 22 to 45
Our purpose on page 14 – Our culture on page 15
Non-financial key performance indicators
Our performance commitments, set out in our price
determination by Ofwat, measure key aspects of our service
and the delivery of our statutory duties.
Our annual incentive plan (AIP) and our senior managers
bonus scheme include health and safety and responsible
business metrics.
Our business performance on page 66
Our AIP metrics on page 183
Principal risks relating to the matters considered in the statement
Our principal risks and factors impacting these areas of risk. Our long-term challenges on page 22
Our risk management and principal risks on page 50
Overview of our approach and practices on matters relevant to this statement
Our strategic direction statement on page 23 and at
southeastwater.co.uk/about/our-plans/strategic-
direction-statement
How we create value for others on page 21
Our section 172(1) statement on page 80
Our key policies, strategies, and outcomes on:
The environment
▶ Protecting and enhancing the environment is part of our
purpose which is incorporated into our articles of association
and our directors’ duties.
▶ Our corporate environmental resilience policy.
▶ Our 25 Year Environment Plan which sets out how we will limit
our impact on the environment and improve its overall health
and how we will work to improve environmental resilience to
the effects of drought, flooding and increasing demand for
tap water.
▶ We deliver an extensive environmental programme including
biodiversity improvements on our SSSIs (WINEP).
▶ We have specific environmental performance commitments.
▶ We manage long-term water resources through our
Water Resources Management Plan in a way that ensures
sustainable abstraction, delivers environmental ambition,
and takes account of climate change.
Our strategic direction statement on page 23
Our 25 Year Environment Plan at
southeastwater.co.uk/25yp
Our Water Resources Management Plan on page 44
Our net zero routemap at
southeastwater.co.uk/routemap
Non-financial and sustainability information

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 97
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
The environment continued
▶ Our drought plan sets out steps to manage drought in a way that
minimises our impact on the environment.
▶ We contribute to the water industry’s public interest commitment
to achieve net zero carbon emissions by 2030 and to reduce leakage
by 2050.
▶ We have adopted a carbon reduction strategy for 2020 to 2025, a net
zero routemap to achieve operational net zero by 2030 and a net zero
target by 2050 including embedded emissions.
▶ Mitigation and adaptation to climate change is an integral part of our
strategic planning.
Our climate change adaptation report at
southeastwater.co.uk/climate
Our performance commitments on
page 66
Our environment on page 86
Our climate-related disclosures on
page 98
Our employees
▶ Our comprehensive people plan defines our strategy on all employment
and people matters, including diversity and inclusion and development.
▶ Our apprenticeship scheme that promotes social mobility.
▶ Our values and behaviours are part of our assessment of
employees’ performance.
▶ We are a Living Wage employer.
▶ We have a comprehensive Thrive 365! health, safety and wellbeing
strategy including mental health and a Thrive 365! Leadership Charter.
▶ We ensure fair pay, reward and recognition for all employees and to
reduce our gender pay gap.
Our people on page 88
Our gender pay gap report at
southeastwater.co.uk/paygap
The health, safety and wellbeing metrics
in our AIP, page 186
Social matters
▶ BS 18477 certification on inclusive service provision.
▶ Our business plan commitments on priority service and vulnerability.
▶ Our vulnerability strategy increases our support to customers and helps
them access our services.
▶ Water industry public interests commitments social mobility pledge.
How we create value for others on page 21
Our customers and communities on
page 84
Our stakeholders and regulators on
page 90
The respect for human rights
▶ Ethical purchasing policy.
▶ Modern slavery policy and statement explains how we monitor our
own compliance and our supply chain compliance with modern
slavery legislation.
▶ Our procurement selection process considers matters related to
human rights and modern slavery.
▶ We require our supply chain to apply similar standards to ours.
Our modern slavery statement
is available online at
southeastwater.co.uk/modern-slavery
Anti-corruption and anti-bribery
▶ We provide regular mandatory training to our employees on
anti-corruption and anti-bribery.
▶ Hospitality gratuities and gifts policy.
▶ Conflict of interests policy.
▶ Speaking Up (whistleblowing) policy, including a confidential
independent channel for protected disclosures, with systematic
reporting to the board in conditions that ensure the protection of
whistleblowers.
▶ We require our supply chain to apply similar standards to ours.
Our people on page 88
Every year, we publish a performance, people and planet report with information on our non-financial
performance and our corporate social responsibility in a clear and accessible format. Our performance,
people and planet report is at performance.southeastwater.co.uk

Graphics
98 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Governance and risk management
Board oversight
The board is responsible for promoting our long-term
sustainable success and for all aspects of our regulated
business. A core component of our purpose is to “create
tomorrow’s water solutions”. Our main duty is to develop
and maintain an efficient water supply system. Our service is
inherently linked to the environment from which we collect raw
water and our operations are directly impacted by the climate
and weather events. Climate change is therefore an essential
consideration for our board.
■ It reviews our principal risks (which include the risk of
climate change) and an annual risk report that assesses
our climate-related risks.
■ It approves our annual reporting including our disclosures
under the TCFD recommendations and our emissions
reporting under the streamlined energy and carbon
reporting (SECR).
■ It receives regular updates on and approves our
long-term plans that set out our responses to climate
change (our WRMP, Drought plan, adaptation report,
net zero routemap).
■ It receives regular updates on the delivery of our capital
programme (including on the delivery of our flood
resilience schemes or drought resilience schemes).
■ It approved proposals to enter into power purchase
agreements that will help us demonstrate our
contribution to the development of new renewable
energy capacity and considered our strategic direction
statement, as well as our WRMP24 and long-term delivery
strategy along adaptive pathways that reflect different
assumptions on the impact of climate change.
Responsible business
committee
The committee has
direct oversight of our
responsible business
policies, including the
management of climate-
related issues and of our
TCFD disclosures.
Audit and risk committee &
remuneration committee
The audit and risk committee
reviews and recommends for
approval by the board our
annual reporting, including
reporting on climate-
related risks, with a focus on
consistency with financial
statements. This role will
increase as we develop our
financial disclosures in coming
years. It also has oversight of
the effectiveness of our risk
management and systems of
internal controls.
The remuneration committee
has set targets related
to TCFD disclosures and
objectives relating to aligning
our approach with the Science
Based Targets initiative.
These climate-related disclosures have been
prepared following the requirements of
section 414CB of the Companies Act 2006 and
the recommendations of the Task Force on
Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (TCFD).
We aim to follow a comprehensive approach to
the management of climate-related risks that is
integrated into our long-term planning. These
disclosures present our current approach to the
management of these risks and opportunities, our
reporting on emissions, and cover the four thematic
areas in the TCFD recommendations: governance,
risk management, strategy, and metrics and targets.
Identification and management of
climate-related risks
Risk management
We carry out specific scenario analysis in line with
the TCFD recommendations and complementary
assessments for our climate change adaptation
reporting to Defra under the Climate Change Act. These
processes identify climate-related risks, their impact
and mitigation, and feed into our long-term plans.
Our long-term adaptive plans are based on different
emissions’ assumptions and incorporate adaptive
pathways to define how we address key challenges
arising from the combination of population growth,
environmental ambition, and climate change.
We submitted and published an updated climate
change adaptation report in November 2024 in the
fourth round of voluntary reporting to Defra under
the Climate Change Act 2008.
Climate-related risks are recorded in our corporate
risk register and scored following our standard
risk methodology, allowing specific reporting and
monitoring. We regularly review the effectiveness
of our controls in compliance with our corporate
governance code principles.
Independent assurance partners assure our
performance monitoring against our commitments
and compliance with our statutory obligations. This
is a key part of how we manage operational and
other business risks,including where climate-related
risks affect performance.
All the processes described above inform how we
define and assess our principal risks which include
climate change and consider the impact of climate
change on the other principal risks.
Climate-related disclosures
Non-financial and sustainability information statement continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 99
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Executive team
The executive team, under the direction of the CEO, comprises the CFO, regulation and
strategy director, customer services director and operations director. It defines and
implements our strategy and manages the operational and financial performance of the
company. It coordinates how climate-related issues are identified and managed consistently
across the various areas of the business.
Management’s role
Regulatory strategic group and
thematic working groups
The regulatory strategic group
provides oversight for the
development of our main
long-term regulatory plans and
policies which define our strategy
to respond to the long-term effects
of climate change.
Other working groups relating to
investment and operational issues
also consider the impact of climate
change in their decisions.
Key business
functions
Several teams are responsible for
assessing and managing climate-
related risks across the business,
especially for our long-term
planning. The main issues that each
role deals with are:
■ Company secretary:
disclosures under the TCFD
recommendations.
■ Head of water resources:
the impact of climate change in
our WRMPs working with WRSE.
■ Head of environment:
the impact of climate change on
our environmental policies and
practices, including relating to
water sources.
■ Head of asset management:
ensuring that our water
supply system will be resilient
to climate change through
adaptation and adaptive
planning.
■ Head of economic
regulation and strategy:
ensuring our business planning
reflects our long-term goals on
resilience to climate change.
■ Carbon strategy and
economic manager:
managing our risk management
process (including for climate-
related risks), implementing
our net zero routemap, PPAs
as well as emissions reductions
& reporting.
Responsible business
steering group
It implements actions and develops
proposals on responsible business
initiatives, including relating to
climate change, and reports to the
responsible business committee.
Members of the responsible
business steering group are also
non-director members of the
responsible business committee
which ensures that the committee
has access to a wide range of
expertise and is able to consider
transversal and complex issues
across the business.
Key
Sets direction, advises
and provides challenge
Implements, reports,
monitors and escalates
Read more
– on our risk man-
agement systems
and principal risks
on page 50.
– on our long-term
planning and
how it addresses
our challenges
including climate
change on
page 42.

Graphics
100 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Scenario analysis
We have identified and assessed climate-related
risks and opportunities using five scenarios derived
from the SSP-RCP framework. These combine
representative concentration pathways, shared
socioeconomic pathways, and policy assumptions
adapted from the network of central banks and
supervisors for greening the financial system (NGFS).
Ofwat’s common reference scenario assumptions
and insights from our own STEEP analysis have also
been incorporated as relevant driving forces.
These scenarios reflect different combinations
of assumptions on the implementation of climate
policy, environmental ambition, water demand
reduction, technological changes and on the
alignment of these drivers with our strategy.
Overview of scenarios used for our analysis
Description Key Parameters Key assumptions
Optimistic:
Rapid global &
UK transition
SSP2
RCP2.6
+1.5°C
▶ 
Rapid global and UK policy changes by 2030 and significant investment in
low carbon technologies.
▶ 
Significant regulatory changes and high environmental ambition in water
and other sectors.
▶ 
Steady increase in physical risks but with relatively lower frequency and
magnitude plateauing in 2050.
Orderly:
Steady global
& UK transition
SSP2
RCP4.5
+2.6°C
▶ 
Steady global and UK policy changes by 2030 and progress of the UK’s net
zero roadmap with moderate investment in low carbon technologies.
▶ 
Moderate environmental ambition outside of the water sector, and more
ambitious environmental and demand reduction targets for the water sector
with moderate investment in water-saving technology.
▶ 
Steady increase in physical risks’ frequency and magnitude.
Disorderly:
Delayed global
& UK transition
SSP2
RCP4.5
+2.6°C
▶ 
Limited global and UK policy changes by 2030 and the UK falling behind on
its net zero roadmap with moderate investment in low carbon technologies.
▶ 
Misalignment in environmental ambition, policy, legislation, and
technological development. Moderate environmental ambition and delayed
investment in water-saving technology in the water sector and limited in
other sectors.
▶ 
Steady increase in the frequency and magnitude of physical risks.
Hot house:
Delayed global
transition &
Steady UK
transition
SSP5
RCP8.5
+4.2°C
▶ 
Limited global policy changes by 2030 and steady progress of the UK’s net
zero roadmap with moderate investment in low carbon and technologies.
▶ 
More ambitious environmental and demand reduction targets in the water
sector with moderate investment in water-saving technology; moderate
ambition and investment in other sectors.
▶ 
Steady then more rapid increase in the frequency and magnitude of physical
risks as critical temperature thresholds are exceeded leading to severe
physical risks over the long-term.
Pessimistic:
Delayed global
& UK transition
SSP5
RCP8.5
+4.2°C
▶
Delayed and limited global policy changes and the UK falling behind
on its net zero roadmap with delayed and limited investment in low
carbon technologies.
▶ 
Misalignment in environmental ambition, policy, legislation, and technological
development. Moderate environmental ambition and delayed investment in
water-saving technology in the water sector; limited in other sectors.
▶ 
Steady, then more rapid increase in the frequency and magnitude of physical
risks as a late transition leads to critical temperature thresholds being
exceeded and severe physical risks over the long-term.
Climate-related disclosures continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 101
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
The position of the scenarios
on the grid reflects the
combination of transition and
physical risks for the relevant
scenario. This categorisation
builds upon the four policy
reference worlds of the
NGFS framework (orderly,
disorderly, hot house world,
too little too late). Scenarios
on the grey background are
based on SSP5 (not used by
NGFS); those on the white
background are based on
SSP2.
Transition risks have been assessed to 2035 reflecting the greater uncertainty that arises from relevant
drivers (policy, technology, and market) beyond that horizon. This aligns with our commitment to achieve
operational net zero by 2030 and encompasses our next two regulatory periods.
Physical risks have been assessed to 2080. This is consistent with our capital planning and investment
horizons, including our WRMP and the life of major assets.
Scenarios & horizons used for the assessment of transition and physical risks
Transition risks Physical risks
Short-term
To 2035
Short-term
To 2035
Medium-term
2035 to 2050
Long-term
2050 to 2080
Low emissions
Optimistic – – Optimistic
Central emissions
Orderly
Disorderly
Orderly
Disorderly
Orderly
Disorderly
Orderly
Disorderly
High emissions
– – – Hot house
Pessimistic
RCP 2.6 RCP 4.5/RCP 6.0 RCP 8.5
Delayed UK &
global transition.
Steady global
transition.
General alignment
with
South East Water’s
strategy.
Rapid global
transition.
Physical risks
Transition risks
Disorderly Too little, too late
Orderly Hot house world
SSP2SSP2 SSP5
High
Low
Low High

Graphics
102 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Climate-related risks, impact, and strategic response
We have used the TCFD categorisation of risks for the assessment of climate-related risks and their impact.
Transition risks
Our analysis of transition risks considers technology risks, market risks, policy, regulatory and legal risks and
reputational risks. We also consider how policy areas (e.g. carbon reduction, environmental ambition and
water demand reduction) across sectors, and how other factors, such as public awareness, may support or
hinder our strategy. Regular stakeholder engagement have informed our views.
1. Technology risks relating to the transition to lower-carbon operations
Impact and variations between scenarios
Uncertainty about the availability, cost and reliability
of the technologies required to meet operational
net zero by 2030, net zero by 2050 and achieving
demand and leakage reductions (which contribute to
reducing emissions).
Potential shortage of the skills necessary to implement
or operate these technologies. Especially in relation to:
▶ High-capacity battery storage to mitigate power
blips and interruptions.
▶ Smart networks and meters for demand and
leakage reduction.
▶ Energy efficient pumps, network equipment and
water treatment processes.
▶ Heavy duty vehicles, compressors and generators
for street works and excavations (e.g. availability
of hydrogen powered vehicles and equipment as
batteries may not provide sufficient power
or autonomy).
▶ Orderly: A more progressive implementation with
supportive regulation limits uncertainties and
facilitate risk mitigation. Net Zero targets are likely
to be substantially met.
▶ Disorderly: Delayed energy transition and misaligned
policies leads to slow technology development and
less capacity in the supply chain, keeping the unit
cost of low carbon technology and products high,
with a greater risk of missing net zero targets (or of
relying on carbon offset) and increased transition
risks approaching 2050.
▶ Optimistic: Net Zero objectives would be met with
ambitious targets, and high pace of transition and
decarbonisation. A rapid roll-out of technology
would increase risks of disruption to operations,
maintenance, and investment delivery and of skills
shortage and supply chain bottlenecks. This would
lead to high initial costs of technology that may later
be superseded.
Financial impact
Strategic response
Expenditure
▶ Increase in totex and operating costs in line with
planning assumptions but with greater risk of
exceeding them in a rapid transition context or
disorderly transition.
▶ See transition risk 3 below for related potential
impacts of price reviews and misalignment
of policies.
Assets and liabilities
▶ Potential write-off or impairment of high-emissions
assets especially in a rapid transition context
requiring a higher rate of asset replacement.
▶ Potential write-off or impairment of unsuccessful
low carbon technologies especially in a rapid
transition context.
▶ Adaptive planning and working with suppliers and
stakeholders to map out in advance the key steps
required to upgrade and future-proof assets and
rationalise expenditure.
▶ Innovation programme with gated investments and
collaboration with other water companies for joint
procurement and investment into new technologies.
▶ Potential increase in offsetting by 2030 to ensure
optimum replacement of existing assets.
▶ Potential change to depreciation of relevant assets.
▶ Potential use of offsetting until end of life of
assets especially for large M&E assets with a life of
20 to 40 years.
Climate-related disclosures continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 103
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
2. Market risks relating to the cost of technology, materials and energy
Impact and variations between scenarios
Uncertainty about the ability of supply chains to scale up
production and meet demand for low-carbon processes
and technology (e.g. construction methods and materials,
vehicles, machinery, renewable energy, chemicals).
Macroeconomic factors, and high demand for relevant
products and technologies may increase pressure on
supply chains, transportation, and drive up the cost of
materials and commodities as decarbonisation deadlines
approach (2030 and then 2050).
Increasing development costs of solar and wind farms,
green hydrogen and of adapting the electricity grid
leading to higher electricity costs and grid charges.
Electricity prices under long duration PPAs for wind and
solar might exceed future assessment of electricity
prices by Ofwat.
Procuring low carbon options to reduce embedded
carbon and potential expansion of carbon pricing may
increase our input costs.
▶ Orderly: Competing demand for low carbon
technologies, products and materials may lead to
cost increases but less so than under an optimistic
scenario. Relative balance between supply and
demand for renewable electricity would have a lesser
impact on the cost of renewable electricity.
▶ Disorderly: Low availability of new technologies and
low carbon products would keep prices high with
potential for delays in decarbonising operations and
reducing embodied carbon. Relatively low renewable
capacity generation would lead to high costs of
renewable electricity (but demand would be lower
than under the other scenarios).
▶ Optimistic: Fast transition across sectors would
lead to high demand for low carbon products and
materials and significant cost increases. High demand
for renewable electricity would lead to higher costs
(on-site renewables, PPAs or grid renewables).
Financial impact
Strategic response
Expenditure
u Increase in totex (including for our investment
programme) and operating costs in line with planning
assumptions but with greater risk of exceeding them
in a rapid transition context or disorderly transition.
u See transition risk 3 below for related potential
impacts of price reviews and misalignment
of policies.
▶ Adaptive planning and working with suppliers and
stakeholders to match supply and demand, capacity
building and ensure the deliverability of investment
at efficient costs.
▶ Procurement strategies to limit costs and maximise
efficiencies through the supply chain.
▶ Collaboration with other water companies to develop
joint procurement and joint investment into new
technologies, materials and processes.
▶ Entering into PPAs (wind and solar) as well as
development of renewable generation on own
sites and adjacent land to diversify our renewable
electricity sources.

Graphics
104 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
3. Policy, regulatory and legal risks
Impact and variations between scenarios
Ofwat’s assessment of the amount and timing of the
required expenditure in mitigation (operational net zero
by 2030 and net zero by 2050) and adaptation may differ
from ours, resulting in underfunding at price reviews,
assumptions on efficiency and base operating costs
that do not fully recognise actual pressure on costs, and
performance penalties incorrectly calibrated.
The potential misalignment of different areas of policy
may make the transition to lower-carbon operations and
investment in adaptation more challenging and costly.
This includes insufficient controls on third parties causing
raw water deterioration, reduction of both our and third
parties’ abstraction without an alternative for the latter,
new drinking water quality standards that increase the
energy and chemical intensity of treatment, competing
pressures on land use including for biodiversity gains.
▶ Orderly: A more progressive rate of change and
better alignment of policies reduce the risk of a
significant regulatory funding gap to achieve 2030
and 2050 emission reduction goals, unplanned
investment, and unforeseen costs.
▶ Disorderly: Slower and more challenging progress,
and greater risk of delay in meeting our 2030
(or greater reliance on offsetting) and potentially
2050 emission goals with reputational impact.
Misalignment of policies increases the risk of a
significant regulatory funding gap, unforeseen
costs and delays.
▶ Optimistic: Rapidly changing carbon policies as well
as requirements to meet ambitious environmental
targets (potentially conflicting due to the pace of
change) require significant and potentially unplanned
investment, but relevant costs would be recovered
through price reviews due to strong policy drivers.
Financial impact
Strategic response
Expenditure
u Increase in totex (including for our investment
programme) and operating costs in line with planning
assumptions but with greater risk of exceeding them
in a rapid or disorderly transition context and greater
risk of underfunding in a disorderly scenario.
▶ Proactive identification of conflicts and
inconsistencies of regulatory requirements and
associated costs in our investment plans, business
plan, and regulatory plans (e.g. WRMP, WINEP) to limit
the risks of underfunding and imbalanced incentives
at price reviews.
▶ Use of alternative delivery models and funding from
other sources (e.g. government grants) to cover
funding gaps (under the optimistic scenario and
orderly scenario).
▶ Industry collaboration to address challenges with
conflicting targets and regulation, engagement with
regulators and policymakers to promote alternatives.
▶ Engagement with stakeholders and customers to gain
their support for adapting net zero commitments
based on the actual support and phasing recognised
by the policy or regulatory context under a
disorderly scenario.
Climate-related disclosures continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 105
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Physical risks
We used spatially coherent temperature and precipitation daily timeseries in 12km grid-squares from the
UKCP18 regional climate model (RCM) for RCP2.6, PCP4.5 and RCP8.5 to better understand the impact of
climate change on our assets and operations in Kent, Sussex and Western regions.
Winters will become wetter, with more frequent heavy rainfall events. Summers will become significantly
hotter and drier, with clear upward trends in frequency of metrics above the thresholds of risk to our assets
and operations and increasing events severity and duration.
1. Supply demand balance and impact of droughts. Risk to supply demand balance and impact of droughts leading to
stretched or insufficient water resources to meet demand and/or low flow limiting abstraction.
Main climate-related metrics considered | Dry weather (low precipitation) | Dry weather with heatwave (compound)
Short and medium-term impact Financial Impact Strategic Response
Pressure to the supply demand
balance is expected to progressively
increase but consistently with water
resources planning assumptions.
▶ Disorderly: Greater uncertainty
and risk of misaligned policies
to achieve leakage and demand
reductions.
Expenditure
▶ Totex in line with planning
assumptions but in the medium to
long-term potentially with higher
cost options and/or acceleration
of investment being required.
▶ Capital investment in smart
networks, smart meters
and supporting technology
(IT systems, software, data
management).
▶ Operating costs relating to
droughts/dry weather and
conjunctive use of sources
increasing in the medium to
long-term.
Revenue
▶ Impact of drought restrictions on
revenue and associated impact
on revenue allowance associated
with ODI penalties.
Assets and liabilities
▶ In the medium to long-term
write-off linked to loss of sources
consistent with water resources
planning assumptions on the
development of new sources.
▶ Investment in WRMP options
including new reservoirs.
▶ Planning for a 1 in 500-year
drought resilience for 2040.
▶ Leakage reduction using smart
networks and operational changes
to the networks as well as
demand management.
▶ Water use restrictions to
manage droughts.
▶ Conjunctive use of water sources
to efficiently use surface and
groundwater sources.
▶ Long-term adaptive planning
using investigations carried out in
the short and medium-term and
improved modelling.
▶ Bringing forward investment
in water resources if sufficient
demand reductions can’t be
achieved in the short and
medium-term.
▶ Additional water resources
options, potentially including
water reuse, bankside storage,
new reservoir, and potentially
desalination in the long-term.
Heavy rainfalls and extreme
temperatures resulting in ground
movement would also increase
leakage and pipe bursts.
Long-term impact
More frequent dry years / droughts
with less recovery time occur under
all scenarios.
▶ High emissions: Greatest chronic
pressure on the supply-demand
balance exacerbated by more
frequent acute weather events.
▶ Optimistic: Ambitious
sustainability reductions in
abstractions could compound
pressures on the supply demand
balance and require bringing
forward new water sources.
▶ Disorderly and pessimistic:
Greater misalignment of drivers
(e.g. less demand reduction,
unsustainable abstraction or
pollution by third parties) would
impact the effectiveness of
our strategy.

Graphics
106 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
2. Heatwave peak demand. Peak demand during heatwaves may exceed network capacity for water distribution,
leading to service disruptions and interruptions of supplies.
Main climate-related metrics | Prolonged high temperatures | Dry weather with heatwave (compound)
Short and medium-term impact Financial Impact Strategic Response
Peak demand may exceed our
supply system capacity especially at
locations with network constraints
(e.g. areas at the end of the network
or supplied from a single source)
which have a greater risk of supply
interruption.
Expenditure
▶ Totex in line with planning
assumptions but potentially with
acceleration of investment in the
short-term (e.g. drinking water
storage, network connectivity and
increased treatment capacity)
and in the medium to long-term
higher cost options being required
(e.g. mains replacement or
new sources).
▶ Operating costs linked to
heatwaves incident management
and customer compensation, with
increasing likelihood and quantum
in the medium to long-term.
Revenue
▶ Impact on revenue allowance
associated with ODI penalties
(interruptions and C-MeX) with a
greater likelihood and quantum
in the medium to long-term
but potentially mitigated by
appropriate investment
in resilience.
▶ Lower revenue following
implementation of use
restrictions.
▶ Short-term resilience schemes
to address existing network
pinch points.
▶ Use of drought plan to implement
water use restrictions to dampen
peak demand.
▶ Increased enhancement
expenditure focused on resolving
supply resilience issues in our
PR24 business plan.
▶ New tariffs (in conjunction with
enhanced demand management
relying on smart networks/
meters) to flatten peak demand
and encourage water efficiency.
▶ Resilience schemes and increasing
interconnections between water
resource zones.
▶ Water efficiency initiatives and
campaigns enhanced during
heatwaves and droughts.
▶ Mains replacement to reduce
leakage and/or acceleration of
resource schemes if leakage
reduction and demand
management options do not
deliver the expected results.
Long-term impact
An increased risk of heatwaves
appears under all scenarios.
▶ High emissions: Higher risk of
heatwaves, dry years or droughts
combined with higher risk of
disruptions caused by acute
weather events (see risk 5) which
can cause damage to assets or
outage and reduce our ability to
cope with peaks in demand.
▶ Optimistic: Greater sustainability
reductions in abstraction from
high environmental ambition,
may lead to the need to develop
or bring forward new sources.
▶ Disorderly and pessimistic:
Less demand reduction would
fail to mitigate the impact of
heatwaves on high demand.
Climate-related disclosures continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 107
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
3. Raw water quality deterioration. Risk of raw water quality deterioration and increased algae presence affecting
resource availability and treatment.
Main climate-related metrics considered | Dry weather (low precipitation) | Prolonged high temperatures | Dry
weather with heatwave (compound) | Hot spells followed by heavy rainfall (flash floods) | Heavy rainfall and
prolonged wet periods
Short and medium-term impact Financial Impact Strategic Response
Higher concentration of pollutants
or other biological material in raw
water during prolonged hot periods
(e.g. low river flows).
Release of sediments, pollutants,
increased turbidity, and sewerage
overflow following heavy rainfall.
Blue-green algae increasingly all year
round in raw water reservoirs.
Potential damage to biodiversity and
reputational damage if algal water
overflows from reservoirs following
heavy rainfall.
▶ Disorderly: Less effective
controls on third parties’ pollution
and abstraction insufficiently
mitigate these risks.
Expenditure
▶ Totex in line with planning
assumptions, with greater risk
of acceleration of investment
in treatment or sources in the
medium to long-term.
▶ Operating costs relating
to operational changes
(e.g. reservoirs and sources
management) increasing in the
medium to long-term.
▶ Operating costs relating to
additional treatment increasing in
the medium to long-term.
Revenue
▶ Impact on revenue allowance
associated with ODI penalties
(interruptions or potentially ERI)
increasingly in the medium to
long-term.
Assets and liabilities
▶ Write-off linked to loss of sources
but consistent with water
resources planning assumptions
on the development of new
sources but with greater risk of
acceleration in a disorderly and
high emission scenario.
▶ Potential liabilities associated
with the release of algal waters.
▶ Increased monitoring and
investigations to identify main
causes and develop action plans.
▶ Catchment management and
nature-based solutions.
▶ Engaging with sewerage
companies and other entities, the
EA and local authorities so they
address causes of raw
water deterioration.
▶ Engaging with the EA, Natural
England and local authorities
about land management measures
to protect raw water quality (e.g.
new source protection zones).
▶ Dredging of reservoirs and
changes to operation of reservoirs
(e.g. to avoid filling after high
flow events).
▶ Treatment alternatives to
mitigate raw water quality
deterioration with increased
likelihood in the medium to
long-term.
▶ Additional treatment
or alternative sources if
interventions with third-party
are not sufficient (with increased
likelihood in the medium to
long-term for nitrate removal
and to enable the conjunctive
use of different sources at
different times.
▶ Additional bankside storage to
enable changes to how reservoirs
are filled and operated.
Long-term impact
Similar impacts as in the short to
medium-term but with increased
likelihood and frequency under all
scenarios.
▶ Disorderly: Similar to short
and medium-term risks with
expected increase in climate
change impact.
▶ High emissions: Highest risk
with significant chronic increase
in summer temperatures and
heatwaves, and flooding and
heavy rainfall during the year.

Graphics
108 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
4. Impact of storms, high wind, extreme heat, and floods on supply system. Acute weather events may take assets
temporarily out of operation or disrupt our operations and water supply.
Main climate-related metrics | Heavy rainfall and prolonged wet periods | Hot spells followed by heavy rainfall (flash
floods) | Prolonged high temperatures | Storms and high winds
Short and medium-term impact Financial Impact Strategic Response
Flooding may disrupt or interrupt the
operation of our water treatment
works causing disruptions or
interruptions to the water supply.
Extreme summer temperatures may
lead to the overheating of assets and
mechanical systems.
Secondary impacts of flooding and
storms such as loss of access to sites
may temporarily reduce operation
resilience, including from secondary
failure where the delivery of supplies,
maintenance or repairs are hindered
preventing normal operations.
Expenditure
▶ Totex in line with planning
assumptions, with increasingly
higher level of investment in
adaptation required in the
medium to long-term especially
under high emissions scenarios.
▶ Capital investment in resilience
to power supply blips and
interruptions.
▶ Operating costs linked to the
management of acute weather
events and related incidents,
increasing in the medium to
long-term especially under high
emissions scenarios.
Revenue
▶ Impact on revenue allowance
associated with ODI penalties
(interruptions and C-MeX)
increasing potentially in the
medium to long-term, but
potentially mitigated by
appropriate investment
in resilience.
Assets and liabilities
▶ Potential write-off or impairment
of assets that may not be
resilient to flooding or that need
accelerated replacement to
ensure resilience of the water
supply system to acute
weather events.
▶ Flood resilience investigation and
mitigation schemes (resilience to
1-in-500-year event by 2040) with
investment in redundancy for
sites that can’t be fully protected.
▶ Additional generators (avoiding
fossil fuels), battery storage
and alternative power supplies
at WTWs and pumping stations
for resilience to blips (leading to
temporary sites’ shutdown) and
longer supply interruptions.
▶ Investment in asset resilience and
in active or passive cooling for
critical network equipment.
▶ Ensure availability of suitable
vehicles in all conditions
(including with transition to
zero emission vehicles).
▶ Investment in remote automated
restart of production sites to
minimise disruption and improve
post-event recovery.
▶ Continuation of the short-term
and medium-term responses set
out above, with increases in the
level of investment to match
additional impact in the
long-term and under higher
emissions scenarios.
Storms and high winds may cause loss
of power and telemetry and affect the
transport infrastructure, resulting in
disruptions or interruptions to the
water service.
The impact of acute weather events
on our supply chain (e.g. chemicals,
construction partners and material
suppliers) may affect operations and
investment delivery.
Long-term impact
Similar direct and cascading impacts
as in the short and medium-term
but with increased likelihood and
frequency under all scenarios.
▶ High emissions: Greater
intensity, frequency and
proximity of acute weather
events exacerbate these impacts,
recovery from them, and reduce
the time windows for the outages
required for maintenance and
construction works.
Climate-related disclosures continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 109
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
5. Sinkholes and ground movement. Sinkhole damaging or disrupting the operation of key assets and ground
movement increasing pipes bursts or leaks.
Main climate-related metrics considered | Dry weather | Dry weather with heatwave (compound) | Heavy rainfall and
prolonged wet periods
Short and medium-term impact Financial Impact Strategic Response
Sinkholes linked to chronic climate
impact on heavy rainfalls and
prolonged dry weather, damaging key
assets requiring emergency works or
asset replacement.
Expenditure
▶ Totex planned and unplanned
for emergency repairs or asset
replacement.
▶ Operating costs linked to sinkhole
incident management.
Revenue
▶ Impact on revenue allowance
associated with ODI penalties
(interruptions and C-MeX).
Assets and liabilities
▶ Write-off or impairment of assets
damaged by sinkholes.
▶ Geological surveys, modelling of
risks of sinkholes and monitoring
for current and future assets in
the short to medium-term.
▶ Continuation of short-term and
medium-term responses above
and specific investment where
appropriate in the long-term.
Increased pipe bursts and leakage
caused by ground movements
resulting from heavy rainfall, extreme
temperatures, and dry soils.
Long-term impact
Similar impacts as in the short and
medium-term but with increased
likelihood and frequency under all
scenarios.
▶ High emissions: The risks of
sinkholes and ground movement
would be relatively higher with
greater frequency and intensity
of high temperatures and heavy
rainfall during the year.

Graphics
110 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
6. Sea level rise and coastal erosion. Sea level rise and coastal erosion affecting access to or causing saline intrusion in
some of our groundwater sources.
Main climate-related metrics | Sea level rise
Short and medium-term impact Financial Impact Strategic Response
Erosion from sea level rise may
compromise access to one of our
coastal sites.
Expenditure
▶ Totex in line with planning
assumptions including specific
schemes for the protection of
affected sites. In the long-term
especially under high emissions
scenarios, higher investment
would be required (e.g. to
develop new sources or new
treatment processes).
▶ Operating costs relating to
additional treatment and changes
to the operation of sources
(e.g. resting groundwater) in
the long-term.
Assets and liabilities
▶ Write-off of sources or assets
permanently affected by coastal
erosion or saline intrusion.
▶ Monitoring of beach and cliff
with ad-hoc maintenance and
material replenishment.
▶ Re-routing access roads to sites
vulnerable to erosion.
▶ Investment in alternative water
sources to replace sources
lost due to coastal erosion or
saline intrusion.
Long-term impact
Sea level rise may potentially lead
to the permanent loss of certain
sites, under all scenarios. Resting of
groundwater sources to mitigate
saline intrusion would require
developing alternative water sources.
▶ High emissions: Greater sea
level rise would be likely to result
in saltwater intrusion in some
aquifers requiring changes to
treatment processes or leading
to the permanent loss of some
water sources.
Climate-related disclosures continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 111
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Strategic planning and resilience
of our strategy
Climate change has contributed to the exceptional
combination of weather events that led to supply
interruptions in network hotspots in Kent and
Sussex between 2020 and 2023. In response, we
have brought forward and prioritised investment
in resilience during the 2020 to 2025 regulatory
period and have exceeded our cost allowance. Our
business plan for 2025 to 2030 includes a significant
increase in resilience investment in Kent and Sussex
and our long-term delivery strategy has identified
further investment in subsequent periods. We
have requested a redetermination of Ofwat’s price
determination by the CMA, as Ofwat had not fully
accepted the need or extent of the resilience
investment we had requested. Subject to the
outcome of the redetermination by the CMA and
subsequent prices reviews, our planned adaptation
is expected to address physical climate risks in the
short to medium-term.
Short-term impact of physical risks is felt through
severe weather events and their impact on
additional costs and lower revenue through ODI
penalties. Stress testing for our long-term viability
assessments reflects these impacts.
We use our five-yearly planning process based on
adaptive planning to address challenges arising
from the combination of population growth,
environmental ambition and climate change, and
ensure our strategy responds to different ‘worlds’ in
our scenarios.
Climate-related risks are drivers of investment in
water resources, our environmental programme
and in our infrastructure and are an integral part
of our long-term delivery strategy and business
plan. We have identified a range of options in
our long-term planning, including low-regret
solutions to achieve a baseline level of resilience
across the scenarios considered in our analysis.
Their implementation may vary across scenarios as
external factors will determine when and how they
should be implemented, as well as their costs and
effectiveness. Under the most severe scenarios,
the implementation of additional responses will
be required (above that baseline level of resilience)
and the operation of our business may be
significantly altered.
Our continuous infrastructure investment
programme addresses factors that determine
the need for maintenance, renewal, replacement
of infrastructure or additional infrastructure. We
consider the impact of physical risks on costs, asset
lives, and potential impairment when defining our
investment programme. This includes investment in
adaptation and to extend the useful life of assets or
develop alternative assets (e.g. new sources of water
to replace those that will no longer be sustainable).
Write-offs and impairment risks are more likely to
materialise in the medium to long-term as climate
projections indicate most significant shifts in
climate patterns from mid-century.
Ensuring long-term resilience should involve regular
and appropriate investment in adaptation and
mitigation within the short-term and medium-
term. Delays in adaptation would be likely to result
in excessive exposure in the long-term when
operational risks associated with capital works on
the water supply system, environmental constraints
and the strongest expected chronic and acute
physical impacts of climate change would converge.
In this context, policy and regulatory risks
substantially determine the financial impact of
transition and physical risks and whether our capital
and operating expenditures in a given scenario
may exceed Ofwat’s cost allowances and whether
performance incentives are appropriately calibrated.
This is also discussed in respect of principal risk 8
(Adverse policies or political & social environment).
Read more
on our long-term planning and how it addresses our
challenges including climate change on page 42.

Graphics
112 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Metrics and targets
Our emissions reduction commitments
Performance commitment for 2020 to 2025
Our performance to-date against our targets for 2020 to 2025 is set out below.
2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25
Target kgCO
2
e/ML 152 120 82 65 58*
Actual kgCO
2
e/ML 192 30 207 203
198
* This target includes all scope 1, 2, and some scope 3 emissions and represents a reduction of our operational emissions of
80 per cent by 2025 (when compared to 2017/18). This is based on the scope of operational emissions as defined before the
introduction by Ofwat of the additional categories of scope 3 emissions – as set out below – and uses a 2019/20 emission
conversion factor for all years in the 2020 to 2025 period.
Our decision not to purchase REGOs as originally
anticipated explains the variance between actual
and targeted emissions from 2022/23. Volatile
energy markets have led to significant price
increases and REGOs no longer provide good value
for our customers. Our focus is instead on securing
direct green PPAs which add renewable capacity in
the UK, even if this means that our market-based
GHG emissions will be above our target until PPAs
come into commercial production. We continue to
monitor the REGO market and downward change in
cost could lead us to resume purchases as part of
our intermediate strategy.
Net Zero commitments
We outline our strategy to achieve operational net
zero by 2030 in our net zero routemap. It represents
a 98 per cent reduction in our operational direct
carbon emissions, with the remaining two per cent
requiring insetting (e.g. carbon sequestration on
company land) and offsetting regionally or in the
UK. This reduction is measured by reference to a
2018/19 operational emission baseline.
We are implementing our routemap in a way that
contributes to the development of new renewable
energy capacity in the UK. Our board has approved
entering into a power purchase agreement (PPA)
relating to a wind farm, which is expected to meet
c.40 per cent of our electricity requirements from
2026. To cover the rest of our electricity needs,
we are considering one or more other PPA and are
working with partners to develop solar generation
on our sites and adjacent land.
We continually review how we can minimise our
carbon emissions, including in-depth energy
management reviews, extended metering, and our
capital maintenance programme of replacing older
assets such as pumps with newer more efficient
pumps which will reduce our energy consumption
and carbon emissions.
We have developed analytics and reporting
surrounding energy per mega litre produced at our
major operational sites, which allow us to optimise
energy use and identify sites that are less efficient
based on energy trends and would benefit from a
revised process or improved assets.
Our strategic direction statement also includes
a net zero commitment by 2050 in respect of all
our operational emissions, including embedded
emissions. We will work with our supply chain to
deliver this objective.
Find out more
about our net zero routemap and on our
strategic direction statement
southeastwater.co.uk/netzero
Climate-related disclosures continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 113
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Emissions reporting
Reporting methodology
To measure and report our emissions under scope
1, 2 and 3 we use the UKWIR Carbon Accounting
Workbook (CAW) provided for all UK water
companies to give a consistent and transparent
approach for accounting for greenhouse gas (GHG)
emissions from annual operational activities. The
CAW provides estimates of the GHGs identified in
the Kyoto Protocol, which are produced as a result
of the operational activities of water companies,
including water treatment and distribution
and sludge management. Estimates are made
following guidance published by Defra and the
Department of Energy Security and net zero, as well
as international guidance.
UK water companies use the tool to report progress
internally and prepare information for reporting
performance to regulatory bodies, voluntary
reporting schemes and customers. It is updated
annually as required in line with UK publication
of conversion factors used for estimating GHG
emissions. The report is therefore a suitable tool for
reporting SECR requirements.
The data comes from various sources across the
business and is placed into a carbon accounting
information pack before being transcribed into the
appropriate areas of the CAW. This allows the CO
2
e
figures for the company to be compiled for external
auditing. This data is then used to calculate the total
associated kWh for purchased energy and transport
using recent year emission factors.
External assurance of the processes and data for
our GHG emissions has been carried out by Ricardo.
Emissions are reported in-line with the GHG protocol
across scope 1, 2, and 3 categories. Undertaking the
verification exercise, Ricardo has therefore reviewed
our carbon footprint data collection and calculation
methodologies in line with the GHG protocol. In
addition we are seeking to renew our ISO 14064
accreditation with the process underway at time of
publication and due by close of July 2025.
Included in the assurance review was:
▶ The data held within our Carbon Accounting
Workbook v19 (CAW) which is used to manage
our carbon management and footprinting.
▶ The primary data on which the CAW is based
(contained within the ‘Carbon accounting
info pack’).
▶ The process manual which defines the
methodology we used for our carbon
management and reporting processes.
Based on the assurance review, Ricardo noted the
methodology to be robust and includes all the
necessary documentation controls and checks.
Also demonstrated was an effective step-by-step
process of the methodology for each of the table
lines, tracing back to the raw data sources.
We provide below information on our performance
commitment for 2020 to 2025, reporting on
emissions as required under Part 7A, Schedule 7
Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups
(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008
and emission reporting according to Ofwat
requirements.

Graphics
Climate-related disclosures continued
114 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Streamlined energy and carbon reporting
Location Based Greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 Unit
1 Annual quantity of GHG emissions for the purposes
of transport. No gas is used for the purpose of
transport. The consumption of fuel for the purpose
of transport falls into several categories: fleet
vehicles, company cars.
1,576 1,821 2,006 2,057 tCO
2
e
2 Annual quantity of GHG emissions resulting
from the purchase of electricity for own use
(including for the purpose of transport). The
electricity usage is divided into four categories:
pumping, treatment, administration and transport.
30,530 28,790 31,140 30,126 tCO
2
e
3 Aggregate equivalent kWh for emissions
under 1 and 2 above.
151,516,643 156,239,208 158,910,754 154,288,911
kWh
4 GHG emission intensity metric – Operational GHG
emissions per mega litre of treated water based on
the emissions set out under 1 and 2 above.
164 155 166 160
kgCO
2
e
/Ml
Market Based Greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 Unit
1 Annual quantity of GHG emissions for the purposes
of transport.
No gas is used for the purpose of transport.
The consumption of fuel for the purpose of
transport falls into several categories: fleet
vehicles, company cars.
1,576 1,821 2,006 2,057 tCO
2
e
2 Annual quantity of GHG emissions resulting
from the purchase of electricity for own use
(including for the purpose of transport)
The electricity usage is divided into four
categories: pumping, treatment, administration
and transport.
0 62,827 57,596 66,631 tCO
2
e
3 Aggregate equivalent kWh for emissions
under 1 and 2 above.
151,516,643 156,239,208 156,910,754
154,288,911
kWh
4 GHG emission intensity metric
Operational GHG emissions per mega litre of
treated water based on the emissions set out
under 1 and 2 above.
8 327
299 342
kgCO
2
e
/Ml
Note: For SECR reporting we utilise both location and market based reporting. Further details on the methodology and assurance
process for the data used for our streamlined energy and carbon reporting (SECR) please refer to explanations set out on page 113.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 115
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions
We measure and report on our scope 1, 2 and 3 operational emissions annually to Ofwat and a summary is
provided below for:
▶ Scope 1 (direct) emissions: Emissions from activities owned or controlled by us that release emissions
into the atmosphere.
▶ Scope 2 (energy indirect) emissions: Emissions associated with our consumption of purchased
electricity, heat, steam and cooling.
▶ Scope 3 (other indirect) emissions: Emissions that are a consequence of our actions and that occur
at sources that we do not own or control, and that are not classed as scope 2 emissions (for example,
emissions from business travel by means not owned or controlled by us or emissions associated with
our supply chain). Our regulatory reporting of operational emissions has been expanded since 2022/23
to cover the following additional scope 3 emissions categories: (i) purchased electricity (including
extraction, production, transmission and distribution), (ii) purchased fuels (including extraction,
production, transmission and distribution), and (iii) chemicals.

Graphics
Climate-related disclosures continued
116 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions continued
Location Based 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 Unit
Scope 1
1 Direct emissions from burning of
fossil fuels (including natural gas
CHP* generated onsite)
508 510 1,747 1,554 1,818 tCO
2
e
2 Process and fugitive emissions** 1,250 1,393 1,274 1,107 1,084 tCO
2
e
3 Transport: Company owned or
leased vehicles
1,612 1,576 1,821 2,006 2,057 tCO
2
e
Scope 2
4 Total grid electricity used by company
(including CHP* electricity
purchased)
34,200 30,845 28,790
31,140
30,126 tCO
2
e
Scope 3
5 Business travel on public transport
and private vehicles used for company
business
40 29 45
51
27 tCO
2
e
6 Outsourced activities (if not included
in scope 1 or 2) Energy and other
3,560 3,230 3,074
3,055 3,055
tCO
2
e
7 Total grid electricity used by company
(including CHP electricity purchased)
– Transmission and Distribution***
2,940 2,730 N/A
(replaced
with
following
line)
N/A
(replaced
with
following
line)
N/A
(replaced
with
following
line)
tCO
2
e
8 Purchased electricity; extraction,
production, transmission and
distribution
N/A N/A 10,155
7,500 9,932
tCO
2
e
9 Purchased fuels; extraction,
production, transmission and
distribution
N/A N/A 1,577
839 909
tCO
2
e
10 Chemicals N/A N/A 5,914
6,680 4,937
tCO
2
e
Gross emissions
11 Gross operational emissions 44,110 40,313 54,397 53,932
53,945
tCO
2
e
Intensity metric
12 Operational GHG emissions per mega
litre of treated water
192 185 275 272
269
kgCO
2
e
/Ml
This metric includes all scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions for energy for pumping and treatment except energy emissions relating to
administration. (This metric includes emissions from diesel generators used at sites and from ozonation at sites.) Since 2022/23
this metric has been simplified as including all emissions in the table.
In the tables below, CO
2
e or Carbon dioxide equivalent means the number of metric tons of CO
2
emissions
with the same global warming potential as one metric ton of another greenhouse gas.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 117
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Market Based 2020/21 2021/22 2022/23 2023/24 2024/25 Unit
Scope 1
1 Direct emissions from burning of fossil
fuels (including natural gas CHP*
generated onsite)
508 510 1,747 1,554 1,818 tCO
2
e
2 Process and fugitive emissions** 1,250 1,393 1,274 1,107 1,084 tCO
2
e
3 Transport: Company owned or leased
vehicles
1,612 1,576 1,821 2,006 2,057 tCO
2
e
Scope 2
4 Total grid electricity used by company
(including CHP* electricity purchased)
41,800 0 62,827 57,596 66,631 tCO
2
e
Scope 3
5 Business travel on public transport and
private vehicles used for company business
40 29 45 51 27 tCO
2
e
6 Outsourced activities (if not included in
scope 1 or 2) Energy and other
3,560 3,230 3,074 3,055 3,055 tCO
2
e
7 Total grid electricity used by company
(including CHP electricity purchased) –
Transmission and Distribution***
2,940 2,730 N/A
(replaced with
following line)
N/A
(replaced with
following line)
N/A
(replaced with
following line)
tCO
2
e
8 Purchased electricity; extraction,
production, transmission and distribution
N/A N/A 10,155 7,500 9,932 tCO
2
e
9 Purchased fuels; extraction, production,
transmission and distribution
N/A N/A 1,577 839 909 tCO
2
e
10 Chemicals N/A N/A 5,914 6,680 4,937 tCO
2
e
Gross emissions
11 Gross operational emissions 51,710 9,468
88,434 80,388 90,450 tCO
2
e
Intensity metric
12 Operational GHG emissions per mega litre
of treated water
230 30 447.3 405 450 kgCO
2
e
/Ml
This metric includes all scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions for energy for pumping and treatment except energy emissions relating to
administration. (This metric includes emissions from diesel generators used at sites and from ozonation at sites.) Since 2022/23
this metric has been simplified as including all emissions in the table.
* CHP – Combined Heat and Power – a process that captures and utilises the heat that is a by-product of the electricity
generation process.
** Process emissions are a consequence of physical or chemical processes (for example in our water treatment).
Fugitive emissions include intentional and unintentional releases (for example refrigerant in air conditioning units).
***Electricity which is lost in the transport and distribution system used for delivering purchased electricity.
Embedded carbon emissions
Since 2022/23, in addition to direct operational emissions we are required to report scope 3 embedded
carbon emissions relating to capital projects and purchased goods and services.
No regulatory target will be set in respect of embedded emission for the 2025 to 2030 period allowing the
water industry to develop their reporting and deliver a consistent dataset. We have worked with Ricardo
Energy and Environment to develop our initial embedded carbon reporting. Initially our reporting of carbon
emissions is calculated based on our spend activity but moving forward our intention is to refine this analysis
with more detailed and specific carbon/material reporting from our suppliers.

Graphics
118 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Our long-term viability
assessment reviewed the
company’s prospects and
considered the principal risks
and uncertainties
“
The company is a regulated long-term utility
business characterised by multi-year investment
programmes and stable revenues. The water
industry in England and Wales is currently subject
to economic regulation rather than market
competition and Ofwat, the economic regulator,
has a statutory obligation to act in the manner
best calculated to secure that water companies are
able (in particular, by securing reasonable returns
on their capital) to finance the proper carrying
out of their appointed activities. Ofwat meets this
obligation by setting price controls for five-year
Asset Management Periods (AMPs). This mechanism
reduces the potential for variability in revenues
from the regulated business. The current AMP
(AMP 8) runs until March 2030.
We do not consider that the regulatory allowances
and targets in Ofwat’s PR24 Final Determination
provide an appropriate balance of risk and return
to investors and deliverability for customers and
the environment, particularly when considering the
substantial investment required both for South East
Water and across the UK water sector during this
AMP and the next. We have therefore referred the
matter to the Competition and Markets Authority
(CMA) for redetermination. While we consider we
have a strong case, the redetermination process
is ongoing and, pending its conclusion, there is
significant uncertainty regarding our level of
allowances and ODI targets for the next five years.
An appropriate regulatory determination for PR24
will have a strong influence on the long-term
viability of the company.
Our assessment of the current financial position is
set out on page 74.
Long-term viability statement
Our long-term viability assessment reviewed the
Company’s prospects and considered the principal
risks and uncertainties. Downside sensitivities have
been developed based on an assessment of the
plausibility and financial scale of these principal
risks. Stress tests have been performed based
on these downside sensitivities (individually and
in combination) to assess the potential impacts
of these risks and uncertainties. The assessment
also considered the mitigating actions that might
be taken to reduce the impact of such risks and
uncertainties and the likely effectiveness of
mitigating actions. Additional detail on the downside
sensitivities tested is set out below.
Assessment period
We have considered the appropriate length of time
over which to provide the viability assessment. In
making an assessment, we have taken account of the
balance between the length of the period assessed
and robustness of such analysis, alongside guidance
from Ofwat. In considering our outlook period we
had regard to the long-term nature of our business
and the characteristics of our regulatory regime as
described above.
On the recommendation of the Audit and Risk
Committee, and in line with Ofwat’s guidance, we
have assessed the prospects of the company over a
period of 10 years to March 2035.
Regulatory mechanisms
We note that at this stage in the regulatory process
the outcome for PR24 is uncertain. We have
assessed two potential outcomes from the CMA
process, one in which it remains unchanged from
Ofwat’s PR24 Final Determination (FD Case) and one
in which it is adjusted in line with the submissions
made in our Statement of Case. Our base case for
each potential regulatory outcome assumes that
the company performs in line with the P50 level
implied by our statistical risk analysis and expected
expenditure based on our detailed cost forecasts.
We have also considered variance in performance
in our sensitivities. The financial sensitivities
considered include positive cashflow adjustments
arising from PR19 regulatory true up mechanisms
such as cost sharing and the RPI/CPIH wedge.
To prepare our long-term viability statement, we have conducted our long-term
viability assessment, taking into consideration our business model, our current
financial position, and principal risks that can affect our business.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 119
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
These result in positive adjustments to AMP 8
revenues and opening RCV where outturns were not
in line with ex ante allowances.
Impact of Covid-19, socio-political
uncertainty and weather events on the
company’s prospects
During the Covid-19 pandemic the government
advised the public to work from home. This resulted
in an unprecedented demand for water within
our region due to the high population of London
commuters. Whilst work-from-home guidance is
no longer in place, many people continue to work
from home on a full or part time basis as companies
have embraced agile working on a more permanent
basis. This change in working culture continues to
drive higher demand for water within our region
compared with pre-pandemic levels. This additional
demand has been further exacerbated by a number
of exceptional weather events experienced over
recent years.
The cost-of-living pressures now being experienced
by our customers are expected to have some impact
on cash collection, notwithstanding our additional
support to help make bills affordable for our
customers most in need. We have made allowance
for the general pressures on household finances
via additional bad debt provisions in our medium-
term plan and have considered the impact of high
inflation on our cost base.
In an effort to manage high inflation economic
uncertainty, we have assessed sensitivities
reflecting both high and low market interest
costs and inflation to inform our assessment of
financial resilience.
Liquidity and financing
In May 2025, our shareholders injected £200 million
of new equity into South East Water Limited. This
equity injection reduces our gearing to c.65 per
cent, further reinforcing the financial stability of
the company. This investment follows a previous
£75 million equity injection made in December
2024, underscoring our shareholders’ continued
commitment to supporting the financial resilience
of South East Water, despite the ongoing
uncertainty regarding PR24 allowances and ODI
targets. The investment by shareholders in the
company does not alter our conclusion, as set out
in our SoC presented to the CMA, that we
do not consider that Ofwat’s PR24 Final
Determination provides the right foundations
for the long-term investability of the water
sector and the delivery of our plan for
our customers.
Additional funding will need to be secured over the
course of the forecast period in order to provide
additional liquidity and finance our plans. The
first issuance of term debt is anticipated in 2026,
following publication of the CMA’s redetermination.
The directors are of the opinion that the new
borrowings will be secured, and we have reflected
this assumption in our modelling.
Under downside scenarios we assume that, where
required, additional debt investment would be
forthcoming. We also assume that equity investment
would be forthcoming from the start of AMP 9, as
required, on the basis that the allowances and ODI
targets for PR29 are set at a level commensurate
with an appropriate risk/return trade-off, and
investors are therefore appropriately incentivised
to invest. We have material concerns that the
risk/return trade-off implied by Ofwat’s PR24 FD,
notwithstanding recent changes to our capital
structure, could be insufficient to attract equity
investment and could also jeopardise our ability to
raise debt finance at reasonable commercial terms
typical for an investment grade company.
Assuming the CMA’s redetermination addresses
the most material concerns we have with the risk
and return balance implied by Ofwat’s PR24 FD, we
expect to maintain strong investment grade credit
ratings in the forecast period, which would support
investability and financial resilience. Our credit
ratings depend on a balanced outcome from the
CMA’s redetermination process.
Stress testing
The company reviews and considers the risks to which
the business is exposed and potential impacts on
viability on an ongoing basis; this includes structured,
systems-based risk identification processes and
management controls, robust budgeting and
forecasting and continuous sensitivity analysis.
Principal risks represent all factors that could
prevent the company from delivering its strategic
objectives and business plan. As a result, not all
principal risks translate directly into a downside
sensitivity. The company has considered
the principal risks and uncertainties for the
company and their potential impact on viability.

Graphics
Long-term viability statement continued
120 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Sensitivity tested Specification of sensitivity Related principal risks
Sensitivity 1 & 2
– Macroeconomic
shocks
We assess a low/high scenario of inflation and interest rates,
noting the generally accepted assumption that market interest
rates and inflation tend to move in the same directions.
The company’s revenues are linked to inflation. Low or negative
inflation tends to adversely impact operating profits and cash
flows as decreases in revenues exceed decreases in costs and visa
versa. Low interest rates reduce the company’s net interest costs.
Economic environment
and Financing
Sensitivity 3
– Severe and
persistent totex
underperformance
Severe and persistent total expenditure (totex) overspend
throughout AMP 8 represents one of the most significant
potential financial challenges for the company. As an extreme
stress test, we have assessed the impact of P10 performance
levels for totex overspend, which are substantially higher than
our base case projections.
Under the FD Case, this P10 totex downside sensitivity projects
a total totex overspend of £627.6 million over AMP 8 in nominal
prices, significantly exceeding the P50 totex overspend of
£188.2 million in the FD Case. For the SoC, the P10 totex
downside sensitivity equates to a total totex overspend of
£428.3 million, compared to a P50 totex overspend of £28.4
million in the SoC.
We consider the likelihood of this level of persistent
underperformance to be remote.
Operational performance
Investment programme
delivery
Water resources and
climate change
Delivery of business plan
Where it is assessed that (1) it is plausible a principal risk could occur and (2) the financial impact
could be material, the implications for financial resilience are assessed in the LTVS through defined
downside sensitivities.
Based on the principal risks, we have identified below the relevant risk factors that can cause negative
impact on the financial position of the company. We then construct downside sensitivities focusing on
different combinations of the risk factors.
Our sensitivities combine qualitative and quantitative criteria and cover the following risk factors to assess
their impact on liquidity and compliance with financial ratios until March 2035:
▶ Outturn inflation under forecast: Inflation risk primarily relates to the fact that the price control is
in real terms and the allowed revenue moves up by a designated inflation figure (CPIH for PR24) while
some of the costs are fixed in nominal terms. This means that when inflation is lower than costs in
nominal terms, the company will face the risk of underfunding on these elements.
▶ Interest rate above forecast: Interest rate risk can result in an increase in borrowing rate for new debt
raised, and it can increase the borrowing cost for any floating rate debt.
▶ ODI penalties: The effect of ODI penalties as a result of miscalibrated performance commitments and
unexpected adverse events can materialise through a reduction in revenue, which has been considered
in our assessment.
▶ Totex overspend: Totex over-spend is a risk that we have assessed carefully, when considering scenarios
of company underperformance as well as unexpected costs due to severe weather-related incidents.
▶ PR24 regulatory allowances and ODI targets: The CMA’s PR24 redetermination is not yet confirmed
and could have a material impact on the level of revenues the company is able to generate in AMP 8.
As set out in our SoC, Ofwat’s PR24 FD is inappropriate and places undue pressure on the company’s
finances. For the purposes of our viability testing, we have assessed scenarios in which the CMA
redetermination is set a) in line with Ofwat’s PR24 FD, and b) in line with our SoC.
Our downside sensitivities include individual and combination scenarios that we considered to be severe but
plausible. These are summarised in the table below:

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 121
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Sensitivity tested Specification of sensitivity Related principal risks
Sensitivity 4
– ODI penalty
Failure to deliver performance at the Final Determination level
can lead to significant Outcome Delivery Incentive (ODI) penalties.
We have assessed a severe ODI penalty scenario, which considers
performance at the P10 level for both the FD Case and the SoC
downside scenarios through AMP 8. This level of performance is
determined by statistical analysis of historical data across the
water sector.
The FD Case P10 downside scenario accounts for a total ODI
penalty of £150.3 million over AMP 8. In comparison, the SoC P10
downside scenario projects a total ODI penalty of £64.3 million
over AMP 8. These penalties primarily stem from water supply
interruptions, leakage, and per capita consumption.
Operational performance
Investment programme
delivery
Water resources and
climate change
Delivery of Final
Determination and
performance against ODIs
Sensitivity 5
– Severe totex
underperformance
This downside reflects a severe underperformance on totex
(at P10). ODI performance remains at base case level under the
FD Case and SoC, which implies totex overspend was driven by
factors unrelated to input prices like scope and design changes.
Macroeconomic factors impact is reflective of base case levels
for both the FD Case and SoC.
This sensitivity assumes the following:
Low inflation and interest rates, totex performance at P10 levels.
for the remainder of AMP 8; and ODI underperformance at the
P50 level for the remainder of AMP 8.
Operational performance
Investment programme
delivery
Water resources and
climate change
Delivery of business plan
and performance
against ODIs
Economic environment
and Financing
Sensitivity 6
– Severe ODI
underperformance
Combination
This downside scenario implies a low inflation and interest rate
macroeconomic scenario and severe underperformance on ODIs
(at P10). Totex performance remains at P50 level.
This sensitivity assumes the following:
Low inflation and interest rates, totex performance at P50 base
case levels for the remainder of AMP 8.
ODI underperformance at the P10 level for the remainder
of AMP 8.
Operational performance
Investment programme
delivery
Water resources and
climate change
Delivery of business plan
and performance against
ODIs
Sensitivity 7
– Combination
Severe
macroeconomic
volatility
This downside scenario implies high inflation and interest rates
and plausible underperformance on both totex and ODIs. We
assume that underperformance based on the P50 levels could be
compatible with the sustained adverse macro conditions.
This sensitivity assumes the following:
High inflation and interest rates; totex performance at the P50
level for the remainder of AMP 8; and ODI underperformance at
the P50 level for the remainder of AMP 8.
Operational performance
Investment programme
delivery
Water resources and
climate change
Delivery of business plan
and performance
against ODIs
Sensitivity 8
– Severe overall
performance
This is the most drastic of the combination scenarios and
represents a situation where several of the severe scenarios above
occur simultaneously This downside scenario implies high inflation
and interest macroeconomic scenario. Simultaneously, the totex
and ODI performance would encounter severe underperformance
driven by factors outside of the company’s control like more
frequent extreme weather, base case CPIH-inflation and interest
rates and a high RPI-CPIH wedge at the P90 level.
This sensitivity assumes the following:
Totex performance at the P10 level for AMP 8; and ODI
underperformance at the P10 level for AMP 8.
Severe macroeconomic underperformance at P10 levels.
While this scenario is plausible it is viewed as being highly unlikely
to occur.
Delivery of business plan
Financing

Graphics
122 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Assessment results and
mitigation strategy
Our securitised financing arrangements include
covenants with default event and trigger thresholds
which are reported bi-annually.
The results of our assessment revealed that,
assuming an appropriate regulatory determination
for PR24, none of the stress-testing scenarios would
lead to a default event in servicing the company’s
debt, nor would they lead to adverse impact on
customer service or the company’s ability to carry
out normal operational activities. In the most
severe downside cases a trigger event could
occur, but this is not a threat to the company’s
financial viability. Any such breach of the
trigger threshold would activate initial creditor
protections
1
under the terms of the securitised
financing arrangements, which are designed to
maintain the company’s creditworthiness without
disrupting its ability to trade and raise finance, such
as restrictions on dividends. None of the scenarios
resulted in an impact on the company’s expected
financial viability that cannot be reasonably
mitigated using the existing safeguards within the
company’s financing structure.
It is also expected that South East Water would
maintain its investment grade credit rating in all
sensitivities modelled assuming the CMA agrees
with the regulatory allowances and targets set out
in our CMA SoC, as appropriate mitigating actions
(such as potential shareholder equity injections)
would be applied to avoid a downgrade below
minimum investment grade.
If the CMA outcome does not provide appropriate
and sufficient movement from Ofwat’s PR24
FD, the company will have less headroom on its
covenant ratios and is more likely to breach trigger
event thresholds. While we still expect to satisfy
covenants designated as events of default under
our financing arrangements, even under the most
severe downsides, persistent pressure on totex and
ODIs could drive gearing towards levels which are
unattractive to lenders in the current environment.
As a result, South East Water’s cost of debt could
increase materially (and likely materially above the
cost of debt allowance set out in Ofwat’s PR24
FD). Equity investors could also be disincentivised
from investing, further driving the reliance on
debt investors.
Furthermore, if the CMA outcome remains
unchanged from Ofwat’s PR24 FD, a number of
the downside sensitivities assessed imply a high
likelihood of downgrade in credit rating from Baa3/
BBB-to below investment grade, in the absence of
mitigating actions. These findings are consistent
with South East Water’s PR24 submissions regarding
the notional company, reaffirming that the key
challenges are driven by Ofwat’s risk allocation and
cost allowances rather than our capital structure.
Rating agencies have also noted in their recent
publications that their guidance could be tightened
if it appears likely that South East Water will suffer
a structural shortfall in totex allowances or accrue
material Outcome Delivery Incentive (ODI) penalties
in future controls stemming from the operational
and resilience challenges implied by Ofwat’s
PR24 FD.
The assessment also considers potential mitigating
actions that the company could undertake to reduce
the impact of the sensitivities considered, which are
further detailed in the following sections.
The directors have identified actions, including
reducing discretionary outflows of funds and
working with providers of finance (debt and equity),
that could be available to the company to mitigate
the impact of adverse outcomes.
As part of the assessment of the resilience of the
company and the regulated business, we take into
account the impact of the overall group structure
and intra-group transactions. The resilience and
viability of the group is assessed on a continuous
basis, including any implications of the financial
projections of the wider group for the regulated
business and vice versa. We have not identified any
issues from our recent analysis of viability across the
group that are likely to impact on the resilience of
the company.
1
Creditor protections under a Trigger Event include:
1. No payment of distributions.
2. A remedial plan to be agreed with Security Trustee (who acts
for the debt investors on a collective basis).
3. Security Trustee may commission an independent review.
4. If continuing for more than six months, the Security Trustee
can appoint non-executive directors up to 20 per cent of
the board.
Long-term viability statement continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 123
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Sensitivity tested Potential impacts on viability without mitigating action
Sensitivities 1 & 2
– High/Low inflation
and interest rates
Under these scenarios, we project that South East Water maintains compliance with all
financial covenant thresholds for both the FD Case and the SoC.
While overall credit rating metrics generally align with the base case due to higher/lower
revenues (from inflation) offsetting increased/decreased operating costs and debt interest,
important distinctions emerge between the two regulatory scenarios.
Under the FD Case certain credit metrics, specifically those assessed by S&P, fail to meet
current investment grade guidance during AMP 8. This reinforces our view that the FD Case
does not provide a financially resilient foundation for South East Water, implying a likely
downgrade to sub-investment grade by at least on rating agency, despite gearing remaining
below 70 per cent.
Under the SoC credit metrics demonstrate significantly greater resilience. Only S&P’s
revised FFO/Debt guidance is briefly breached in FY25/26 before recovering, with all other
credit rating thresholds met with comfortable headroom throughout AMP 8. Regulatory
gearing is forecast to remain in the mid 60’s.
In both the FD and SoC, South East Water maintains sufficient available liquidity.
Sensitivity 3
– Severe and
persistent totex
underperformance
All covenant ratios that would lead to an Event of Default remain in compliance under both
the FD Case and the SoC.
Under the FD Case, South East Water’s Adjusted Interest Cover Ratio (AICR) and Average
AICR breach covenant trigger event thresholds throughout AMP 8. This reflects significant
operating expenditure (opex) overspend and increased interest expense from funding the
P10 Totex overspend. While a Trigger Event does not immediately affect the long-term
viability, persistent breaches of Trigger Event thresholds could negatively impact the
company’s ability to attract the investment required to fund the much-needed capital
investment programme.
Under the SoC, South East Water would breach trigger event financial covenants in
FY25/26 only. A temporary Trigger Event is not seen as a threat to South East Water’s
financial viability or resilience. Trigger Events are designed to act as an early warning to
reinforce creditworthiness and reduce the likelihood of an Event of Default occurring.
Key consequences include:
1. No payment of distributions (dividends).
2. Agreement of a remedial plan with the Security Trustee (representing debt investors).
3. The Security Trustee may commission an independent review.
4. If persistent (over six months), the Security Trustee can appoint non-executive directors
(up to 20 per cent of the board).
Under the FD Case, credit metrics in this sensitivity fall below investment grade guidance
throughout AMP 8, indicating a high likelihood of sub-investment grade downgrade
without mitigating actions. Gearing could rise to unsustainable levels and a significant
equity injection may therefore be required, which might not be forthcoming if the risk/
return balance implied by the regulatory regime is not appropriately set. This reinforces our
conclusion that Ofwat’s PR24 FD is not a financially resilient outcome.
Under the SoC, South East Water is more resilient. Despite the severity of this downside
operational scenario, Moody’s credit metrics are expected to remain above investment
grade (with the possibility of limited temporary breaches in the AICR). Gearing peaks around
c.72 per cent in AMP 8 and reduces to c.65 per cent in AMP 9 (assuming appropriate AMP 9
regulation). S&P’s FFO/Debt ratio breaches the guidance level for South East Water’s current
‘Strong’ business risk profile (as assessed by S&P). However, regaining an ‘Excellent’ business
risk profile (post-CMA redetermination) could help South East Water retain an investment
grade rating with S&P.
The table below considers the potential implications for each downside scenario, prior to mitigating actions.

Graphics
124 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Sensitivity tested Potential impacts on viability without mitigating action
Sensitivity 4
– ODI penalty
Sensitivity 4, does not fall below the covenant ratio thresholds that would result in an Event
of Default in either FD Case or SoC. The Average AICR, which results in a Trigger Event falls
below the covenant threshold in the last two years of AMP 8 under the FD Case only, before
recovering in AMP 9.
The increased ODI penalties, which are applied with a 2-year lag to revenues, cause a
reduction in FFO, resulting in a decrease in Moody’s AICR and S&P’s FFO/Net debt.
Under the FD Case the higher penalties put additional pressure on credit rating agency
thresholds. Under this sensitivity credit rating metrics are persistently at sub-investment
grade levels with S&P and Moody’s, before recovery in AMP 9. There is a risk of a sub-
investment grade credit rating under this sensitivity.
Under the SoC, this sensitivity results in Moody’s ratios remaining investment grade and
S&P’s FFO/Debt dipping below investment grade in one year only, which would not expect to
result in a sub-investment grade credit rating.
Consistent with the financing assumptions outlined for the FD Case and SoC, there is
sufficient available liquidity under both sensitivities.
Sensitivity 5
– Combination
1: Severe totex
underperformance
Under Sensitivity 5, all covenant ratios that would result in an Event of Default if breached
continue to show headroom in both the FD Case and SoC.
Financial projections under this sensitivity fall below South East Water’s covenant trigger
event threshold under the FD Case during the forecast period. AICR and Average AICR are
breached consistently throughout AMP 8. Under the SoC, AICR and Average AICR covenants
are breached in 25/26 only before recovering for the remaining years in AMP 8 and
throughout AMP 9.
Gearing under the FD case, absent further equity injections, increases to 85 per cent, which
is a trigger event under our covenants. This level of gearing is higher than Moody’s guidance
for an investment grade rating and we would therefore expect South East Water to be rated
sub-investment grade with Moody’s under the FD Case if this severe underperformance
downside were to materialise.
Given the changed funding dynamics for the industry, as evidenced by recent challenges
faced by other water companies, elevated gearing levels significantly diminishes lender
appetite for further financing. This creates a pronounced financeability risk, meaning that
without additional equity investment, the company would face challenges in securing the
necessary funds to meet its operational and capital expenditure requirements, ultimately
leading to financing shortfalls. This highlights the substantial scale of the financial resilience
challenge under Ofwat’s PR24 FD.
Under the SoC, gearing increases to 73 per cent by 2030, which is well within our trigger
event threshold and also within Moody’s guidance for an investment grade credit rating.
As long as the reasons for the totex underperformance are not expected to be persistent
and will be addressed as part of PR29, we expect to maintain an investment grade credit
rating with Moody’s and for our lenders to support our liquidity position. S&P’s FFO/Debt is
persistently below investment grade guidance levels in AMP 8 and there is the potential for
our investment grade credit rating to be removed under this scenario with S&P. We have the
option to also explore a credit rating with Fitch to support our target of maintaining at least
two investment grade ratings at all times.
Sensitivity 6
– Combination 2:
Severe ODI penalty
Sensitivity 6, characterised by (P10) ODI penalties and low macroeconomic forecasts,
neither falls below the covenant ratio thresholds that would result in an Event of Default nor
a trigger event in either the FD Case and SoC.
Assuming the CMA outcome remains unchanged from the FD, under this sensitivity credit
rating metrics are likely to be sub-investment grade with Moody’s & S&P, due to consistent
breaches in AICR and FFO/Debt across AMP 8.
Under the SoC, S&P’s FFO/Debt falls below investment grade in one year only, with Moody’s
AICR remaining above investment grade throughout, indicating that we would likely maintain
our investment grade credit rating with both rating agencies under this scenario.
There is sufficient liquidity headroom in line with sensitivity 4 analysis.
Long-term viability statement continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 125
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Sensitivity tested Potential impacts on viability without mitigating action
Sensitivity 7
– Combination
3: Severe
macroeconomic
volatility
Financial projections under sensitivity 7, which is characterised by high inflation, interest
costs and moderate underperformance on both totex and ODIs do not fall below any of the
financial covenant thresholds under the FD Case or SoC. Higher revenues, due to increased
inflation, are offset by increased operating costs and higher interest on debt.
Under the FD Case credit metrics are consistently below S&P’s investment grade guidance
levels in all years of AMP 8. Moody’s AICR for FY25/26 also falls below investment grade
thresholds in one year, before recovering throughout the remainder of the AMP 8 and 9. This
would likely suggest an investment grade rating maintained with Moody’s but not with S&P
under the PR24 FD regulatory framework.
Under the SoC, credit metrics only fall below S&P’s current guidance in 2025/26, before
recovering throughout the rest of AMP 8. All other credit rating thresholds are met with
comfortable headroom, include Moody’s AICR. We would expect an investment grade credit
rating to be maintained with both rating agencies under this scenario.
Under the FD Case gearing is expected to slowly increase to c.70 per cent by the end of AMP
8, absent further equity injections, before staying flat in AMP 9. Under the SoC gearing could
gradually reduce, assuming no dividends, to c.62 per cent by the end of AMP 8.
Sensitivity 8
– Severe overall
performance
This is the most extreme of the combination scenarios and represents a situation where
several of the severe scenarios above occur simultaneously. All covenant ratios that would
result in an Event of Default if breached, continue to show headroom in both the FD Case
and SoC.
FD Case financial projections under this sensitivity fall below the AICR Trigger Event threshold
consistently across AMP 8. In the absence of further equity injections, we anticipate high
gearing levels up to c.87 per cent by the end of AMP 8. Despite gearing not constituting an
automatic Event of Default at these levels, it severely curtails lender appetite for further
financing, making it extremely challenging to secure the necessary funds to meet operational
and capital expenditure requirements. The company would likely require significant cuts to
the capital programme to avoid gearing spirals.
Shareholders may not be incentivised to invest if the CMA outcome is not appropriately
recalibrated and the company severely and persistently underperforms as a result. In this
context it is also likely that South East Water would be rated sub-investment grade with
both rating agencies and could breach our licence to operate unless a series of remedial
undertakings are agreed with our regulators.
Under the SoC we would be in breach of the AICR covenant Trigger Event threshold across
all years excluding 26/27 in AMP 8. The business would see gearing reaching levels of c.74
per cent by the end of AMP 8, before levelling out over the course of AMP 9 assuming an
appropriate reset to the regulatory framework at that time.
Gearing would be projected to remain within Moody’s investment grade guidance and
Moody’s AICR only breaches investment grade threshold in one year. As a result, we would
expect our investment grade credit rating to be maintained with Moody’s.
Under the SoC, S&P’s FFO/Debt is persistently under investment grade threshold under this
sensitivity, and we would assume our credit rating would fall below investment grade with
S&P in the absence of mitigating actions (such as reductions to the capital programme and/
or additional equity investment).
Under the FD Case our ability to maintain our liquidity would be challenging as support from
lenders in 2028 to fund the maturing £166 million loan in 2029 would not be guaranteed.
Under the SoC we would expect more readily available support from both lenders and
shareholders if required.

Graphics
126 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Description
Related scenarios/
downside sensitivities Potential mitigating actions
Change in inflation
or interest rates
Sensitivity 1
High inflation and
interest rates
Sensitivity 2
Low inflation and
interest rates
Reduce discretionary expenditure.
Reduce working capital to support cash flow.
Additional draw down on credit facilities.
Underperformance
on ODIs
Sensitivity 4
ODI penalties
All combination
downside sensitivities
Reduce discretionary expenditure to cover costs relating
to penalties.
Additional draw down on credit facilities.
Discuss the impact of debt covenants with lenders and seek a
temporary waiver if required.
Higher costs
than Ofwat Final
Determination
Sensitivity 3
– Severe totex
underperformance
All combination
downside sensitivities
A reduction in discretionary expenditure.
Consider additional efficiency programmes which seek to bring
costs in line with regulatory allowances.
Additional draw down on credit facilities.
Discuss the impact of debt covenants with lenders and seek a
temporary waiver if required.
Discuss the temporary impact of external factors on credit
metrics with rating agencies and make adjustments if required.
Additional equity investment (provided the regulatory
allowances and targets for PR24 are sufficient to
attract investment).
Mitigating actions
In the event of more extreme but low likelihood
scenarios occurring, there are a number of key
mitigations available to the company.
The regulatory framework includes mechanisms to
adjust future revenues and RCV to partially offset
cost under recovery when compared to the Final
Determination. As well as the protections that exist
in the regulatory framework, a number of actions
are available to mitigate more severe scenarios,
which include the raising of new finance; capital
programme deferral or reduction of discretionary
expenditure; considering additional efficiency
programmes which seek to bring costs in line with
regulatory allowances; discussing the impact on
debt covenants with lenders and seeking a
temporary waiver if necessary; the temporary
restriction or re-phasing of dividend payments;
and accessing additional equity. As outlined in
our SoC presented to the CMA, we do not believe
that Ofwat’s PR24 FD is appropriately calibrated to
attract and retain investment. As such, accessing
additional equity or raising new debt finance may
not be available as mitigating actions under the
FD Case.
For each scenario and sensitivity, we have considered
and identified appropriate mitigations in the event
that a severe scenario or sensitivity used for stress
testing were to result in a significant deterioration
in projected financial metrics. In selecting which
mitigating actions to apply, we would seek to balance
the interests of all stakeholders and, in particular,
would prioritise mitigating actions that would not
lead to a breach of our commitments to customers.
The table below illustrates the relevant financial
mitigating actions which would be considered in
each scenario.
Long-term viability statement continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 127
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Viability statement
The board has assessed the viability of the company over a ten-year period to March 2035, taking into
account the company’s current position, principal risks, and effectiveness of any potential mitigating actions.
Based on that assessment, the directors have a reasonable expectation that the company will be able to
continue to operate and meet its obligations over the period to March 2035, subject to an appropriate PR24
redetermination by the CMA.
Governance and assurance
The analysis underpinning this assessment has been through a robust internal review process. The board
has reviewed and discussed the process undertaken by management and also reviewed the results of the
stress tests performed, including the key credit financial ratios, the company’s liquidity, and ongoing ability
to meet its financial covenants.
The board also provides robust internal assurance by reviewing and challenging the stress test scenarios
selected and risk mitigation strategies. As part of the assurance process, the board has taken into account
the principal risks and uncertainties facing the company, and the actions taken to mitigate those risks.
The board reviews and approves the medium-term plan on which this viability statement is based. The board
also considers the period over which the assessment of prospects and viability statement should be made.
The Audit and Risk Committee support the board in performing this review. In addition, our external auditor
reviews this viability statement and the outputs of our stress testing as part of its normal audit procedures.
It considers whether these are consistent with the directors’ conclusion with respect to business viability,
and if the processes undertaken are sufficient to support the statements made.
Their report, including comments on the viability statement, is set out in the Annual Report.
Description
Related scenarios/
downside sensitivities Potential mitigating actions
Severe event
– relating
to weather,
operational
failure, or another
exceptional event
Sensitivity 3
– Severe totex
underperformance
All combination
downside sensitivities
Consider additional efficiency programmes which seek to
bring costs in line with regulatory allowances.
Reduction of discretionary expenditure.
Reduce working capital to support cash flows.
Additional draw down on credit facilities.
Discuss the temporary impact of external factors on credit
metrics with rating agencies and make adjustments if required.
Additional equity investment (provided the regulatory
allowances and targets for PR24 are sufficient to
attract investment).
PR24 allowances
and targets are
insufficient
to attract
investment
All scenarios considered
under the OFWAT’s
Final Determination
Additional drawdown on credit facilities.
Additional debt issuance (i.e. increase gearing), provided
sufficient lender appetite.
Capital programme deferral or reduction of
discretionary expenditure.
Considering additional efficiency programmes.
Discussing the impact on debt covenants with lenders and
seeking a temporary waiver if necessary.

Graphics
(2024: £1,348.4 million). Details of the borrowings
including their respective maturities are set out
in note 18. Net cash interest payments in the year
amounted to £48.4 million (2024 £45.9 million).
Under the terms of its banking arrangements, the
group and company has to comply with a number
of financial covenants based on interest cover
and gearing ratios, both on a retrospective and
a prospective basis. Breach of these covenants
can result in either a Trigger Event or a Default
Event. A Trigger Event activates initial creditor
protections under the terms of the group and
company’s securitised financing arrangements,
which are designed to maintain South East Water’s
creditworthiness without disrupting its ability to
trade. The Trigger Event operates to prevent cash
payments out of the ring-fence group (comprising
South East Water Limited, South East Water (Finance)
Limited and South East Water Holdings Limited) to
affiliated entities, providing a degree of protection
to these companies and specifically to the operation
of the regulated business of South East Water.
The Trigger Event preserves the value of the group
and company, which is in the interests of creditors
and customers.
128 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
In preparing the financial statements the directors
considered the group and company’s ability to
meet its debts as they fall due for a period of at
least one year from the date of this report. The
directors believe that it is appropriate to adopt the
going concern basis of accounting in preparing the
financial statements, notwithstanding the material
uncertainty discussed below. The consolidated
financial statements for the year ended 31 March
2025 and set out on pages 200 to 283 have been
prepared on the going concern basis.
The group’s operating profit for the year was
£54.5 million (2024: £63.8 million) and the loss
before tax was £19.8 million (2024: loss of £36.7
million). The group and company finances its
working capital requirements through cash
generated from operations and committed
facilities that can be called upon as required. The
group and company liquidity position and cashflow
projections are closely monitored and are updated
each month. When necessary, mitigating actions
are identified and implemented. At 31 March
2025 the group had cash in hand of £36.1 million
(2024: £5.0 million) and undrawn bank facilities of
£56.0 million (2024: £28.0 million). Total borrowings
at 31 March 2025 amounted to £1,395.4 million
Going concern statement
We continue to comply with the financial covenants set out in our securitisation
structure and continue to hold ratings from Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s consistent
with the requirements of both our securitisation and our instrument of appointment.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 129
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
The board has considered the draft budget for the
year ending 31 March 2026. The ratios calculated
on the basis of the draft budget for 2025/26 are
compliant with all financial covenants. There is
significant headroom on the Interest Cover Ratio and
Regulatory Asset Ratio, the breach of which would
result in an Event of Default, and it is considered
highly unlikely that this would occur. The Adjusted
Interest Cover Ratio is showing less headroom, being
affected by the variability of operating cash flows.
As part of the going concern assessment, the
directors have considered the budgeted and
forecast cash flows over the 12 months to July 2026,
the capital structure of the group and company and
the financing needs for the period. Cash flows
have been based on the Final Determination
issued by Ofwat in December 2024 and do not
include adjustments that might result from the
ongoing referral of the Final Determination to
the Competition and Markets Authority. The cash
flows for the period to 31 March 2026 are consistent
with the draft budget. Having considered the
forecast cash flows over the 12 months to July
2026 the directors are of the view that the group
and company has sufficient resources to meet its
commitments over the going concern period.
However shortly after the end of the going concern
period the company will need to renew the Revolving
Credit Facility that expires in September 2026, in
order to continue to meet its commitments.
The PR24 business plan is the group’s most
ambitious business plan ever. The proposed
investment over the five years 2025 to 2030
amounts to £2.1 billion with goals to improve
customer service, reduce customer supply
interruptions and strengthen network resilience. A
significant investment in environmental schemes is
also proposed.
As a result of the higher operating and capital
expenditure proposed in the business plan, the
group and company has forecasted a net cash
outflow position before financing inflows over the
going concern period of 12 months to July 2026.
The group and company forecast cash flows do not
indicate a requirement for additional financing in
the going concern period, although shortly after the
going concern period it will be necessary to renew
the existing revolving credit facility. The revolving
credit facility matures in September 2026 and
discussions with lenders are underway and
progressing well, although at the date of signing
these financial statements the renewal has not
been legally committed.
Under the base case and assuming that the revolving
credit facility is renewed as expected, the group and
company remains compliant with all its financial
covenants although there is limited headroom on
the Adjusted Interest Cover Ratio.
Sensitivities have been considered to assess the
potential impact on the group and company.
► Cash flow – the directors have considered
whether the group and company can continue
to operate within its borrowing facilities and
covenants, assuming that the revolving credit
facility is renewed, although there is limited
liquidity headroom to accommodate any
overspend or one-off costs.
► Financing – if it is not possible extend the
revolving credit facility, the group and company
will have sufficient liquidity for the going
concern period but not for the extended
look-out period.
► Covenants – none of the scenarios would lead
to a default event in servicing the group and
company’s debt nor lead to adverse impact on
customer service or the group and company’s
ability to carry out normal operational activities.
Under certain of the severe but plausible
scenarios breaches of the Adjusted Interest
Cover Ratio could occur, resulting in a Trigger
Event but not a default event.
If the revolving credit facility is renewed, the
directors believe that the group and company will
have sufficient liquidity over the foreseeable future
to deliver its business plan and meet its regulatory
obligations and financial commitments as they
fall due.
The directors are of the opinion that the revolving
credit facility will be renewed but as this has not been
legally committed at the date of the signing of the
financial statements and its commitment is outside
the control of the directors, the directors believe
that the risk that the funding will not be received
constitutes a material uncertainty that may cast
significant doubt on the ability of the group and
company to continue as a going concern such that it
may be unable to realise its assets and discharge its
liabilities in the normal course of business.

Graphics
130 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Governance

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 131
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Contents
Corporate governance statement 132
Our directors 132
Introduction from the Chair 135
Board leadership and
company purpose 136
Division of responsibilities
and board composition 150
Appointment, succession
and evaluation 153
Transparency, audit, risk and
internal control 158
Remuneration report 164
Report from the remuneration
committee 164
Corporate governance principles 168
Remuneration policy 170
Executive remuneration for 2024/25 181
Implementation of remuneration
policy in 2024/25 196

Graphics
132 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Corporate governance statement
Our directors
Chris was appointed as an independent non-executive director on 24 February
2022 and became chair of the board on 1 April 2022. He has over 38 years’
experience with utilities and infrastructure. Chris has held chief executive,
senior roles in project management, operations and business development at
Cadent, National Grid, Transco and Lattice. He has also sat on various European
and international committees covering commercial and infrastructure
development. Chris is the non-executive chair of Sellafield Limited and was a
non-executive director of the Nuclear Decommissioning Authority from 2022
to 2024, acting as Interim Chair from October 2023 to May 2024. Chris is a
Chartered Engineer and holds a Bachelor’s Degree (Hons) in Fuel and Energy
Engineering and an MBA.
Independent non-executive directors*
Lisa was appointed as an independent non-executive director in January 2023
and is chair of the audit and risk committee. During her executive career Lisa
worked across a wide range of sectors for companies ranging from multi-billion
pound UK and US main-market listed global conglomerates to start-up private
equity backed SMEs. Her roles included being Chief Financial Officer for Sea
Containers Ltd. Subsequently she was a non-executive director and chair of the
audit committee for U.K. Coal PLC during its restructure and reorganisation into
Harworth Group PLC, where she also chaired the audit committee, then later
chaired the remuneration committee and was senior independent director.
She was previously a non-executive director and chair of the remuneration
committee for Light Science Technologies Holdings PLC. Lisa is a Chartered
Accountant and graduate of Oxford University.
Célia was appointed as an independent non-executive director on 1 June 2018
and is chair of the remuneration committee. Célia has previously held a range
of senior executive roles and has a wealth of experience and expertise in a
range of industries. Célia is a non-executive director of Samworth Brothers
(Holdings) Ltd and Hostmore plc (in administration). She is a non-executive
director of Campden BRI, where she chairs the remuneration & nomination
committee, and a non-executive director of Everest UK Bidco Limited (a Jersey
registered company), where she chairs the risk & audit committee. She is the
founder of Impact Ventures Group Limited. Célia holds a Bachelor of Commerce
undergraduate degree and an MBA.
Caroline was appointed as a non-executive director on 12 February 2025. A
Chartered Civil Engineer, Caroline brings 30 years of diverse experience in
asset investment, engineering, and capital delivery. Her extensive career spans
critical infrastructure at Heathrow Airport, Transport for London (leading
capital investment and asset strategy across the network), and Thames Water
Utilities, where she was Engineering and Asset Director. Caroline advises within
the water, rail, and nuclear sectors and is a director at the Construction Industry
Research and Information Association (CIRIA). Caroline holds a MSc in civil
engineering from the University of Leeds and is a chartered member of ICE.
Directors of the company who were in office during the year and up to the date of signing the financial
statements on 14 July 2025.
Chris Train OBE
Independent Chair
Lisa Clement
Célia Pronto
Caroline Sheridan
* As defined in our corporate governance code (2020).

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 133
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Mark was appointed as a non-executive director on 9 February 2022. Mark
joined Morrison as an Investment Director in Morrison’s ANZ Investment Team,
based in the Sydney office before relocating to London as part of the European
investment team in November 2021. Prior to joining Morrison in 2020, Mark was
an investment professional in QIC’s Global Infrastructure business, focused on
the utilities and renewable sectors, where he was responsible for origination,
transaction execution and asset management. Prior to QIC, Mark worked
in M&A and financing roles within the utilities and renewable sectors at RBC
Capital Markets in both London and Sydney. Mark holds a Master of Chemistry
from the University of Oxford.
Non-executive directors
Michael was appointed as a non-executive director on 15 August 2024. With
over 35 years experience, he acts as senior adviser to Vantage Infrastructure
Group (part of the Capital Four group) in relation to South East Water. Michael
was an executive director at a regulated infrastructure company, Phoenix
Energy Group, retiring in 2023 after 27 years with the business, having served
as Group CEO from 2014 and previously holding other roles including Group
CFO. He is a director at Choice Housing Limited and advises Forward Emphasis
International in relation to regulated insurance and financial services. Michael is
a Fellow of the Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (FCCA).
David was appointed CEO on 1 August 2020. With more than 25 years experience
at South East Water, David has held roles including Asset and Regulation Director,
Head of Regulation and Strategy and Head of Water Quality. Additionally, he
has several industry roles including as a director of the Institute of Water and
Water UK. David has held previous senior roles in scientific consultancies as well
as laboratory management for the Public Health Laboratory Services. David
holds a BSc (Hons) in Biotechnology and a Master of Business Administration
specialising in ethical consumerism.
Andrew, who joined as CFO on 1 August 2015, has held a number of senior
management posts in finance, most recently at MAG plc, the country’s largest UK
owned airport operator, and Doosan Power Systems, a leading manufacturing,
energy technologies and services company. Andrew is a non-executive director
of Moat Homes, a housing association in the South East of England. Andrew
qualified as a Chartered Accountant with PricewaterhouseCoopers and holds a
BSC (Hons) in Engineering and Business Studies from the University of Warwick.
Mark McArdle
Michael McKinstry
David Hinton
CEO
Andrew Farmer CFO
Executive directors

Graphics
134 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Corporate governance statement continued
Resigning directors*
Our directors continued
Company details
Nicolas Truillet
Company secretary
Registered office
Rocfort Road, Snodland, Kent ME6 5AH
Registered No. 02679874
Country of domicile and incorporation:
United Kingdom, England and Wales
Company’s bankers
HSBC Bank plc, 60 Queen Victoria Street,
London EC4N 4TR
Company’s independent auditors
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP Statutory Auditor
London, United Kingdom
* Director(s) in office during the period from 1 April 2024 to 31 March 2025 who resigned before 14 July 2025.
Please see page 155 for details of the changes on our board.
John was appointed as an independent non-executive director on 28 January
2016, serving until his resignation on 12 February 2025. Prior to his more recent
involvement with a start-up company developing renewable energy schemes,
John had gained over 30 years’ experience in the water industry, mainly in the UK
(including as chief operating officer for United Utilities Water) but with spells in
the Middle East and New Zealand. John is a former non-executive director of the
Mid-Cheshire Hospitals Foundation Trust and was Executive Chair of All Change
for Crewe, focused on making the most of inward investment to the town.
John is a Chartered Engineer and holds a Bachelor of Engineering in Civil &
Structural Engineering.
John Barnes
Anne-Noëlle was appointed as a non-executive director on 18 December 2023
until her resignation on 15 August 2024; she was also a director from June
2021 to March 2023. She is an Investment Director at Vantage Infrastructure
focusing on the asset management and transaction execution of European
equity infrastructure investments. She holds a Master 1 in Finance from Paris
Dauphine University and a Masters in Accounting and Finance from the London
School of Economics, and she was a non-executive director at gas distribution
company, Phoenix Natural Gas.
Anne-Noëlle Le Gal

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 135
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Our purpose
Our company’s purpose is “to provide today’s public
water service and create tomorrow’s water supply
solutions, fairly and responsibly, working with
others to help society and the environment to
thrive”. It is centred on our core functions as
provider of the public water service and also
expresses our ambitions to contribute to society
and environment protection in fulfilling our primary
public service purpose.
As a statement of the significance of our purpose,
it is enshrined in our articles of association, our
key constitutional document, underscoring our
board’s commitment that we should be a purpose-
led organisation, promoting a culture of public
service and inclusiveness, designed to achieve a
fair balance between the interests of the company
and those of our customers, other stakeholders, and
the environment.
Putting our purpose into practice
Governance is central to us being able to put our
purpose into practice, because to us, governance
is the framework through which the organisation
is led.
We have formulated what corporate governance
means to us, in our corporate governance framework,
and we assess in this statement how the board has
operated within that framework over the last year.
It is important that we know that our people make
decisions that promote a culture of public service
as well as the long-term success of the business.
This statement has been prepared to provide clear
and transparent information on our governance
to our customers, investors, regulators, and other
stakeholders. We have taken concrete steps to meet
the objectives, principles, and provisions of our
corporate governance code and the objectives of
the board leadership, transparency and governance
principles published by Ofwat.
The board confirms that it has complied with the
principles of the company’s corporate governance
code throughout 2024/25, except for one divergence
to the relevant provisions of the code:
► The board as a whole considers succession
planning membership of the board. Compared
with the code requirement for our nominations
committee to assess succession planning. We
consider this divergence brings the benefit of
a more inclusive approach, offering a wider,
balanced perspective, when considering skills
and attributes of prospective members. The
nomination committee has delegated authority
to deal with the process of appointment and to
consider and recommend appointments of new
directors that may be selected in accordance
with the succession planning approach
agreed by the board. Both the board and the
nomination committee observe appropriate
protocols for conflict management during
succession planning. (Code provision 3.1.4).
This statement follows the main themes in
our corporate governance code to present our
assessment of our practical approach to governance.
We hope it demonstrates our commitment to
excellence in governance.
Chris Train OBE
CHAIR
14 JULY 2025
Introduction from the Chair
Corporate governance and compliance are an integral part of how our business as a whole
operates. Underpinning this, in 2016, we adopted a Corporate Governance Code, which was
updated in 2020 for the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018; the Ofwat principles of board
leadership, transparency and governance; and the conditions of our Instrument of Appointment
(in particular the obligation to meet the overarching objectives of Ofwat’s board leadership,
transparency and governance principles).

Graphics
136 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Find out more
about our corporate governance framework and
how governance contributes to our strategy
southeastwater.co.uk/about/who-we-are/
governance
Board leadership and company purpose
A. The company has an effective board with full
responsibility for all aspects of the company’s
business as a regulated company for the
long-term.
B.
A successful company is led by an effective and
entrepreneurial board, whose role is to promote
the long-term sustainable success of the
company, generating value for shareholders and
having a positive impact on wider society and
the environment.
C.
The board should ensure that the necessary
resources are in place for the company to meet
its objectives and measure performance against
them. The board should also establish a framework
of prudent and effective controls, which enable
risk to be assessed and managed.
D.
The board establishes the company’s purpose,
strategy and values, and is satisfied that these
and its culture reflect the needs of all those
it serves.
E.
All directors must act with integrity, lead by
example and promote the desired culture.
F.
In order for the company to meet its
responsibilities to shareholders and stakeholders,
the board should ensure effective engagement
with, and encourage participation from,
these parties.
G.
The board should ensure that workforce policies
and practices are consistent with the company’s
values and support its long-term sustainable
success. The workforce should be able to raise
any matters of concern.
Principles of our corporate governance code relevant to this section
Our principles of governance and
corporate governance code
As a board we promote transparency, accountability,
ethical conduct, inclusive engagement with
customers and stakeholders, a fair balance between
the various interests that we and our staff must
consider every day, and a commitment to high
standards of performance in delivering services to
customers and protecting the environment.
Strong environmental, social and governance
(ESG) performance protects the long-term value
and sustainable success of the company. This is
the optimum way to ensure we are able to deliver
our public water service and secure its future.
Our investors support us when we observe and
enhance our governance, which strengthens our
licence to operate.
Our corporate governance framework sets out our
general philosophy and approach to governance.
We have moved strongly towards a stakeholder
model of corporate governance as we know it
supports our strategy.
Under our licence, we are required to conduct our
regulated business as if it were substantially our
sole business and the regulated business were a
public limited company separate from any other
business we carry out. We must act to ensure we
have appropriate systems of planning and internal
control. We also have an obligation to meet the
objectives of Ofwat’s board leadership, transparency,
and governance principles (BLTG principles) and to
explain in a manner that is effective, accessible and
clear how we are meeting these objectives.
Our corporate governance code combines the
objectives, principles, and provisions of Ofwat’s
BLTG principles with those of the UK Corporate
Governance Code 2018 that are applicable to a
private limited company and consistent with Ofwat’s
principles. We chose to continue to follow the more
detailed provisions of the UK Code rather than
those of the Wates principles. As such principles and
provisions are not exhaustive, as a matter of course,
we consider how to improve our governance.
Our corporate governance code is available on our
website at: southeastwater.co.uk/ourgovernance

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 137
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Our purpose, values, and culture
We have defined our company purpose, which is
incorporated into our articles of association, our
vision, values, and the principles that guide our
culture and strategy. Our purpose and values guide
our day to day activities and decision-making. The
board and the senior leadership team each aim to
exemplify the purpose, strategy, and values in all
aspects of the company’s work and their behaviour
to promote and enhance a culture that firmly
supports our purpose, reflecting the needs of those
we serve.
Achieving a durable change in culture to be a
purpose-led organisation driven by public service
values is a continuous effort. The following
contributes to promoting our purpose and culture
within the business:
► Our corporate governance framework –
available at southeastwater.co.uk/about/who-
we-are/governance
► Our directors’ duty (as set out in the company’s
articles of association) to act in a way that fulfils
our purpose, balancing benefit for shareholders
with a positive impact on society and the
environment, and in doing so, to have regard
to the matters set out in the Companies Act
2006 s172(1).
► Executive directors’ pay related to all aspects
of performance, including responsible
business objectives.
► Staff engagement with an independent non-
executive director nominated as a designated
point of contact with our workforce,
engagement with the Staff Council (workforce
advisory panel) and wider board engagement
programme to increase the interaction of the
board with different levels of the business.
► Customer and stakeholder engagement
on our day-to-day performance and
long-term planning.
► Our ESG practices and achievements are
assessed annually against the GRESB
benchmark, a leading ESG benchmark that
provides standardised and validated data
enabling assessments of sustainability aligned
with international reporting frameworks and
industry best practice.
Read more on our purpose and culture on pages 14
and 15 and on how we engage with customers and
have regard to the matters set out in s172(1) on
page 80.

Graphics
138 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Objective 1 How we meet the objectives Read more
The board of the
Appointee establishes
the company’s
purpose, strategy, and
values, and is satisfied
that these and its
culture reflect the
needs of all those
it serves.
►
We continue to follow and embed the company’s purpose, which has been
a central part of the development of our strategy, values, and culture.
►
Our purpose remains integrated into our articles of association as is our
strengthened directors’ duty.
►
Our articles of association are available at
southeastwater.co.uk/about/who-we-are/governance
On purpose on
page 14.
►
Our vision, guiding principles and values promote a culture of
public service.
Our culture on
page 15.
►
Our strategic direction statement sets out our strategy to 2050 and six
priorities, which run through our long-term delivery strategy and our
business plan for 2025 to 2030.
►
We review our culture in the monthly performance report to the board, as
well as metrics on customer satisfaction, vulnerability, engagement, and
responsible business.
Our strategy
on page 22.
Objective 2 How we meet the objectives Read more
The Appointee has an
effective board with
full responsibility
for all aspects of the
Appointee’s business
for the long-term.
►
The board has full responsibility for all aspects of the company’s business
and sets the company’s strategic aims, purpose, values and the overall
culture and standards of behaviours. It balances the long-term and
short-term interests of the company.
►
Decisions for the overall strategic management of the company are
made by the board. The board committees are used actively for detailed
discussions prior to making reports and recommendations to the board to
inform its final decisions. Further delegations to senior leaders facilitate
efficient day to day decision-making.
►
Our relatively compact board facilitates discussion.
►
Investor interests are taken into account through regular and ongoing
dialogue with shareholders’ representatives.
►
To ensure high quality decisions, in line with our purpose, which address
the short and long-term interest of customers, stakeholders and the
environment, as well as a diversity and balance of views independent
non-executive directors are the largest group on our board.
On our
board and
committees
composition
and role on
pages 141 to
142 and 150.
►
The board has procedures in place to identify and avoid conflicts
of interest.
On how we
avoid conflicts
of interest on
page 144.
How we meet the objectives of the
Board Leadership, Transparency and
Governance principles (BLTG)
Under the terms of its licence, the company is
required to explain in a manner that is effective,
accessible, and clear how it is meeting the
objectives contained in the BLTG principles which
are incorporated into the company’s corporate
governance code.
We explain in the tables below the concrete steps
we are taking to meet each of the four objectives of
the BLTG principles. The tables below are intended
to help readers easily find the explanations in this
annual report about each objective and other
relevant information on how they are met.
Board leadership and company purpose continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 139
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Objective 2 continued How we meet the objectives Read more
►
Our core responsibilities include planning for future water resources
and events such as droughts while investing efficiently and protecting
the environment. The board as a whole is responsible for developing
the strategy and for oversight and approval of long-term plans including
the long-term delivery strategy, business plan, corporate plan,
Water Resources Management Plan and drought plan.
On long-
term trends,
challenges, and
priorities on
pages 22 to 23.
On our long-
term planning
on page 42.
Objective 3 How we meet the objectives Read more
The board of the
Appointee’s leadership
and approach
to transparency
and governance
engenders trust in the
Appointee and ensures
accountability for
their actions.
Our general approach to trust, transparency and governance
►
Our purpose is embedded in our company’s articles of association. This
annual report expands on how our strategy will deliver our purpose, as
well as how we set ourselves targets to deliver the public water service
to our customers, and how we have performed against these.
Transparency on our performance
►
Every year, we publish a “performance, people and planet” report with
information on our performance and our corporate social responsibility
in a clear and accessible format.
►
Our performance, people and planet report is available at
performance.southeastwater.co.uk
►
We are ambitious about our purpose. Our strategic priorities incorporate
ESG objectives to deliver benefits to customers, society and the
environment that go beyond our core public water services.
►
Our annual reporting on delivery against performance commitments is
prepared following rigorous internal control processes. External assurance
with oversight from the audit and risk committee and the board ensure
our reporting is accurate, transparent, and reliable.
►
We also publish how we ensure that the data and information we publish
is reliable, transparent, timely and appropriate to the audience in our
annual performance report.
On how we
ensure the
accuracy and
reliability of
our data and
reporting
in our data
assurance
summary in
our annual
performance
report.
Transparency on ownership, executive pay and dividends
►
Ownership structure: We explain our group and ownership structure and
provide information about our investors.
On our
structure and
investors on
page 72.
►
Executive pay: The pay of our executive directors includes a variable
element which is predominantly based on actual outcomes against our
performance commitments for customers and the environment.
►
Our directors’ remuneration report provides transparency on executive
remuneration and is aligned with the reporting of quoted companies that
can be applied to a private limited company.
Our directors’
remuneration
report on
page 164.

Graphics
140 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Objective 3 continued How we meet the objectives Read more
The board of the
Appointee’s leadership
and approach
to transparency
and governance
engenders trust in the
Appointee and ensures
accountability for
their actions.
►
Dividend: We take care to ensure that the company retains sufficient
financial resources to deliver its functions and meet its obligations as a
water undertaker.
►
We only pay dividends to our shareholders in accordance with our dividend
policy and the principles that dividends should balance providing a
suitable return to shareholders for their investment without impairing the
company’s ability to deliver its obligations (including current and future
investment needs) while maintaining its long-term financial resilience.
►
When considering dividends, the board takes account of a wide range of
considerations consistent with Condition P30 of the company’s licence,
especially an assessment of delivery for customers and the environment.
►
In addition to its licence conditions, the board is obliged to meet relevant
legal requirements prior to declaring or paying a dividend.
►
Our dividend policy is available on our website at
southeastwater.co.uk/ourgovernance
On our
dividend
and how we
have applied
our dividend
policy on
page 78 and
in our annual
performance
report.
Objective 4 How we meet the objectives Read more
The board of the
Appointee and their
committees are
competent, well run,
and have sufficient
independent
membership, ensuring
they can make high
quality decisions
that address diverse
customer and
stakeholder needs.
Board and committees effectiveness
►
We ensure our board and committees are effective by maintaining a
robust ratio of independent non-executive directors. This also ensures that
independent challenge at the board of the company is effective and that
considerations relevant specifically to investors or the group as a whole
may inform decision making allowing the board to remain fully focused on
the regulated activities and the delivery of the public water service.
►
Maintaining a fairly compact board facilitates discussions at board
meetings. Our board has four independent non-executive directors, two
shareholder nominated directors and two executive directors.
►
The company considers that the chair of the board was independent
on appointment, which adds strength to this group of directors, and he
continues to demonstrate objective judgement in this role.
►
We convene in-person board and committee meetings to a regular
schedule, supplementing these with additional meetings as required.
On our
board and
committees
composition
and role on
pages 141 to
142 and 150.
►
There is a formal, rigorous and transparent procedure for new
appointments, which supports our purpose. The whole board considers
succession planning, which capitalises on this body having a broad and
complementary skillset.
►
To ensure that this aspect of succession planning remains a proportionate
and effective use of board resources, the nomination committee deals with
detailed processes, including recommending appointments.
►
Each director receives an induction programme to ensure that knowledge
and familiarity with South East Water and our industry are maintained at
the required level throughout their tenure. Any feedback provided by Ofwat
following their pre-appointment interview is factored into the induction.
On our board
succession
plan on
page 155 .
►
We ensure that our board and committees have the appropriate mix of
independence, service, skills and experience, including specific customer
and service sector experience.
On the
experience of
our directors
on page 132.
Board evaluation
►
We carry out an annual board evaluation to review how effectively the board
operates and discuss suggestions for improvement. The board evaluation
is usually conducted via a non-attributable questionnaire with the results
collated by the company secretary and discussed by the board. Appropriate
actions are taken where improvement possibilities are identified.
On our board
evaluation on
page 156.
Board leadership and company purpose continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 141
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
The role of the board and of its
committees
Long-term sustainable success
The board’s priority continues to be the company’s
obligation to meet its responsibilities as a water
undertaker, which involves being a provider of an
essential public service, maintaining a reputation
for high standards of business conduct. The board
recognises its role to provide strategic leadership
within a framework of prudent and effective
controls that ensures that the necessary financial,
operational, and human resources are in place.
We provide more information on how the board
addresses long-term considerations and its
directors’ duties (set out in our enhanced duty in
our company’s articles of association) on pages 80
to 95 and in our non-financial and sustainability
information statement on page 96.
Short-term decisions are also taken in the context
of the overall strategy, the supporting delivery
plans and the actual performance against targets
or other strategic outcomes at any given time.
They are evaluated by reference to their impact on
the delivery of the commitments and long-term
objectives of the company and any side-effects
from the prioritisation of certain outcomes.
The board receives regular updates on performance
against targets in respect of all the company’s
commitments and short-term decisions are
assessed in the context of that performance. The
board will require and support the business to take
corrective actions where necessary.
Significant decisions such as those relating
to investment and the delivery of the capital
programme are taken within internal governance
processes, which consider a wide range of factors
such as commitments, obligations, and efficiencies.
Leadership of the standalone regulated company
All matters pertaining to the business of the
company are considered and decided by the board of
South East Water and there are no matters reserved
for shareholders or parent companies other than
those requiring a resolution of members under the
Companies Act 2006. In this report, references to
shareholders refers to investors and shareholders of
HDF (UK) Holdings Limited, the ultimate UK holding
company of South East Water.
Circulating the board agenda and background
information in a timely manner empowers directors
to play a constructive role in board decision-making
and oversight.
Our board and committees are effective as
we maintain a strong ratio of independent
non-executive directors to shareholder-nominated
directors. Considerations relevant to investors
are prevented from dominating the board’s
decision-making.
Shareholders typically discuss their respective
positions in respect of matters that are a specific
concern to them including those regarding the
company at board meetings of HDF (UK) Holdings.
This gives them the opportunity to discuss with
their stakeholders matters relevant to decisions
to be made at the board of the company. There
are regular discussions between investors, the
chair of the board and management. Shareholders’
decision making processes regarding the company
recognise that they must comply with the specific
requirements applicable to South East Water as a
regulated water company.
In board meetings, the two shareholder nominated
directors are also given the opportunity to
communicate the views of shareholders when the
board is reaching a decision of particular concern
for shareholders. The board recognises shareholder
support is important in the context of ongoing
financial resilience and the shareholder nominated
directors are given the opportunity to present
their reasoning for consideration across the board.
Notwithstanding this protocol, each director
has one vote and the board endeavours to reach
unanimous decisions taking account of the views of
all directors.
Our shareholders recognise that strong
environmental, social and governance performance
protects the long-term value and sustainable
success of the company and strengthens its licence
to operate. There is a strong alignment between the
company and its shareholders with their approach
to governance; we all are focused on long-term
value creation as a means of delivering the company’s
purpose and achieving our respective objectives.

Graphics
142 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Board
Audit and Risk Committee
Chair: Chris Train OBE
Is responsible for the long-term success of the company.
It sets strategy within a framework of effective controls
and ensures the company has the necessary financial and
human resources. It sets our purpose, values and standards of
governance and it monitors compliance with regulatory and
statutory obligations. It balances the interests of customers,
the environment, shareholders and stakeholders.
Competition and Regulatory Strategy
Customer Insight Committee
Corporate Security
Remuneration Committee
Nomination Committee
Responsible Business Committee
Health & Safety
Investment and Operating Expenditure
Outcomes Delivery
Water Quality
The Corporate Security Steering Group monitors the
implementation and effectiveness of security measures
and policies covering all aspects of security: information
and data protection, cyber risks, physical security and
prevention of fraud. It monitors emerging threats and
opportunities to improve resilience.
Our Regulatory Strategic Group provides oversight of the
implementation of competition and regulatory strategies
including compliance with market requirements and
our main regulatory plans. It also reviews and defines
management’s strategy proposals to the board.
Monitors the progress and effectiveness of our customer
engagement and insight programme across all areas of
the business to improve the satisfaction of our customers
including vulnerable customers and stakeholders. It monitors
how effectively this influences our day-to-day business. One
of its members is an independent non-executive director.
Chair: David Hinton
The Executive Team under the direction of the CEO
comprises the CFO, Regulation and Strategy Director,
Customer Services Director and Operations Director.
It defines and implements the strategy, manages the
operational and financial performance of the company,
and matters not reserved to the board.
Chief Executive Officer
David Hinton
Executive Team
Chair: Mark McArdle
Assists the board in defining its strategy relating to ESG
matters and in reviewing the practices and initiatives of
the company relating to ESG matters, ensuring they remain
effective and up to date. It monitors performance against the
company’s responsible business commitments.
Chair: Célia Pronto
Reviews the remuneration policy for the executive
directors and ensures executive pay rewards performance
in areas that are important to customers. It determines the
remuneration package of executive directors, and other
designated senior executives, including the design and
application of any performance based remuneration.
Chair: Lisa Clement
Exercises oversight over financial statements and reports
to the board on significant aspects of financial reporting. It
reviews the scope and results of financial audits, accounting
policies and judgements. It assesses the systems of internal
control and risk management and the prevention and
detection of fraud and reviews whistleblowing arrangements.
The Executive Investment Committee approves and
ensures the governance of capital investment and the
Programme Management Office controls the delivery of
capital expenditure. The Information Systems Steering
Group approves and monitors key procurement activities.
The Operating Expenditure Committee provides additional
scrutiny and control over operating expenditure.
The Every One Counts Steering Group and the Responsible
Business Steering Group monitor the implementation
of our people initiatives and of our responsible business
commitments and related corporate plan objectives and
business improvement initiatives.
The Water Quality Strategy Group monitors water quality
performance and the delivery of the water quality
strategy and improvement initiatives. It also oversees the
development of future investments in water quality.
How our board, committees and
executive team operate
This diagram shows the roles of our board and its
committees and of the executive team and the
main management steering group.
Chair: Chris Train OBE
Reviews the structure and composition of the board taking
account of the board evaluation and succession planning of the
board and senior management. It makes recommendations on
proposed board appointments and committee membership.
The Health & Safety committee monitors the effectiveness
of health and safety practices, policies, procedures, training
and communication. It analyses safety audit reports and
through sub-committees ensures practices are adapted to the
different areas of the business.
Board leadership and company purpose continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 143
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Aligning our strategy with our
purpose and values
Fulfilling our purpose and ensuring the long-term
sustainable success of the company continues to
be the principal objective of our strategy, which our
approach to governance supports fully.
This approach is set out in detail in our strategic
direction statement in which we explain and present:
► How we have defined our strategy to fulfil our
purpose, guided by key values and principles.
► Our strategic priorities to 2050 in the context
of our long-term challenges and how we intend
to achieve our objectives in the next
regulatory periods.
► How our purpose and values are central to
our 25 Year Environment Plan, which sets out
ambitions and principles of environmental
management and reiterates our commitment to
engagement and collaboration
with stakeholders.
► How our business plan is focused on delivering
our purpose as well as considering what
customers have told us is the most important
to them (including a resilient service, affordable
bills and support for vulnerable customers).
Read more about our strategy on page 22.
Information and support
Quality management information is a keystone of
effective board oversight and robust governance.
Our commitment to high standards of business
conduct drives us to transparently provide
our board with necessary information. We
ensure strong information flows through various
initiatives, including:
► Provision of monthly performance reports to
ensure that directors are regularly informed of
key performance metrics. These cover a range
of aspects including performance against
key regulatory obligations and outcome
delivery incentives.
Find out more
about our strategic direction statement and how it
aligns with our purpose and culture at:
southeastwater.co.uk/sds
► Directors receive specific updates and reports
as appropriate at and outside of scheduled
board meetings, including detailed reports
on specific metrics or updates on significant
operational events.
► Senior leaders present regular updates on their
areas of responsibility to ensure that directors
receive timely information, can extend and
deepen their knowledge of the business,
and provide challenge or seek additional
clarification to assist decision-making.
► The cadence of board meetings, together with
interactions outside of scheduled board and
committee meetings, allows non-executive
directors to raise questions directly with the
executive directors. Depending on the nature of
the query or complexity of the subject-matter,
the company addresses these through written
explanations or meetings with members of the
executive or senior management team.
► The board has an engagement programme with
a wider range of people in the business. This
provides for a better understanding of how the
company operates at all levels, direct feedback,
and insight into the true culture of the business.
► Engagement with our Water Horizon Forum,
which includes customers of different ages and
backgrounds, for all our key plans and strategies
reinforces focus on the company’s public
service and purposeful work with others as
part of society.
► We design our quality assurance for precision
and accuracy. This involves:
► rigorously following company processes
to ensure the accuracy of performance
measurement and reporting.
► leveraging external assurance to
independently verify the reliability of our
company reporting and its foundational data.
► the board approved company monitoring
framework that details the controls
safeguarding the accuracy and reliability of
information we publish.

Graphics
144 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Conflicts of interest
We understand that conflicts of interest may arise
in decision-making. Preventing conflicts of interest
is an ongoing consideration for all board decisions
and so we take active steps to avoid or reduce
undesirable outcomes.
Specific initiatives include:
► Combining regular, standard checks with direct
and proactive communication from directors
who are better-placed to identify any
changing circumstances that could lead to
a potential conflict.
► Beyond standard director requirements, the
company’s articles of association include
specific requirements for the board to observe
to manage and mitigate possible conflicts.
Directors may authorise certain
potential conflicts.
► The directors’ induction pack includes
information on directors’ duties, such as
avoiding conflicts of interests.
► Tabling a standard agenda item at each board
meeting to consider any potential conflicts in
relation to the matters to be discussed at
the meeting.
► Each director is required to declare and provide
updates on any potential conflict of interest
and to inform the company secretary and
other directors of any new appointment or
directorship. Relevant provisions are included in
the letters of appointment of directors.
► Directors complete a questionnaire
annually on close entities and relationships
to identify potential conflicts in relation to
certain transactions.
► Annual review of directors’ commitments and
directorships to ensure records are up to date to
allow for potential conflicts to be identified.
Board activities in 2024/25
During the period from 1 April 2024 to 31 March 2025
there were 16 board meetings in total, including:
► Six regular, scheduled, meetings to consider
general business matters
► Three ad hoc meetings
► Five meetings exclusively dedicated to PR24, and
► Two meetings allocated to our long-term
strategy.
Several of the regular and ad hoc meetings discussed
additional financing measures including capital
injection, loan notes, and borrowing lines as well as
areas such as supply resilience and demand.
General and specific meetings have addressed
progress of the company’s PR24 submissions and
decision to request a redetermination by the
Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) following
Ofwat’s final determination for their PR24 (Price
Review 2024) plan. The board has met with the
company’s solicitors as appropriate throughout.
The board appropriately reviews information
provided to it, which includes full business and
financial performance reports every month.
Key attendance at board and committee meetings in 2024/25
Director Board Audit and risk Nomination Remuneration
C Train 16/16
☐
3/3 3/3
L Clement 16/16 3/3
☐ ☐
C Pronto 14/16 3/3 3/3 3/3
M McArdle 16/16 3/3 3/3 3/3
D Hinton 16/16
☐ ☐ ☐
A Farmer 16/16
☐ ☐ ☐
M McKinstry *app. 15.08.24 11/11 2/2 2/2 2/2
C Sheridan *app. 12.02.25 2/2 0/0 0/0 0/0
J Barnes **res. 12.02.25 12/14 3/3 3/3 3/3
A-N Le Gal **res. 15.08.24 5/5 1/1 1/1 1/1
Note: The responsible business committee did not meet in 2024/25.
☐
Director is not a member of the committee
* Newly appointed director ** Resigned director
Board leadership and company purpose continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 145
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Summary of our activities in 2024/25
Service delivery and
operational performance
► Regularly reviewed performance against our
operational commitments and outcome delivery
incentives and the initiatives taken to improve
service and operational performance.
► Monitored operational preparation for
weather-resilience (such as named storms,
summer peak demand and winter freeze),
through actions including:
 
► Oversight of significant investment into
drinking water mains capacity in the
Aldershot area while ensuring disruption
to existing supply was minimised as well as
oversight of work initiated to improve water
pressure in the Faversham area.
 
► Continued oversight of improvement work
at Bewl, with delivery expected during the
2026/27 reporting period.
 
► Receipt of reports on weather conditions,
particularly noting the exceptionally dry
period in the first half of 2025 (up to the
date of this statement), and its relevance
to preparedness including any required
implementation of temporary use restrictions
and application for a drought permit in
accordance with our drought plan to mitigate
the impact of demand in areas of the network
that have potential to be the most affected.
Receipt of updates in relation to engagement
with the Environment Agency.
 ► Consideration and review of updates and
reports on improvements following specific
events including, for example, extended
customer communications about water
efficiencies, continued use of colour coded
status advisories and customer messaging
across all media, relevant recruitment (e.g.
an Alternative Water Manager to aid summer
preparation and stakeholder engagement
(e.g. with local authorities farmers, and
industry peers)), approval of the successful
AquAlerter, designed to provide real-time
supply updates, agricultural efficiency
discussions (e.g. rainwater harvesting
and storage) and agricultural usage data,
migration to smart metering, additional
tanker capacity (from March 2025), remedial
works to water treatment works and
monitoring issues from sustained exceptional
levels of rainfall and impact from turbidity,
and power resilience.
 
► Emphasised good positioning for the start of
AMP 8, for example, in relation to leakage.
► Considered the successful repair of the
Barcombe contact tank with minimal
impact on relevant water treatment works.
Oversight of engagement with the Drinking
Water Inspectorate.
► Considered progress against our service
commitment plan and the process and controls
in place for the preparation of the update to
our service commitment plan to Ofwat in
November 2024.
► Considered the updates on our capital
programme and capital expenditure in 2023/24
and the main schemes in our capital programme
for 2024/25 to the end of the 2020 to 2025
period, including updates on the delivery of our
main capital schemes and the reprioritisation
of our capital programme to enable the delivery
of additional short-term resilience schemes.
Reviewed preparation for the incoming period
2025 to 2030.
► Considered a review of support services, health
and safety, HR (including the performance
management roadmap and its EDI strategy), and
environmental performance and initiatives as
part of directorate reviews.
► Considered an update on customer service
performance (including C-MeX rankings) and
continuous improvement initiatives relating
to customer experience and systems, water
efficiency, support for vulnerable customers,
insight and engagement, compliance with
the new customer focused condition,
customer communications and support
during incidents as part of a deep dive review
of the retail directorate.

Graphics
146 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Financial, reporting and transactional
► Considered financial forecasts throughout the
year to monitor the financial performance and
resilience of the company.
► Reviewed and approved the annual report and
financial statements for 2023/24, including
the going concern statement, analysis relating
to financial covenants, the viability statement
prepared in line with specific requirements set
out by Ofwat.
► Reviewed and approved our annual performance
report and other regulatory reporting for
2023/24.
► Reviewed the report on performance, people
and planet 2023/24 and approved it for
publication on the microsite.
► Considered the report from the audit and risk
committee on the 2024/25 audit plan, the
independence of the auditors, the audit fees
and on reporting requirements for the 2024/25
annual report and approved the audit fees.
► Considered the budget assumptions and
approved the financial budget for 2024/25.
► Oversight of pensions activity, including
response to Pensions Regulator queries on the
closed defined benefit schemes, noting that
the schemes were funded as deficit repair
contributions were ending as planned in line
with Ofwat’s PR24 determination ending any
such funding through price reviews. Received
information from Trustee and progress updates
on the buy-in of the SEWGPS and buy-out of
the MKGPS scheme. Updates on transactions
progressed with Just group plc. for the SEWGPS
buy-in transaction, approved confirmation to
the Trustee that the company supported the
transaction and would provide funding to FY25
year end. For the MKGPS, approved the company
initiating the winding up of the MKGPS and
the company taking such other steps (with the
trustee, as appropriate) necessary to complete
the winding up and buy-out.
► Approved the issue and sale of one or more
series of fixed rate and index-linked, guaranteed
secured senior notes by private placement for a
total aggregate amount in the range of £50-100
million. Due to market sentiment, noted £50
million was raised.
► PR24 brought a level of uncertainty that
added to pressures on financial resilience,
with sources of funding becoming increasingly
constrained both on a micro level and
macro basis across the water sector. Closely
monitored considerations relating to credit
ratings, and in December 2024, observed that
the directors noted material uncertainties
including concerns about a potential sector
wide credit rating downgrade based on the
PR24 determination and regulatory risks, with
which the company’s auditors concurred. Noted
that, in December 2024, S&P rated the Company
at BBB (CreditWatch Negative) and Moody’s
at Baa3 (Rating Under Review for downgrade)
and engaged with Ofwat. Lenders and credit
agencies indicated a 65 to 70 per cent gearing
ratio was expected to be considered investment
grade. Took steps to oversee de-gearing of
the company to c.65 per cent.
► Received updates on the term loan that was due
to expire during the going concern period and
subsequently approved the basis of a facility
on substantially the same terms as its existing
credit facility, save for an amended margin
and an extension to the maturity date from
20 December 2025 to 20 June 2026.
► Reviewed and approved interim financial
reporting for 2024/25, having regard to liquidity
and requirements in relation to going concern.
Noted that material uncertainty disclosures
were made in interim financial statements in
December 2024 notwithstanding the
term loan extension.
Board leadership and company purpose continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 147
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
► Approved capital injection transactions
resulting in the allotment and issuance of
new shares in the capital of the company to
its sole member:
► £75 million – 75 million shares – noted as
a condition of the restructured term loan
(referenced above) in December 2024.
 ► £200 million – 200 million shares in May 2025.
► Considered the recommendations of the audit
and risk committee to approve this group annual
report and financial statements for 2024/25
having regard to liquidity and requirements
in relation to going concern. Noted that
refinancing discussions were progressing
positively albeit the facilities could not be
legally secured before signature of the financial
statements, noted material uncertainty relating
to going concern existed in the financial
statements for 2024/25 as the refinancing
discussions had not concluded. Noted that we
continue to comply with the financial covenants
in our securitisation and retained credit ratings
consistent with our securitisation and our
instrument of appointment.

Graphics
148 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Board leadership and company purpose continued
ESG, risk management and stakeholder
engagement
► Reviewed the composition of the board and its
committees. Observed required engagement
with Ofwat.
 ► Accepted the resignation of Anne-Noëlle Le
Gal and approved the appointment of Michael
McKinstry as shareholder representative non-
executive directors;
 ► Accepted the resignation of John Barnes
(who had served the maximum term) and
approved the appointment of Caroline
Sheridan as independent non-executive
director. External assistance was provided by
Russell Reynolds Associates as appropriate.
► Approved the re-appointment of Christopher
Train and Célia Pronto for a period of three-
years as independent non-executive directors.
► Carried out the annual evaluation of the board’s
effectiveness through an anonymous online
questionnaire, discussed the points arising and
agreed follow up actions.
► Considered reports and recommendations from
the committees of the board throughout the
year, including the remuneration committee,
which undertook an active review of
remuneration structures including short-term
and long-term incentives to ensure their design
promotes reward for improvements and aligns
with regulatory requirements.
► Carried out the annual review of risks, principal
risks and of the effectiveness of our risk
management process and oversight of remedial
actions and deep dive assessment of specific
risks, including cyber security.
► Considered regular updates on health, safety,
wellbeing and mental health (including taking
steps to address road traffic statistics), and the
annual review of performance as well as actions
taken under our Thrive365! strategy. Monitoring
work to define H&S performance indicators.
► Whistleblowing activity regularly reviewed
(including monthly receipt of disclosures and
trend data, oversight of a comprehensive review
of the speak up policy against Ofwat’s best
practice guidelines (resulting in small adaptations
to policy, process and approach) and ensuring
that colleagues are aware of the policy and
how to raise a concern (bi-annual companywide
communications and awareness raising for new
starters plus availability in different channels
and formats)). Noting there were 12 disclosures
in 2024/25; four of the six that were investigated
resulted in action through to resolution; the
balance were not deemed to be whistleblowing
complaints as defined in our policy.
► Adopted our modern slavery statement and
reviewed compliance with legislation on modern
slavery. Received an update on membership of
the Slave Free Alliance.
► Reviewed and approved our pay gap reporting
and the actions taken to address gender pay
gap and gender balance in different parts of
the business.
► Considered and approved the increase in
INED fees in line with the company pay award
pursuant to the provisions of our corporate
governance code.
► Considered proposals and progress updates
on power purchase agreements relating to a
wind farm, which is expected to meet c. 40 per
cent of the company’s electricity requirements
and contribute to renewable energy capacity.
Received updates on other renewable energy
proposals (e.g. floating solar).
► Approved a significant contract with Southern
Water to provide drinking water testing services
for the majority of its customers, increasing
tests by over 800,000 (from July 2025), creating
46 jobs.
► Oversight and approval of continuous
improvements commitments and appropriate
balance in our vulnerability strategy.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 149
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Strategy and
regulation
► Approved and continued oversight of our PR24
submissions including the company’s response
to Ofwat’s draft determination. Areas reviewed
include, wholesale totex, PCDs, retail price
control, PCs and ODIs, financials and financial
resilience, bill impacts, QAA, external assurance,
overall narrative and DD response structure, and
board assurance. Advice obtained from external
sources including: AtkinsRéalis, KPMG, NRF,
Oxera, Frontier Economics, and ChandlerKBS.
► Approved the assessment of Ofwat’s PR24
final determination, published on 19 December
2024, and the decision to request a reference
to the CMA. In our view, in its current form, the
Final Determination does not provide the right
foundations for the long-term investability of the
water sector. As such, we reflected on whether
it leaves a funding gap. Further information is
in the key decisions section of the Responsible
Business report.
► Reviewed the development of the Corporate Plan.
► Approved the approach for setting and assuring
our wholesale and household end-user charges
for 2025/26, taking account of customer
considerations. Approved our indicative and
final wholesale charges, our household end-
user charges and our new connection charges
and infrastructure charges for 2025/26 and
the related board assurance statements.
Set detailed conditions for the delegation
of authority of the final calculation of the
charges following publication of the PR24
final determination and the November RPI and
finalisation of the charges documents.
► Reviewed and approved the voluntary
intermediate update (fourth round) to the
adaptation report (previously submitted
2021) – which informs the Climate Change
Risk Assessment and the National Adaptation
Programme and submission to Defra.
► Considered Defra’s approval for the publication
of the company’s WRMP24.
► Oversight of contribution to engagement
with industry bodies (e.g. Water UK) as well as
the company’s own response to consultations
on milestone legislation and reviews, such
as the Water (Special Measures) Act 2025
(which received royal assent 24 February
2025), performance-related pay, and the
Cunliffe Review.
► Considered the Ofwat investigation into supply
resilience and received reports on progress and
oversaw the company’s co-operation with this
process and approved company’s approach.
Reviewed and approved the company’s supply
resilience action plan and its update before
submission to Ofwat.
► Oversight of significant internal IT transition.
► Given its close correlation with liquidity risk and
assessments of going concern, received detailed
updates on the capital programme to the end of
the AMP, including criteria for reprioritisation
and resultant risks as well as trends with
forecast and actual expenditure and budget.

Graphics
150 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Principles of our corporate governance
code relevant to this section
H. The chair leads the board and is responsible for its
overall effectiveness in directing the company.
They should demonstrate objective judgement
throughout their tenure and promote a culture
of openness and debate. In addition, the chair
facilitates constructive board relations and
the effective contribution of all non-executive
directors, and ensures that directors receive
accurate, timely and clear information.
I.
The board of the company and their committees
are competent, well run, and have sufficient
independent membership, ensuring they can
make high quality decisions that address diverse
customer and stakeholder needs.
J.
The board should include an appropriate
combination of executive and non-executive
(and, in particular, independent non-executive)
directors, such that no one individual or small
group of individuals dominates the board’s
decision-making. There should be a clear division
of responsibilities between the leadership of
the board and the executive leadership of the
company’s business.
K.
Non-executive directors should have sufficient
time to meet their board responsibilities. They
should provide constructive challenge, strategic
guidance, offer specialist advice and hold
management to account.
L.
The board, supported by the company secretary,
should ensure that it has the policies, processes,
information, time and resources it needs in order
to function effectively and efficiently.
Chair
The chair ensures the effectiveness of the
decision-making process of the board and
promotes discussion on key issues based on quality
information. The chair encourages discussion and
feedback to management to ensure information
received is accurate, timely and transparent.
The chair has responsibility for maintaining a direct
channel of communication with shareholders
and ensures that their concerns and objectives
are taken into account and conveyed to the
directors. Shareholder nominated directors are
able to contribute to board discussions and this is
appropriately balanced by effective contribution
from all the non-executive directors as well as
executive directors. Conflicts are discussed to
ensure directors demonstrate objective judgement.
The Chair and the CEO meet regularly throughout
the year to maintain a good communication
between the board and the executive directors and
to review the board forward programme and the
agendas of board meetings.
There is also a formal schedule setting out the
division of responsibilities between the chair and
the CEO.
Division of responsibilities
and board composition

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 151
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Read more
on our directors’ biographies on page 132.
Board balance and effectiveness
Independent non-executive directors are the
majority group on the board and on our audit
and risk committee, nomination committee and
remuneration committee. These committees are
each chaired by an independent non-executive
director. The chair of the board is independent of
management and has no link to shareholders that
could affect his impartiality as required by our
corporate governance code and Ofwat’s principles
of governance.
Non-executive directors play a significant role in
challenging executive directors and management
as well as in developing strategy. Their diverse
experience also ensures that different perspectives
are considered in the board’s deliberations.
The independence of non-executive directors is
assessed by the nomination committee and the
board following the criteria of the UK corporate
governance code. Length of service is managed to
assist with independence.
There are two shareholder nominated directors,
which assists with prompt and open communication
between all members of the board and shareholders.
In addition to regular updates at board meetings by
the CEO and CFO, senior managers regularly attend
board meetings to present agenda items, ensuring
that the whole board receives and discusses
information about operational issues from different
sources, giving it greater insight into the culture of
the company.
We believe that our board has a strong mix of
skills and experience and has reached a good
balance between new directors and longer-serving
directors. This allows for fresh perspectives and
ensures the board can optimise the benefit of
deep knowledge of our company, the sector,
and all our stakeholders, including previous price
determinations, development of our business plan,
and our strategy and long-term plans. The whole
board is well placed to closely monitor the delivery
of performance commitments, financial resilience,
and wider objectives in this regulatory period.
Non-executive directors and independent non-
executive directors are given direct access to
management as requested and review specific areas
of the business directly with management, drawing
on their particular expertise to provide oversight and
challenge on key regulatory or operational matters
or to review the company’s response to significant
operational events.
The board meets regularly in scheduled as well as
proactive sessions. Attendance and contribution
is noted to ensure directors have the resources
needed to function effectively and efficiently.
The Chair and the CEO meet regularly throughout
the year to maintain a good communication
between the board and the executive directors
“

Graphics
152 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Division of responsibilities and board composition continued
Independent non-
executive directors Appointment Resignation Term*
Audit
and Risk Remuneration Nomination
Responsible
Business
Chris Train (Chair) 24/02/22 N/A 3 yr 1 m
☐
Member Chair
☐
Lisa Clement 11/01/23 N/A 2 yr 2 m Chair
☐ ☐
Member
Célia Pronto Hussey 01/06/18 N/A 6 yrs 10 m Member Chair Member
☐
Caroline Sheridan 12/02/25 N/A 0 yrs 1 m Member Member Member Member
Shareholder
representative directors Appointment Resignation Term*
Audit
and Risk Remuneration Nomination
Responsible
Business
Mark McArdle
(Morrison & Co)
09/02/22 N/A 3 yrs 1 m Member Member Member Chair
Michael McKinstry
(Vantage Infrastructure)
15/08/24 N/A 0 yrs 8 m Member Member Member Member
Executive directors Appointment Resignation Term*
Audit
and Risk Remuneration Nomination
Responsible
Business
David Hinton
(CEO)
01/06/13 N/A 11 yrs 10 m
☐ ☐ ☐
Member
Andrew Farmer
(CFO)
01/08/15 N/A 9 yrs 8 m
☐ ☐ ☐ ☐
Resigning directors Appointment Resignation Term*
Audit
and Risk Remuneration Nomination
Responsible
Business
John Barnes 28/01/16 12/02/25 9 yrs 1 m Member Member Member Member
Anne-Noëlle Le Gal**
(Vantage Infrastructure)
08/06/21 15/08/24 3 yrs 2 m Member Member Member Member
Board balance and composition on 31 March 2025
* As at 31 March 2025.
** Oliver Schubert was appointed a director from 09/03/23 to 18/12/2023 during the maternity leave of Anne-Noëlle Le Gal. This table
shows the duration of her appointment since her initial appointment on 08/06/21 until her resignation on 15/08/24.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 153
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Principles of our corporate governance
code relevant to this section
M. Appointments to the board should be subject
to a formal, rigorous and transparent procedure,
and an effective succession plan should be
maintained for board and senior management.
Both appointments and succession plans should
be based on merit and objective criteria and,
within this context, should promote diversity of
gender, social and ethnic backgrounds, cognitive
and personal strengths.
N.
The board and its committees have the
appropriate balance of skills, experience,
independence and knowledge of the company.
Consideration should be given to the length of
service of the board as a whole and membership
regularly refreshed.
O.
Annual evaluation of the board should consider
its composition, diversity and how effectively
members work together to achieve objectives.
Individual evaluation should demonstrate
whether each director continues to contribute
effectively.
Division of responsibilities
The board has adopted a formal list of reserved
matters that it must consider and approve. These
matters expressly refer to the relevant corporate
governance requirements, our licence and regulatory
obligations as well as our statutory obligations.
They also reflect the allocation of responsibilities
between the board and its committees as set out in
the terms of reference of the committees.
The executive team manages matters that are not
reserved to the board and its committees under
supervision, which is achieved through regular
reporting and specific updates. Management takes
decisions delegated to it after consideration by
the executive team, which includes the CEO, CFO,
regulation and strategy director, customer services
director and operations director. There are several
steering groups that deal with key aspects of
the business.
Appointment, succession
and evaluation
Board committees
Nomination, remuneration and audit and
risk committees
The audit and risk committee, nomination committee
and remuneration committee are chaired by and
have a majority of independent non-executive
directors as required by our corporate governance
code. We have embedded the requirement to have
appropriate skills for committee roles, segregation
of duties and oversight within the committees, with
the allocation of the chair and membership roles.
For example, the chair of the board is not a member
of the audit and risk committee; and the chair of the
audit and risk committee has a relevant professional
qualification and recent financial experience.
Board committees have formal terms of reference.
We have approved a formal schedule describing
the allocation of responsibilities and interactions
between the board and the committees.
Responsible business committee
The main purpose of the responsible business
committee is to assist the board in defining, and
monitoring of execution against, its strategy
relating to environmental, social and governance
(ESG) matters and in reviewing the practices and
initiatives of the company relating to ESG matters
ensuring they remain effective and up to date. The
responsible business committee is chaired by Mark
McArdle. The committee has three other director
members – an independent non-executive director,
a shareholder nominated director and an executive
director. Non-director members of the committee
ensure that a wide range of skills and knowledge is
represented on the committee and provide a clear
line of sight into the business. The RB committee has
a designated role in several areas of the company’s
code, including oversight of how we work with others
(such as customers) – a key aspect of our purpose
– and oversight of our culture and values. The
committee’s make-up fosters a balanced culture,
ensuring the three director groups gain clear insight
into the concerns of a wide range of constituents.
Mark McArdle (Morrison) and Michael McKinstryl
(Vantage Infrastructure) are both representatives
of shareholders, which reflects the emphasis placed
on strong ESG performance by our shareholders.

Graphics
154 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
In 2023/24, it was decided that the whole board would
consider ESG matters as part of the development of
the strategic direction statement and throughout
the business plan process to ensure these
considerations were integrated into our strategy
and business plan. While the responsible business
committee did not meet during the 2024/25 period,
the directors consider all elements falling under
the committee’s purview have been overseen and,
where appropriate, challenged directly by the board
during this period. Further, each month, the board
received and reviewed the business performance
report, which includes focus on metrics relevant to
assessing whether and how we are operating as a
responsible business. Because of its perceived value
of ESG, the board has maintained a strong primary
focus on customer engagement, our communities
and the environment and has assessed relevant data
during this period.
Relationship with shareholders and
investors
South East Water is a private limited company.
Communication with shareholders is facilitated via
shareholder nominated non-executive directors on
the board.
South East Water’s board governs all company
matters, except those legally requiring shareholder
resolution. The board appreciates shareholders’
requirements. Equally shareholders understand
how the company’s operational delivery (including
meeting its regulatory obligations) and financial
resilience enable South East Water to achieve its
long-term purpose. Recent significant capital
contributions reflect a healthy relationship and
shareholder commitment.
The reporting calendar is dominated by the
publication of interim and final results each year,
in which the board reports to shareholders on its
stewardship of South East Water. At other times
during the year, presentations to rating agencies and
updates to the stock exchange are made available to
all. The chair ensures that the CEO and CFO provide
feedback to the board following presentations to
investors and meetings with shareholders. The open
and transparent culture is valued and nurtured.
See the section Leadership of the standalone
regulated company for more detail.
Gender statistics*
The board has not set a specific quota of women
members. The board and nominations committee
do consider balance and diversity when identifying
candidates and appointing new directors.
Men Women
Board 63%: (5) 37%: (3)
Executive Team 80%: (4) 20%: (1)
Senior Management Team 74%: (17) 26%: (6)
* as at 31 March 2025
Find out more
on the terms of reference of
board committees and our governance
southeastwater.co.uk/governance
Appointment, succession and evaluation continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 155
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Current committee members
*
Chris Train OBE (Chair) Independent non-executive
Director
Célia Pronto Independent non-executive
Director
Caroline Sheridan Independent non-executive
Director
Mark McArdle Non-executive director
Michael McKinstry Non-executive director
*as at 31 March 2025
In 2024/25,John Barnes resigned on 12 February 2025 on which
date Caroline Sheridan was appointed and Anne-Noëlle Le Gal
resigned on 15 August 2024 on which date Michael McKinstry
was appointed.
I am pleased to report on the work of the
nomination committee since 1 April 2024 and in
relation to this annual report for 2024/25.
The aim of the committee and of the board is to
ensure continuity of knowledge and experience
on the board and the optimum phasing of new
appointments, having regard to the regulatory cycle
of the company. As mentioned at the beginning
of this corporate governance statement, the
whole board considers succession planning across
the business.
Several items have been considered by the
committee during this period. The resignation of
John Barnes was accepted, as he had reached the
maximum service term, and Caroline Sheridan
was appointed as an independent non-executive
director, after due consideration, in February 2025.
Michael McKinstry was appointed as a non-executive
director designated by shareholders (Vantage
Infrastructure) and the resignation of Anne-
Noëlle Le Gal was accepted in August 2024, due to
her change of role. On the date of appointment,
Michael and Caroline each became a member of the
nomination committee, audit and risk committee,
remuneration committee and responsible business
committee. There was no other change to the
composition of the board or committees in 2024/25.
In May 2024, the appointment of Célia Pronto as an
independent non-executive director and chair of
the remuneration committee was renewed for a
term of three years from 1 June 2024 to 31 May 2027,
following recommendation by the committee. Célia
was also confirmed as a member of the nomination
committee and of the audit and risk committee.
In March 2025, the appointment of Christopher
Train OBE as an independent non-executive director
and chair of the remuneration committee was
renewed for a term of three years from 1 April 2025
to 31 March 2028, following recommendation by the
committee. Chris was also confirmed as a member
of the remuneration committee and of the
nomination committee.
The whole board reviewed the company’s initiatives
on diversity and gender pay gap. Further information
on gender pay gap is provided on page 39.
The committee reviewed its effectiveness as
part of the overall board evaluation process and
the members of the committee and directors
were satisfied that it is operating effectively in
accordance with its terms of reference.
Chris Train OBE
CHAIR
14 JULY 2025
Report from the Nomination Committee

Graphics
156 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Appointment, succession and evaluation continued
At the 2024 board evaluation, it was decided to
schedule an annual board session dedicated to the
analysis of key strategic risks in addition to the
current annual review of risks from the risk register,
which took place in December 2024 and will continue
to be held at least once a year.
It was also decided that from 2024/25 succession
planning would be considered by the nomination
committee (instead of the whole board) and that
one meeting of the nomination committee would
be dedicated to succession planning each year.
At the 2025 board evaluation, it was agreed that a
review of succession planning by the nomination
committee would take place as part of the
Corporate Plan process. This would take account of
the change of the organisational structure for the
new regulatory period (2025 to 2030). This would be
followed by regular reviews thereafter. This was also
intended to enable the nomination committee and
the board to get a better visibility of the succession
planning pipeline under the executive team and
senior management levels.
Following the PR24 period during which ESG
matters had been considered by the whole
board through the preparation of the company’s
submissions, the work of the Responsible Business
Committee going forward was discussed. The board
was keen for the Responsible Business Committee
to resume its activities to address topics such as
social capital, DEI, the environment, vulnerability
and People Plan. It was also suggested that
there should be a significant emphasis on
environmental aspects.
Board evaluation
Our board evaluation was carried out by means of
a confidential online questionnaire. The results
were collated and summarised by the company
secretary on a non-attributable basis and the
Chair led a discussion on the conclusions to draw
from the survey results and recommendations for
change or improvement. The discussions related
more particularly to questions that had received
a relatively lower score and comments made by
directors highlighting specific issues or suggestions.
The questionnaire covered the performance of the
board and its committees, reflecting key aspects
of our corporate governance code, including
compliance with the board leadership, transparency
and governance principles. The questionnaire also
incorporated questions from the Sustainability
First “Check-list for energy and water board
effectiveness” in line with our responsible business
commitments and questions from the City Values
Forum “Governing culture: an agenda for boards”
on the alignment of decision making with the
company’s purpose and values, and on culture and
the promotion of behaviours the board wishes
to encourage.
To ensure comments were not limited to responses
to specific questions in the questionnaire, open
questions on the working and effectiveness of the
board and committees in fulfilling their roles were
also included. Each committee also considered its
own practices against its terms of reference and the
committee chairs report on their findings in their
respective sections.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 157
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Commitment
The expected commitment, including time outside
scheduled board meetings when required, is
reviewed as part of the appointment process of the
non-executive directors. The terms of appointment
of non-executive directors do not include a set
expected time commitment, but instead include
an undertaking that the director will dedicate
sufficient time to discharge their responsibilities.
None of our non-executive directors has raised
concerns over the time required to fulfil their duties
and this aspect is also considered in the board
evaluation process.
The chair’s and directors’ other commitments were
disclosed and considered prior to appointment
and have not materially changed since their
appointment. Details on the chair’s and directors’
other commitments can be found on page 132.
Induction
On joining the board, each director receives a
detailed, tailored induction programme which
is supplemented as needed to ensure that the
director’s knowledge, familiarity with South
East Water and our industry are maintained at
the required level throughout their tenure. The
induction programme includes meetings with all
senior managers and visits to production sites
and other facilities away from the head office.
Such visits give directors the opportunity to speak
to a wider group of employees and contractors.
Any feedback provided by Ofwat following their
pre-appointment interview is also incorporated into
the induction programme.

Graphics
158 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Principles of our corporate governance
code relevant to this section
P. The board should establish formal and
transparent policies and procedures to ensure the
independence and effectiveness of internal and
external audit functions and satisfy itself on the
integrity of financial and narrative statements.
Q.
The board of the company’s leadership and
approach to transparency and governance
engenders trust in the company and ensures
accountability for their actions.
R
The board should present a fair, balanced and
understandable assessment of the company’s
position and prospects.
S.
The board should establish procedures to manage
risk, oversee the internal control framework, and
determine the nature and extent of the principal
risks the company is willing to take in order to
achieve its long-term strategic objectives.
Current committee members
*
Lisa Clement (Chair) Independent non-executive
Director
Célia Pronto Independent non-executive
Director
Caroline Sheridan Independent non-executive
Director
Mark McArdle Non-executive director
Michael McKinstry Non-executive director
*as at 31 March 2025
In 2024/25,John Barnes resigned on 12 February 2025
on which date Caroline Sheridan was appointed and
Anne-Noëlle Le Gal resigned on 15 August 2024 on which
date Michael McKinstry was appointed.
I am pleased to report on the work of the audit
and risk committee since 1 April 2024 and in
relation to this annual report for 2024/25.
► For 2023/24, we considered the latest
information available on the advanced
discussions with lenders and the progress
made to date to raise additional liquidity. As
the additional liquidity could not be legally
secured before signature of the financial
statements, even though discussions with
external lenders were at an advanced stage,
we concluded that a material uncertainty
relating to going concern existed. In this
context, we noted the confirmation received
from the ultimate shareholders that they
were minded in principle to support the
group if the need arises. We noted that
the company continued to comply with its
financial covenants and to hold investment
grade credit ratings. We considered the
sensitivity analysis carried out for the purpose
of going concern and long-term viability, the
underlying factors that might affect financial
ratios and credit ratings, and the mitigation
of related risks identified under relevant
scenarios. Following due consideration of
the information available, we concluded that
there was a reasonable expectation that the
group would be able to meet its debts as they
fall due over the relevant period and that it
was appropriate to adopt the going concern
basis of accounting in preparing the
financial statements, notwithstanding
the material uncertainty.
► We reviewed the half-year group financial
reporting for 2024/25 in December 2024 and
the board concluded that despite securing
a new loan of £50 million in August 2024,
the agreed equity injection of £75 million,
and the legally agreed six month extension
of the £120 million credit facility (to June
2026) beyond the going concern period, the
prospect of further potential downgrades
across the sector following the PR24 final
determination could affect our ability to
raise financing and still represented a
material uncertainty.
Transparency, audit, risk
and internal control
Report from the Audit and Risk Committee

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 159
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
► Subsequent to those reviews we received a
total of £275 million from shareholders.
► We reviewed this annual report and financial
statements for the full year ended 31 March
2025 and recommended their approval by
the board.
► We considered the significant level of planned
expenditure over 2024/25 and into AMP 8, the
forecast cash flows over the next 12 months,
the capital structure of the group (noting the
additional equity provided by shareholders in
December 2024 (£75 million) and May 2025
(£200 million)), and ongoing activities to renew
working capital facilities.
► We considered the prospects of South East
Water for the purpose of both the going
concern statement by the directors and the
longer-term viability described in the
viability statement.
► For the going concern assessment, we have
considered the budgeted and forecast cash
flows over the 12 months to July 2026 (based on
the final determination), the capital structure
of the group and the financing needs for the
period and are of the view that the company has
sufficient resources to meet its commitments
over the going concern period. However,
shortly after the end of the going concern
period the company will need to renew the
revolving credit facility, in order to continue to
meet its commitments. This facility matures in
September 2026 and we noted that discussions
with lenders were underway and progressing
well and that it was likely that the revolving
credit facility would be renewed. However, as
this would not be legally committed at the date
of the signing of the financial statements and
its commitment was outside the control of
the directors, we concluded that the risk that
the funding will not be received constituted a
material uncertainty.
► We considered the potential impact of Ofwat’s
ongoing investigation into supply resilience,
having regard to the engagement carried out
to date with Ofwat. We concluded that at this
stage of the investigation it is unclear what the
outcome will be, and that no liability should be
provided in the financial statements. We also
concluded that it was not possible to reliably
estimate any potential liability.
► We considered the impact of the PR24 final
determination having regard to the company’s
decision to request a reference to the CMA
noting however that the CMA is due to publish
provisional findings in September 2025 and that
any CMA redetermination is not expected to
be known until December 2025 at the earliest.
While we assessed two possible outcomes
for the purposes of the long-term viability
statement, we noted that the status of the
redetermination process was such that it was
not yet possible to identify any clear, and
reasonably predictable implications for the
financial position of the company, whether
favourable or otherwise.
► We noted that, despite challenging financial
conditions during 2024/25, we continued to
comply with the financial covenants and retain
credit ratings consistent with our securitisation
and our instrument of appointment. Further,
having regard to the factors considered, we
concluded that the company would continue to
be able to maintain its investment grade credit
ratings and comply with financial covenants for
the foreseeable future.
► Following due consideration of the information
available, we concluded that there was a
reasonable expectation that the group would
be able to meet its debts as they fall due over
the relevant period and that it was appropriate
to adopt the going concern basis of accounting
in preparing the financial statements,
notwithstanding the material uncertainty
noted in the Going Concern Statement.

Graphics
160 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Report from the Audit and Risk Committee continued
► Further, we recommended the board
maintain a lookout period of 10 years for its
viability statement. We have also considered
and made recommendations to the board
on the appropriate nature and extent of
stress testing to be used to assess the future
prospects of South East Water. Our principal
risks and our viability statement are set out
in the strategic report.
► We considered the report to those charged
with governance on the findings of the audit.
► We considered the impact of the continued
high inflation and the impact of the
increases in bills reflecting the PR24 final
determination on customers and of macro-
economic risks on our key judgements and
estimates in the financial statements, in
particular the impact on our debtor book
and expected credit loss adjustment.
Financial statements and annual
performance report
► Audit plan
We reviewed the audit plan with the auditors
and were satisfied that it covered the key
issues. We reviewed the proposed significant
audit risks typical of a water company and the
areas of audit focus.
► Fair, balanced and understandable
We reviewed, with the external auditors, the
findings of their audit including any major
topics identified during the audit, any risks
to the quality of the audit and how they were
addressed, areas of significant judgement,
key accounting and audit judgements, and any
points to raise from the audit.
We reviewed this annual report and financial
statements and the regulatory reporting in order
to assess whether they present a fair, balanced
and understandable assessment of South East
Water’s and the group’s position and prospects.
We reviewed the relevant specific notes and
explanations to the financial statements to ensure
they provided a clear explanation of accounting
policies and technical matters. Following this
review, we recommended to the board that, taken
as a whole, the group annual report 2024/25 is fair,
balanced and understandable.
We also reviewed the report from AtkinsRéalis,
our external assurance partners, on our regulatory
reporting and recommended to the board
the approval for publication of our regulatory
reporting, cost assessment tables and our
performance, people, and planet report.
► Significant judgements and sources of
estimation uncertainty considered
Revenue recognition
A significant proportion of water supplied to our
domestic and our smaller commercial customers
remains unbilled at the end of the financial
year. As such, judgements and estimates are
made in respect of the value of unbilled water
revenue. These estimates are based on previous
consumption levels and are validated to ensure
that the assessments are reasonable taking
account of changes in patterns of consumption.
Bad debt provisioning
Our trade receivables balance includes a provision
for bad debt, which is our assessment of debts
that will be unpaid by our customers. The provision
is based on the application of expected recovery
rates to our aged debt balances using specific data
for household and for non-household debt. We are
satisfied that the level of provision reflects the
potential impact of persisting high inflation and
the impact of the increase in bills reflecting the
PR24 final determination.
Transparency, audit, risk and internal control continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 161
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Classification of costs between operating and
capital expenditure
We have a significant capital programme and
therefore it is important that the policies
underpinning the capitalisation of expenditure
are closely validated and compliant with current
accounting standards. The committee sought
clarification and comfort that the costs capitalised
as fixed assets are directly attributable to
capital projects.
Management override of controls
The audit committee keeps the judgements and
sources of estimation uncertainty under review
and challenges as appropriate, typically as part of
the annual reporting, and the board also exercises
scrutiny throughout the year as part of the board
review of the monthly management accounts in
the finance report.
► Other areas of audit and risk committee focus
Areas of focus reviewed by the committee
included the appropriateness of actuarial
assumptions for the valuation of the assets and
liabilities of the two defined benefit pension
schemes to ensure they were within an acceptable
range considering the economic environment. The
other areas of audit focus were the going concern,
long-term viability statement, the potential
impact of the Ofwat investigation into resilience
(see note 28). Consideration was also given to
cyber risks and the mitigation measures put in
place by the company.
► Disclosures on climate-related risks
We have reviewed our non-financial and
sustainability information statement which
includes our climate-related disclosures following
the requirements of section 414CB of the
Companies Act 2006 and the recommendations
of the task force on climate-related financial
disclosures. Our climate-related disclosures set
out a qualitative assessment of climate-related
risks on the business under several scenarios using
the detailed analysis of climate projections and
climate-related risks carried out for the purpose
of our long-term delivery strategy. We noted the
approval by the board of the publication of our
updated adaptation report in November 2024.
External auditors
► Audit fee
We reviewed and approved the audit fee proposal
from the auditors for the 2024/25 audit and the
settlement of the fees for 2023/24.
►   Effectiveness of the external
audit process
We reviewed the effectiveness of the external
audit process, receiving feedback from the
auditors and the CFO and Group Financial
Controller on the conduct of the audit and
any issues and potential improvements. The
chair of the committee met with the auditors
to discuss the audit. We were satisfied with
the performance of the auditors and the
effectiveness of the overall process.
► Objectivity and independence of auditors
We reviewed the objectivity and independence of
the auditors, considering the total fees received
by the auditors which are paid by South East
Water, the duration of the appointment of the
auditors, and the confirmation of independence
from the auditors.
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP were appointed
as statutory auditor in August 2021. The
appointment has been made for an intended
initial five years starting with the year ended
31 March 2022, and is currently in its fourth year.
It may be extended for a further three years.
This term is within current FRC guidance that
the audit should be tendered every 10 years.
We also considered the level of non-audit
services relating essentially to regulatory
reporting which are best provided by PwC to
ensure consistency. The committee concluded
that PwC are objective and independent in their
role as external auditor.
We applied our policy on non-audit services that
requires approval of non-audit work by the chair
of the committee or, for any work in excess of
£50,000, the full committee.

Graphics
162 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Report from the Audit and Risk Committee continued
Review of policies
►   We carried out the annual review of and
approved the policy on audit and non-audit
services which reflected the latest FRC
Ethical Standard.
►   We considered work on the development
of an audit and assurance policy, drawing
on established processes to ensure the
accuracy and completeness of the data and
information we publish as currently set out in
our Company Monitoring Framework.
Risk management and internal controls
►   We considered whether an internal audit
function was required. We considered the
established processes in place for regulatory
and performance reporting, which include
both internal and external assurance, the
size and structure of the company and the
nature of the core activities. We concluded
that an internal audit function was not
required at this stage and that the current
combination of internal reviews of controls
and systems carried out by the finance team
and of specific out-sourced internal audit
assignments was appropriate and allowed
access to specialist skills and knowledge
that it would not be cost effective to
maintain internally.
►   We considered the outcome of the FRC
review of the company’s annual report and
financial statements for the year ended 31
March 2024 in accordance with Part 2 of the
FRC Corporate Reporting Review Operating
Procedures. The letter concluded that the
FRC had no questions or queries to raise.
It noted several improvements which the
FRC believed users of the annual report and
financial statements would benefit from.
The committee considered these matters
to ensure they would be addressed in the
annual report and financial statements for
2024/25. The FRC review was based solely on
the annual report and financial statements
2023/24 without the benefit from
detailed knowledge of our business or an
understanding of the underlying transactions
entered into, and therefore the review of the
FRC does not provide any assurance in respect
of our 2023/24 financial statements and the
FRC does not accept any liability for reliance
by anyone on its letter to the company
referred to above.
►   We discussed a proposed programme of
internal audit work in 2024/25 including
the consideration of the implementation
of the recommendations from a review of
capital expenditure / asset processes by BDO
commenced in 2023/24 and of non-regulated
finance and governance processes. We
discussed the preparation of an AI governance
framework including in the context of the
management of cyber risks. We also reviewed
and agreed a forward plan of the items to
be discussed at future audit committee
meetings.
►   We reviewed the effectiveness of the
committee as part of the board evaluation
and the members of the committee and
directors were satisfied that it is operating
effectively in accordance with its terms
of reference.
►   In 2024/25 the focus of the board as a whole
has continued to be on the management of
the risks related to PR24.
Lisa Clement
CHAIR
14 JULY 2025
Transparency, audit, risk and internal control continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 163
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Transparency and reporting
The board and the audit and risk committee ensure
that the business, financial and regulatory reporting
of South East Water is fair and balanced, transparent
and informative and accurately reflects material
issues and describes our business model, strategy
and performance.
Our annual reporting on performance against
the performance commitments in our final
determination is prepared following rigorous
internal control processes and external assurance
with oversight from the audit and risk committee
and the board. Our processes to ensure the
accuracy and reliability of our data and reporting
are described in our data assurance summary in our
annual performance report.
We also maintain and publish our company
monitoring framework, which sets out what we do
to ensure that the data and information we publish
is reliable, transparent, timely and appropriate to
the audience. We publish a risk assessment and
the mitigation and controls to address the risks we
have identified.
Risk management and internal controls
The board is responsible for defining the risk
management strategy and processes, including
the risk register and the identification of the
principal risks. It also carries out an annual review
of the effectiveness of the risk management and
internal control systems (financial, operational
and compliance) of the principal risks and of the
prospects of our company. Our risk management
process is described in the strategic report.
The audit and risk committee plays a key role
in the ongoing monitoring of the adequacy and
effectiveness of the internal controls and risk
management systems established by the board.
This involves reviewing the ability to identify and
manage new risk types, ensuring effective controls
are embedded into management and governance
processes, and continuously monitoring risks with
relevant items at each meeting. The audit and risk
committee also ensures that appropriate audit work
is carried out on risk management.
Read more on risk management and principal risks
on page 50 and on our long-term challenges on
pages 22 to 23.
This corporate governance statement was
approved by the board and is signed on its behalf
by David Hinton, Chief Executive Officer.

Graphics
164 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Remuneration report
Current committee members
*
Célia Pronto (Chair) Independent non-executive director
Caroline Sheridan Independent non-executive director
Chris Train OBE Independent non-executive director
Mark McArdle Non-executive director
Michael McKinstry Non-executive director
*as at 31 March 2025
In 2024/25,John Barnes resigned on 12 February 2025 on
which date Caroline Sheridan was appointed; Anne-Noëlle
Le Gal resigned on 15 August 2024 on which date Michael
McKinstry was appointed.
I am pleased to present the directors’ remuneration
report for the year ended 31 March 2025.
The aim of the Remuneration Committee
(“committee”) is to ensure that executive
pay is aligned with strategy and culture and
that remuneration reflects the company’s
performance against clear measures relating to
operations, delivering outcomes for customers,
the environment, responsible business and finance
as well as individual objectives. We prioritise
linking executive pay to business performance
(including improvements), which in turn links to
demonstrable customer benefits. To that end,
we may exercise discretion of up 100 per cent to
reflect the operating environment. We set out
in this remuneration report how this has been
achieved this year.
To improve transparency and clarity, we choose
to present our remuneration reporting having
regard to the reporting requirements that apply
to quoted companies under schedule 8 of the
Large and Medium-Sized Companies and Groups
(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008.
I highlight the following in respect of the main
activities of the committee in 2024/25:
Annual Incentive Plan (‘AIP’) 2020 to 2025
We recognised the efforts throughout our team
during the period by approving the final awards
under the 2023/24 AIP on 4 July 2024 and the
performance measures and targets (including
threshold, target and stretch levels) for the
2024/25 AIP after considering a range of assurance
including the findings from the external audit
alongside other independent external assurance
the findings of the financial audit and external
assurance of our regulatory performance, ensuring
the committee had due regard to all necessary
information before confirming its final decision.
Operation of the AIP in 2024/25
We reviewed the full year performance of the
company and that of individual executive directors
in 2024/25.
We carried out a detailed assessment of
performance in the round, considering
performance for customers and the environment
before reaching our decision on awards under the
AIP for 2024/25 as set out in this remuneration
report. In doing so, we had regard to the
investigation launched by Ofwat in November
2023 into supply resilience, expectations set by
Ofwat in respect of performance related pay at
PR24 and the performance related executive pay
prohibition rule published in June 2025 pursuant to
the Water (Special Measures) Act 2025.
We provide explanations on this detailed
assessment on page 189 of this remuneration
report.
We reviewed the outcome of the AIP as a whole
and concluded that it continued to operate
effectively, reflecting actual performance while
recognising progress in meeting important
environmental, social and governance objectives.
We determined the final award under the AIP and
that no award would be granted under the ODI
component (including in respect of the PCC and
non-household void ODIs) and the financial metric
of the AIP relating to appointed operating costs.
We determined that the AIP for 2024/25 would
result in appropriate awards in respect of the
responsible business, appointed business cash
receipt and personal objective components. There
would also be an award in respect of the non-
appointed operating profit component of the AIP.
We determined that deferral payments for the
2022/23 period would be paid in July 2025 as part
Report from the remuneration committee

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 165
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
of the normal scheduled payment as agreed in
previous meetings of the committee.
We considered the overall remuneration outcome
to be appropriate under our policy and in
comparison with other companies in the sector,
including their reporting on CEO pay ratios.
Governance
We reviewed the outturn of the senior managers’
bonus scheme for 2023/24. We reviewed the
targets for 2024/25 under that bonus scheme
having regard to its alignment with ODIs, the
strategic objectives of the company and its
consistency with the executive team bonus
scheme. We reviewed the pay award negotiated
with the Staff Council for the workforce.
The committee and the board discussed
requirements and expectations set out by Ofwat
at PR24 and in the performance related executive
pay prohibition rule published in June 2025
pursuant to the Water (Special Measures) Act
2025. In the course of the year the committee and
the board also considered relevant consultations
and the engagement between Ofwat, Water UK
and water undertakers (including the company) in
relation to remuneration practices more generally.
We reviewed the effectiveness of the committee
as part of the overall board evaluation process
and the members of the committee and directors
were satisfied that it is operating effectively in
accordance with its terms of reference.
The committee reviewed water companies’ PR24
remuneration incentives and policies to identify
any relevant trends and best practice that could
inform the development of incentives for AMP 8.
In a price review year, the main focus of the
committee had been to review its remuneration
policy for 2025 to 2030 to ensure incentives
reflected both the PR24 final determination (and
CMA redetermination when available) and the
priorities of the business in AMP 8, which will see
a significant increase in crucial expenditure and
new regulatory targets and mechanisms. The
committee engaged Ellason LLP as independent
advisers to provide benchmarking analysis and to
support the development of the AMP 8 incentives.
We describe below the key characteristics of our
remuneration policy for AMP 8 and the rationale
for the changes implemented. A further review will
take place in 2025/26 to reflect relevant changes
from the CMA redetermination.
Remuneration policy for AMP 8 (spanning
financial years 2024/25 to 2029/30)
During the year, a key activity of the committee
has been to review the remuneration policy to
ensure it remains appropriate for South East
Water in the context of both a critical period of
strategic planning and investment during AMP 8,
and heightened public and regulatory scrutiny of
remuneration across the sector.
Our overarching aim is to ensure that the executive
directors are appropriately incentivised to deliver
long-term, sustainable performance for the
benefit of our customers, the environment and our
shareholders, while remaining compliant with the
water industry’s evolving regulatory framework,
including the Water (Special Measures) Act 2025
and Ofwat’s rules relating to the prohibition
of awarding Performance-Related Pay (PRP) in
certain prescribed circumstances. South East
Water remains committed to a remuneration
framework that supports a performance culture,
and recognises success but does not reward
poor performance. Following the committee’s
thorough review of the remuneration policy for
the executive directors (which cascades to their
direct reports and other senior management
levels), several changes have been made to the
policy to ensure it is fit for purpose over AMP 8.
The main changes are set out below (and explained
in more detail later in this report).
Base salary
Following a comprehensive benchmarking exercise
against the sector and other key talent markets
in which the company competes, the committee
approved base salary increases for executive
directors, effective 1 April 2025, as follows:
  ►   Chief Executive: increased by 30.2%
to £400,000.
  ►   Chief Financial Officer: increased by 19.2%
to £300,000.

Graphics
166 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Report from the remuneration committee continued
The committee recognises that the salary
increases are significant. However, it believes
they are necessary to bridge a gap to competitive
norms that has resulted from a sustained period
of pay restraint at the company. The committee
first noted this position following an analysis
of market competitiveness in early 2023, but
resolved to consider market-based adjustments
to salary as part of its next review of the wider
remuneration policy in advance of the next AMP.
The committee undertook this review in the round
last year, ahead of AMP 8. It concluded that the
overall pay opportunities, and salaries specifically,
continued not to reflect market norms, the scale
and complexity of the roles at South East Water,
nor the calibre of our well-regarded incumbent
team. It agreed that it would be appropriate, fair,
and in stakeholders’ interests now to address this
competitive gap; ensuring market-competitive pay
is essential to attract, retain, motivate and ensure
the stability of a high-calibre executive team
capable of delivering our critical capital programme
over the next five years. The new salary levels
were set to underpin a broadly median package
overall, taking into account the broader context
of increasing regulatory scrutiny, heightened
expectations around performance delivery, and
broadened scopes of leadership responsibility.
The base salaries of three other permanent
members of the executive team were increased
from 1 April 2025 by the same percentage as for
the CFO to reflect market norms.
Cash allowance
The company is currently engaged in a PR24
redetermination process with the Competition
and Markets Authority (CMA), which the Board
believes is in customers’ best interests. However,
the committee acknowledges that the decision
to enter into this process places significantly
increased demands on executives’ time and
leadership focus. In recognition of the exceptional
workload and sustained increase in working
hours associated with this process, including
strategic preparation and extensive regulatory
engagement, the committee has approved
the payment of an additional cash allowance
to recognise this broader role scope. While
the committee considered consolidating this
allowance into base salary, it determined that a
separate arrangement was more appropriate, to
retain flexibility over its duration. The committee
has approved a cash allowance of £50,000 per
annum for 2025/26 for each executive director
in relation to the CMA process. The allowance is
non-pensionable, will not be included in
the calculation of performance-related pay
opportunities, and will be paid monthly. No
clawback or malus provisions will apply.
Long-term Incentive Plan (LTIP) 2025
to 2030
As part of its comprehensive review of the
remuneration policy, the committee concluded
that the reintroduction of a LTIP would be
appropriate to align with the company’s long-term
priorities and the significant number of capital
programmes to be delivered over the new AMP.
The LTIP is designed to align executives’ focus
with core customer and environmental outcomes,
as well as value creation for our shareholders, over
the next five years.
Awards under the new LTIP will be granted in
2025/26, with no further grants (except for
new joiners, or in the event of promotion) until
2030/31. The extent to which awards will pay out
to participants will depend on performance over
the five-year period ending in 2029/30, against
pre-determined targets. These targets (and
the measures for which they are set) have been
carefully selected to reflect the company’s key
strategic and regulatory commitments over the
next five years, and include measures linked to:
  ► Delivery of the capital programme.
  ► Demand management performance.
  ► Customer satisfaction (C-MeX).
  ►   Delivery of the Water Industry National
Environment Programme (WINEP).
  ► Return on Regulated Equity (RoRE).
A summary of the LTIP scorecard, including,
including measure weightings, is provided later
in this report.
Remuneration report continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 167
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
To ensure appropriate alignment with stakeholder
interests and to maintain a balanced remuneration
structure, the maximum LTIP opportunity for
each executive director under this arrangement
will be 150 per cent of base salary. The plan is
performance-related pay and will be subject to
malus and clawback provisions.
Annual Incentive Plan (AIP)
The committee also undertook a thorough review
of the operation and effectiveness of the AIP
over the course of AMP 7. This review evaluated
the AIP’s continued alignment with company
performance, stakeholder expectations, and the
evolving regulatory environment. The committee
concluded that the overall structure of the AIP,
including the use of a balanced scorecard and
clear performance metrics, continues to be
appropriate and effective in supporting short-
term accountability.
However, in the context of the reintroduction of a
LTIP for AMP 8, the committee determined that a
recalibration of the AIP opportunity was warranted.
As a result, the maximum AIP opportunity for
both executive directors has been reduced to
ensure the overall remuneration package remains
proportionate, appropriately balanced between
short- and long-term focus, and aligned with
competitive norms and governance good practice.
The 2025/26 target and maximum opportunities
for the executive directors will be:
Target
opportunity
(% of salary)
Maximum
opportunity
(% of salary)
CEO 45% 65%
CFO 35% 50%
The committee also reviewed the performance
metrics underpinning the AIP, with a summary
of its decisions provided later in this report.
Consistent with the operation of the plan in prior
years, 66 per cent of any earned award will be
payable in July following the end of the relevant
financial year, while the remaining 34 per cent
will be deferred for a period of two years, with
payment subject only to continued employment.
The AIP is performance-related pay and will be
subject to clawback and malus provisions.
Service Award
Following careful consideration, the committee
approved an additional Service Award alongside
performance-related elements of the package, to
support leadership continuity throughout AMP 8,
a critical delivery period for the company.
The award is intended to recognise the importance
of retaining experienced executive leadership
through what will be a complex and demanding
regulatory and operational cycle. The Service
Award is structured solely around continued
service and will vest progressively over the five-
year AMP, subject to continued employment at
each vesting date.
The vesting schedule will be as follows:
  ► 20% on the third anniversary of grant.
  ► 20% on the fourth anniversary of grant.
  ► 60% on the fifth anniversary of grant.
The maximum overall award for each executive
director under this arrangement will be 100 per
cent of their 2025/26 base salary.
This structure is designed to promote long-term
stability and leadership continuity through the full
AMP cycle while ensuring that the overall reward
opportunity remains proportionate in the context
of competitive practice.
Conclusion
The committee recognises the heightened
public, regulatory, and stakeholder expectations
facing the sector and remains fully committed
to ensuring that remuneration outcomes are
fair, transparent, and aligned with the long-term
delivery of value for customers, the environment,
and shareholders.
In shaping the 2025 to 2030 remuneration policy,
we have sought to strike the right balance between
attracting and retaining the leadership needed
to deliver critical outcomes, while maintaining
restraint and accountability in line with Ofwat’s
guidance and wider regulatory standards. The
committee believes that the structure we have
adopted reflects both the scale of the challenge
ahead and the need for stable, experienced
leadership over the five-year AMP 8 period.

Graphics
168 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
We explain below how corporate governance principles have been taken into account to define our
remuneration policy.
Principles of our corporate governance code relevant to remuneration
T. Remuneration policies and practices should
be designed to support strategy and promote
long-term sustainable success. Executive
remuneration should be aligned to company
purpose and values, and be clearly linked to
the successful delivery of the company’s
long-term strategy.
U.
Directors should exercise independent
judgement and discretion when authorising
remuneration outcomes, taking account of
company and individual performance, and
wider circumstances.
Remuneration principles
► Remuneration is aligned with the company’s purpose, values and vision and promotes the long-term
sustainable success of the company.
► Remuneration is demonstrably linked to the delivery of the core purpose of the company to provide
the public water service, high customer satisfaction and achieving strategic objectives.
► Remuneration is competitive with companies of similar size and complexity and fair in the context
of the wider workforce remuneration.
► The total remuneration includes a variable element that effectively incentivises improvements in
performance and balances the short-term and long-term interests of the company.
► The remuneration committee shall ensure that the company upholds and applies the fundamental
principles of equal pay.
Corporate governance principles
V. A formal and transparent procedure for
developing policy on executive remuneration
and determining director and senior
management remuneration should be
established. No director should be involved in
deciding their own remuneration outcome.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 169
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
How our remuneration policy addresses the factors of clarity, simplicity, risk, predictability,
proportionality and alignment to culture that are set out in our corporate governance code.
Clarity
Remuneration arrangements should be transparent
and promote effective engagement with
shareholders and the workforce.
► Our reporting on remuneration is transparent
with our policy across all components of
remuneration explained in detail.
► We engage with the Staff Council on
executive remuneration.
Simplicity
Remuneration structures should avoid complexity and their
rationale and operation should be easy to understand.
► Our remuneration is based on the clear remuneration
principles set out above.
► Each element of the package has a defined role.
► Our performance measures and targets are based on
our performance commitments.
Risk
Remuneration arrangements should ensure
reputational and other risks from excessive rewards,
and behavioural risks that can arise from target-
based incentive plans, are identified and mitigated.
► The level of remuneration is monitored to
ensure it is maintained at a median level with
comparable companies.
► The AIP and LTIP include performance measures
that relate to all aspects of our strategy,
including both performance commitments and
responsible business commitments, to ensure
there is no incentive to achieve certain targets
to the detriment of others.
Predictability
The range of possible values of rewards to individual
directors and any other limits or discretions should be
identified and explained at the time of approving the policy.
► A model including all measures and targets is used by the
committee to assess the potential awards under the AIP
and LTIP at different levels of performance. It provides
visibility to both the committee and the participants,
with the committee retaining absolute discretion to
decide on individual awards.
► The range of potential awards under the AIP and LTIP are
disclosed in this directors’ remuneration report with an
illustration of the application of the policy for the next
financial year.
► The remuneration policy includes details on the
discretion of up to 100 per cent that may be exercised
by the committee in respect of the different
remuneration components.
Proportionality
The link between individual awards, the delivery
of strategy and the long-term performance of the
company should be clear. Outcomes should not
reward poor performance.
► Performance related remuneration is
predominantly based on our corporate plan
commitments, clearly linking remuneration to
performance and strategy.
► The remuneration policy sets out the principles
followed in determining the stretching targets
under the AIP and LTIP.
► The committee retains discretion to avoid
inappropriate or mechanistic outcomes and there
are also malus and clawback provisions in the AIP
and LTIP rules.
Alignment to culture
Incentive schemes should drive behaviours consistent with
company purpose, values and strategy.
► The majority of the performance measures in the AIP
and LTIP relate to our core purpose of providing the
public water service and relate to the key aspects of
our activities: operational delivery, high standards of
customer service, a safe working environment and the
delivery of our capital & environmental programme.
► The LTIP performance measures are consistent for
all participants.
► The alignment of the performance measures between
the AIP and the senior managers’ bonus scheme creates
consistent incentives in support of culture and strategy.

Graphics
170 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Executive directors’ remuneration policy
This section of the report describes the elements of the remuneration policy adopted by the committee
for the duration of AMP 8 (2025/26 to 2029/30).
The rules of the AIP and LTIP were approved by the committee on 3 July 2025 and are intended to apply
until 31 March 2030.
Base salary
Purpose and link to strategy
To provide a fixed remuneration
sufficient to attract, motivate and
retain individuals with the appropriate
experience, skills and competencies
to lead the business and to define and
implement the company’s strategy in line
with the board’s strategic direction.
Operation and performance measures
Base salaries reflect the individual’s experience and role and are
reviewed annually by the committee. Any changes are typically
effective on 1 April. Outside of salary reviews, annual salary
increases follow the company wide pay award negotiated with
the Staff Council.
This is fixed remuneration which is not determined by reference to
performance measures (but personal performance is assessed under
the annual incentive plan and as part of any salary review).
No clawback or malus provisions apply.
Maximum opportunity
A maximum limit for salary has not
been set by the committee and salary
increases are typically in line with
the workforce.
Periodic reviews may take place to ensure
pay remains competitive, targeting
remuneration at market median using
comparisons with market practices for
comparable companies in terms of size,
activities and complexity. Remuneration
consultants are used where deemed
appropriate by the committee. A similar
assessment is made to assess the
appropriate base salary on changes of
roles and promotions.
Implementation 2024/25
CEO: £307,274
(increased by 4.5 per cent
on 1 April 2024).
CFO: £251,710
(increased by 4.5 per cent
on 1 April 2024).
Implementation 2025/26
CEO: £400,000
(increased by 30.2 per cent
on 1 April 2025).
CFO: £300,000
(increased by 19.2 per cent
on 1 April 2025).
Cash allowance
Purpose and link to strategy
Cash allowances reflect sustained and
exceptional demands placed on executive
time and leadership capacity that extend
beyond the scope of their core role
responsibilities.
Operation and performance measures
Cash allowances are reviewed annually by the committee, with any
changes normally effective on 1 April. The committee may withdraw
the cash allowance at any time if it is deemed there is no longer an
increased demand on executive time beyond that reasonably to be
expected for discharging core role responsibilities.
This is fixed remuneration which is not determined by reference to
performance measures.
The cash allowance is not contractual and non-pensionable, is not
included in the calculation of performance-related pay opportunities
and is paid monthly. No clawback or malus provisions apply.
Remuneration policy

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 171
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Cash allowance continued
Maximum opportunity
A maximum limit for the cash allowance
has not been set by the committee.
Periodic reviews take place to ensure the
payment of an allowance, and the level at
which this is set, appropriately reflects
the time demands on executives.
Implementation 2025/26
CEO: £50,000
CFO: £50,000
Benefits
Purpose and link to strategy
A range of benefits sufficient to maintain
the competitiveness of the company
at recruitment stage and to help retain
individuals of the appropriate experience,
skills and competencies. Benefits are
usually aligned with the benefits offered
to senior managers or the
wider workforce.
Operation and performance measures
Executive directors are eligible for benefits which are available to
the wider workforce on broadly similar terms. Their benefits may be
reviewed in connection with any review of their base salary.
The committee has discretion to agree specific benefits where
appropriate for recruitment or retention purposes.
No clawback or malus provisions apply.
This is fixed remuneration which is not determined by reference to
performance measures.
Maximum opportunity
There is no set maximum value for
benefits, but executive directors’
benefits are similar to those of senior
managers or the wider workforce.
Implementation 2024/25
The CEO and CFO benefits for
2025/26 are the same as in
2023/24.
Implementation 2025/26
CEO: Company car,life assurance,
private medical insurance and
health cash plan.
CFO: Car allowance,
life assurance, private medical
insurance and health cash plan.
Pension
Purpose and link to strategy
To attract and retain individuals with
the appropriate experience, skills and
competencies by providing competitive
pension arrangements.
Operation and performance measures
Executive directors are offered the choice of a company contribution
into a defined contribution pension scheme or a cash allowance in
lieu of pension, or a combination of both at their election with no
employee contribution required.
This is fixed remuneration which is not determined by reference to
performance measures.
Maximum opportunity
There is no set maximum but the
percentage of contributions or cash
allowance for new appointments or
changes of roles are aligned with the
percentage that applies to the wider
workforce (10 per cent).
Implementation 2024/25
CEO: 10 per cent of salary as
pension cash allowance and/or
employer pension contribution.
CFO: 10 per cent of salary as
pension cash allowance and/or
employer pension contribution.
Implementation 2025/26
CEO: 10 per cent of salary as
pension cash allowance and/or
employer pension.
CFO: 10 per cent of salary as
pension cash allowance and/or
employer pension contribution.

Graphics
172 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Annual incentive plan
Purpose and link
to strategy
To incentivise the
delivery of annual
performance
commitments and
financial as well as
responsible business and
longer-term strategic
objectives, creating
a direct link between
actual company
performance and
variable remuneration.
Award opportunities
are determined by
the committee taking
account of market
conditions, to deliver a
competitive package
overall, and within that
an appropriate balance
between fixed and
variable remuneration.
Operation and
performance measures
Link to performance: The performance of executive directors is assessed using a
range of performance measures which are predominantly based on performance
commitments made in the business plan, with a particular focus on delivering for
customers. In addition to the CEO and CFO, the performance related pay of all other
members of the Executive Team is also determined by the committee under the AIP.
The metrics, their weightings, targets (at threshold, target and maximum levels) and
potential outcomes at each performance level (as a percentage of salary) are set by
the committee at the beginning of the year to align potential reward to the business
strategy. These details will be disclosed in the relevant directors’ remuneration report.
No award is made for performance outcomes at or below the threshold level set. The
committee seeks to ensure that targets do not encourage undue risk taking by the
executives so that the long- term performance of the business is not put at risk by
considerations of short-term value.
Personal objectives are set by the committee and include individual objectives specific
to the role of the individual and collective objectives for the entire Executive Team.
Stretch: Threshold levels are normally set no lower than prior year actual performance.
Target levels are set at stretching performance outcomes and maximum pay-out
levels should reflect truly exceptional performance improvements. Year-to-year, the
elements comprising the AIP may change, as can the threshold, target and maximum
pay-out performance levels to ensure that the AIP remains stretching.
Discretion/underpin/malus: The committee retains full discretion to determine whether
and when any award is paid under the AIP, and the amount of the awards. In addition
to setting threshold levels of performance, the committee will seek to ensure that
the final outcome reflects performance that is genuine and demonstrable and takes
account of any material issues of performance, having regard to delivery for customers
and the environment – which can result in no award being paid irrespective of whether
the application of the AIP metrics and targets could otherwise result in an award. The
committee may also determine that the performance metrics or targets are no longer
appropriate following the date of grant and adjust them during a performance year.
Payment and deferral: 66 per cent of any award determined by the committee is paid
in cash in the month of July following the end of the financial year, with the remaining
34 per cent being paid in cash after two years, provided that the director remains in
employment or is determined to be a “good leaver” under the rules of the scheme.
Deferral, clawback and malus: Any award can be deferred in whole or in part at the
discretion of the committee, including by reference to the committee’s “in the round”
assessment of performance. The amount of any award can be reduced, or any award
can be cancelled and sums paid may be recovered, with provisions aligned to Ofwat’s
performance-related pay prohibition rules – see page 175 for trigger events.
If it is determined that an award should be reduced or cancelled, the committee may
determine that the amount of any reduction can be set off against any deferred
award and/or require the repayment of any sums already paid. Details relating to the
treatment of AIP at the end of an executive’s appointment are set out on page 178.
Maximum opportunity
CEO:
Target performance:
45 per cent of salary
Maximum
(outperformance):
65 per cent of salary
CFO:
Target performance:
35 per cent of salary
Maximum
(outperformance):
50 per cent of salary
Implementation 2024/25
The metrics and targets for 2024/25 are
set out on page 183.
Implementation 2025/26
A summary of the performance measures
selected for the AIP in 2025/26 is set out
on page 196.
Remuneration policy continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 173
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Long-term incentive plan
Purpose and link
to strategy
To align the long-term
interests of executive
directors with those of
stakeholders, by directly
linking reward to the
successful delivery of
the company’s strategic
objectives over the
regulatory period.
Award opportunities are
set by the committee
taking account of
market conditions, to
deliver a competitive
package overall,
and within that an
appropriate balance
between fixed and
variable remuneration.
Operation and
performance measures
Link to performance: Performance is measured by five categories: capital programme
delivery (50 per cent), demand management (12.5 per cent), C-MeX (12.5 per cent),
WINEP delivery (12.5 per cent) and RoRE (12.5 per cent).
The metrics, targets (at threshold, target and maximum levels) and potential outcomes
at each performance level (as a percentage of salary) are set by the committee
at grant. No award is made for performance at or below the threshold level of
performance. The committee seeks to ensure that targets do not encourage undue
risk taking by the executives.
Grant: One-off grant in 2025/26.
Performance period: Five years.
Vesting and payment: The LTIP will vest and be paid out to the extent warranted by
performance in July 2030, subject to continued employment, and following the testing
of the performance conditions and an overall assessment ‘in the round’, at the end of
the five-year performance period.
Discretion/underpin: The committee retains full discretion to determine the outcome
of the LTIP. The committee may adjust the measures and targets attaching to the
LTIP if events occur that cause it to determine they are no longer appropriate in the
circumstances. Any amendment would seek to ensure that the metrics and targets
achieve their original purpose and are not, in the opinion of the committee, materially
more or less challenging to satisfy in the circumstances. The committee will also seek
to ensure that outcomes reflect performance that is genuine and sustainable, take
account of any material performance issue, having regard to delivery for customers
and the environment and performance ‘in the round’.
Clawback and malus: Any award can be deferred in whole or in part at the discretion of
the committee, including by reference to the committee’s “in the round” assessment
of performance. The amount of any award can be reduced, or any award can be
cancelled and sums paid may be recovered in line with the provisions of Ofwat’s
performance-related pay prohibition rules – see page 175 for trigger events.
If it is determined that the LTIP should be reduced or cancelled, the committee may
determine that the amount of any reduction can be set off against AIP awards and/or
require the repayment of any sums already paid. Details relating to the treatment of
LTIP at the end of an executive’s appointment are set out on page 178.
Maximum opportunity
CEO:
150 per cent of salary as
of 1 April 2025
CFO:
150 per cent of salary as
of 1 April 2025
Implementation 2025/26
A summary of the performance measures selected for the AIP in 2025/26
is set out on page 196.

Graphics
174 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Remuneration policy continued
Notes to the remuneration policy table
Note on taxable benefits: Private medical insurance is available to all senior managers and some longer
serving employees. A car allowance or company car is available to managers and senior managers in
accordance with the company policy, the amount of the allowance being dependent on the seniority of the
role of the employee. The life assurance benefit and health cash plan are available to all employees and are
not taxable benefits.
Note on pension benefits: Employees of the company are entitled to a maximum company contribution of
10 per cent at a personal contribution rate of 8 per cent. Contributions or cash equivalent to the CEO and
CFO are not conditional on a personal contribution of 8 per cent.
Note on cash allowance, AIP, LTIP and Service Award: The cash allowance, AIP, LTIP and Service Award are
available to the CEO and CFO and other permanent members of the Executive Team. There is a senior
manager bonus scheme which adopts targets similar to the AIP, to achieve a convergence of incentives at
senior management level. The senior managers’ incentive scheme sets targets against a range of individual
ODIs rather than the net ODI position. There is no company-wide bonus scheme. There is a specific bonus
scheme to incentivise employees of the customer contact centre, which focuses on achieving high levels of
customer satisfaction.
Note on clawback and malus: Clawback and malus provisions apply to all performance-related pay (PRP),
namely the AIP and LTIP, and align to Ofwat’s performance-related pay prohibition standards relating to
consumer matters, environment, financial resilience and criminal liability. The committee may adjust awards
before vesting or payment (malus) or require repayment or cancel awards already delivered for up to a period
of three years from payment or vesting (clawback).
Service award
Purpose and link to
strategy
To support the continuity
and stability of executive
leadership over the full
AMP 8 regulatory period.
Designed to recognise
the critical importance
of retaining experienced
senior executives to lead
the company through
a period of heightened
regulatory, operational,
and environmental
demands.
Operation and performance measures
This is fixed remuneration, by way of a one-time grant, which is not determined by
reference to performance measures.
Vesting: Vesting will be in three tranches:
► 20% in July 2028
► 20% in July 2029
► 60% in July 2030
Service Awards are not subject to malus or clawback provisions.
Details relating to the treatment of a Service Award at the end of an executive’s
appointment are set out on page 178.
Maximum opportunity
100 per cent of salary as
of 1 April 2025.
Implementation
As described above

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 175
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Clawback and malus can be triggered if any of the conditions set out in paragraph 6 of Ofwat’s PRP prohibition
rules are met, including:
1. Consumer Matters Standard:
a. A financial penalty is imposed by Ofwat under section 22A of the Water Industry Act 1991 for breach
of sections 37 and/or 94.
b. Ofwat would have imposed a penalty but accepted undertakings under section 19.
c. Non-compliance with an enforcement order or undertakings linked to such breaches.
2. Environment Standard:
a. A 1-star rating in the Environment Agency (EA) or Natural Resources Wales (NRW) EPA.
b. One or more Category 1 pollution incidents in the calendar year ending in the PRP Year.
3. Financial Resilience Standard:
a. Breach of Licence Condition P due to insufficient investment-grade credit ratings
(unless an exemption was granted).
b. Breach of enforcement orders or undertakings related to such failures.
4. Criminal Liability Standard:
a. A criminal conviction leading to a sentence in the PRP Year.
Other company triggers include:
► Use of inaccurate or misleading data to determine the final payment amount;
► If a participant commits an act that amounts to fraud, dishonesty or gross misconduct, or is in material
breach of obligations to the company, or engages in any conduct that brings the participant or the
company into disrepute or is materially adverse to the company’s interests;
► A material failure of risk management or regulatory compliance by a participant (including where this
has led to a serious pollution events or other serious breaches of principal duties);
► Any circumstances that would allow the participant to be summarily dismissed; and
► Any other exceptional circumstances that justify such decision by the committee.

Graphics
176 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Independent non-executive directors’ remuneration policy 2025 to 2030
Fee
Purpose and link to strategy
To provide a fixed fee sufficient to
attract, motivate and retain individuals
with the appropriate range and balance
of experience, skills and competencies
to provide strategic direction to the
business and to lead, support and
challenge the executive directors and
management of the business.
Operation and performance measures
The policy of the company is that non-executive directors’ fees
should be comparable to those of companies of similar size, activities
and complexity.
The fees for the chair and other independent non-executive
directors reflect the individual experience and role and the required
time commitment, which may include additional responsibilities as
chair of committee or other specific responsibilities. Fees are paid in
cash monthly.
Fees are reviewed at the discretion of the company and increases
ordinarily take effect on 1 April.
This is fixed remuneration which is not determined by reference to
performance measures.
No clawback and malus provisions apply.
Maximum opportunity
There is no set maximum fee but
increases are typically the same as the
company wide pay award negotiated with
the Staff Council.
Implementation 2024/25
The fees to independent
non-executive directors were
increased in line with the
company pay award
for senior executives
(4.5 per cent increase).
Implementation 2025/26
The fees to independent
non-executive directors were
increased in line with the
company pay award for
senior executives
(3.5 per cent increase).
Other items
Purpose and link to strategy
To facilitate the performance of
non-executive directors’ duties to
the company.
Operation and performance measures
Reasonable travel and other expenses incurred by directors when
performing their duties are reimbursed.
Non-executive directors do not receive any other remuneration
or benefits.
This component is not determined by reference to performance
measures and clawback and malus provisions do not apply.
Maximum opportunity
There is no set maximum reasonable
expenses provision.
Implementation 2024/25
Expenses will be reimbursed in
line with the policy.
Implementation 2025/26
Expenses will be reimbursed in
line with the policy.
Mark McArdle, Anne-Noëlle Le Gal (who was re-appointed on 18 December 2023 and resigned on 15 August
2024) and Michael McKinstry (who was appointed on 15 August 2024) represent the ultimate shareholders
of the company and do not have a letter of appointment or service contract and do not receive any
remuneration from the company.
Remuneration policy continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 177
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Policy on recruitment remuneration
Executive directors
The remuneration package on recruitment of a new executive director, or promotion of an employee to
a position of executive director, should be sufficient to attract, motivate and retain individuals with the
appropriate experience, skills and competencies to lead the implementation of the company’s strategy.
However, the company should not pay more than is necessary.
The components of the remuneration of a new executive director are set in accordance with the remuneration
policy applicable at the time of the recruitment. The committee will also consider the wider approach to
workforce remuneration, as well as any legislative and corporate governance requirements.
The committee may take account of a candidate’s employment or personal circumstances in awarding
relocation or payments for forfeited variable pay. Where an employee is promoted to the position of executive
director, pre-existing awards and contractual commitments will be honoured in accordance with their terms.
When approving a recommendation of an appointment of a new executive director or member of the wider
executive team, the board will ensure that the nominations committee has sought approval of the proposed
remuneration package by the remuneration committee.
Base salary The base salary should reflect any market data or market assessment that may be carried out by
the committee to inform its decision. It should take account of the specific experience, skills and
competencies of the selected candidate and of the salaries of other executive directors. It may
be set at a different level than the previous incumbent.
Benefits The benefits package should be in line with that provided to other executive directors under the
remuneration policy.
Pension The pension contribution rates for executive directors, or payments in lieu, should be aligned with
those available to the workforce (currently 10 per cent of base salary).
Cash
allowance
The suitability of providing a cash allowance will be considered at the time of appointment. Any
decision to include a cash allowance will be made in the context of ensuring a fair, competitive,
and appropriately balanced remuneration structure.
AIP The AIP would normally be implemented in accordance with the applicable structure, metrics and
targets, and maximum potential awards at the time of the recruitment.
The committee may exercise discretion to agree specific modifications in the first year of the AIP,
depending on when the recruitment takes place in the year. Any award will be pro-rated to the
actual period of employment in that year.
LTIP The LTIP would normally be implemented in accordance with the applicable structure, metrics
and targets, and maximum potential awards at the time of the recruitment.
Any award will be pro-rated to the actual period of employment during the vesting period.
Service
award
The Service Award would normally be implemented in accordance with the applicable structure,
and maximum potential awards at the time of the recruitment.
Any award will be pro-rated to the actual period of employment during the vesting periods.
Relocation The committee may agree a cash payment for reasonable relocation and temporary
accommodation costs, as well as travel and incidental expenses incurred.
Forfeited
variable pay
The committee may agree a cash payment as compensation for the forfeit of any award under
variable remuneration arrangements entered into with a previous employer, provided that the
nature and value of the forfeited award can be objectively demonstrated by the candidate.
Such cash payment should not be more generous in terms of quantum or vesting period than
the forfeited awards and should be subject to clawback in the event of an early termination of
appointment for any reason.
Sign-on
bonus
Our policy is not to provide other sign-on compensation except in exceptional circumstances at
the discretion of the committee.

Graphics
178 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Independent non-executive directors
Fees for new independent non-executive directors are aligned with the remuneration policy and current
fees for similar non-executive director roles on the board, taking account of time commitment and any
specific duties.
Payment for loss of office (audited) – policy 2025 to 2030
Executive directors
There are no provisions in executive directors’ service agreements creating an obligation of the company
to pay compensation on termination by the company. Receipt of a cash allowance and Service Award, and
participation in the AIP and LTIP is at the discretion of the committee and are not contractual entitlements.
Base salary,
pension &
benefits
Salary, pension and benefits are paid over the notice period. The committee may at its discretion
determine that a payment in lieu of notice should be made.
Cash
allowance
Cash allowances may continue to be paid over the notice period to an executive director who is a
“good leaver”. In all other cases cash allowance payments will ordinarily cease from the date
of resignation.
AIP Under the AIP, an executive director who is a “good leaver” (under the rules of the scheme) remains
entitled to receive a pro-rated amount of the award that is not subject to deferral. The committee
has discretion to determine that this award will not be pro-rated and/or that the director remains
entitled to full payment. The payment date will be in July following year-end unless the committee
determines that an early payment should be made. A “good leaver” remains entitled to receive any
deferred award under the AIP on the same date unless the committee accelerates the payment.
Any payments to a good leaver are subject to the exercise of discretion by the committee when
employment ceases and to deferral or malus as set out above on page 175.
A leaver due to any other reason loses the right to receive any payment (or any further payment or
any deferred payments) or compensation for loss of any payment (or further payment) in respect
of awards under the AIP.
Where the committee determines that clawback applies in respect of a payment already made, a
participant is required under the rules of the AIP to repay all or some of such payment.
LTIP Under the LTIP, an executive director who is a “good leaver” (under the rules of the scheme)
ordinarily will retain a time pro-rated interest in the award until the normal vesting date. Vesting
of the retained interest will be based on performance over the full performance period, unless the
committee determines otherwise.
An award lapses in full if an executive leaves for any other reason.
Where the committee determines that clawback applies in respect of a payment already made, a
participant is required under the rules of the LTIP to repay all or some of such payment.
Service
award
Unvested awards lapse in full, unless the committee determines otherwise.
Independent non-executive directors
Letters of appointment with independent non-executive directors do not include provisions for compensation
for loss of office. They provide for the payment of fees accrued until the end of the appointment.
Remuneration policy continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 179
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Consideration of pay and employment conditions of employees
The committee does not consult with employees when defining its remuneration policy, but directors
receive updates on pay and employment matters from workforce channels and have considered the
executive directors’ remuneration policy in context.
The committee receives updates on the pay award negotiations with the Staff Council and their outcome.
This is directly taken into account when reviewing executive directors’ salary increases, which are usually
(outside of specific salary reviews) in line with the pay award agreed with the Staff Council.
The committee also reviews the structure, metrics, and targets of the senior managers’ bonus scheme in
conjunction with the approval of the AIP metrics and targets, to ensure that executive director and senior
manager incentives are closely aligned and focused on the delivery of the company’s strategic objectives.
The committee reviews the requirements of the company’s Corporate Governance Code as they
relate specifically to the review of workforce remuneration and engagement with the workforce on
executive remuneration.
Engagement with the Staff Council is facilitated by Célia Pronto who is Chair of the committee and the
independent non-executive director specifically designated for engagement with the workforce.
Consideration of shareholder views
Two non-executive directors representing the ultimate shareholders of the company are members of the
committee (together with three independent non-executive directors). They make recommendations and
participate directly in the work of the committee when defining the remuneration policy, the components
of executive remuneration and the structure and operation of performance-related pay elements (i.e. the
AIP and LTIP). This helps ensure that the link between performance and pay is strong and managed in a way
that recognises shareholders’ expectations and priorities.

Graphics
180 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Directors service agreements and letters
of appointment
CEO and CFO service contracts
The CEO and CFO had service contracts that were not fixed term contracts with the following notice periods:
CEO CFO
Effective date of contract 1 August 2020** 29 June 2015
Notice period by director 12 months 6 months
Notice period by company* 12 months 6 months
*Other than for breach of contract
**Before becoming CEO, David Hinton had been an executive director since 1 June 2013
Independent non-executive directors’ agreements
Independent non-executive directors’ letters of appointment have a fixed term of three years that may
be extended for successive periods of three years subject to meeting the criteria of independence set out
in the company’s corporate governance code. A shorter term and shorter notice period by the company
may be agreed in anticipation of the replacement of an independent non-executive director to facilitate
succession arrangements.
The letters of appointment of the current independent non-executive directors have the following
remaining terms and notice periods:
Chris Train Lisa Clement Caroline Sheridan Célia Pronto
Effective date of contract* 24 February 2022 11 January 2023 21 October 2024 1 June 2021
Expiry date** 31 March 2028 10 January 2026 11 February 2028 31 May 2027
Notice period by director 3 months 3 months 3 months 3 months
Notice period by company*** 1 month 1 month 1 month 3 months
*Full terms since appointment are shown in the corporate governance report.
** The appointment of Célia Pronto was extended until 31 May 2027 following approval of the board on 2 May 2024.
The appointment of Chris Train was extended until 31 March 2028 following approval of the board on 6 March 2025.
***Other than for breach of the terms of appointment.
Mark McArdle, Anne-Noëlle Le Gal (who was re-appointed on 18 December 2023 and resigned on 15 August
2024) and Michael McKinstry (who was appointed on 15 August 2024) represent the ultimate shareholders
of the company and do not have a letter of appointment or service contract and do not receive any
remuneration from the company.
Remuneration policy continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 181
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Executive remuneration
for 2024/25
Single remuneration figure for executive directors (audited)
David Hinton – CEO Andrew Farmer – CFO
2023/24 2024/25 2023/24 2024/25
Base salary £294,042 £307,274 £240,871 £251,710
Taxable benefits £2,877 £2,713 £1,435 £2,078
Annual bonus £112,560 £115,231 £74,580 £75,728
Long-term incentives – – – –
Pension £29,404 £30,727 £24,087 £25,171
Company car trade £1,589 £1,589 £9,385 £1,908
Total £440,472 £457,534 £350,358 £356,595
Total fixed remuneration £327,912 £342,303 £275,778 £280,867
Total variable remuneration £112,560 £115,231 £74,580 £75,728
Note on deferral of AIP award:
A sum of £35,618, in respect of the award of David Hinton, and £23,454 in respect of the award of Andrew
Farmer, corresponding to 34 per cent of the total AIP award for 2022/23 have been deferred. Both deferred
sums will be paid in cash in July 2025 (provided relevant conditions under the rules of the AIP are met at the
time). The amount corresponding to 66 per cent of the award paid in July 2023 to David Hinton was £69,141
and to Andrew Farmer was £45,528.
A sum of £38,270, in respect of the award of David Hinton, and £25,357 in respect of the award of Andrew
Farmer, corresponding to 34 per cent of the total AIP award for 2023/24 have been deferred. Both deferred
sums will be paid in cash in July 2026 (provided relevant conditions under the rules of the AIP are met at the
time). The amount corresponding to 66 per cent of the award paid in July 2024 to David Hinton is £74,290
and to Andrew Farmer is £49,223.
A sum of £39,179, in respect of the award of David Hinton, and £25,748 in respect of the award of Andrew
Farmer, corresponding to 34 per cent of the total AIP award for 2024/25 have been deferred. Both deferred
sums will be paid in cash in July 2027 (provided relevant conditions under the rules of the AIP are met at the
time). The amount corresponding to 66 per cent of the award paid in July 2025 to David Hinton is £76,052
and to Andrew Farmer is £49,980.

Graphics
182 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Single remuneration figure for non-executive directors (audited)
Director Year Fee
Taxable
benefits
Annual
bonus
Long-
term
incentives Pension Total
Total fixed
remuneration
Total variable
remuneration
Chris
Train
2023/24
2024/25
£115,500
£120,698
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
£115,500
£120,698
£115,500
£120,698
–
–
John
Barnes
2023/24
2024/25
£38,588
£34,948
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
£38,588
£34,948
£38,588
£34,948
–
–
Célia
Pronto
2023/24
2024/25
£42,914
£44,845
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
£42,914
£44,845
£42,914
£44,845
–
–
Lisa
Clement
2023/24
2024/25
£45,366
£47,408
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
£45,366
£47,408
£45,366
£47,408
–
–
Caroline
Sheridan*
2023/24
2024/25
–
£16,802
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
£16,802
–
£16,802
–
–
Anne-Noëlle
Le Gal
2023/24
2024/25
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mark
McArdle
2023/24
2024/25
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Michael
McKinstry*
2023/24
2024/25
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Anne-Noëlle Le Gal was a shareholder representative non-executive director from 18 December 2023
until her resignation on 15 August 2024. Michael McKinstry was appointed as a shareholder representative
non-executive director from 15 August 2024.
John Barnes resigned as an independent non-executive director (as he had served the maximum term) on
12 February 2025. Caroline Sheridan was appointed as an independent non-executive director from
12 February 2025.
Annual incentive plan for 2024/25
We explain below how the AIP was applied in 2024/25 and the factors the remuneration committee
considered in reaching its decision on performance related pay. The remuneration policy for 2021 to 2025 is
set out in full in our annual report for 2023/24.
Executive remuneration for 2024/25 continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 183
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
AIP measures, targets, scoring and actual performance in 2024/25 (audited)
The AIP awards are based on the score achieved against performance measures in four categories: Outcome
Delivery Incentives (ODIs), responsible business, financial and personal objectives.
For each measure, the remuneration committee compares the actual performance (following internal
and external assurance of the performance data) with a threshold (minimum), target and outperformance
(maximum) level of performance set at the beginning of the financial year to determine the actual score.
The following table summarises the operation of the AIP in 2024/25, including the different categories and
types of performance measures, the actual performance achieved relative to the three levels of performance
set by the remuneration committee (threshold/minimum, target, outperformance/maximum), and the
corresponding scores and potential awards as a percentage of salary.
This summary is based on the audited financial statements for 2024/25 and on the externally assured
performance reporting for 2024/25 and after presentation of the findings of our auditors and external
assurance partner to members of the remuneration committee.
Category Measure Threshold Target Maximum
Actual
Performance
Actual
Score
CEO
Award
CEO
(% of
salary)
Actual
Score
CFO
Award
CFO
(% of
salary)
ODIs (40%) Net reward
/ penalty
(£m)
-6.8 -5.8 -4.5
-£12.5m 0 0% 0 0%
ODI Score 0 40 54.8
Responsible
business
(20%)
Points
achieved
0 2 4
2.67 22.5 15.8% 22.5 12.7%
RB Score 0 20 27.4
Appointed
cash receipts
(10%)
Net variance
from target
values (£m)
-2 0 +2
£2.1m 13.7 9.7% 13.7 7.7%
Finance
Score 1
0 10 13.7
Appointed
Opex (10%)
Net variance
from target
values (£m)
-2 0 +2
-£8.5m 0 0% 0 0%
Finance
Score 2
0 10 13.7
Non-
appointed
Operating
Profit (10%)
Profit target
(£m)
4.1 4.6 5.1
£4.5m 7.8 5.5% 7.8 4.4%
Finance
Score 3
0 10 13.7
Personal
objectives
(10%)
Points
achieved
0 10 10
– 9.2 6.5% 9.4 5.3%
Personal
objectives
Score
0 10 10.0
Total score 0 100 133.3 –
53.2 37.5% 53.4 30.1%

Graphics
184 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Executive remuneration for 2024/25 continued
Performance measures by categories
The majority of the AIP performance measures relate directly to delivery for customers and the environment.
The ODI and responsible business components of the AIP represent 60 per cent of potential incentives.
The table below shows the balance of performance measures between those relating directly to delivery for
customers and the environment and the other performance measures, including financial measures. Further
details on these measures are set out below.
Appointed business performance measures
Delivery for customers and environment Other performance measures
Customer experience
► The customer measure of experience (C-MeX)
► The developer services measure of experience
(D-MeX)
► Average satisfaction across all customer segments
(Reputational ODI)
► Satisfaction of household customers who are
experiencing payment difficulties (Reputational ODI)
► Satisfaction of household customers who are
receiving non-financial support (which is a
reputational ODI)
Core service delivery
► The compliance risk index (CRI)
► The appearance of tap water
► The taste and odour of tap water
► Leakage reduction on a 3 year average
► Reduction of per capita consumption on 3 year average
► Unplanned outage
► Supply interruptions
► The number of mains bursts repairs
► The number of household void properties
► The number of void business properties
► The number of sites protected from the risk
of flooding
► The number of properties at risk of low pressure
► The delivery of the Wellwood to Potters Corner
strategic main
Environment
► The delivery of the Water Industry National
Environment Programme schemes
► The bespoke Abstraction Incentive Mechanism (AIM)
► Protecting wildlife and increasing biodiversity
(Financial ODI)
► Engaging and working with landowners and land
managers to improve catchment resilience related to
raw water quality deterioration (Financial ODI)
Employees and Health and safety
► Health & Safety compliance level above 75 per cent
as recorded during audits of H&S systems
and policies
► Lost time injury frequency rate (LTIFR) of less than 5
(Target set annually)
► Satisfactory progress in implementing wellbeing and
mental health awareness for employees
ESG and sustainability
► Implementation of the recommendations of the Task
Force on Climate-Related Financial Disclosure (TCFD)
► GRESB benchmark score
Financial
► Appointed cash receipts – Net variance from
target values
► Appointed Opex – Net variance from target values
Personal objectives
► Personal objectives relate primarily to delivery for customers and the environment but may also relate to other
aspects of performance
Non-appointed business performance measures
► n/a ► Non-appointed Operating Profit target

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 185
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Performance measures included in the ODI component
Performance against ODIs is assessed against an overall net reward/penalty target based on the final
determination for all financial ODIs (except biodiversity and catchment management which are included in
the responsible business category).
The threshold, target and maximum levels were set by the remuneration committee to incentivise the
delivery of significant improvements compared with baseline performance for comparable measures in
2019/AMP 6.
It is the main category of the AIP measuring the delivery of core services to customers which includes the
following ODIs:
The customer measure of experience (C-MeX)
The developer services measure of experience (D-MeX)
The compliance risk index (CRI) The number of household void properties
The appearance of tap water The number of void business properties
Leakage reduction on a 3 year average The delivery of the Water Industry National
Environment Programme schemes
Reduction of per capita consumption on 3 year average The number of sites protected from the risk of flooding
Unplanned outage The bespoke Abstraction Incentive Mechanism (AIM)
Supply interruptions The number of properties at risk of low pressure
The number of mains bursts repairs The delivery of the Wellwood to Potters Corner
strategic main
The taste and odour of tap water
Note:The biodiversity and catchment management ODIs are included in the Responsible Business
performance measures, except that any variance from the net reward/penalty target for these ODIs in AMP
7 is included in the calculation of the net reward/penalty in year 5 of AMP 7.
Note: From 2021/22, an element of the potential award relating to the ODIs on per capita consumption and
non-household voids has been excluded and the actual award has been determined at the end of the current
regulatory period after Ofwat has published its assessment of performance.
Per capita consumption and non-household voids ODIs
Ofwat determined that it would assess performance relating to the PCC and non-household voids ODIs
at the end of the current regulatory period. The committee considered how to reflect this change given
that the PCC and non-household voids ODIs were part of the ODI component of the AIP. The committee
concluded that the most practical approach would be to carve out an element of the potential AIP award
to be allocated to the PCC and non-household voids ODIs. The committee decided to determine the actual
award for these metrics based on Ofwat’s assessment. It was our expectation that Ofwat would recognise
the impact of Covid-19 in its assessment of performance against these ODIs. With regard to the AMP 7
AIP carve out for PCC and NHH voids, the end of the AMP position for these ODIs led the remuneration
committee to determine that no bonus shall be paid for these items.

Graphics
186 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Executive remuneration for 2024/25 continued
C-MeX and D-MeX
Considering that the final C-MeX and D-MeX performance are determined by Ofwat after publication of
the companies’ annual report, to take account of this timing difference, the committee decided that from
2021/22 the award in respect of 2021/22 (year 0) would be calculated based on a best estimate of the
C-MeX and D-MeX penalty/reward position. An adjustment would then be made which would be applied
to the awards for 2022/23 (year 1) to achieve an equivalent position, and similarly in subsequent years. This
ensures the awards reflect the actual performance and avoid a retrospective adjustment to the previous
year’s award.
Responsible business measures and points allocation
The Responsible Business performance category relates to (i) ESG, (ii) Health & Safety, (iii) achieving Corporate
Plan targets on environmental initiatives and (iv) achieving Corporate Plan targets on customer satisfaction.
To assess management’s performance, the remuneration committee determines whether several measures
under each of the headings above have been achieved. The measures for 2024/25 and associated points
are set out in the table below. The maximum score achievable under this measure is 4 and a score of 2
corresponds to the target level of performance.
Health & Safety Points Customer satisfaction Points
Health & Safety compliance level above
75 per cent as recorded during audits of
H&S systems and policies
0.33 Average satisfaction across all customer segments
(Reputational ODI): 4.5 out of 5 for 2024/25
0.33
Lost time injury frequency rate (LTIFR)
of less than 5 (Target set annually)
0.33 Satisfaction of household customers who are
experiencing payment difficulties (Reputational
ODI): 4.5 out of 5 for 2024/25
0.33
Satisfactory progress in implementing
wellbeing and mental health awareness
for employees by reference to a list
of activities
0.33 Satisfaction of household customers who are
receiving non-financial support (which is a
reputational ODI): 4.5 out of 5 for 2024/25
0.33
ESG Environmental
GRESB benchmark score >=90 0.25 Target met on protecting wildlife and increasing
biodiversity (Financial ODI) – 1,660 hectares
(cumulative for AMP to date)
0.5
Inclusion of climate-related disclosures
under the recommendations of the
task force on climate-related financial
disclosures (TCFD) in annual reporting
0.25 Target met on engaging and working with
landowners and land managers to improve
catchment resilience related to raw water quality
deterioration (Financial ODI) – 15,017 hectares
(cumulative for AMP to date)
0.5
Presentation to the Board of a strategy
on the delivery of operational net zero
by 2030
0.5
Financial measures
The appointed cash receipts & opex measures seek to incentivise effective cash collection performance and
management of bad debt and efficient operations whilst delivering the core services and strategic priorities
of the business.
The non-appointed operating profit target incentivises non-regulated commercial activities, which
include in particular billing and customer services to other undertakers, laboratory services, plumbing and
technical services.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 187
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Personal objectives
Personal objectives are set by the remuneration committee and include individual and collective objectives
for the Executive Team. Collective objectives have a weighting of 25 per cent and individual objectives a
weighting of 75 per cent. The maximum score of 10 can only be achieved if all the objectives are met.
Setting targets and assessing stretch
ODI Component of the AIP
The ODI component of the AIP includes a basket of the main financial ODIs (as set out above). Performance
under this component is assessed by reference to the net overall ODI reward or penalty for the relevant year
in accordance with the methodology set out in Ofwat’s final PR19 determination.
In determining the threshold, target and maximum levels for the ODI component of the AIP, the remuneration
committee gave due consideration to the primary purpose of the AIP, which is to incentivise stretching but
deliverable improvements in performance compared with the baseline performance achieved in AMP 6.
The metrics and targets presented by the company in its business plan submissions reflected a significant
level of improvement in performance over AMP 7. However, the 2019 price determination set regulatory
targets that went beyond what the company considered to be reasonably achievable given the level of
investment and revenue allowance set in the final determination.
The corporate plan approved by the Board following the final determination anticipates net ODI penalties
being incurred even if the company achieves significant performance improvements over AMP 7. The
negative weighting of the ODI targets is particularly relevant for performance commitments that are
directly affected by severe weather events. These events have led to cumulative penalties under several
ODIs including interruptions, C-MeX, other customer satisfaction measures, and for some events such as
freeze-thaw events, on leakage and burst mains.
In addition, some conflicts between the targets set in the final determination mean that activities
necessary to achieve a target will likely lead to another target being missed. This is the case for example
of the relationship between leakage and the number of main bursts repairs, as leakage activities result in
a higher number of bursts being detected which could then result in the target for the number of bursts
being exceeded.
Having considered this negatively weighted outcome of the PR19 final determination on ODIs, the
remuneration committee still determined to use the net ODI position that would result from the final
determination as the main operational measure in the AIP to ensure it was based on the final determination.
The threshold, target and maximum levels of performance for the ODI metrics in the AIP have then been
set at levels that require significant improvements in performance in line with our business plan. However,
even this level of improvement would still result in penalties under the regulatory framework set by Ofwat
at PR19. This explains why an award may still be paid under the ODI metric when the company is in a net
penalty position.
In respect of 2023/24 the remuneration committee adjusted the threshold, target and maximum levels of
performance to recognise a higher likely ODI penalty with a view to incentivising management to deliver the
leakage recovery plan.
Extreme weather events in 2022/23, especially the freeze-thaw event in December 2022, had a significant
impact on leakage performance in 2022/23. In response to this, the company has implemented a leakage
recovery plan to achieve the final determination annual target in year 5 of the current AMP.

Graphics
188 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Executive remuneration for 2024/25 continued
Without adjustment to the target for the ODI component of the AIP for 2023/24 and 2024/25, the leakage
figure in 2022/23 would have had a significant negative impact on the 3-year average used for 2023/24 and
2024/25 to measure leakage. In turn, this would have resulted in the overall ODI performance being below
the threshold level, even if performance for all other ODIs was at target level and leakage performance was
in line with the recovery plan.
Therefore, in these specific circumstances, the remuneration committee determined to adjust the
threshold, target, and outperformance level for the ODI component of the AIP to recognise for the effect
of the 2022/23 leakage figure and to ensure that the directors were still incentivised to achieve the target
of the leakage recovery plan.
This revised target still required significant efforts to maintain and/or recover from the impact on leakage
that resulted from the events referred to above and for these reasons the remuneration committee
was satisfied that it remained stretching whilst preserving the incentive to recover and improve leakage
performance before the next regulatory period.
In making this determination, the remuneration committee also took account of constraints arising from
cost pressures linked to high inflation as well as the impact on ODI penalties and the related reductions in
our revenue allowance.
Responsible business measures
The assessment of stretch for the metrics included in the responsible business component of the AIP is
assessed annually and for quantitative metrics targets are adjusted to reflect improvement or maintenance
of performance at an appropriate baseline level. The table below summarises the targets and how the
remuneration committee has concluded that these targets remain stretching.
GRESB score => 90 The target score of 90 represents an upper quartile position in the relevant peer
group. Although a score of 96 was achieved in the previous year a target score
of 90 was maintained to take account of a change of methodology and to take
account of continuous improvement by other companies in the peer group,
recognising that a score of 90 still represents upper quartile performance.
Health & Safety compliance
level above 75 per cent as
recorded during audits of
H&S systems and policies
The target has been set at 75 per cent to incentivise good compliance without
negatively affecting our established culture of openness, which actively
encourages issues and near misses to be proactively identified and addressed in
order to promote continuous improvement.
Lost time injury frequency
rate (LTIFR) of less than 5
(Target set annually)
This metric replaced the previous metric based on the number of RIDDORs in
2022/23. The target has been maintained at 5 in 2024/25 and is reassessed
annually based on performance and consideration of underlying information on
incidents causing days off work.
Customer satisfaction
measures by segment
These targets have been set using a year-on-year profile of improvement in 2020
to 2025. These targets have proved challenging but have been maintained by the
committee even though operational events had a significant impact on
customer satisfaction.
Protecting wildlife and
increasing biodiversity;
catchment resilience
The targets (in number of hectares) increase each year to reflect the expected
cumulative surface covered following a year-on-year profile for 2020 to 2025.
These targets are assessed annually by the remuneration committee, which
concluded they remain stretching having regard to the fact that achieving
performance is dependent on successful engagement with, and participation of,
third-parties.
Other ESG metrics are subject to a qualitative assessment by the remuneration committee. This includes
the metrics relating to climate-related disclosures and wellbeing initiatives based on an assessment of
compliance and/or successful implementation of relevant initiatives in the year.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 189
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Appointed business financial measures
The remuneration committee measures
performance for appointed cash receipt by
reference to a percentage of revenue billed
(revenue less accruals) which corresponds to the
target level of performance. The threshold and
outperformance levels of performance correspond
to a variance from target of -£2 million or +£2
million respectively. Revenue billed is confirmed
at year end based on audited financial figures.
The percentage of recovery is set by reference to
the previous years’ performance. The percentage
of recovery for 2024/25 was set at 98.3 per cent
(comparable to 98.4 per cent in 2023/24) which
ensured the target remained stretching, taking
account of debt recovery trends and of the context
of macroeconomic conditions that continued to
impact debt recovery.
The remuneration committee sets the target level
of performance for appointed opex by reference to
the budget approved for the relevant year, ensuring
the target remains appropriate. The threshold and
outperformance levels of performance for 2024/25
correspond to a variance from target of -£2 million
or +£2 million respectively. The remuneration
committee is satisfied that this target was
stretching in the context of high inflation that
affected key costs (energy and chemical), the
continued impact on costs of supply events
experienced in the previous year, and expected
increases in operating expenditures to maintain or
improve performance against key service metrics.
Overall assessment of performance
and decision on award under the
2024/25 AIP
A key principle of our remuneration policy is that
remuneration must reflect performance and is
demonstrably linked to the delivery of the core
purpose of the company to provide the public water
service, high customer satisfaction and achieving
strategic objectives.
The committee uses a clear methodology which
includes all measures and targets to calculate
transparently the potential awards under the AIP
at different levels of performance. This approach
provides full visibility of these to the committee,
participants, and the public.
The committee uses a model to calculate awards
which provides predictability and transparency
to both the committee and participants but is
complemented by an assessment of performance
in the round to avoid formulaic outcomes and
the committee retains absolute discretion to
decide on individual awards of up to 100 per cent
where appropriate.
Assessment of operational performance
The committee considered the overall ODI
performance in 2024/25, which resulted in a net
ODI penalty of -£12.5 million, which is below the
threshold level of -£6.8 million that we had set
for 2024/25. This net penalty figure excludes the
penalties relating to PCC and non-household voids
as these ODIs were carved out of the ODI component
of the AIP considering that Ofwat had decided
to assess these ODIs at the end of AMP 7 (2020 to
2025). This figure includes (i) the reward relating to
the delivery of the strategic main from Wellwood
to Potters Corner (£0.5 million) which is an end of
AMP target only applying in 2024/25 and (ii)
the positive variance (£0.1 million) between the
reward target for the biodiversity and catchment
management ODIs in AMP 7 (£1.5 million) and
the actual reward achieved (£1.6 million) which
is included in the calculation of the net reward/
penalty in year 5 of AMP 7.

Graphics
190 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Executive remuneration for 2024/25 continued
The greatest component of this total net penalty
(-£8.2 million) is the result of performance on
leakage. Severe weather primarily in 2022 but also in
2023 significantly deteriorated our leakage position.
Despite the increase in leakage expenditure in
2023/24 and 2024/25 the leakage recovery plan did
not deliver the expected level of improvement in the
earlier part of the year and the increase in leakage
that occurred in 2022 and 2023 has continued to
affect the three-year average used to measure
leakage, resulting in a penalty for 2024/25. The
leakage recovery plan has however been delivering
a steady reduction in leakage since the beginning
of 2025 across the company, and locally with our
Western region achieving its lowest leakage level
in 3 years.
No significant high demand event has affected our
customers since June 2023 but our interruption
performance was severely impacted by two large
events in January and March 2025. The most
impactful was a power related failure at our water
treatment works in Sevenoaks in January 2025 along
with the loss of another water treatment works
in March 2025 due to flooding. These two events
contributed to 20.85 minutes of the total 44.04
minutes. The committee recognised that there
were technical explanations for this outage and that
the power fault would not have been detected by
the testing that had been carried out, and that the
impact of flooding could not have been mitigated,
but concluded that nevertheless no discretion
would be exercised and the rule of the AIP would
be applied.
Our C-MeX performance, which was affected by the
supply interruptions events in 2022 and 2023 has
seen improvements consistent with the initiatives
taken and engagement carried out to progressively
rebuild trust with our customers and communities
resulting in an estimated ranking of 12th (compared
to 15th in 2023/24).
Despite good performance on drinking water
quality and on environmental measures, the overall
performance of the company across all operational
and service measures was disappointing.
The committee considered separately the
performance under the PCC and non-household
voids based on Ofwat’s assessment carried out as
part of the PR24 process. This resulted in an ODI
penalty of £1.7 million for these two ODIs combined
which did not meet our internal target of no penalty
for these ODIs.
Considering operational performance in 2024/25
and the fact that the net penalty position before
adjustment was below threshold, no adjustment was
made this year to reflect any difference between
the C-MeX and D-MeX performance estimated in
July 2024 and the actual performance subsequently
determined by Ofwat. Explanations on the reasons
for such potential adjustment are set out on
page 186.
Details on actual performance against our
performance commitments’ targets are set out in
the business performance section on page 66.
Assessment of financial performance
Performance on debt collection has remained
strong in challenging conditions as inflation
continues to affect customers.
The variance from budgeted operating expenditure
in 2024/25 exceeded the threshold level the
committee had set, even if the committee
recognises that this expenditure was essential to
maintain and improve our service to customers –
including higher energy costs, incident readiness
and response costs and contractor costs relating to
increased, reactive maintenance, reservoir cleaning,
water efficiency and meter reading activity,
and other necessary expenditure to gear up for
AMP 8. Further details are provided on operating
expenditure on page 75.
Assessment of ESG performance
Most measures have been achieved except for the
3 customer satisfaction measures and the review of
our strategy on the delivery of operational net zero
by 2030. This resulted in an overall score of 2.67 and
some of the outperformance points being awarded
for this component of the AIP.
The committee noted the good GRESB score
achieved by the company (98 and third in its peer
group). A LTIFR score of 4.4 was achieved meeting
the target we had set.
Performance against environmental measures on
protecting wildlife and increasing biodiversity and
engagement with landowner to improve catchment
resilience was also above target.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 191
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Other key factors considered by the
remuneration committee
In addition to the areas of business performance
specifically assessed under the AIP, the committee
considered the overall performance of the company
against its regulatory and other obligations.
In carrying out this assessment in the round, the
committee assessed the performance of the
business in the context of the company’s strategy
and priorities in the year and for the transition to
AMP 8, as well as the expectations set by Ofwat
at PR24 and in its guidance on the PRP recovery
mechanism, and its 2023/24 assessment under
that mechanism.
The committee considered the position of the
company in Ofwat’s water company performance
report 2023 to 2024, noting that it had improved,
moving from the lagging behind category in
2022/23 to the average category in 2023/24. The
committee also had regard to the delivery of the
service commitment plan and the update to this
plan provided to Ofwat in 2024.
The committee also considered operational
performance in the context of Ofwat’s investigation
into supply resilience which was launched in
November 2023 following the high demand incidents
the company experienced between 2020 and 2023
which resulted in interruption of customer supplies.
It recognised that where service delivery affects
public perception, customers affected perceive
executive awards as unrelated to the level of service
they have experienced.
The committee was also conscious of taking
proportionate account without complacency,
but with fairness, of conditions that influence
performance or the ability of management to
respond to operational challenges. These include
external factors such as extreme weather and
macroeconomic conditions, business environment,
the level of resilience and performance that could
objectively be expected having regard for example
to planning requirements and assumptions and the
impact of regulatory mechanisms.
The company made clear at the outset that it
agrees entirely that resilience was an important
issue, requiring a stable and predictable regulatory
regime. The investigation is ongoing at the time this
report is published and no formal decisions have
been made by Ofwat at this point.
Notwithstanding the ongoing nature of the
investigation, the committee separately noted that
appropriate investment in infrastructure together
with improvements to incident responses was
necessary, taking account of the scale, cost and
time required for delivery of this investment.
The committee therefore considered the
prioritisation of short-term resilience schemes
and other parts of the company’s investment
programme and maintenance activities that also
contribute to improving short-term resilience in
AMP 7. These steps had been taken based on post-
incident reporting and lessons learnt reviews to
improve service to customers and in particular
supply resilience, most of them initiated before the
investigation was open, and which had been set out
in a draft supply resilience action plan submitted to
Ofwat in May 2024 and December 2024.
The committee recognised the progress made in
delivering this investment and these activities and
the benefits for customers. The committee noted
that these steps had contributed significantly to
the overspend in 2024/25.
The committee considered the efforts made to
develop a significant programme of resilience
investment at PR24 to address the root causes of
our supply resilience issues, which will incrementally
improve resilience as these schemes are delivered
throughout AMP 8. These schemes by their nature,
scale, the time required for design, planning and
delivery, needed to be included in our multi-year
investment programme for AMP 8.
Ofwat’s final determination had rejected some of
the crucial resilience investment put forward by
the company in its business plan, and the board
had decided to request a redetermination to
put the company in a position to ensure water
security and improve service to its customers in
AMP 8 and beyond.
The committee noted that there had been no
material non-compliance with environmental
obligations and that the company had not received
any conviction for environmental offences.
Graphics
192 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Executive remuneration for 2024/25 continued
The committee considered the steps taken by the
business and shareholders to improve the liquidity
position and financial resilience of the company
in the year, including raising £50 million of debt in
August 2024, extending the maturity of a £120 million
loan to June 2026, and additional £75 million equity
and £200 million equity provided by shareholders
in December 2024 and May 2025 respectively. The
company had maintained investment grade credit
ratings in the year and the additional equity helped
maintain credit ratings. The committee noted that
uncertainty remained in respect of the financeability
of the final determination but that the final decision
of the CMA may not be known until March 2026.
Decision on awards for 2024/25
As performance under the ODI component of the
AIP was below the threshold level, the remuneration
committee determined that there would be no
award under this component of the AIP.
The committee determined that no award would be
granted in respect of the PCC and non-household
void ODIs which had been carved out until the end
of AMP assessment by Ofwat which resulted in a
penalty for these metrics.
The committee also concluded that no award would
be granted under the financial metric of the AIP
relating to appointed operating costs as the variance
in expenditure was also below the threshold level.
The committee noted that the AIP for 2024/25
would result in awards in respect of the responsible
business, appointed business cash receipt and
personal objective components. There would also be
an award in respect of the non-appointed operating
profit component of the AIP.
The committee further considered the reduced
award it was contemplating in the context of
Ofwat’s guidance on the PRP recovery mechanism
and the performance related executive pay
prohibition rule published in June 2025 pursuant to
the Water (Special Measures) Act 2025.
After due consideration of the factors set out
above, the committee determined that the awards
arising from the application of the rules of the AIP
for 2024/25 were appropriate in respect of the
regulated business, having regard to the fact that (i)
no bonus would be paid in relation to water service
performance (ODI component) and performance
on operating expenditure, (ii) the bonus awarded
would only relate to areas that management should
continue to be incentivised to deliver – especially,
health and safety, biodiversity and catchment
management and ESG practices - which contribute
to delivering the long-term strategic priorities of
the company, and debt recovery which was also in
the interest of customers.
The committee concluded that a prohibition
under Ofwat’s performance related executive
pay prohibition rule would not apply in respect of
awards for 2024/25, after consideration of all the
potential grounds for prohibition, and especially as
the company had maintained an investment grade
credit rating throughout 2024/25 and no financial
penalty had been imposed by Ofwat in 2024/25.
The committee noted that the investigation was
ongoing and no formal decisions had been made by
Ofwat at this point. The outcome of the investigation
would be considered by the committee when
assessing performance related pay in respect of
2025/26 as appropriate.
Overall, the AIP operated to ensure that no award
was paid in respect of areas of underperformance
for customers but that other important areas of
performance were appropriately incentivised.
This final decision on awards was made at a meeting
of the remuneration committee held after receiving
the outcome of the financial audit and external
assurance of our regulatory performance, ensuring
the committee had due regard to all necessary
information before confirming its final decision.
Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 193
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
Actual cash awards for 2024/25 under the AIP (audited)
Total Award
(£)
Total Award (% of salary) Amount paid in July
2025
Amount payable in July
2027
CEO £115,231 37.5% £76,052 £39,179
CFO £75,728 30.1% £49,980 £25,748
Note: A proportional award is made for performance between threshold and target and between target and
outperformance.
In addition to the amounts set out above, the deferred awards from 2022/23 will become payable in July
2025 and the total amount paid will be as set out below.
The committee determined that the deferred payment from 2022/23 should be made in accordance with
the AIP, noting that they already reflected the assessment of performance carried out by the committee in
respect of the 2022/23 AIP awards and that there were no circumstances that would lead the committee to
exercise discretion.
CEO CFO
Award for 2024/25 payable in July 2025 £76,052 £49,980
Deferred payment from 2022/23 payable in July 2025 £35,618 £23,454
Total £111,670 £73,434
Comparison with potential awards under the AIP in 2024/25
The potential awards below are set as a percentage of salary for a given performance. For 2024/25 the
potential awards for an overall performance at target level and the maximum potential award (at or above
outperformance level) were as set out in the table below (and reflecting the adjustment relating to the PCC
and non-household voids ODIs described above):
Potential Score Potential Award (% of salary) Potential Award (£)
CEO CFO CEO CFO
@ Target: 100 70.5% 56.4% £216,628 £141,964
@ Maximum: 133.3 95.5% 81.4% £293,447 £204,892
Note: A proportional award is made for performance between threshold and target and between target
and outperformance.
Graphics
194 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Executive remuneration for 2024/25 continued
Further disclosures on remuneration
Pension benefits earned (audited)
Approved contributory final salary pension scheme were as follows:
Accrued benefits David Hinton
At March 2025
Annual pension £36,709
Lump sum £109,888
At March 2024
Annual pension £36,083
Lump sum £108,051
Increase in accrued benefits excluding inflation
Annual pension £626
Lump sum £1,837
The defined benefit pension scheme was closed to future accrual on 31 March 2015. The deferred pension
increases annually in line with inflation.
Approved defined contribution scheme (audited)
In the year to 31 March 2025 two executive directors were members of the defined contribution scheme.
The table below summarises the contributions that were made in the scheme as at 31 March 2025:
Contributions in
2023/24
Value of contributions as
at 31 March 2024
Contributions in
2024/25
Value of contributions as
at 31 March 2025
David Hinton £10,000 £147,335 £10,000 £157,335
Andrew Farmer £10,000 £128,897 £13,000 £141,897
Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 195
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
CEO pay ratios
The table below sets out a comparison between the CEO’s single total figure of remuneration for 2024/25
and an equivalent figure for UK employees at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile.
Total pay and benefits have been calculated as at 31 March 2025 to allow for the comparison with the single
total figure table.
Year Method 25th percentile pay Median pay
ratio
75th percentile pay
ratio
2021 B 16:1 13:1 11:1
2022 B 22:1 13:1 10:1
2023 B 16:1 9:1 7:1
2024 B 18:1 15:1 13:1
2025 B 17:1 13:1 12:1
Note: For 2020/21, the CEO single total figure of remuneration is a combined figure, including the relevant
single total remuneration received by both Paul Butler and David Hinton as CEOs during that year. The
amount received as CEO by Paul Butler from 1 April 2020 to 31 July 2020 was £111,284. The relevant amount
received by David Hinton as CEO from 1 August 2020 to 31 March 2021 was £307,921 and includes the salary
actually received in the period, the amount of pension benefit actually received, and the pro-rated amounts
of taxable benefits, company car trade and AIP award.
The table below sets out the base salary and total pay and benefits details for the CEO and the employees
at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile received in or in respect of 2024/25. For the purpose of the calculation
the reference salary without deduction of any pension salary sacrifice of employees was used for a better
comparability of the figures.
CEO Method £
Base salary 307,274
Total pay and benefit £457,534
Employees £
Base salary 25th percentile 26,521
Base salary 50th percentile 34,589
Base salary 75th percentile 34,638
Total pay and benefits 25th percentile 26,634
Total pay and benefits 50th percentile 36,530
Total pay and benefits 75th percentile 39,121
Graphics
196 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
The remuneration policy for 2025 to 2030 will be implemented in 2025/26 as set out in the earlier
remuneration policy section. An illustration of the potential total remuneration of the executive directors in
respect of 2025/26 is set out below.
AIP for 2025/26
The structure of the AIP for 2025/26 is as is described earlier in the report. The targets for 2025/26 have
been updated by the committee to ensure they are stretching and in line with the corporate plan for 2025 to
2030. A further review will take place in 2025/26 to reflect relevant changes from the CMA redetermination.
Details on the new metrics and their weightings are summarised below, along with the allocations at target
and outperformance (noting that payment starts accruing if performance exceeds defined thresholds):
Updated remuneration policy and
implementation in 2025/26
Category Measure Target Outperformance
(% target allocation) (% target allocation)
Customer ODIs (20%) C-MeX D-MeX BR-MeX PCC
Supply interruptions
ODI score 20 26.6
Customer vulnerability
(5%)
Vulnerability strategy measures
Customer score 5 6.7
Assets / investment ODIs
(10%)
CRI
Customer contacts water quality
Leakage
Unplanned outage Mains repairs
Assets/ investment ODI score 10 13.3
Assets / investment
PCDs (5%)
Overall measure across all PCDs
Assets/ investment PCD score 5 6.7
Environment ODIs (12%) Discharge permit compliance Serious
pollution incidents Biodiversity
Operational greenhouse gas
Environment ODI score 12 16.0
Environment
– compliance (3%)
Abstraction compliance
Environment - compliance score 3 4.0
People (10%) H&S audits
Incidents – LTIFR
5
5
6.7
6.7
People score 10 13.3
Financial (30%) Cash receipts
Opex
Non-appointed profit/margin
10
15
5
13.3
20.0
6.7
Financial score 30 40.0
Personal objectives (5%) Personal objectives score 5 6.7
Total score 100 133.3
Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 197
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
2025 to 2030 LTIP
As described earlier in this report, the executive directors will be granted an award under the LTIP in
2025/26, which shall vest in 2030, subject to performance over a five-year period spanning FY2026 to 2030.
A high-level overview of the selected performance metrics, along with their respective weightings, is
provided below; at the time of finalising this report, the performance targets had not been formally
approved by the committee but these will be disclosed in the first remuneration report to be published
following their approval.
A further review will take place in 2025/26 to reflect relevant changes from the CMA redetermination.
Metric Summary Weighting
Capital programme delivery Delivery of PCDs (scope and cost) 50.0%
Demand management Achievement of WRMP targets for leakage PCC and
business demand at end of AMP 8
12.5%
C-MeX Industry average position at end of AMP 8 12.5%
WINEP Delivery of WINEP schemes in line with the EA’s latest
deadlines at end of AMP 8
12.5%
RoRE RoRE delivered at the end of AMP 8 12.5%
Service Award
The executive directors will be granted a Service Award, as described earlier in this report, during 2025/26.
This award is considered by the committee to be fixed remuneration. The Service Award is not conditional
on meeting performance targets or standards; its payment is subject only to continuous employment at the
prescribed payment date.
Scenario charts
The following assumptions have been made in respect of the following illustrations:
Minimum Fixed pay, which comprises: FY25/26 salary, pension contribution
(10% of salary); benefits and company car trade (using FY24/25 as an
estimate for FY25/26)
Cash allowance
Service Award, pro-rated to reflect the five-year vesting period
(20% of salary)
On-target All elements of pay as set out under the Minimum scenario, plus:
•
Target AIP payout (CEO: 45% of salary; CFO: 35% of salary), of which
66% is paid out immediately and 34% is deferred for two years
•
Target LTIP payout, pro-rated to reflect the five-year vesting period
(target payout is assumed to be 50% of maximum, equivalent to
15% of salary for the executive directors)
Maximum All elements of pay as set out under the Minimum scenario, plus:
•
Maximum AIP payout (CEO: 65% of salary; CFO: 50% of salary), of which
66% is paid out immediately and 34% is deferred for two years
• Maximum LTIP payout, pro-rated to reflect the five-year vesting period
(30% of salary)
Graphics
198 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
CEO – Illustration of the possible outcomes of the remuneration policy for 2025/26
Maximum
£954,301
On-target
£814,301
Minimum
£574,301
47%
55%
77%
9%
8%
13%
7%
18%
15%
14%
5%
6%
9%
£300
Thousands
Fixed pay Cash allowance AIP cash AIP cash payment AIP deferral Service award
£1000 £400£200 £500 £700£600
8%
10%
£800 £900 £1,000
Updated remuneration policy and implementation in 2025/26 continued
Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 199
Financial StatementsGoverna nceStrategic Report
CFO – Illustration of the possible outcomes of the remuneration policy for 2025/26
Maximum
£694,816
On-target
£604,816
Minimum
£454,816
50%
57%
76%
7%
6%
13%
7% 10%
14%
11%
13%
7%
8%
11%
Fixed pay Cash allowance AIP cash AIP cash payment AIP deferral Service award
£300
Thousands
£1000 £400£200 £500 £700£600 £800
9%
Graphics
200 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Financial Statements
Our values and behaviours are an integral part of
underpinning how we deliver our strategy.
Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 201
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Contents
Directors’ report 202
Independent auditors’ report 206
Group income statement
216
Group statement of other
comprehensive income 216
Company income statement
217
Company statement of other
comprehensive income 217
Group statement of financial position 219
Company statement of financial position 218
Group statement of changes in equity 220
Company statement of changes in equity 221
Group statement of cash flows 222
Company statement of cash flows 223
Notes to the financial statements 224

Graphics
202 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Directors’ report
for the year ended 31 March 2025
The directors have pleasure in presenting the group
directors’ report relating to South East Water
Limited (“South East Water” or the “company”) and
its subsidiary South East Water (Finance) Limited
(together referred to as the “group”) for the year
ended 31 March 2025, together with the audited
financial statements.
Statement of directors’ responsibilities
in respect of the financial statements
The directors are responsible for preparing the
group’s annual report and the financial statements
in accordance with applicable law and regulation.
Company law requires the directors to prepare
financial statements for each financial year.
Under that law the directors have prepared the
group and the company financial statements
in accordance with UK-adopted international
accounting standards.
Under company law, directors must not approve
the financial statements unless they are satisfied
that they give a true and fair view of the state of
affairs of the group and company and of the profit
or loss of the group and company for that period.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors
are required to:
► Select suitable accounting policies and then
apply them consistently.
► State whether applicable UK-adopted
international accounting standards have
been followed, subject to any material
departures disclosed and explained in the
financial statements.
► Make judgements and accounting estimates
that are reasonable and prudent.
► Prepare the financial statements on the going
concern basis unless it is inappropriate to
presume that the group and company will
continue in business.
The directors are responsible for safeguarding the
assets of the group and company and hence for
taking reasonable steps for the prevention and
detection of fraud and other irregularities.
The directors are also responsible for keeping
adequate accounting records that are sufficient
to show and explain the group’s and company’s
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy
at any time the financial position of the group
and company and enable them to ensure that the
financial statements comply with the Companies
Act 2006.
The directors are responsible for the maintenance
and integrity of the company’s website. Legislation
in the United Kingdom governing the preparation
and dissemination of financial statements may
differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.
Directors’ confirmations
The directors consider that the group annual report
and financial statements, taken as a whole, is fair,
balanced and understandable and provides the
information necessary for shareholders to assess the
group’s and company’s position and performance,
business model and strategy.
Each of the directors, whose names and functions
are listed in the corporate governance statement
confirm that, to the best of their knowledge:
► The group and company financial statements,
which have been prepared in accordance
with UK-adopted international accounting
standards, give a true and fair view of the
assets, liabilities, financial position and loss of
the group and loss of the company.
► The strategic report includes a fair review of the
development and performance of the business
and the position of the group and company,
together with a description of the principal
risks and uncertainties that it faces.
In the case of each director in office at the date the
directors’ report is approved:
► As far as the director is aware, there is no
relevant audit information of which the group’s
and company’s auditors are unaware.
► They have taken all the steps that they ought
to have taken as a director in order to make
themselves aware of any relevant audit
information and to establish that the
group’s and company’s auditors are aware
of that information.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 203
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Principal activities and
future developments
The principal activities of the group comprise the
supply of water to a population of 2.3 million in an
area of 5,700 square kms and the provision of certain
ancillary services for customers, developers and
other bodies within the constraints of the relevant
legislation.
The directors consider the performance
of the business to be satisfactory and that this is
expected to continue in the future. An indication
of the likely future developments in the company’s
business, including its strategy for the period 2025
to 2030, are set out in the strategic report as well as
information on the prospects of the company in the
long-term viability statement.
The revenue of the group for the year ended
31 March 2025 was £285.5 million (2024: £280.6
million) and profit from operations was £54.5 million
for the year (2024: £63.8 million). The loss before
taxation for the year was £19.8 million (2024: £36.7
million). The financial position at 31 March 2025
for the group and for the company is shown on
pages 218 and 219 respectively. Further analysis
of the performance of the business and future
developments is included in the strategic report on
pages 45 and 66.
Appointment as a water undertaker
and the ring-fence
South East Water has been appointed as a water
undertaker under the Water Industry Act 1991 and
the duties and the obligations of the appointee are
set out in that Act, in regulations created under
that Act, and in its instrument of appointment. The
conditions of the instrument of appointment cover
a variety of areas including charges, accounts and
requirements to produce information for customers.
The instrument of appointment deals with ring-
fencing and requires South East Water to ensure,
so far as is reasonably practicable, that it retains
at all times sufficient rights and assets (other than
financial resources) for a special administrator, if
appointed, to be able to manage the affairs of the
business, which must be confirmed annually.
Condition P requires South East Water to ensure
that it has sufficient financial and managerial
resources and adequate systems of planning and
internal control to carry out the regulated activities
and to certify this annually. Condition P requires
South East Water to conduct the appointed business
as if it was substantially the company’s sole business
and it was a separate public limited company. The
ultimate controllers of South East Water are bound
by a binding undertaking required under Condition
P to procure that their subsidiaries, other than
South East Water, provide information required by
South East Water to comply with its obligations
under the Water Industry Act 1991 and the
instrument of appointment and to refrain from any
action that would cause the appointee to breach
any of these obligations.
The effect of the relevant legislation and the
terms of the instrument of appointment mean
that our directors have an overriding responsibility
to ensure the regulatory ring-fence is maintained.
The directors remain mindful of these obligations,
along with their duties as directors set out in the
Companies Act 2006 and the Articles of Association.
One of the ways the directors meet the ring-fencing
obligations is by ensuring that all board level matters
that affect the company are decided at the board
of South East Water, rather than at a holding
company level.
Group structure
South East Water is the main operating company in
the group of companies headed by HDF (UK) Holdings
Limited (“HDF”). Further details of the structure of
the HDF group are provided in the strategic report
on page 72. There are no branches (as defined in
section 1046(3) of the Companies Act 2006) of the
company outside of the United Kingdom.
Capital structure
Details of the authorised and issued share capital
are shown in note 24 of the financial statements.
During the year an equity injection by the company’s
sole shareholder resulted in the issue of 75 million
new shares at a par value of £1 per share. South East
Water has one class of share which carries no right
to fixed income. There are no specific restrictions
on the size of a holding nor on the transfer of
shares, which are both governed by the Articles of
Association and prevailing legislation.
Details of South East Water’s immediate and
ultimate controlling parties are provided in note 32
and in the strategic report.

Graphics
204 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Accounting framework
The financial information presented in these
audited financial statements has been prepared in
accordance with the disclosure and transparency
rules of the Financial Conduct Authority and UK-
adopted international accounting standards. The
financial statements are presented in Sterling.
The results published in this report describe our
performance for the year and incorporate the
consolidated performance of South East Water
Limited and South East Water (Finance) Limited.
Use of financial instruments
The group’s financial risk management policies are
set out in note 21.
Research and development activities
South East Water is a member of UK Water
Industry Research (UKWIR) and participates in their
research programmes.
Dividends
The directors have approved no ordinary dividends
(2024: £2.25 million) for the current year. No dividends
have been proposed and unpaid at the balance
sheet date.
The company’s dividend policy is discussed on
page 78 of the strategic report.
Capital expenditure
During the year the group’s capital expenditure
totalled £157.3 million (2024: £123.8 million). Further
details are given in notes 12 and 13 of the financial
statements.
In the opinion of the directors, the market value
of land is significantly more than its book value.
However, it would not be practicable because of the
number of sites and the costs of valuing such sites
to precisely quantify this.
Directors and their interests
The directors who at any time during the financial
year and at the date of this report were directors of
South East Water, are set out on pages 132 to 134
and further details regarding their appointments
are set out on page 152.
No director held any shares or loan stock in
South East Water or other associated companies,
which is required to be disclosed under the
Companies Act 2006, during the financial year.
Directors’ indemnities
South East Water has granted an indemnity to its
directors against liability in respect of proceedings
brought by third parties, subject to the conditions
set out in the Companies Act 2006. Such qualifying
third-party indemnity provisions were in force during
the year (having taken effect on the appointment of
the directors) and remain in force as at the date of
approving this directors’ report.
Principal risks and uncertainties
A description of the principal risks and uncertainties
and an explanation of the steps the board takes to
mitigate these risks are provided in the strategic
report on pages 50 to 65.
Corporate governance
arrangements
Information on South East Water’s corporate
governance arrangements are set out in the
corporate governance statement on page 130.
Disclosures on greenhouse
gas emissions
Information on greenhouse gas emissions, energy
consumption and energy efficiency action (including
as required under Part 7, Schedule 7 of the Large and
Medium-Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and
Reports) Regulations 2008 are set out on page 114
of the strategic report and relate to the period from
1 April 2024 to 31 March 2025.
We also report on our greenhouse gas emissions in
our performance, people and planet report, which is
published on the company’s website.
Directors’ report continued

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 205
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Environmental and corporate
social responsibility
South East Water’s approach to sustainable
development of our business includes a strong
commitment to the environment and corporate
social responsibility. Details of our actions in this
respect are given throughout the strategic report
and corporate governance report.
Employment policies on disability
and engagement with employees,
suppliers, customers and others
South East Water offers equal opportunities to
all employees and applicants for employment.
Our managers and officers are trained to ensure
there is no unlawful discrimination on grounds
of race, gender, age, religion, union membership,
disability or sexual orientation. Employment
policies are intended to confirm South East Water
as an employer of choice through provision of a
safe work environment, satisfying work, personal
development and fair rewards. Further details are
given in the strategic report on page 88.
South East Water gives full consideration to
applications for employment from disabled
persons where the candidate’s particular aptitudes
and abilities are consistent with meeting the
requirements of the job.
Opportunities are available to disabled employees
for training, career development and promotion.
Where existing employees become disabled it is
South East Water’s policy to provide continuing
employment, wherever practicable, in the same
position or in an alternative position and to provide
appropriate training to achieve this aim.
South East Water places considerable value
on the involvement of our employees and has
continued to keep them informed on matters
affecting them as employees and on various
factors affecting the performance of the company.
This is achieved through formal and informal
meetings, regular bulletins on the intranet and an
employee e-magazine.
Employee representatives are consulted regularly
through the Staff Council on a wide range of matters
affecting their current and future interests.
South East Water has developed a comprehensive
engagement programme to ensure that we capture
the differing views of our customers, suppliers and
other stakeholders in the wider community. This
programme has helped us shape our plans for the
2025 to 2030 AMP. There are a number of examples
of how South East Water has interacted with
stakeholders in forming its policies and decisions.
The strategic report also discusses how the directors
have had due regard to the engagement with
employees, customers, suppliers and other business
relationships on pages 80 to 95.
Independent auditors
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP have expressed their
willingness to continue in office as auditors and a
resolution to reappoint them will be proposed at the
forthcoming meeting of the board.
Post balance sheet events
In May 2025 a further equity injection by the
company’s shareholder resulted in the issue of £200
million new shares at a par value of £1 per share. The
£200 million raised from the share issue will primarily
be used to reduce the group’s gearing.
Political donations
No political donations were made by the group in
either the current or prior period.
Approved by the board and signed by order of the
board by:
Nicolas Truillet
COMPANY SECRETARY
14 JULY 2025

Graphics
206 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Independent auditors’ report to the
members of South East Water Limited
Report on the audit of the financial statements
Opinion
In our opinion, South East Water Limited’s group financial statements and company financial statements (the
“financial statements”):
►
give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the company’s affairs as at 31 March 2025 and
of the group’s and company’s loss and the group’s and company’s cash flows for the year then ended;
►
have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards; and
►
have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
We have audited the financial statements, included within the 2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial
Statements (the “Annual Report”), which comprise: the group statement of financial position and the company
statement of financial position as at 31 March 2025; the group income statement, the group statement of other
comprehensive income, the company income statement, the company statement of other comprehensive
income, the group statement of changes in equity, the company statement of changes in equity, the group
statement of cash flows and the company statement of cash flows for the year then ended; and the notes to the
financial statements, comprising material accounting policy information and other explanatory information.
Our opinion is consistent with our reporting to the Audit and Risk Committee.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and
applicable law. Our responsibilities under ISAs (UK) are further described in the Auditors’ responsibilities for the
audit of the financial statements section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained
is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
Independence
We remained independent of the group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant
to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, which includes the FRC’s Ethical Standard, as applicable
to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with
these requirements.
To the best of our knowledge and belief, we declare that non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical
Standard were not provided.
Other than those disclosed in note 6 of the financial statements, we have provided no non-audit services to
the company or its controlled undertakings in the period under audit.
Material uncertainty related to going concern
In forming our opinion on the financial statements, which is not modified, we have considered the adequacy of
the disclosure made in note 3.1 to the financial statements concerning the group’s and the company’s ability
to continue as a going concern. Note 3.1 details that the group and company forecast base case prepared by
the directors does not indicate an additional requirement for financing in the going concern period although
shortly after the going concern period it will be necessary to renew the existing revolving credit facility, or find
alternative financing, in order to continue as a going concern. The directors’ severe but plausible downside
case without mitigating actions would indicate a need for financing towards the end of the going concern
period. The revolving credit facility matures in September 2026 and discussions with lenders are underway and
progressing well, although at the date of approval of these financial statements the renewal has not been legally
committed. These conditions, along with the other matters explained in note 3.1 to the financial statements,
indicate the existence of a material uncertainty which may cast significant doubt about the group’s and the
company’s ability to continue as a going concern. The financial statements do not include the adjustments
that would result if the group and the company were unable to continue as a going concern.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 207
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of
accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.
Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group’s and the company’s ability to continue to adopt the
going concern basis of accounting included:
►
Obtaining an understanding of the relevant controls related to the directors assessment of
going concern;
►
Obtaining third party bank confirmations for the groups’ bank accounts, which confirmed cash balances
and borrowings, inspected facility agreements and compared to the facility commitments assumed in
the forecasts;
►
Obtaining the directors’ going concern assessment, including cash flow forecast, liquidity requirements
and forecast covenant calculations for the going concern period and performing integrity checks
including testing the mathematical accuracy;
►
Assessing the forecasts used for the going concern assessment period for reasonableness and
reconciling the data with information from other areas of the audit. We have evaluated the
appropriateness of key revenue and expenditure assumptions in the forecasts, considering consistency
with the PR24 final price determination and other commitments made by directors. We have also
considered the historical accuracy of forecasting;
►
Recalculating debt covenants and assessing compliance over the forecast period, including
consideration of the most recent available credit ratings of the company to determine the impact this
has on covenant compliance;
►
Evaluating and challenging management’s stress test modelling to understand the impact on the group
and company’s liquidity and covenant ratios;
►
Assessing the appropriateness of the disclosures within the financial statements relating to the material
uncertainty on going concern; and.
►
Considering the potential impact of the outcome of the ongoing CMA appeal in respect of the PR24
price determination and the possible outcomes of the s203 investigation on the future cash flows over
the going concern period.
►
Obtaining supporting documentation to corroborate the current position of the debt refinancing;
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the
relevant sections of this report.
Our audit approach
Context
The terms of the company’s licence under the Water Industry Act 1991 require the company to report as if it
had issued equity share capital listed on the London Stock Exchange and therefore the opinion below refers to
the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA).

Graphics
208 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Independent auditors’ report to the members of South East Water Limited continued
Overview
Audit scope
►
The group comprises South East Water Limited (the regulated water business) and its only subsidiary
company South East Water (Finance) Limited (which issues part of the Group’s debt). Both of these
companies were subject to a full scope audit by the Group audit engagement team.
►
In scoping our audit, with reference to our risk assessment, we identified and included all material
financial statement line items within the scope of our audit procedures.
►
Climate change – As part of our audit planning we have considered the impact that the Group has on the
environment and the current and potential future impact of climate change on the Group’s business and
its financial statements. The Group has set out its Climate Change targets with the goal of achieving
operational net zero by 2030. The key consequences of global warming identified relate to the quantity
and quality of water resources and potentially disruption of operations or those of others on whom the
group rely, such as other bulk water suppliers and energy suppliers.
►
As part of our audit, we have made enquiries of management to understand the extent of the potential
impact of climate change risks affecting the Group’s financial statements. Many of the risks identified
are of a medium or long term nature and, in the short term, the directors have concluded that other than
the risks arising from adverse weather events which are considered in downside scenarios in the Viability
Statement and the going concern assessment, climate change risks have no material impact on the
carrying value of assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date.
►
We have performed our own evaluation on the potential impacts of climate change, including
assessing the estimates made regarding the useful economic lives of property, plant and equipment.
We determined that no heightened audit risk arose in the year in respect of climate change.
►
We have read the group’s disclosure of climate related information in the front half of the annual report
and considered consistency with the financial statements and our audit knowledge.
Key audit matters
►
Material uncertainty related to going concern
►
Risk of error in household measured income accrual estimate (group and company – note 16)
(group and company)
►
Risk of error in bad debt allowance for household revenue (group and company – note 16)
(group and company)
►
Risk of incorrect classification of costs between capital and non-capital spend
(group and company – note 12) (group and company)
Materiality
►
Overall group materiality: £4.0m (FY24: £4.0m) based on approximately 0.21% of total assets.
►
Overall company materiality: £3.8m (FY24: £3.8m) based on approximately 0.21% of total assets
(capped at 95% of group materiality).
►
Performance materiality: £3.0m (FY24: £3.0m) (group) and £2.85m (FY24: £2.85m) (company).
The scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in
the financial statements.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 209
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of most significance
in the audit of the financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks
of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by the auditors, including those which had
the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the
efforts of the engagement team. These matters, and any comments we make on the results of our procedures
thereon, were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our
opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
In addition to going concern, described in the Material uncertainty related to going concern section above, we
determined the matters described below to be the key audit matters to be communicated in our report. This
is not a complete list of all risks identified by our audit.
The key audit matters below are consistent with last year.
Key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Risk of error in household
measured income accrual estimate
(group and company - note 16)
(group and company)
The household measured
income accrual of £44.4m
(31 March 2024: £42.5m) is an
estimate of the water that was
supplied but remained unbilled
at year end. The calculation
primarily relies on historical
consumption data for measured
household customers. It is
determined using the latest
average read dates and daily
consumption averages for
properties within specific
zones, subject to adjustments
for seasonal factors guided by
forecast models, along with
verification against historical
data and assumptions about
leakage. This estimation is
based on historical usage for
the months and zones where
measurement and billing have
not occurred, although water
supply was provided before
year-end. Consequently, the
accrual involves significant
judgment, affects reported
revenue and profit, and is
therefore prone to errors and
potential management bias.
Our procedures for the household measured income accrual included:
undertaking a review of the estimation methods used for determining
consumption and other critical date inputs to management’s model; obtaining
an understanding of the process to calculate the estimate and assessed
the design and implementation of related financial controls; reperforming
management’s calculations to verify mathematical accuracy; testing the
validity of management’s inputs by assessing the following to ensure
consistency with historical billing data over the prior six-month period;
verifying the total number of properties and ensuring they are allocated
correctly within their designated billing zones and monthly billing groups;
sensitising the average duration since the last billing for each monthly billing
group; recalculating the weighted average daily consumption rate; validating
the tariffs applied against the approved annual tariff listing; evaluating
management’s seasonal and leakage adjustment assumptions, considering
both seasonality and leakage allowances, through examining historical usage
trends and conducting sensitivity analyses, which we found reasonable; and
reviewing the appropriateness of the related financial statement disclosures.
Furthermore, we reviewed the accuracy of household measured income
accruals through a look back analysis, comparing the actual bills raised to the
accrued amounts at year end. A post year-end assessment, which included
revenue data up to May 2025, was conducted, and we concur with management
that the applied methodology is materially reasonable. Additionally, we
assessed for any contradictory or corroborative evidence regarding the accrual
estimates and found no issues arising. Overall, we consider the methodology
and assumptions used by management as at 31 March 2025 to be reasonable.

Graphics
210 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Independent auditors’ report to the members of South East Water Limited continued
Key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Risk of error in bad debt allowance
for household revenue (group
and company – note 16) (group
and company)
As of 31 March 2025, the
total bad debt provision for
household revenue stands
at £40.1m (31 March 2024:
£35.4m). This provision is
calculated by applying various
percentages, derived from
historical cash collection rates
to trade receivables according
to their ageing. In making
their provision assessment
management continues to use a
3-year average cash collections
basis to recognise the risk
around customers paying
their bills acknowledging the
current state of the economy
and the cost of living demands
on households. Management’s
view is that no specific
adjustment is needed to the
provision, particularly when
considering that a position
has been taken to provide for
100% of debt over 4 years
despite cash being collected
annually on significantly aged
debt. Management have not
identified any basis for applying
a further increase in bad debts
based on evidence they have
available to them at present.
These provision calculations
involve significant judgement
and estimation and affect
revenue and profit.
Our audit procedures on the bad debt provision included: Challenging
management on their assessment of the impact of inflationary and cost of
living pressures on customers looking forwards and considering whether any
additional overlay is required in relation to this; testing the ageing of accounts
receivable balances incorporated in the bad debt provision; assessing the
collection levels of debts from accounts previously provided for; verifying
the accuracy of data within the cash collection model and testing the
mechanics of the spreadsheet used for calculating the provision as well as the
methodology for determining provision rates; verifying that the final provision
has been calculated in line with IFRS 9 methodology through the application of
management’s bad debt methodology and challenging whether it captures the
lifetime expected credit outcomes for receivables, which involved assessing
the alignment of recoverability assumptions with current cash collection
rates and future credit risks; obtaining an understanding of the process to
calculate the estimate and assessed the design and implementation of related
financial controls; and reviewing the adequacy of related financial statement
disclosures. We conclude that when taken together, these are reasonable
assumptions and that the bad debt provision is fairly stated.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 211
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Risk of incorrect classification of
costs between capital and non-
capital spend (group and company
– note 12) (group and company)
For FY25, capital expenditures
amounted to £156.0m,
compared to £119.2m in
FY24. The capitalised amount
excludes £23.6m (FY24: £23.0m)
of reactive maintenance,
which has been recorded as
an operating expense in the
income statement, adhering
to IFRS requirements. The
distinction between capitalised
costs and those allocated to
renewals and maintenance can
be subjective and significantly
impacts profit. Due to the
judgement involved and the
magnitude of these figures,
there is a risk of management
bias or error potentially leading
to inappropriate capitalisation.
The audit procedures we conducted on assets capitalised during the period
included: understanding and evaluating the controls governing the approval
of capital expenditure requests and then testing the operating effectiveness;
examining, on a sample basis, additions to assets under construction during
the year, verifying supporting documentation to confirm both the amount
capitalised and its capital nature per IAS 16 capitalisation criteria; assessing
management’s controls over assets under construction to identify any assets
that should be operational and subject to depreciation. We also tested a
sample of assets moved from assets under construction to the fixed asset
register, ensuring appropriate transfer and that depreciation is based on a
suitable useful economic life; and reviewing aged assets under construction
to identify any that should be moved to the fixed asset register. For overheads
capitalised during the period: Understanding and evaluating the control
processes that review overhead recovery rates and the overhead capitalisation
methodology; testing the capitalisation process for staff costs by matching
samples to timesheets and evaluating the reasonableness of the proportion of
salary capitalised against total costs; and evaluating management’s allocation
of departmental overheads based on time invested in the capital programme,
assessing the proportion of costs capitalised compared to prior years, and
finding the methodology consistent and reasonable. Based on all procedures
carried out to address the identified risk, we have concluded there are no
material errors in the classification of capital and non-capital expenditures.
How we tailored the audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion
on the financial statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the group and the company, the
accounting processes and controls, and the industry in which they operate.
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion
on the financial statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the group and the company, the
accounting processes and controls, and the industry in which they operate.
Both legal entities in the group were considered financially significant and therefore subject to full scope audits
for group purposes. South East Water Limited is the primary trading entity within the group; it generates the
vast majority of revenue for the group and incurs the related costs. South East Water (Finance) Limited holds a
significant portion of the group’s external debt. All audit procedures were led by the Group audit team located
in the United Kingdom.

Graphics
212 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Independent auditors’ report to the members of South East Water Limited continued
The impact of climate risk on our audit
As part of our audit, we have made enquiries of Management to understand its process to assess the extent
of potential climate change risk, the determination of mitigating actions and the impact on the financial
statements and support the disclosures made within the Strategic Report. We further obtained Management’s
climate-related risk assessment and reviewed their draft 25 year environment plan. Management has made
commitments to reach operational net zero by 2030. While Management acknowledge that the physical and
transition risks posed by climate change have the potential to impact the medium to long-term success of the
business, they have assessed that there is no quantitatively material impact arising from climate change on
the judgements and estimates made in the financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2025.
We reviewed Management’s climate change risk assessment and evaluated the completeness of identified
risks and the impact on the financial statements. We also considered the impact of climate change in our own
audit risk assessment procedures and did not identify any additional risks of material misstatement. We have,
however, made additional considerations throughout our audit work to address areas which are commonly
seen to be impacted by climate change risks, such as when assessing going concern forecast assumptions, long
term viability assumptions, and the appropriateness of useful economic lives of material non-current assets.
Our audit procedures also included: reading disclosures included in the Strategic Report and considering
whether they are materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained in the audit;
and, evaluating financial statement disclosures to assess whether climate risk assumptions were appropriately
disclosed, where relevant.
Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds
for materiality. These, together with qualitative considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit
and the nature, timing and extent of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement line items and
disclosures and in evaluating the effect of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the financial
statements as a whole.
Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole
as follows:
Financial statements – group Financial statements – company
Overall materiality £4.0m (FY24: £4.0m). £3.8m (FY24: £3.8m).
How we
determined it
approximately 0.21% of total assets approximately 0.21% of total assets
(capped at 95% of group materiality)
Rationale for
benchmark applied
An asset-based benchmark is considered
appropriate as the Group is a significant
provider of crucial infrastructure, and
generates revenues almost entirely through
using its infrastructure assets. Assets are a
key driver of business value for readers of
the accounts for the group. As such we have
determined that this is the most appropriate
benchmark for the consolidated group
accounts of South East Water Limited.
An asset-based benchmark is considered
appropriate as the Company is a significant
provider of crucial infrastructure, and
generates revenues almost entirely through
using its infrastructure assets. Assets are a
key driver of business value for readers of the
accounts for the company. As such we have
determined that this is the most appropriate
benchmark for the company accounts of
South East Water Limited.
For each component in the scope of our group audit, we allocated a materiality that is less than our overall
group materiality. The range of materiality allocated across components was between £3.4m and £3.8m.
Certain components were audited to a local statutory audit materiality that was also less than our overall
group materiality.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 213
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
We use performance materiality to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate
of uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceeds overall materiality. Specifically, we use performance
materiality in determining the scope of our audit and the nature and extent of our testing of account balances,
classes of transactions and disclosures, for example in determining sample sizes. Our performance materiality
was 75% (FY24: 75%) of overall materiality, amounting to £3.0m (FY24: £3.0m) for the group financial statements
and £2.85m (FY24: £2.85m) for the company financial statements.
In determining the performance materiality, we considered a number of factors - the history of misstatements,
risk assessment and aggregation risk and the effectiveness of controls - and concluded that an amount at the
upper end of our normal range was appropriate.
We agreed with the Audit and Risk Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified during
our audit above £200,000 (group audit) (FY24: £200,000) and £190,000 (company audit) (FY24: £190,000) as
well as misstatements below those amounts that, in our view, warranted reporting for qualitative reasons.
Reporting on other information
The other information comprises all of the information in the Annual Report other than the financial statements
and our auditors’ report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information. Our opinion on the
financial statements does not cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion
or, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this report, any form of assurance thereon.
In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and,
in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements
or our knowledge obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify
an apparent material inconsistency or material misstatement, we are required to perform procedures to
conclude whether there is a material misstatement of the financial statements or a material misstatement
of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material
misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report based
on these responsibilities.
With respect to the Strategic report and Directors’ report, we also considered whether the disclosures required
by the UK Companies Act 2006 have been included.
Based on our work undertaken in the course of the audit, the Companies Act 2006 requires us also to report
certain opinions and matters as described below.
Strategic report and Directors’ report
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit, the information given in the Strategic
report and Directors’ report for the year ended 31 March 2025 is consistent with the financial statements and
has been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.
In light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and company and their environment obtained
in the course of the audit, we did not identify any material misstatements in the Strategic report and
Directors’ report.
Responsibilities for the financial statements and the audit
Responsibilities of the directors for the financial statements
As explained more fully in the Directors’ report, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial
statements in accordance with the applicable framework and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair
view. The directors are also responsible for such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable the
preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the company’s
ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the
going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the company or
to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Graphics
214 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Independent auditors’ report to the members of South East Water Limited continued
Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free
from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditors’ report that includes our
opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in
accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise
from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be
expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures
in line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities,
including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud, is
detailed below.
Based on our understanding of the group and industry, we identified that the principal risks of non-compliance
with laws and regulations related to industry regulation, including the requirements of The Water Services
Regulation Authority (‘Ofwat’), the Listing Rules, health and safety regulation (including the requirements of
The Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974), environmental regulation, and pensions legislation, and we
considered the extent to which non-compliance might have a material effect on the financial statements.
We also considered those laws and regulations that have a direct impact on the financial statements such as
the Companies Act 2006 and UK tax legislation. We evaluated management’s incentives and opportunities for
fraudulent manipulation of the financial statements (including the risk of override of controls), and determined
that the principal risks were related to the posting of inappropriate journal entries and management bias in
accounting estimates. Audit procedures performed by the engagement team included:
►
Discussions with management, including consideration of known or suspected instances of
non-compliance with laws, regulation and fraud;
►
Evaluation of Management’s controls to prevent and detect irregularities;
►
Challenging assumptions and judgements made by management in their significant accounting
estimates and judgements; in particular in relation to the recoverability of trade receivables, the
capitalisation of costs in fixed assets and accuracy of the household measured income accrual,
including the disclosure of such matters in the financial statements;
►
Identifying and testing journal entries, in particular any journal entries with unusual combination
of account codes with credits to revenue where the debit entry is not to an expected account
and credits to the income statement (excluding staff costs) where the debit entry is to property,
plant and equipment, or journals with certain key unusual words.
There are inherent limitations in the audit procedures described above. We are less likely to become aware of
instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations that are not closely related to events and transactions
reflected in the financial statements. Also, the risk of not detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is
higher than the risk of not detecting one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by,
for example, forgery or intentional misrepresentations, or through collusion.
Our audit testing might include testing complete populations of certain transactions and balances, possibly
using data auditing techniques. However, it typically involves selecting a limited number of items for testing,
rather than testing complete populations. We will often seek to target particular items for testing based on
their size or risk characteristics. In other cases, we will use audit sampling to enable us to draw a conclusion
about the population from which the sample is selected.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s
website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditors’ report.

Graphics
southeastwater.co.uk 215
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
Use of this report
This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the company’s members as a body in
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving
these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person to whom this
report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.
Other required reporting
Companies Act 2006 exception reporting
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
► we have not obtained all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
► adequate accounting records have not been kept by the company, or returns adequate for our audit
have not been received from branches not visited by us; or
► certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
► the company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.
We have no exceptions to report arising from this responsibility.
Appointment
Following the recommendation of the Audit and Risk Committee, we were appointed by the members on 17
December 2021 to audit the financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2022 and subsequent financial
periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is 4 years, covering the years ended 31 March 2022 to
31 March 2025.
Other matter
The company is required by the Financial Conduct Authority Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules to
include these financial statements in an annual financial report prepared under the structured digital format
required by DTR 4.1.15R – 4.1.18R and filed on the National Storage Mechanism of the Financial Conduct
Authority. This auditors’ report provides no assurance over whether the structured digital format annual
financial report has been prepared in accordance with those requirements.
Other voluntary reporting
Directors’ remuneration
The company voluntarily prepares a Remuneration Report in accordance with the provisions of the Companies
Act 2006. The directors requested that we audit the part of the Remuneration Report specified by the
Companies Act 2006 to be audited as if the company were a quoted company.
In our opinion, the part of the Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance
with the Companies Act 2006.
Andy Grimbly (Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
London
14 JULY 2025

Graphics
216 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Note
2025
£000
2024
£000
Revenue 4 285,517 280,594*
Bad debts 16 (4,055) (4,533)*
Net operating costs 6 (241,471) (225,711)
Other income 4 14,496 13,427
Profit from operations 54,487 63,777
Finance income 8 2,490 1,711
Finance expense 8 (76,758) (102,151)
Loss before taxation (19,781) (36,663)
Taxation 9 6,240 8,620
Loss for the year (13,541) (28,043)
Loss per share attributable to the
ordinary equity holders of the parent Note
2024 2025
Pence
2024
Pence
Basic and diluted 11 (17.53) (56.87)
* see note 4 for details of prior year changes to presentation
The group activities above are derived from continuing operations.
Group statement of other comprehensive income
for the year ended 31 March 2025
Note
2025
£000
2024
£000
Loss for the year (13,541) (28,043)
Other comprehensive loss:
Items that will not be reclassified to the income statement:
Net actuarial loss on pension schemes 23 (21,176) (8,015)
Deferred tax credit on net actuarial loss 9 5,294 2,004
Other comprehensive loss for the year (15,882) (6,011)
Total comprehensive loss (29,423) (34,054)
The notes on pages 224 to 283 form part of these financial statements.
Group income statement
for the year ended 31 March 2025


Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 217
Note
2025
£000
2024
£000
Revenue 4 285,517 280,594*
Bad debts 16 (4,055) (4,533)*
Net operating costs 6 (241,465) (225,705)
Other income 4 14,496 13,427
Company profit from operations 54,493 63,783
Finance income 8 2,400 1,692
Finance expense 8 (76,781) (102,173)
Loss before taxation (19,888) (36,698)
Taxation 9 6,267 8,629
Loss for the year (13,621) (28,069)
Loss per share attributable to the
ordinary equity holders of the company Note
2025
Pence
2024
Pence
Basic and diluted 11 (18.33) (56.92)
* see note 4 for details of prior year changes to presentation
The company activities above are derived from continuing operations.
Company statement of other comprehensive income
for the year ended 31 March 2025
Note
2025
£000
2024
£000
Loss for the year (13,621) (28,069)
Other comprehensive loss:
Items that will not be reclassified to the income statement:
Net actuarial loss on pension schemes 23 (21,176) (8,015)
Deferred tax credit on net actuarial loss 9 5,294 2,004
Other comprehensive loss for the year (15,882) (6,011)
Total comprehensive loss (29,503) (34,080)
The notes on pages 224 to 283 form part of these financial statements.
Company income statement
for the year ended 31 March 2025


Graphics
218 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Note
31 March 2025
£000
31 March 2024
£000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 12 1,870,841 1,777,640
Right of use assets 12 3,461 3,804
Intangible assets 13 8,787 10,066
Defined benefit pension surplus 23 8,378 23,014
1,891,467 1,814,524
Current assets
Inventories 15 1,268 1,343
Trade and other receivables 16 99,278 97,477
Cash and cash equivalents 17 36,072 4,986
136,618 103,806
Total assets 2,028,085 1,918,330
Liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Trade and other payables 20 3,483 3,864
Loans and borrowings 18 1,325,934 1,250,980
Deferred income 22 3,913 3,646
Defined benefit pension liability 23 2,357 2,493
Deferred tax liability 9 178,169 189,665
1,513,856 1,450,648
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 20 143,759 114,849
Loans and borrowings 18 69,484 97,436
Deferred income 22 4,615 5,651
Provisions 19 8,014 6,966
225,872 224,902
Total liabilities 1,739,728 1,675,550
Net assets 288,357 242,780
Issued capital and reserves attributable to owners of the parent
Share capital 24 124,312 49,312
Revaluation reserve 204,067 208,657
Retained losses (40,022) (15,189)
Total equity 288,357 242,780
The financial statements on pages 216 to 283 were approved and authorised for issue by the board of
directors and were signed on its behalf by:
David Hinton Andrew Farmer
CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
14 JULY 2025 14 JULY 2025
The notes on pages 224 to 283 form part of these financial statements.
Group statement of financial position
Registered number: 02679874
as at 31 March 2025


Graphics
GovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 219
Financial Statements
Note
31 March 2025
£000
31 March 2024
£000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 12 1,870,841 1,777,640
Right of use assets 12 3,461 3,804
Intangible assets 13 8,787 10,066
Defined benefit pension surplus 23 8,378 23,014
1,891,467 1,814,524
Current assets
Inventories 15 1,268 1,343
Trade and other receivables 16 99,217 97,092
Cash and cash equivalents 17 35,664 2,717
136,149 101,152
Total assets 2,027,616 1,915,676
Liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Trade and other payables 20 3,483 3,864
Loans and borrowings 18 1,325,934 1,250,980
Deferred income 22 3,913 3,646
Defined benefit pension liability 23 2,357 2,493
Deferred tax liability 9 178,169 189,665
1,513,856 1,450,648
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 20 144,936 113,761
Loans and borrowings 18 69,484 97,436
Deferred income 22 4,615 5,651
Provisions 19 8,014 6,966
227,049 223,814
Total liabilities 1,740,905 1,674,462
Net assets 286,711 241,214
Issued capital and reserves attributable to owners of the parent
Share capital 24 124,312 49,312
Revaluation reserve 204,067 208,657
Retained losses (41,668) (16,755)
Total equity 286,711 241,214
The financial statements on pages 216 to 283 were approved and authorised for issue by the board of
directors and were signed on its behalf by:
David Hinton Andrew Farmer
CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
14 JULY 2025 14 JULY 2025
The notes on pages 224 to 283 form part of these financial statements.
Company statement of financial position
Registered number: 02679874
as at 31 March 2025


Graphics
220 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Note
Issued
share
capital
£000
Revaluation
reserve
£000
Retained
(losses)/
earnings
£000
Total
equity
£000
At 1 April 2023 49,312 213,254 16,518 279,084
Loss for the year - - (28,043) (28,043)
Other comprehensive loss 25 - - (6,011) (6,011)
Total comprehensive loss for the year
- - (34,054) (34,054)
Dividends 10 - - (2,250) (2,250)
Amortisation of revaluation reserve - (6,110) 6,110 -
Release revaluation reserve on disposals - (19) 19 -
Deferred tax on revaluation and retained earnings transfer
1
- 1,532 (1,532) -
- (4,597) 2,347 (2,250)
At 31 March 2024 49,312 208,657 (15,189) 242,780
At 1 April 2024 49,312 208,657 (15,189) 242,780
Loss for the year - - (13,541) (13,541)
Other comprehensive loss 25 - - (15,882) (15,882)
Total comprehensive loss for the year
- - (29,423) (29,423)
Issue of shares 24 75,000 - - 75,000
Amortisation of revaluation reserve - (6,110) 6,110 -
Release revaluation reserve on disposals - (10) 10 -
Deferred tax on revaluation and retained earnings transfer
1
- 1,530 (1,530) -
75,000 (4,590) 4,590 75,000
At 31 March 2025 124,312 204,067 (40,022) 288,357
The notes on pages 224 to 283 form part of these financial statements.
All transactions relate to the equity holders of the group.
1
The movement between the revaluation reserve and retained earnings arises from the depreciation and associated
deferred tax on the fair value uplift of assets at the time of transition to IFRS.

Group statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 March 2025


Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 221
Note
Issued
share
capital
£000
Revaluation
reserve
£000
Retained
(losses)/
earnings
£000
Total
equity
£000
At 1 April 2023 49,312 213,254 14,978 277,544
Loss for the year - - (28,069) (28,069)
Other comprehensive loss 25 - - (6,011) (6,011)
Total comprehensive loss for the year
- - (34,080) (34,080)
Dividends 10 - - (2,250) (2,250)
Amortisation of revaluation reserve - (6,110) 6,110 -
Release revaluation reserve on disposals - (19) 19 -
Deferred tax on revaluation and retained earnings transfer
1
- 1,532 (1,532) -
- (4,597) 2,347 (2,250)
At 31 March 2024 49,312 208,657 (16,755) 241,214
At 1 April 2024 49,312 208,657 (16,755) 241,214
Loss for the year - - (13,621) (13,621)
Other comprehensive loss 25 - - (15,882) (15,882)
Total comprehensive loss for the year
- - (29,503) (29,503)
Issue of shares 24 75,000 - - 75,000
Amortisation of revaluation reserve - (6,110) 6,110 -
Release revaluation reserve on disposals - (10) 10 -
Deferred tax on revaluation and retained earnings transfer
1
- 1,530 (1,530) -
75,000 (4,590) 4,590 75,000
At 31 March 2025 124,312 204,067 (41,668) 286,711
The notes on pages 224 to 283 form part of these financial statements.
All transactions relate to the equity holders of the group.
1
The movement between the revaluation reserve and retained earnings arises from the depreciation and associated
deferred tax on the fair value uplift of assets at the time of transition to IFRS.
Company statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 March 2025


Graphics
222 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Note
2025
£000
2024
£000
Cash flows from operating activities
Loss for the year
Adjustments for:
(13,541) (28,043)
Depreciation and impairment of property, plant and equipment 12 62,953 61,054
Amortisation of intangible assets including impairment 13 2,524 2,315
Finance income 8 (2,490) (1,711)
Finance expense 8 76,758 102,151
Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment (63) (69)
Difference between pension contributions paid and amounts recognised
in the income statement
(5,547)
(5,996)
Income tax credit 9 (6,240) (8,620)
114,354 121,081
Movements in working capital
Increase in trade and other receivables (2,066) (5,196)
Decrease/(increase) in inventories 75 (211)
Increase in trade and other payables 16,026 3,160
Cash generated from operations 128,389 118,834
Income taxes paid (1,048) (8,464)
Interest element on lease liability payments (136) (121)
Interest received 1,144 526
Interest paid (50,521) (46,294)
Net cash generated from operating activities 77,828 64,481
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (140,951) (123,342)
Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment 285 256
Purchase of intangible assets (1,250) (4,613)
Net cash outflow from investing activities (141,916) (127,699)
Cash flows from financing activities
Credit facility (repayment)/drawdowns 26 (28,000) 67,000
Index linked borrowing 26 50,000 -
Issue of shares 24 75,000 -
Net payment of lease liabilities 26 (445) (548)
Issue costs of debt 26 (1,381) -
Dividends paid to shareholders 10 - (2,250)
Net cash generated from financing activities 95,174 64,202
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 31,086 984
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of year 17 4,986 4,002
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 17 36,072 4,986
The notes on pages 224 to 283 form part of these financial statements.
Group statement of cash flows
for the year ended 31 March 2025


Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 223
Note
2025
£000
2024
£000
Cash flows from operating activities
Loss for the year
Adjustments for:
(13,621) (28,069)
Depreciation and impairment of property, plant and equipment 12 62,953 61,054
Amortisation of intangible assets including impairment 13 2,524 2,315
Finance income 8 (2,400) (1,692)
Finance expense 8 76,781 102,173
Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment (63) (69)
Difference between pension contributions paid and amounts recognised
in the income statement
(5,547)
(5,996)
Income tax credit 9 (6,267) (8,629)
114,360 121,087
Movements in working capital
Increase in trade and other receivables (2,066) (5,196)
Decrease/(increase) in inventories 75 (211)
Increase in trade and other payables 16,026 3,160
Cash generated from operations 128,395 118,840
Income taxes paid (1,048) (8,457)
Interest element on lease liability payments (136) (121)
Interest received 1,073 506
Interest paid (48,595) (48,554)
Net cash generated from operating activities 79,689 62,214
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (140,951) (123,342)
Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment 285 256
Purchase of intangible assets (1,250) (4,613)
Net cash outflow from investing activities (141,916) (127,699)
Cash flows from financing activities
Credit facility (repayment)/drawdowns 26 (28,000) 67,000
Index linked borrowing 26 50,000 -
Issue of shares 24 75,000 -
Net payment of lease liabilities 26 (445) (548)
Issue costs of debt 26 (1,381) -
Dividends paid to shareholders 10 - (2,250)
Net cash generated from financing activities 95,174 64,202
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 32,947 (1,283)
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of year 17 2,717 4,000
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 17 35,664 2,717
The notes on pages 224 to 283 form part of these financial statements.
Company statement of cash flows
for the year ended 31 March 2025


Graphics
224 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

1. Basis of preparation and authorisation of financial statements

The financial statements of South East Water Limited and its subsidiary (the “group”) for the year ended
31 March 2025 were authorised for issue by the board of directors on 14 July 2025 and the Statement of
Financial Position was signed on the board’s behalf by David Hinton and Andrew Farmer.
South East Water
Limited
is a private company that has limited liability by shares and is incorporated in the United Kingdom
and registered in England and Wales.

These consolidated and company only financial statements have been prepared in accordance with
UK-adopted international accounting standards and with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 as
applicable to companies reporting under those standards.

Details of the group’s accounting policies, including changes during the year, are included in note 3.

The group financial statements are presented in Sterling and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand
pounds (£000) except where otherwise indicated.

1.1 Basis of measurement
The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis except for the following items,
which are measured on an alternative basis on each reporting date.
Items Measurement basis
Pension assets Fair value
Certain assets in property, Measured at deemed cost by reference to fair
plant and equipment value on adoption of IFRS on 1 April 2014

1.2 Changes in accounting policies
i) New standards, interpretations and amendments effective from 1 April 2024
The group has adopted the following standards and amendments with mandatory adoption date on or
before 1 April 2024:
► Presentation of financial statements on non-current liabilities with covenants – IAS 1 (amended)
► Lease Liability in a Sale and Leaseback – IFRS 16 (amended)
► Supplier finance – IAS 7 and IFRS 7 (amended)
► Sustainability related financial information – IFRS S1
► Climate – IFRS S2
► Lack of Exchangeability – IAS 21
The standards and amendments listed above did not have any material impact on the amounts recognised
in the prior year and are not expected to significantly affect the current or future years.
ii) New standards, interpretations and amendments not yet effective
At the date of these financial statements, the following Standards were in issue but not yet effective (and in
some cases had not yet been adopted by the UK) and have not been applied to these Financial Statements.




Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 225
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

1. Basis of preparation and authorisation of financial statements continued

New standard or Mandatory effective
interpretation EU Endorsement status date (period beginning)
IFRS 7 and 9 (amended) Classification and Measurement of Financial Instruments 1 April 2026
IFRS 7 and 9 (amended) Contracts referencing nature-dependent electricity 1 April 2027
IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements 1 April 2027
IFRS 19 Subsidiaries without public accountability disclosure 1 April 2027
The directors do not anticipate that the adoption of the Standards and Interpretations listed above will have
a material impact on the finances of the group or company, but may have an impact on the presentation in
the financial statements of the group or company in future periods.



2. Key judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty
2.1 Key judgements
The preparation of financial statements requires the application of judgements and assumptions by
management which affects the value of assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date and income and
expenditure for the year. Actual results may differ from those arrived at based on management’s judgements
and assumptions.
Revenue recognition
The company bills customers in line with its entitlement to receive revenue based on the limits established
by successive regulatory periodic review processes. Revenue is recognised when the performance
obligations are met and when collection of the resulting revenue receivable is probable. Assessment of
the probability of collection and therefore the fair value of revenue to be recognised during the year is
judgemental. Management considers historical trends in determining any potential adjustment to revenue
to reflect instances where collection is not probable at the point of delivery. This has resulted in a decrease
in underlying revenue for the current year of £3.8 million (2024 £1.2 million), with a corresponding decrease
in receivables as shown in note 16.
The capitalisation of costs including employee and other directly attributable costs
The group incurs significant expenditure on its infrastructure assets and management has to exercise
judgement in determining the classification of these costs between capital and operating expenditure.
The group capitalises expenditure where the expenditure enhances assets or increases the capacity of the
network. Expenditure which maintains the asset’s potential to deliver future economic benefits is commonly
referred to as “repairs and maintenance” and is recognised in the income statement in the period in which
it is incurred. Differentiating between enhancement and maintenance works can be subjective, particularly
where projects may include both activities.
The group determines employee costs directly attributable to capital projects based on the time spent on
the projects. Other directly attributable costs are then assessed. The costs relating to capital projects are
then capitalised into individual projects. During the year £12.1 million of directly attributable employee costs
(2024: £11.1 million) and £6.1 million of other attributable costs (2024: £5.7 million) have been capitalised.
This represents 7.0 per cent of total operating costs before capitalisation (2024: 6.9 per cent). In addition, the
group capitalises borrowing costs incurred for significant projects that meet certain criteria and judgement
is required to identify which projects qualify for this. The capitalised borrowing costs for property, plant and
equipment for the year ended 31 March 2025 were £4.6 million (2024: £1.3 million).

Graphics
226 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
2. Key judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty continued
2.1 Key judgements continued
Provisions for other liabilities and charges – recognition of other provisions
A provision is recognised when it is probable that the group has an obligation for which a reliable estimate
can be made of the amount of the obligation. The group is subject to commercial and legal claims that
are incidental to the day-to-day operation of its business. These could include contractual, regulatory,
employment and environmental matters which are managed in the ordinary course of business. Assessing
the outcome of uncertain commercial and legal cases requires judgement to be made regarding the extent
to which any claim against the group is likely to be successful. On a case-by-case basis, management
evaluates the likelihood of adverse outcomes to these matters and whether it is possible to derive a reliable
estimate and makes a judgement about whether or not a provision should be recognised.
Other provisions, which are detailed in note 19, total £3.1 million at 31 March 2025 (2024: £1.9 million).
Retirement benefit obligations – recognition of a defined benefit asset
The Trust Deeds for the South East Water Pension Scheme (SEWPS) and the Mid Kent Group Pension
Scheme (MKGPS) provide the group with an unconditional right to a refund of surplus assets assuming the
full settlement of plan liabilities in the event of a plan winding-up. Furthermore, in the ordinary course of
business the Trustee has no rights to unilaterally wind-up the schemes or otherwise augment the benefits
due to members of the schemes. Based on these rights, the group considers that under IFRIC 14, it is
appropriate to recognise the net surpluses in SEWPS and MKGPS of £5.7 million (2024: £19.3 million) and
£2.7 million (2024: £3.8 million) respectively in full.
Climate change
We have identified climate change as our leading principal risk. The natural environment in which the group
operates is continually changing and the expected impact on the group from climate change is set out
within the climate related disclosures in the strategic report on pages 98 to 117. The consequences of global
warming could affect the quantity and quality of water resources and potentially disrupt our operations or
those of others on whom we rely, such as energy suppliers.
The risks associated with climate change are long-term in nature, and will create a need for us to adapt our
infrastructure to improve resilience. Our assessment of transitional risks has identified a potential impact
on asset values to the extent that investment in new low carbon technology could reduce remaining useful
economic lives of existing assets. However, at this stage of our assessment and long-term planning we
have not identified any material impact on the value or lives of specific assets that can be directly linked to
climate change.
2.2 Key sources of estimation uncertainty
Estimates are required to be made by management when preparing the financial statements. These
estimates affect the value of assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date and income and expenditure for
the year. The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis with any revisions to
accounting estimates recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised and future periods where the
revision affects both current and future periods. The actual results may differ from those arrived at based
on management’s estimates.

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 227
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
2. Key judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty continued
2.2 Key sources of estimation uncertainty continued
Unbilled water income
Unbilled water income at the year-end (Household customers): metered customers are billed on a
six monthly cycle. This means that at the year-end there is a large volume of water which has been supplied
but not billed to customers. The value of unbilled water income at 31 March 2025 is estimated to be
£44.4 million (2024: £42.5 million).
The methodology for arriving at the value of unbilled consumption incorporates estimates of water used
based on historical consumption data and the relevant tariffs for customers. Previously billed consumption
history provides a reliable basis for the estimate that is included in the financial statements. Our historical
analysis of consumption indicates that billed revenue has generally been within 2 per cent of our previous
estimates of the value of unbilled consumption.
The sensitivity of the estimate of unbilled consumption is illustrated in the table below where the impact
of fluctuations in estimated water consumption in one year of one per cent and two per cent have been set
out. These variants have been selected because our annual assessment of unbilled revenue is usually within
2 per cent of actual billed revenue.
Sensitivity
Unbilled water income +1%
+2%
-1% -2%
31 March 2025 £44.4 m +£0.4 m +£0.9 m -£0.4 m -£0.9 m
31 March 2024 £42.5 m +£0.4 m +£0.9 m -£0.4 m -£0.9 m
Unbilled water income at the year end (Non-Household customers): Water revenue chargeable to
Non-Household customers is governed by the Market Settlement Process and information provided by the
Central Market Operating System. System data is used to estimate the amount of unbilled revenue in respect of
Non-Household customers. As at 31 March 2025, the level of unbilled revenue was estimated to be £4.9 million
(2024: £5.1 million).
Sensitivity
Unbilled water income +1%
+2%
-1% -2%
31 March 2025 £4.9 m +£0.05 m +£0.10 m -£0.05 m -£0.10 m
31 March 2024 £5.1 m +£0.05 m +£0.11 m -£0.05 m -£0.11 m
Our calculations are prepared at the year-end but based on consumption patterns over the last six months.

Graphics
228 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
2. Key judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty continued
2.2 Key sources of estimation uncertainty continued
Household debt
Our Household customer base includes customers who cannot or will not pay their bills and, therefore, we
need to make a provision for the level of doubtful debt. The value of the provision for doubtful debts as at
31 March 2025 was £40.1 million (2024: £35.4 million).
Our methodology establishes the expected credit loss of our household debt at the year-end by identifying
customer debt categories and projecting historical cash collections across these customer groups to
determine an estimate of irrecoverable debt. The expected credit loss is calculated based on estimated
cash collection percentages that take into account historical performance, and also on our expectations of
the future impact of external economic factors on the group’s collection of household debt. The continuing
economic factors including higher energy and fuel prices, high inflation and increases in taxation are already
impacting household disposable income and are expected to continue to do so.
In our calculations of the expected credit loss we do not take credit for cash collections expected to be
received after more than four years. This is equivalent to reducing cash collection percentages by 3.1 per
cent. We consider that this adjustment fairly reflects the potential future impact of wider economic factors
on cash collection rates.
Our cash collection history over the past three years has been used to determine future collection rates, in
line with the approach for 2023/24. This is considered a reasonable approach in recognising the economic
pressures brought about by the cost of living crisis.
The sensitivity of the bad debt provision is illustrated in the table below where the impact of using cash
collection histories over the past two years and four years as the basis for determining the expected credit
loss is shown.
Cash collection history
Bad debt provision estimate 2 years 4 years
31 March 2025 £40.1 m +£0.2 m -£1.0 m
31 March 2024 £35.4 m +£1.0 m -£0.9 m
Retailers
South East Water Limited provides wholesale supply to Retailers through the Non-Household market/
(MOSL). Trading terms are governed under the Wholesale Code and as such we secure collateral from Business
Retailers in the form of bank guarantee, deposit or other form of security. At the year end, our assessment is
that the security provided by Business Retailers obviates the need to make a provision against retailer debt.
The useful lives of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets
Management estimates the useful economic lives of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets
employed by the group in meeting its business objectives. Tangible and intangible assets are categorised by
type of asset or equipment and an appropriate estimate of how long the assets in each category will remain
operational and economically viable is made. This estimate will determine the value of depreciation charged
to the income statement each year and the carrying value of fixed assets in the balance sheet.
The estimates are based on management’s judgement and experience and are reviewed annually to ensure
they are still suitable. Additionally, an impairment review of assets is undertaken each year to identify any
assets that may be impaired and to write down the value of those assets to the future economic value.
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 229
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
2. Key judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty continued
2.2 Key sources of estimation uncertainty continued
The sensitivity on the annual depreciation charge due to the estimates of asset lives is illustrated in the
tables below using examples of the lives attributed to:
► Wells and boreholes of 60 years (included in Land, wells, structures and buildings)
► Light plant and machinery of 20 years (included in Plant, equipment and vehicles)
► Computer software of 5 years
Sensitivity
Wells and boreholes +5 years
+20
years -5 years -20 years
31 March 2025 £4.8 m -£0.4 m -£1.2 m +£0.4 m +£2.4 m
31 March 2024 £3.7 m -£0.3 m -£0.9 m +£0.3 m +£1.9 m
Sensitivity
Light plant and machinery +5 years
+10
years -5 years -10 years
31 March 2025 £24.1 m -£4.8 m -£8.0 m +£8.0 m +£24.1 m
31 March 2024 £24.7 m -£4.9 m -£8.2 m +£8.2 m +£24.7 m
Sensitivity
Computer software +1 years
+3
years -1 years -3 years
31 March 2025 £2.5 m -£0.4 m -£0.9 m +£0.6 m +£3.8 m
31 March 2024 £2.3 m -£0.4 m -£0.9 m +£0.6 m +£3.5 m
Pension and other post-employment benefits
There are a range of variables required to be determined to value the company’s defined benefit pension
schemes and the underlying costs of providing post employment benefit.
The costs of defined benefit pension schemes are determined using actuarial valuations. The actuarial
valuations are determined by using certain assumptions for discount rates, mortality rates, expected
return on assets and corporate bond performance projections as set out in note 23. Pension increases are
based on expected future inflation rates. The net defined benefit pension scheme asset at 31 March 2025 is
£8.4 million (2024: £23.0 million) and is recognised in full.

Graphics
230 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
2. Key judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty continued
2.2 Key sources of estimation uncertainty continued
The sensitivity of the estimate of the surpluses in the pension schemes is illustrated in the table below where
the impact of fluctuations in prevailing market conditions on key assumptions of discount rate, inflation and
life expectancy have been set out.
Sensitivities 31 March 2025 Decrease in schemes’ surplus
0.1% decrease to the discount rate £1.7 m 1.1 %
0.1% increase to inflation £1.7 m 1.1 %
One year increase in life expectancy £5.6 m 3.1 %
Sensitivities 31 March 2024 Decrease in schemes’ surplus
0.1% decrease to the discount rate £2.1 m
1.2 %
0.1% increase to inflation £1.9 m 1.1 %
One year increase in life expectancy £6.7 m 3.8 %
In 2020 and 2021 mortality rates were significantly higher than the long-term trend as a result of Covid-19,
although 2021 was an improvement on 2020. Mortality experience continued to be elevated during 2022
and subsequent years, and although excess deaths could be attributed to the virus in the years following
the pandemic, recent evidence suggests that excess deaths are now primarily due to other causes. The
latest available version of the CMI projections model (CMI_2023) used in the calculations for the 2025 year
end gives weight to post-pandemic experience. The CMI_2023 model differs from that adopted in previous
years in that there is a single weighting calibration parameter with users able to determine what weighting
to apply to 2022 and 2023.
The choice of weighting to apply to recent data is a complex area and will require judgements to be made.
The UK has continued to see the impact of the pandemic over 2022 and 2023 with significant excess deaths
compared to pre-pandemic levels. However the prominent cause of deaths is no longer a direct result of
Covid-19, with factors such as delayed diagnoses from lockdown events, strain on the NHS due to backlogs
and poorer health due to long Covid being possible reasons for the sustained higher mortality.
Whilst the CMI has accepted that recent mortality may be indicative of future mortality trends (by setting
w2022 = w2023 = 15 per cent), we view this as conservative given the UK’s economic situation with a cost-of-
living crisis and associated challenges. Therefore, given the UK’s uncertain outlook but recognising that the
core CMI_2023 model may well represent an overly cautious view of experience in the near-term, the group’s
current view is that the CMI_2023 with weighting parameters of 25 per cent for 2022 and 2023 experience
is appropriate.
The increase in weighting compared with the core CMI_2023 model results in a reduction in liabilities of 0.5
to 1.0 per cent for a typical scheme.
As this is a roll-forward calculation, the liabilities are based on the membership as at the last formal valuation
at 31 March 2023 and will ignore any excess deaths experienced since that date.

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 231
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025


3. Material accounting policies
The principal accounting policies adopted by the group are set out below. These policies have been
consistently applied in both the current and prior years, except for those changes required due to the
mandatory adoption of new reporting standards.
3.1 Going concern
The group and company’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development
and position, are set out in the Strategic Report on pages pages 45 and 66.
The directors have undertaken a detailed review of the group and company’s liquidity requirements
compared with the cash and facilities available, which includes cash at hand, cash on deposit, and committed
bank facilities of which £56.0 million remained undrawn at 31 March 2025. The directors have also considered
the financial covenant position including projections based on future forecasts, the current credit ratings
and financial risk.
The PR24 business plan is the group’s most ambitious business plan ever. The proposed investment over the
five years 2025 to 2030 amounts to £2.1 billion with goals to improve customer service, reduce customer
supply interruptions and strengthen network resilience. A significant investment in environmental schemes
is also proposed.
As a result of the higher operating and capital expenditure proposed in the business plan, the group and
company has forecasted a net cash outflow position before financing inflows over the going concern period
of 12 months to 14 July 2026.
The group and company forecast base case does not indicate an additional requirement for financing in
the going concern period although shortly after the going concern period it will be necessary to renew the
existing revolving credit facility, or find alternative financing, in order to continue as a going concern. The
severe but plausible downside case without mitigating actions would indicate a need for financing towards
the end of the going concern period. The revolving credit facility matures in September 2026 and discussions
with lenders are underway and progressing well, although at the date of approval of signing these financial
statements the renewal has not been legally committed.
The directors are of the opinion that the revolving credit facility will be renewed, but as this has not been
legally committed at the date of signing these financial statements and the commitment is not within the
control of the directors, the risk that the revolving credit facility will not be renewed constitutes a material
uncertainty that may cast significant doubt on the ability of the group and company to continue as a
going concern.
Not withstanding the material uncertainty described above, and on the basis of their assessment of the
group and company’s overall financial position, and the latest cash flow forecast shared with the board, the
directors have a reasonable expectation that the group and therefore the company has adequate resources
to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future, being a period of at least 12 months from
the date of approval of these financial statements. For this reason the directors continue to adopt the
going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial statements. Further details can be found in the
strategic report on pages 45 and 66. The financial statements do not include the adjustments that would
result if the group and company were unable to continue as a going concern.

3.2 Basis of consolidation
These financial statements incorporate the financial information of South East Water Limited and its
subsidiary, South East Water (Finance) Limited (together the “group”).
Transactions and balances between the company and its subsidiary have been eliminated fully on
consolidation. Subsidiaries are consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the group and
cease to be consolidated from the date on which control is transferred out of the group.



Graphics
232 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

3. Material accounting policies continued
3.3 Revenue
Revenue represents the fair value of the consideration receivable in the ordinary course of business for
the goods and services provided. All revenue arises within the United Kingdom and is recorded net of VAT.
The company only recognises revenue in respect of “named” customers, that is the company will not bill an
address without first knowing the name of the person living at the address. Specific recognition criteria
must also be met before revenue is recognised as detailed below.
Bad debt on bills raised in the year considered uncollectable at the time of billing based on historical
experience is excluded from revenue. This ensures that the revenue recorded is the amount which the
company expects to receive from its customers for the provision of its services in line with the requirements
of IFRS 15.
Metered and unmetered income
The performance obligation of the company for metered and unmetered income is the supply of potable
water to each named customer in the period under review.
Metered water income is recognised when water has been delivered to the customer and the performance
obligation has been satisfied for the period. This income includes an estimation of the volume of mains
water supplied but unbilled at the year end which is recorded within contract assets (accrued income). This
is estimated using a defined methodology as detailed under key sources of estimation uncertainty above.
Unmetered water income was invoiced in full for the financial year 2024/25 on 1 April 2024 and is recognised
over the year as water is supplied to the named customer and the performance obligation is satisfied.
Cash received in advance from customers is not treated as current year revenue, being recognised as
payments received in advance within contract liabilities.
Infrastructure charges
Infrastructure charges represent the fees charged to property developers and others for connecting new
properties and water outlets to the group’s network. The performance obligation within these contracts
is the completed connection of the relevant properties and outlets to the mains supply. These fees are
recognised in the income statement upon completion of the performance obligation.
Contributions
Contributions are received in respect of both infrastructure and non-infrastructure assets and are usually
received in advance of the work being undertaken by the company. The receipts are recognised as deferred
income on the balance sheet upon receipt. The performance obligation for this income stream is the
completion of the work to which contributions relate. The income is recognised in the income statement
upon completion of the specific performance obligations.
Rechargeable works
Rechargeable works includes the administration work required to be performed for developers in managing
new connections and other mains related projects. Also included in rechargeable works are the sales of
plumbing and related services to third parties.
The performance obligations for rechargeable works are the installation of meters, the connection of new
property developments to the mains supply and the completion of specific contracted work. The income for
rechargeable works is recognised when the performance obligations are completed.



Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 233
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

3. Material accounting policies continued

3.3 Revenue continued
Other income
Other income includes charges for engineering, scientific, laboratory, billing and cash collection services.
The performance obligations for the supply of these services are detailed in the specific contracts with
customers and the income is recognised in the income statement when the work to which it relates
is complete.
Finance income
Finance income is recognised using the effective interest rate method.

Contract assets
Contract assets are presented in the statement of financial position when the group’s right to consideration
is met in advance of billing. An example would be contract assets relating to revenue based on an estimate
of the amount of water charges unbilled at year end. The group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to
measuring expected credit losses on contract assets which uses a lifetime expected loss allowance.
Contract liabilities
Contract liabilities are presented in the statement of financial position where a customer has paid an amount
of consideration prior to the group performing the transfer of the related good or service to the customer.
An example would be for an unmeasured customer where the amount billed is dependent upon the rateable
value of the property. The amount is billed at the start of the financial year and is apportioned to revenue
over the period. In addition, included in contract liabilities is receipts in advance in relation to contributions
received for infrastructure and non-infrastructure assets.

3.4 Outcome Delivery Incentives
Water companies operate on a five-year business plan, known as the Asset Management Plan (AMP). The
current period, AMP 7, runs from 1 April 2020 to 31 March 2025. The price review process is undertaken by
Ofwat in advance of each five-year period, and they determine the revenue that can be earned through
customer bills in exchange for providing a specified level of service.
A key element of the pricing framework is Outcome Delivery Incentives (ODIs), which link performance to
financial rewards or penalties. These incentives are designed to either increase or reduce the company’s
revenues, depending on service levels. ODIs can result in either revenue adjustments or Regulatory Capital
Value (RCV) adjustments, influencing future tariff levels.
The ability to benefit from ODI rewards or suffer from ODI penalties is tied to the provision of future
services as well as performance in future periods, and ODI adjustments are therefore not recognised as
assets or liabilities (entitlement or obligation) at the balance sheet date. Most of South East Water’s AMP 7
performance commitments involve financial ODIs, and adjustments may be made either in-period or at the
end of the AMP period.
For in-period adjustments, any financial outcomes from exceeding or underperforming targets are assessed
annually and reflected in future revenue allowances with a two-year lag. For end-of-AMP adjustments, the
financial impact of the ODIs will be reviewed at the next price review, and any adjustments will be applied to
the revenue allowances for the next AMP period.


Graphics
234 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025




3. Material accounting policies continued

3.5 Taxation
Current tax, being UK Corporation Tax, is provided at amounts expected to be paid (or recovered) using tax
rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. Tax relating to
items recognised directly in equity is also recognised directly in equity and not in the income statement.
Deferred tax is calculated using the balance sheet method, addressing temporary differences between asset
and liability values for tax accounting purposes. Deferred tax liabilities and assets are generally recognised
for all taxable temporary differences. However, a deferred tax asset is only recognised if it is probable there
will be enough taxable profits in the future to use it. Deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities are
measured at the tax rates expected to apply when they reverse, and they are not discounted. Deferred tax
assets and deferred tax liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off tax assets
against tax liabilities and when they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the
Group intends to settle its current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis.


3.6 Dividends
Dividends are recorded in the financial statements in the year in which they are approved by the board.

3.7 Investments in subsidiaries
Investments are recorded at historical cost. Where the directors are of the opinion that there has been
a permanent diminution in the value of investments, the carrying amount of such investments is written
down to the recoverable amount.


3.8 Intangible assets
(i) Intangible assets
Externally acquired and internally generated intangible assets, once in use, are recognised at cost.
They
have finite useful lives and are amortised over three to seven years on a straight-line basis. Useful lives of
intangible assets are re-assessed annually and, where necessary, changes are accounted for prospectively.

Employee and other costs directly attributable to intangible asset projects are capitalised in the financial
statements as part of the cost of the intangible asset to which they relate. Training costs, administration
and other general overhead costs including interest are not capitalised.
Intangible assets under development are amortised once brought in to use.
(ii) Derecognition of intangible assets
An intangible asset is derecognised upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to
arise from the continued use of the asset. Any gain or loss arising on derecognition of the asset, calculated
as the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the item, is included in the
income statement in the year in which the item is derecognised.




Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 235
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025




3. Material accounting policies continued

3.8 Intangible assets continued
(iii) Software-as-a-Service “SaaS” arrangements
SaaS arrangements are service contracts that allow the group the right to access the cloud service provider’s
software over the contract period. Costs incurred to configure or customise the application, and the ongoing
fees to obtain access to the cloud provider’s application software, are recognised as operating expenses
when the services are received.
Where costs are incurred relating to the development of software code that enhances or modifies existing
on-premise systems, the costs are recognised as intangible software assets, subject to meeting the
recognition criteria for an intangible asset.

These are amortised over the useful life of the software on a
straight line basis. The useful lives of these assets are reviewed at least at the end of each financial year, and
any change accounted for prospectively as a change in accounting estimate.




3.9 Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and provision for impairment.
Certain assets, which were held at the time of the group’s transition to IFRS, are stated at deemed cost being
the fair value at the transition date less accumulated depreciation and provision for impairment.
Assets in the course of construction are depreciated from the time they are brought into use.
Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the asset as follows:
Land, wells, structures and buildings
Freehold land is not depreciated.
Wells (including boreholes): 60 years.
Operational structures are assets used for water treatment purposes and include service reservoirs,
water towers and similar assets. They are depreciated over 50 to 80 years.
Freehold buildings: 80 years. Other buildings are depreciated over the length of the lease.
Plant, equipment and vehicles
Fixed plant and machinery: 10 to 35 years.
Meters, vehicles, mobile plant, furniture and office and IT equipment: 3 to 10 years.
Mains and surface reservoirs
Mains comprises a network of pipes and supplementary components which are depreciated over a period
of between 20 years and 100 years.
Surface reservoirs: 250 years.

Derecognition
An item of property, plant and equipment is derecognised upon disposal or when no future economic
benefits are expected to arise from the continued use of the asset. Any gain or loss arising on derecognition
of the asset (calculated as the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the
item) is included in the income statement in the year the item is derecognised.
Residual values and useful lives
Residual values and useful lives of all assets are re-assessed annually and, where necessary, changes are
accounted for prospectively.



Graphics
236 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025





3. Material accounting policies continued



3.9 Property, plant and equipment continued
Capitalisation of employee and other directly attributable costs
Employee and other costs, including borrowing costs, directly attributable to capital projects are capitalised
in the financial statements as part of the cost of the property, plant and equipment to which they relate.
Training costs, administration and other general overhead costs are not capitalised.
Leased assets
Property, plant and equipment held under leases are capitalised as a right-of-use asset at the present value
of the minimum lease payments. These assets are depreciated over the shorter of the estimated useful life
of the asset and the lease term.

Impairment of property, plant and equipment, investments and intangible assets
At each reporting date an assessment is carried out to determine whether there is any indication that
property, plant and equipment, investments and software intangible assets may be impaired. If there is
an indication of impairment, the recoverable amount of the asset or respective cash-generating unit is
compared to the carrying amount. Where the recoverable amount is less than the carrying amount, the
asset value is reduced to the recoverable amount with an impairment loss recognised as an operating cost
in the income statement in the year in which the respective assessment takes place.



3.10 Borrowing costs
Borrowing costs are incurred on the group’s general borrowings. Where appropriate, borrowing costs are
attributed to qualifying assets in line with IAS 23 Borrowing Costs. Otherwise borrowing costs are expensed
as incurred. See note 8 for further details.

3.11 Inventories
Inventory is valued at the lower of average cost or net realisable value. The stocks of treated water held by
the group are valued at £nil. Consumable chemical purchases are recognised as an expense in the income
statement at the point they are received on site for use, either from central stores or from suppliers direct.
Work-in-progress for chargeable services is valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value.

3.12 Provisions
A provision is recognised when the group has a legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event,
it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation and a reliable
estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation. Provisions are measured at management’s best
estimate of the expenditure required to settle the present obligation at the balance sheet date. Where the
effect is material, expected future cash flows are discounted using a current pre-tax rate that reflects the
risks specific to the liability.

3.13 Short-term trade and other receivables
Short-term trade and other receivables are initially measured at their transaction price in line with the
provisions of IFRS 9. The carrying value for trade receivables includes an allowance for the lifetime expected
credit loss (doubtful debts) of the outstanding debts. The group applies the simplified approach permitted
by IFRS 9 for estimating expected credit losses on trade and other receivables. An estimate for the expected
credit loss for trade receivables that are assessed not to be impaired individually is calculated by the group’s
management in accordance with the defined methodology detailed under key sources of estimation
uncertainty above.



Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 237
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025





3. Material accounting policies continued
3.14 Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents in the statement of financial position comprise cash at bank and in hand and
short-term deposits with an original maturity of three months or less.
Included within cash and cash equivalents are amounts that are held in designated bank accounts
as short-term deposits in order to meet the interest falling due in respect of listed debt and other
long-term borrowings.

3.15 Cash flow statement
For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents include highly liquid investments
that are readily convertible to cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of change in value. Such
investments are normally those with less than three months maturity from the date of acquisition and
include cash and bank balances and investments in liquid funds.
Interest paid in the cash flow statement includes amounts charged to the income statement only and
excludes amounts charged to the cost of property, plant and equipment.

3.16 Trade payables
Trade payables are measured at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost.





3.17 Financial instruments
The group’s financial instruments comprise fixed and variable rate borrowings, index linked loans, fixed rate
debentures, lease liabilities, cash, short-term and medium-term bank deposits, trade receivables and trade
and other payables.
Recognition
Financial instruments are recognised on the statement of financial position when the group becomes party
to the contractual provisions of the instrument. The group determines the classification of its financial
liabilities at initial recognition.
Impairment of financial assets other than trade receivables
A provision for twelve month expected credit loss on new financial assets is recognised in the income statement
to establish a loss allowance on initial recognition in line with the impairment requirements of IFRS 9.
At each reporting date an assessment is carried out to determine whether there is any indication that the
credit risk on financial assets has increased significantly. If this is considered to be the case, full life-time
expected credit loss is recognised in the income statement.
Where there is objective evidence that an impairment loss has arisen, the loss is recognised in the income
statement in the year in which the respective assessment takes place. Impaired debts are derecognised
when they are assessed as irrecoverable.







Derecognition
Financial liabilities are removed from the statement of financial position when the related obligation is
discharged, cancelled or it expires.

Financial assets are removed from the statement of financial position when the rights to the cash flows
from the asset expire, or when the risks and rewards of ownership of the asset are transferred or when
control of the asset is transferred.





Graphics
238 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025



3. Material accounting policies continued




3.17 Financial instruments continued

Embedded derivatives
Financial instruments and other host contracts that are not carried at fair value through the income
statement are reviewed to determine if they contain embedded derivatives. Embedded derivatives are
accounted for separately as derivative financial instruments when the economic characteristics and risks
are not closely related to the respective host financial instrument or contract.





Interest bearing loans and borrowings
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at cost, being the fair value of the consideration received
net of issue costs associated with the borrowing.
Interest-bearing loans and borrowings are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective
interest method. Amortised cost is calculated by taking into account any issue costs, and any discount or
premium on settlement.

Liabilities arising on leases
The initial values of lease liabilities equate to the present value of future lease payments under the relevant
lease contracts. The group has applied the practical expedient of using a single discount rate to leases with
reasonably similar characteristics. The discount rates used in calculating the liabilities reflect the interest
rates at which the group would currently be able to borrow in order to finance similar assets to those under
the lease affected by the transition (the incremental borrowing rate).


3.18 Revaluation reserve
The revaluation reserve was created on the adoption of IFRS when the company took the option to treat
the revalued amounts as deemed cost. This reserve is released over the life of the underlying assets to
which it relates in line with the depreciation of the revalued assets and transferred to retained earnings.
The revaluation uplift remaining on any assets that are disposed of is also transferred to retained earnings
at the time of the disposal.
3.19 Research and Development
Research costs are charged to the income statement in the year in which they are incurred.
Development costs are capitalised based on management’s judgement that the technological and economic
feasibility of a project is confirmed, usually when a project has reached a defined milestone according to an
established project management model. In determining the amounts to be capitalised management makes
assumptions regarding the expected future cash generation of the assets, discount rates to be applied and
the expected period of benefits.

3.20 Defined contribution schemes
Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes are charged to the consolidated statement of
comprehensive income in the year to which they relate.
3.21 Defined benefit schemes
The pension scheme asset or liability in the statement of financial position represents the net present value
of the defined benefit obligation and the fair value of scheme assets at the balance sheet date. The present
value of the defined benefit obligation is analysed between the funded and unfunded pension plans.
The present value of the defined benefit obligation and the cost of providing benefits under defined benefit
plans is determined on a triennial basis, and updated to each year end by an independent qualified actuary
using the Projected Unit Credit actuarial valuation method, discounted at an interest rate equivalent at
measurement date to the rate of return on a high quality corporate bond of equivalent term and currency
to the scheme liabilities.



Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 239
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

3. Material accounting policies continued
3.21 Defined benefit schemes continued
The pension cost in the income statement includes current and past service cost and the effect of any
settlements and curtailments. A net finance charge or credit is recognised within finance costs in the
income statement and comprises the net of the expected return on pension scheme assets and the interest
on pension scheme liabilities.
All actuarial gains and losses and the related deferred taxation are recognised in the statement of
comprehensive income.





4. Revenue and other income
The following is an analysis of the group and company’s revenue and other income for the year from
continuing operations:
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Revenue
Household - measured 204,188 196,554
Household - unmeasured 21,644 21,171
Non-household - measured
52,408 51,864
Non-household - unmeasured 1,124 1,102
Other revenue 9,967 11,084
Charge for bad and doubtful debts (3,814) (1,181)*
Total revenue 285,517 280,594*
Other income
Rental income 1,168 1,172
Laboratory income 4,354 3,769
Commission income 7,978 7,666
Other income 996 820
Total other income 14,496 13,427


All revenue is from customers within the United Kingdom.
Other revenue comprises a number of income streams, including those associated with activities typically
performed for property developers, which impact the group’s infrastructure network assets, including
diversions works to relocate water assets, and activities that facilitate the creation of an authorised
connection through which properties can obtain water services. Other revenue includes new connections
income of £4.0 million (2024: £3.9 million), infrastructure income of £0.2 million (2024: £1.0 million) and
capital contributions of £3.5 million (2024: £3.5 million).
* Under IFRS 15, revenue should only be recognised to the extent that it is probable that economic benefits will flow to
the entity. In previous years, we have estimated the amount of revenue potentially requiring adjustment as immaterial
(2024: £1.2 million). We have reviewed the basis on which the adjustment is calculated in the current year, aligning
the calculation with the bad debt provision assessment period. This has resulted in an adjustment of £3.8 million for
the current year. We have reflected this adjustment as a deduction against revenue in the current year, and in order
to ensure comparability between years we have restated the presentation of the bad debt charge for the prior year.
This has no impact on operating profit and is purely presentational.



Graphics
240 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

4. Revenue and other income continued
Contract assets and liabilities
The group has recognised the following revenue-related contract assets and liabilities:
2025
£000
2024
£000
Contract assets
Current
Accrued revenue for water supplied to metered customers 49,254 47,593
Accrued income for other activities 1,220 1,284
Total contract assets 50,474 48,877
Contract liabilities
Non-current
Deferred revenue from infrastructure charges 3,913 3,646
Deposits payable to developers 3,483 3,864
Total non-current contract liabilities 7,396 7,510
Current
Advance payments received 47,674 46,227
Deferred revenue from infrastructure charges 4,215 5,247
Deferred revenue from other activities 400 404
Total current contract liabilities 52,289 51,878
Total contract liabilities 59,685 59,388
Revenue recognised in relation to contract liabilities
The table below shows how much revenue was recognised in the reporting period relating to brought
forward contract liabilities.
Year ended 31 March
2025
£000
2024
£000
Revenue recognised that was included in the contract liability balance at
the start of the period
Advance payments received 46,227 48,087
Deferred revenue from infrastructure charges 5,247 4,972
Deferred revenue from other activities 404 340
Total 51,878 53,399



Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 241
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
5. Segmental Analysis
Financial and other performance information is reported internally every month to the South East Water
Limited Executive Committee. The Executive Committee is responsible for the day to day running of the
business, and accordingly the Executive Committee is considered to be the chief operating decision maker
of the group for the purposes of segmental reporting under IFRS 8: Operating Segments. The Executive
Committee considers that the group’s activities largely fall into one main business segment, namely
Regulated Water, with all other activities included in “Other” below. Regulated Water is the supply of potable
water on a wholesale and retail basis, both of which are governed by the Water Act 2014.
A segmental analysis of the management results are presented below together with a reconciliation to the
statutory revenue and loss before tax.
Regulated
water
£000
Other
activities
£000
Total
£000
Year ended 31 March 2025
Water revenue 279,365
-
279,365
Other income 5,782 18,594 24,376
Net operating costs (179,801) (14,538) (194,339)
EBITDA 105,346 4,056 109,402
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment (65,477) - (65,477)
Company operating profit 39,869 4,056 43,925
Year ended 31 March 2024
Water revenue 270,692 - 270,692
Other income 6,994 17,725 24,719
Net operating costs (163,948) (14,033) (177,981)
EBITDA 113,738 3,692 117,430
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment (63,346) - (63,346)
Company operating profit 50,392 3,692 54,084
Water revenue on a management basis above of £279.4 million (2024: £270.7 million) compares with total
revenue on a statutory basis of £285.5 million (2024: £280.6 million). The difference is Other revenue of
£10.0 million (2024: £11.1 million) (see note 4) and an adjustment of £3.8 million (2024: £1.2 million) attributed
to bad debt on bills raised in the year, in line with the requirements of IFRS 15.


Graphics
242 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
5. Segmental Analysis continued
The business segments’ operating profit is reconciled to the group’s statutory operating profit and loss
before tax as follows:
2025
£000
2024
£000
Management operating profit 43,925 54,084
Results of South East Water (Finance) Limited (1) (6) (6)
Pension costs adjustment (2) 5,576 6,064
Statutory depreciation and write-off adjustments (3) - -
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment 63 69
Capitalisation of new connections (4) 4,498 4,660
Additional bad debt provision (5) (1,095) -
Other statutory adjustments 1,526 (1,094)
Statutory profit from operations 54,487 63,777
Finance income 2,490 1,711
Finance expense (76,758) (102,151)
Statutory loss before taxation (19,781) (36,663)
1) The profit of South East Water (Finance) Limited is consolidated into these financial statements but not
included in the finance reports presented to the Executive Committee.
2) The internal finance reports include pension costs on the basis of contributions paid whereas the financial
statements include pension costs on the basis of IAS 19 Employee Benefits.
3) Adjustments are made to depreciation and impairment or write-off of assets between internal finance
reports and the financial statements.
4) The internal finance reports record the costs associated with new connections in operating costs but these
costs are capitalised as Property, Plant and Equipment in the financial statements.
5) The bad debt provision for 2025 was reviewed and increased as part of the process to finalise the
financial statements.
The group analyses results by segment to profit from operations only, so no segmental statement of financial
position or statement of cash flows are presented.


Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 243
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025



6. Net Operating Costs
Group Note
2025
£000
2024
£000
Employee benefits expense 7 43,494 38,643
Asset expense:
Depreciation - owned assets 62,418 59,941
Depreciation - right-of-use assets 535 1,113
Amortisation of intangible assets 13 2,524 2,315
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment (63) (69)
65,414 63,300
Other operating expenses:
Operating lease rentals:
Vehicles and office equipment 328 324
Land and buildings 16 (7)
Energy costs 29,982 27,674
Rates 16,254 16,640
Contractors 45,653 41,484
Bulk water supplies and abstraction licences 11,489 10,294
Chemicals 6,939 6,758
Insurance and related costs 4,281 4,161
Compensation and donations 1,707 2,152
IT costs 7,263 4,699
Other 14,776 15,311
Other operating expenses charged to capital projects (6,125) (5,722)
132,563 123,768
Total operating costs 241,471 225,711
The other operating costs includes admin fees of £6,000 (2024: £6,000) for South East Water (Finance) Limited.

Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Fees payable to the group’s auditors in respect of:
Audit of the group and company financial statements 529 564
Audit of subsidiary 1 1
Total audit 530 565
Regulatory accounts 78 76
Other assurance services 18 17
Total non-audit services 96 93
Total fees payable to the group’s auditors 626 658




Graphics
244 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025


7. Employees and directors
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Employee benefit expenses (including directors) comprise:
Wages and salaries 45,704 41,467
Social security costs 4,628 4,181
Defined contribution pension cost 3,419 3,114
Defined benefit scheme charge 1,825 957
Labour costs capitalised (12,082) (11,076)
43,494 38,643

Key management personnel compensation
Emoluments of the directors, who are the group’s key management, were:
2025
£000
2024
£000
Aggregate emoluments including bonuses (short-term employee benefits) 1,056 1,016
Pension scheme costs – defined contribution plans 23 20
1,079 1,036
Emoluments of the highest paid director including bonuses were: £448,000 (2024: £430,000).
One director (2024: one) has a deferred pension from the defined benefit pension schemes which closed to
future accrual in 2015. There are currently two directors (2024: two) under a defined contribution scheme.
Further disclosures in respect of directors’ emoluments are set out in the remuneration report on page 170.
The monthly average number of persons, including the directors, employed by the group during the year
was as follows:
2025
No.
2024
No.
Operations 505 443
Management and Administration 622 628
1,127 1,071



Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 245
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025







8. Finance income and expense
Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Finance income
Interest receivable on bank balances and short-term deposits 1,361 530
Net interest income on defined benefit asset 1,129 1,181
Total finance income 2,490 1,711
Finance expense
Debenture interest 42 42
Effective interest on listed debt 15,185 15,003
Interest on lease liabilities 136 121
Financing guarantee fees 1,320 1,188
Bank interest and other finance charges 20,148 18,151
Amortisation of loan issue costs 827 652
Indexation on index linked bonds 7,051 12,349
Interest payable on index linked loans 17,856 16,044
Indexation on index linked loans 18,765 39,942
Interest capitalised (4,572) (1,341)
Total finance expense 76,758 102,151


Interest is capitalised at the weighted average rate of interest on the group senior long-term debt of 5.0 per
cent (2024: 5.0 per cent).

Indexation on index linked bonds and loans are lower due to the decreased inflation and lower RPI compared
to prior year.






Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Finance income
Interest receivable on bank balances and short-term deposits 1,271 511
Net interest income on defined benefit asset 1,129 1,181
Total finance income 2,400 1,692
Finance expense
Debenture interest 42 42
Interest payable to subsidiary 19,058 18,728
Indexation payable to subsidiary 12,605 22,766
Interest on lease liabilities 136 121
Financing guarantee fees 1,320 1,188
Bank interest and other finance charges 20,148 18,150
Amortisation of loan issue costs 827 652
Interest payable on index linked loans 14,006 12,342
Indexation on index linked loans 13,211 29,525
Interest capitalised (4,572) (1,341)
Total finance expense 76,781 102,173
Interest is capitalised at the weighted average rate of interest on the group senior long-term debt of 5.0 per
cent (2024: 5.0 per cent).
Indexation on index linked bonds and loans are lower due to the decreased inflation and lower RPI compared
to prior year.

Graphics
246 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

9. Taxation
9.1 Income tax recognised in profit or loss
Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Current tax
Current tax on profits for the year 27 9
Adjustments in respect of prior years (65) (93)
Total current tax credit (38) (84)
Deferred tax credit
Origination and reversal of timing differences (4,715) (9,053)
Adjustments in respect of prior years (1,487) 517
Total deferred tax credit (6,202) (8,536)
Total tax credit (6,240) (8,620)
Total tax credit above consists of a tax credit of £6,267,000 (2024: £8,629,000) for South East Water Limited
and a charge of £27,000 (2024: £9,000) for South East Water (Finance) Limited.
The reasons for the difference between the actual tax credit for the year and the standard rate of corporation
tax in the United Kingdom applied to losses before income tax for the year are as follows:
Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Loss for the year (13,541) (28,043)
Income tax credit (6,240) (8,620)
Loss before income taxes (19,781) (36,663)
Tax using the company’s domestic tax rate of 25% (2024: 25%) (4,945) (9,166)
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes, other than goodwill,
amortisation and impairment
273
138
Adjustments to current tax charge in respect of prior periods (65) (92)
Adjustments to deferred tax charge in respect of prior periods (1,487) 517
Tax effect of income not taxable in determining taxable profit (16) (17)
Total tax credit (6,240) (8,620)



Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 247
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

9. Taxation continued
9.1 Income tax recognised in profit or loss continued
The deferred tax on temporary differences as at 31 March 2025 have been calculated using 25 per cent
(2024: 25 per cent), the enacted corporation tax rate for the periods during which the temporary differences
are expected to unwind.
The adjustments to current and deferred tax charge in respect of previous years represent the changes
between the prior year financial statements and the prior year tax computations submitted. The expenses
not deductible for tax purposes are primarily driven by the movement on general provisions, non- deductible
entertainment expenditure, and depreciation on non-qualifying capital expenditure.
Changes in tax rates and factors affecting the future tax charges
Capital investment is expected to remain at similar or higher levels and the group expects to be able to claim
capital allowances in excess of depreciation in future years. There are losses of £61.8 million available within
the company to mitigate future profits. The enacted enhanced 100 per cent first year full expensing capital
allowance for qualifying plant and machinery and 50 per cent allowance for special rate assets expenditure
have been made permanent.
9.2 Income tax recognised in other comprehensive income
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Deferred tax
Deferred tax on defined benefit pension schemes 5,294 2,004
The net credit recognised in other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 March 2025 is £5.3 million
(2024: £2.0 million).
9.3 Deferred tax balances
The following is the analysis of deferred tax liabilities presented in the consolidated statement of
financial position:
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Deferred tax liabilities (178,169) (189,665)
Group and Company
Opening
balance
£000
Recognised in
profit or loss
£000
Recognised
directly in
equity
£000
Closing
balance
£000
2025 Deferred tax (liabilities)/assets
in relation to:
Property, plant and equipment (199,197) 7,090 - (192,107)
Losses carried forward 14,662 781 - 15,443
Defined benefit obligations (5,130) (1,669) 5,294 (1,505)
(189,665) 6,202 5,294 (178,169)



Graphics
248 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

9. Taxation continued
9.3 Deferred tax balances continued
Group and Company
Opening
balance
£000
Recognised in
profit or loss
£000
Recognised
directly in
equity
£000
Closing
balance
£000
2024 Deferred tax (liabilities)/assets in relation to:
Property, plant and equipment (206,514) 7,317 - (199,197)
Losses carried forward 11,649 3,013 - 14,662
Defined benefit obligations (5,340) (1,794) 2,004 (5,130)
(200,205) 8,536 2,004 (189,665)
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are only offset where there is a legally enforceable right of offset and
there is an intention to settle the balances net. All of the deferred tax assets were available for offset
against deferred tax liabilities and hence the net deferred tax liability at 31 March 2025 was £178.2 million
(2024: £189.7 million).
Temporary timing differences
All temporary timing differences are recognised in the deferred tax calculation.
The total amount of qualifying tangible fixed assets for R&D claims recognised in the deferred tax liability
as at 31 March 2025 is £191,000 (2024: £144,000).


10. Dividends
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
No dividends were paid during the year (2024: Interim dividend of 4.56 pence).
- 2,250
There were no dividends proposed for approval as at 31 March 2025.


Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 249
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
11. Earnings per share
Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Loss for the year from continuing operations (13,541) (28,043)
2025
Number
2024
Number
Basic and diluted weighted average number of shares 74,312,454 49,312,354
2025
Pence
2024
Pence
Basic and diluted loss per share from continuing operations (17.53) (56.87)

Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Loss for the year from continuing operations (13,621) (28,069)
2025
Number
2024
Number
Basic and diluted weighted average number of shares 74,312,354 49,312,354
2025
Pence
2024
Pence
Basic and diluted loss per share from continuing operations (18.33) (56.92)

Graphics
250 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements

12. Property, plant and equipment

Group and Company
Land, wells,
structures
and buildings
£000
Plant,
equipment
and vehicles
£000
Mains and
surface
reservoirs
£000
Assets
under
construction
£000
Total
£000
Cost or valuation
At 1 April 2023 273,405 525,682 1,247,856 107,292 2,154,235
Additions - 2,685 - 116,479 119,164
Disposals (200) (10,181) (228) - (10,609)
Transfers between classes 22,589 14,956 60,674 (98,219) -
At 31 March 2024
295,794 533,142 1,308,302 125,552 2,262,790
Additions 193 2,568 - 153,267 156,028
Disposals (205) (16,033) (72) - (16,310)
Transfers between classes 19,008 46,945 42,319 (108,272) -
At 31 March 2025 314,790 566,622 1,350,549 170,547 2,402,508
Group and Company
Land, wells,
structures
and buildings
£000
Plant,
equipment
and vehicles
£000
Mains and
surface
reservoirs
£000
Assets
under
construction
£000
Total
£000
Accumulated depreciation
and impairment
At 1 April 2023 43,687 219,346 167,681 - 430,714
Charge for the year 5,762 33,560 21,732 - 61,054
Disposals (140) (10,108) (174) - (10,422)
At 31 March 2024 49,309 242,798 189,239 - 481,346
Charge for the year 6,826 34,041 22,086 - 62,953
Disposals (135) (15,914) (44) - (16,093)
At 31 March 2025 56,000 260,925 211,281 - 528,206
Net book value
At 1 April 2023 229,718 306,336 1,080,175 107,292 1,723,521
At 31 March 2024 246,485 290,344 1,119,063 125,552 1,781,444
At 31 March 2025 258,790 305,697 1,139,268 170,547 1,874,302



Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 251
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

12. Property, plant and equipment continued
12.1 Assets held under leases
The net book value of owned and leased assets included as “Property, plant and equipment” in the group
statement of financial position is as follows:
Group and Company
31 March
2025
£000
31 March
2024
£000
Property, plant and equipment owned 1,870,841 1,777,640
Right-of-use assets, excluding investment property 3,461 3,804
1,874,302 1,781,444
Information about right-of-use assets is summarised below:
31 March
2025
£000
31 March
2024
£000
Net book value
Property 3,426 3,701
Plant and machinery 35 103
3,461 3,804
There are no substantial additions to the leases during the financial year.

12.2 Assets under construction relate to the following categories
31 March
2025
£000
31 March
2024
£000
Land, wells, structures and buildings 55,168 32,411
Mains and surface reservoirs 79,881 26,889
Plant, equipment and vehicles 35,498 66,252
170,547 125,552


Graphics
252 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025


13. Intangible assets

Group and Company
Computer
software
£000
Assets in
course of
construction
£000
Total
£000
Cost
At 1 April 2023 32,167 840 33,007
Additions - 4,613 4,613
Transfers between classes 1,895 (1,895) -
Disposals (10,350) - (10,350)
At 31 March 2024 23,712 3,558 27,270
Additions - 1,250 1,250
Transfers between classes 3,456 (3,456) -
Disposals (1,127) - (1,127)
At 31 March 2025 26,041 1,352 27,393
Accumulated amortisation and impairment
At 1 April 2023 25,239 - 25,239
Charge for the year 2,315 - 2,315
Disposals (10,350) - (10,350)
At 31 March 2024 17,204 - 17,204
Charge for the year 2,524 - 2,524
Disposals (1,122) - (1,122)
At 31 March 2024 18,606 - 18,606
Net book value
At 1 April 2023 6,928 840 7,768
At 31 March 2024 6,508 3,558 10,066
At 31 March 2025 7,435 1,352 8,787





Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 253
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

14. Subsidiaries
Details of the group’s material subsidiaries at the end of the reporting period are as follows:
Name of subsidiary Principal activity
Place of
incorporation
and operation
Proportion
of ownership
interest and
voting power
held by the
group (%)
2025 2024
South East Water (Finance) Limited Finance company Cayman Islands 100 100
South East Water (Finance) Limited
South East Water (Finance) Limited’s principal purpose is to raise debt on behalf of South East Water Limited
and any proceeds from such issues are lent on to South East Water Limited. South East Water (Finance)
Limited is a company registered in the Cayman Islands but the company does not gain any tax benefit from
this as the company is resident for tax purposes in the UK.
South East Water (Finance) Limited is wholly-owned by South East Water Limited, which owns 100 per cent
of the voting rights and 100 ordinary shares of £1 each at a par value. Its registered address is P.O. Box 309GT,
Ugland House, South Church Street, George Town, Grand Cayman, Cayman Islands.


15. Inventories
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Consumables 1,256 1,313
Work in progress 12 30
1,268 1,343


Graphics
254 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

16. Trade and other receivables
Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Financial asset receivables
Gross trade receivables 82,081 78,793
Less expected credit loss provision (41,616) (37,067)
Net trade receivables 40,465 41,726
Contract assets 49,445* 47,985*
Sundry debtors 3,639 2,018
Amounts due from parent and fellow subsidiary undertakings due within one year 443 50
93,992 91,779
Non-financial asset receivables
Prepayments 5,286 5,698
Total trade and other receivables 99,278 97,477
* Shown net of expected credit loss provision of £1.0 million (2024: £0.9 million).


Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Financial asset receivables
Gross trade receivables 82,081 78,793
Less expected credit loss provision (41,616) (37,067)
Net trade receivables 40,465 41,726
Contract assets 49,445* 47,985*
Sundry debtors 3,617 2,014
Amounts due from parent and fellow subsidiary undertakings due within one year 443 50
93,970 91,775
Non-financial asset receivables
Prepayments 5,247 5,317
Total trade and other receivables 99,217 97,092
* Shown net of expected credit loss provision of £1.0 million (2024: £0.9 million).

Group and Company
The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime
expected loss allowance for all trade receivables and contract assets. This is calculated based on historical
experience of levels of recovery and expectation of what might happen in the future.



Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 255
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

16. Trade and other receivables continued
Movements in expected credit losses provision were as follows:
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
At 1 April 37,959 34,920
Charge for the year – charged against revenue 3,814 1,181
Charge for the year – included within operating expenses 4,055 4,533
Amounts written off (utilised) (3,183) (2,675)
Total at 31 March 42,645 37,959
Provision against trade receivables 41,616 37,067
Provision against contract assets 1,029 892
42,645 37,959
As at 31 March, the ageing of gross trade receivables is as follows:
2025
£000
2024
£000
Up to 365 days 33,870 33,075
1-2 years 13,164 11,775
2-3 years 8,993 8,423
3-4 years 6,610 6,603
Over 4 years 19,444 18,917
82,081 78,793
As at 31 March, the ageing of the expected credit loss provision is as follows:
2025
£000
2024
£000
Up to 365 days 6,629 5,208
1-2 years 7,143 5,728
2-3 years 6,018 5,054
3-4 years 4,852 4,463
Over 4 years 18,003 17,506
42,645 37,959
The loss allowance for trade receivables is set out below:
2025
Per cent (%)
2024
Per cent (%)
Up to 365 days 19.6 15.7
1-2 years 54.3 48.6
2-3 years 66.9 60.0
3-4 years 73.4
67.6
Over 4 years 92.6 92.5



Graphics
256 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
17. Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise the following at 31 March:
Group Company
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
2025
£000
2024
£000
Cash at bank and in hand 36,072 4,986 35,664 2,717
Included in the group and company cash at bank and in hand balance at 31 March 2025 was £32.5 million
(2024: £1.3 million) held in an on demand deposit account.
At 31 March 2025, £0.4 million (2024: £2.3 million) of cash was held for the group in designated bank accounts
and £0.03 million (2024: £Nil) of cash was held for the company in designated bank accounts in order to meet
interest falling due in respect of the listed debt and index linked loans (note 8).


18. Loans and borrowings
Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Non-current
Loans and borrowings (a) 1,321,754 1,246,511
Debentures (b) 981 981
Lease liabilities (c) 3,199 3,488
1,325,934 1,250,980
Current
Drawdown facility (d) 68,984 96,973
Lease liabilities (c) 500 463
69,484 97,436
Total loans and borrowings 1,395,418 1,348,416
The loan documentation for the group’s long and short-term loans and borrowings contain a number of
covenants that the group is required to meet to safeguard the interest of its lenders.
The loans and borrowings are secured over the entire property, assets, rights and undertakings of
South East Water (Holdings) Limited, South East Water Limited and South East Water (Finance) Limited (the
South East Water (Holdings) Limited group) as far as allowed by the Water Industry Act 1991 and South East
Water’s licence. It is not possible to quantify the value of property, assets, rights and undertakings pledged
as security.
a. Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Loans and borrowings
Listed bonds (i) 400,184 392,971
Index linked loans (ii) 578,488 510,271
Variable rate loan (iii) 119,140 119,393
Fixed rate loan notes (iv) 223,942 223,876
1,321,754 1,246,511



Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 257
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

18. Loans and borrowings continued
i. Group
Loan due
2029
£000
Loan due
2041
£000
Total
£000
2025
Listed bonds
Original loan consideration 166,000 130,000 296,000
Indexation on bonds - 105,440 105,440
Less: unamortised issue costs (444) (812) (1,256)
165,556 234,628 400,184
2024
Original loan consideration 166,000 130,000 296,000
Indexation on bonds - 98,388 98,388
Less: unamortised issue costs (554) (863) (1,417)
165,446 227,525 392,971
The group holds non-current bonds listed on the London Stock Exchange with an original value of
£296 million (2024: £296 million), with effective terms, as follows:
► £166 million at a fixed rate of 5.5834 per cent, falling due for repayment on 29 March 2029 (or earlier at
the option of the group)
► £130 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 3 June 2041 (or earlier at
the option of the group)
Issue costs incurred by the group in securing the long-term borrowings were deducted from the amount of
the consideration received. The issue costs have been amortised under the effective interest rate method
over the lives of the bonds to which the costs relate.
Indexation accrues on the bond repayable in 2041 under the terms of the bond.
ii. Group
Loan due
2032
£000
Loan due
2033
£000
Loan due
2037
£000
Loan due
2040
£000
Total
£000
2025
Index linked loans
Original loan amounts 135,000 34,000 100,000 50,000 319,000
Indexation on bonds 164,199 35,892 61,279 543 261,913
Less: unamortised issue costs (626) (132) (949) (718) (2,425)
298,573 69,760 160,330 49,825 578,488
2024
Original loan amounts 135,000 34,000 100,000 - 269,000
Indexation on bonds 153,929 33,493 55,725 - 243,147
Less: unamortised issue costs (707) (145) (1,024) - (1,876)
288,222 67,348 154,701 - 510,271



Graphics
258 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
18. Loans and borrowings continued
The group holds index linked loans with an original value of £319 million (2024: £269 million) and with
effective terms as follows:
► £135 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 30 September 2032
(or earlier at the option of the group)
► £34 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 30 September 2033
(or earlier at the option of the group)
► £100 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 1 December 2037
(or earlier at the option of the group)
► £50 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 19 September 2040
(or earlier at the option of the group)
In August 2024, the group entered into a new loan arrangement for £50 million index linked to CPI with a
nominal interest rate of 3.5 per cent. This loan matures in September 2040. All other loans are linked to RPI.
Indexation on the loans accrues under the terms of the loans. Issue costs incurred by the group in securing
the long-term borrowings were deducted from the amount of the consideration received. The issue costs
have been amortised under the effective interest rate method over the lives of the bonds to which the
costs relate.
iii. Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Variable rate loan
Original loan amount 120,000 120,000
Less: unamortised issue costs (860) (607)
119,140 119,393
In December 2018 the group entered into a loan facility for £120 million which matures in June 2026.
This loan facility was drawn down in full in September 2019 at a variable rate of London Inter-Bank Offered
Rate "LIBOR" plus 1.2 per cent. The group agreed amendments with its lenders to the fall back provisions to
move from GBP LIBOR to Sterling Overnight Index Average “SONIA” on the £120.0 million floating rate loan.
This took effect from 28 December 2021, after UK LIBOR ceased.
In December 2024, the group entered into an agreement with the lenders of the £120 million loan facility
to extend the maturity of the facility from 20 December 2025 to 20 June 2026. As part of this “amend and
extend” agreement, it was further agreed that the applicable margin on the loan would increase from
1.2 per cent over SONIA to 2.2 percent from 1 July 2025 to 31 December 2025, and that a margin of
3.2 per cent would apply to the term extension from 1 January 2026 to 20 June 2026.
iv. Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Fixed rate loan notes
Loan note series 1 75,000 75,000
Loan note series 2 100,000 100,000
Loan note series 3 50,000 50,000
Less: unamortised issue costs (1,058) (1,124)
223,942 223,876

Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 259
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
18. Loans and borrowings continued
On 16 September 2019 the group issued fixed rate loan notes totalling £175 million. The notes were issued
in two tranches being:
► £75 million falling due for repayment on 16 September 2031
► £100 million falling due for repayment on 16 September 2042
On 1 December 2021 the group issued new fixed rate loan notes totalling £50 million.
► £50 million falling due for repayment on 1 December 2035
b. Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Irredeemable Debenture Stock
3 % perpetual stock 25 25
3.5 % perpetual stock 384 384
4 % perpetual stock
175 175
5 % perpetual stock 359 359
5.5 % perpetual stock 1 1
6 % perpetual stock 37 37
981 981
Interest on irredeemable debenture stock is payable six monthly.
c. Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Lease liability
Balance as at 1 April 3,951 4,499
Remeasurement of lease liability 193 -
Less: capital repayment (445) (548)
3,699 3,951
The total cash outflow in the year in respect of the group’s leasing activities was £0.4 million
(2024: £0.5 million).
Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Lease liability
Non-current lease liability 3,199 3,488
Current lease liability 500 463
3,699 3,951
d. Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Current bank loans
Original loan amount 69,000 97,000
Less: unamortised issue costs (16) (27)
68,984 96,973


Graphics
260 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
18. Loans and borrowings continued
The current bank loans are the total of the Group’s draw downs on its revolving credit facility. The facility
has a limit of £125 million (2024: £125 million). Each draw down can be for an interest period of one, three or
six months. Interest is charged at a rate of SONIA plus 0.75 per cent margin and the principal and interest on
each draw down is repayable at the end of the interest period. The facility expires in September 2026.
At 31 March 2025 the total draw downs were £69 million (2024: £97 million).

Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Non-current
Loans and borrowings (a) 1,321,754 1,246,511
Debentures (b) 981 981
Lease liabilities (c) 3,199 3,488
1,325,934 1,250,980
Current
Drawdown facility (d) 68,984 96,973
Lease liabilities (c)
500
463
69,484 97,436
Total loans and borrowings 1,395,418 1,348,416
The carrying value of loan and borrowings classified as financial liabilities measured at amortised cost
approximates fair value.
a. Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Loans and borrowings
Loans from subsidiary (i) 560,514 547,672
Index linked loans (ii) 418,158 355,570
Variable rate loan (iii) 119,140 119,393
Fixed rate loan (iv) 223,942 223,876
1,321,754 1,246,511
The loan documentation for the company’s long and short-term loans and borrowings contain a number of
covenants that the company is required to meet to safeguard the interest of its lenders.
The loans and borrowings are secured over the entire property, assets, rights and undertakings of
South East Water (Holdings) Limited, South East Water Limited and South East Water (Finance) Limited (the
South East Water (Holdings) Limited group) as far as allowed by the Water Industry Act 1991 and South East
Water’s licence. It is not possible to quantify the value of property, assets, rights and undertakings pledged
as security.

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 261
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
18. Loans and borrowings continued
i. Company
Loan due
2029
£000
Loan due
2041
£000
Loan due
2037
£000
Total
£000
2025
Loans from subsidiary
Original loan consideration 166,000 130,000 100,000 396,000
Indexation on bonds - 105,440 61,279 166,719
Less: unamortised issue costs (444) (812) (949) (2,205)
165,556 234,628 160,330 560,514
2024
Original loan consideration 166,000 130,000 100,000 396,000
Indexation on bonds - 98,388 55,725 154,113
Less: unamortised issue costs (554) (863) (1,024) (2,441)
165,446 227,525 154,701 547,672
The company’s subsidiary undertaking, South East Water (Finance) Limited, has debt with an original
consideration of £396 million (2024: £396 million), of which £296 million (2024: £296 million) is listed on
the London Stock Exchange. The funds raised are lent to the company under loan agreements between
the company and its subsidiary. An annual fee of £23,000 (2024: £23,000) was charged by South East Water
(Finance) Limited to South East Water Limited.
The effective terms of the £396 million loans due to South East Water (Finance) Limited are as follows:
►
£166 million at a fixed rate of 5.5834 per cent, falling due for repayment on 29 March 2029
(or earlier at the option of the company)
►
£130 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 3 June 2041
(or earlier at the option of the company)
►
£100 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 1 December 2037
(or earlier at the option of the company)
Issue costs incurred by the company in securing the long-term borrowings were deducted from the amount
of the consideration received. The issue costs have been amortised under the effective interest rate method
over the lives of the bonds to which the costs relate.
Indexation accrues on the loans repayable in 2041 and 2037.

Graphics
262 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
18. Loans and borrowings continued
ii. Company
Loan due
2032
£000
Loan due
2033
£000
Loan due
2040
£000
Total
£000
2025
Index linked loans
Original loan amounts 135,000 34,000 50,000 219,000
Indexation on bonds 164,199 35,892 543 200,634
Less: unamortised issue costs (626) (132) (718) (1,476)
298,573 69,760 49,825 418,158
2024
Original loan consideration 135,000 34,000 - 169,000
Indexation on bonds 153,929 33,493 - 187,422
Less: unamortised issue costs (707) (145) - (852)
288,222 67,348 - 355,570
The company holds index linked loans with an original consideration of £219 million (2024: £169 million) and
effective terms as follows:
►
£135 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 30 September 2032
(or earlier at the option of the company)
►
£34 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 30 September 2033
(or earlier at the option of the company)
►
£50 million at a variable rate linked to inflation, falling due for repayment on 19 September 2040
(or earlier at the option of the group)
In August 2024, the company entered into a new loan arrangement for £50 million index linked to CPI with a
nominal interest rate of 3.5 per cent. This loan matures in September 2040. All other loans are linked to RPI.
Indexation on the loans accrues under the terms of the loans. Issue costs incurred by the company in
securing the long-term borrowings were deducted from the amount of the consideration received.
The issue costs have been amortised under the effective interest rate method over the lives of the bonds
to which the costs relate. Index linked loans are stated after the uplift for accrued indexation and the
deduction of issue costs to be amortised at the balance sheet date.
iii. Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Variable rate loan
Original loan amount 120,000 120,000
Less: unamortised issue costs (860) (607)
119,140 119,393
In December 2018 the company entered into a loan facility for £120 million which matures in June 2026. This
loan facility was drawn down in full in September 2019 at a variable rate of London Inter-Bank Offered Rate
“LIBOR” plus 1.2 per cent. The company agreed amendments with its lenders to the fall back provisions to
move from GBP LIBOR to SONIA on its other floating rate borrowing, being the £120 million floating rate
loan. This took effect from 28 December 2021, after UK LIBOR ceased.

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 263
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
18. Loans and borrowings continued
In December 2024, the company entered into an agreement with the lenders of the £120 million loan facility
to extend the maturity of the facility from 20 December 2025 to 20 June 2026. As part of this “amend and
extend” agreement, it was further agreed that the applicable margin on the loan would increase from 1.2
per cent over SONIA to 2.2 percent from 1 July 2025 to 31 December 2025, and that a margin of 3.2 per cent
would apply to the term extension from 1 January 2026 to 20 June 2026.
iv. Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Fixed rate loan notes
Loan note series 1 75,000 75,000
Loan note series 2 100,000 100,000
Loan note series 3 50,000 50,000
Less: unamortised issue costs (1,058) (1,124)
223,942 223,876
On 16 September 2019 the company issued fixed rate loan notes totalling £175 million. The notes were
issued in two tranches being:
►
£75 million falling due for repayment on 16 September 2031
►
£100 million falling due for repayment on 16 September 2042
On 1 December 2021 the company issued new fixed rate loan notes totalling £50 million.
►
£50 million falling due for repayment on 1 December 2035
b. Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Irredeemable Debenture Stock
3 % perpetual stock 25 25
3.5 % perpetual stock 384 384
4 % perpetual stock 175 175
5 % perpetual stock 359 359
5.5 % perpetual stock 1 1
6 % perpetual stock 37 37
981 981
Interest on irredeemable debenture stock is payable six monthly.
c. Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Lease liability
Balance as at 1 April 3,951 4,499
Remeasurement of lease 193 -
Less: capital repayment (445) (548)
3,699 3,951
The total cash outflow in the year in respect of the company leasing activities was £0.4 million
(2024: £0.5 million).

Graphics
264 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
18. Loans and borrowings continued
Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Lease liability
Non-current lease liability 3,199 3,488
Current lease liability 500 463
3,699 3,951
d. Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Current bank loans
Original loan amount 69,000 97,000
Less: unamortised issue costs (16) (27)
68,984 96,973
The current bank loans are the total of the Company’s draw downs on its revolving credit facility. The facility
has a limit of £125 million (2024: £125 million). Each draw down can be for an interest period of one, three or
six months. Interest is charged at a rate of SONIA plus 0.75 per cent margin and the principal and interest on
each draw down is repayable at the end of the interest period. The facility expires in September 2026.
At 31 March 2025 the total draw downs were £69 million (2024: £97 million).

19. Provisions
Group and Company
Third party
damage
claims
£000
Leak
allowance
£000
Other
provisions
£000
Total
£000
As at 1 April 2024 2,484 2,588 1,894 6,966
Additional amounts provided 1,303 4,176 5,387 10,866
Unused amounts reversed - - (956) (956)
Amounts utilised (1,173) (4,505) (3,184) (8,862)
31 March 2025 2,614 2,259 3,141 8,014
As at 1 April 2023 2,027 3,314 1,944 7,285
Additional amounts provided 1,306 3,618 1,821 6,745
Unused amounts reversed - - (515) (515)
Amounts utilised (849) (4,344) (1,356) (6,549)
31 March 2024 2,484 2,588 1,894 6,966
Other provisions are recognised when it is probable that the group has an obligation for which a reliable
estimate can be made of the amount. This includes amounts that may become payable under Ofwat’s
Innovation Fund and estimates of debt collection fees that may become payable. It also includes capital
infrastructure provisions to cover various potential third party costs, including compensation claims, arising
from the construction of infrastructure assets. The amounts recorded represent Management’s best estimate
of the value of settlement and any associated costs.



Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 265
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

19. Provisions continued
The timing of settlement for these obligations is uncertain but management consider that settlement is
more likely than not within the next year, and therefore amounts provided have been classified as current.
The group needs to determine the chances of settlement of these obligations, the likelihood of an outflow
of economic benefits occurring and whether there is a need to disclose a contingent liability or whether
a provision is required based on this assessment. There is an inherent risk that the final outcome of legal
claims will be different to amounts provided.



20. Trade and other payables
Group
2025
£000
2024
£000
Current liabilities
Financial liability payables
Trade payables 38,864 17,398
Amounts due to parent and fellow subsidiary undertakings 168 1,261
Other payables 9,481 8,129
Accruals 44,645 40,530
93,158 67,318
Non-financial liability payables
Payments received in advance 47,674 46,227
Other taxes and social security 2,927 1,304
50,601 47,531
Total trade and other payables 143,759 114,849
Non-current liabilities
Financial liability payables
Deposits payable to developers
3,483
3,864


Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Current liabilities
Financial liability payables
Trade payables 38,864 17,398
Amounts due to parent and fellow subsidiary undertakings 4,545 5,551
Other payables 9,481 8,129
Accruals 41,445 35,152
94,335 66,230
Non-financial liability payables
Payments received in advance 47,674 46,227
Other taxes and social security 2,927 1,304
50,601 47,531
Total trade and other payables 144,936 113,761
Non-current liabilities
Financial liability payables
Deposits payable to developers
3,483
3,864

Graphics
266 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025



21. Financial instruments – Fair values and risk management
Financial risk management objectives and policies
The group’s financial instruments comprise index linked loans, variable rate loans, fixed rate loans, cash,
short-term and medium-term deposits, trade receivables and trade and other payables. The main purpose
of the group’s financial instruments is to raise finance for the group’s operations.
The group’s treasury operations are managed within parameters defined by the board and the board of HDF
(UK) Holdings Limited. It is the group’s policy to minimise liquidity risk within an acceptable range of interest
rates. The group does not use foreign currency financial instruments. The main risks arising from the group’s
financial instruments are interest rate and liquidity risk. There are no regulatory capital requirements placed
on the group.
Interest rate and Cash flow risk
The group finances its activities through a mixture of cash generated from operations, irredeemable
debentures and other fixed rate long-term loans, variable rate loans and long-term index linked loans.
Debentures are long-term fixed rate loans. Other fixed rate loans include listed bonds and loan notes. Long-
term index linked loans comprise loans linked to inflation.
The group’s policy is to manage short-term interest rate risk and cash flow risk by using short-term
fixed rate drawdowns under a revolving committed facility. During the year to 31 March 2025 there
was a net outflow of £28 million (2024: inflow of £67 million). It is the view of the group that long-
term fluctuations in interest rates will be within the parameters that are considered acceptable by
the group.
The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a reasonable possible change in interest rates, with all
other variables held constant, on the group’s profit before tax. The sensitivity analysis excludes all fixed rate
financial instruments carried at amortised cost.
Group and Company
Increase/
decrease in
basis points
Effect on
profit
before tax
£000
Effect on
shareholders’
equity
£000
2025
Sterling +300 (5,670) (4,253)
Sterling -100 1,890 1,418
2024
Sterling +300 (6,510) (4,883)
Sterling -100 2,170 1,628
Liquidity risk
The group aims to maintain a balance between continuity of funding and flexibility. Continuity of
funding has been guaranteed throughout the period by the existence of long-term funding facilities.
Short-term flexibility is achieved by varying the drawdown amounts under the revolving committed facility.
Further details are given below. Cash is also put on deposit with variable maturity dates so as to mitigate
liquidity risk.

Inflation risk
The group manages its inflation risk on its financial liabilities through the use of index linked bonds and loans
(note 18). The group considers that the inflation rate risk is effectively managed as Ofwat allows revenues to
be increased in line with inflation.




Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 267
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025



21. Financial instruments – Fair values and risk management continued
Credit risk
The group’s financial assets include short-term and medium-term bank deposits and trade receivables, which
represent the group’s maximum exposure to credit risk in relation to financial assets. The group’s credit risk
is primarily attributable to its trade receivables, which are stated in the statement of financial position at
original invoice amount less an allowance for any doubtful debts (see note 16). An estimate for the provision
for doubtful debts is calculated by management based on the application of expected recovery rates to
an aged debt profile. We have no significant concentration of credit risk with exposure spread over a large
number of domestic customers and a number of retail customers. For our retail customers, we have secured
adequate collateral under the Market Codes to mitigate any risk.

Capital risk management
Capital risk primarily relates to whether the group is adequately capitalised and financially solvent. The
board reviews the group’s exposure to these risks and actively oversees the treasury activities, reviewing
the treasury policy and approving the treasury strategy and funding plan. The group’s key objectives in
managing capital are:
►
To maintain a broad portfolio of debt, diversified by source and maturity
►
To retain the company’s investment grade credit rating
►
To satisfy the covenants under South East Water’s financing documents
►
To provide liquidity sufficient to fund ongoing obligations on an ongoing basis without reliance on the
standby liquidity facilities
►
To maintain customer bills at a level which is both affordable and sustainable
At the date of signing the financial statements the group has sufficient committed liquidity to continue
to meet its obligations until at least September 2026, when the existing revolving credit facility is due to
mature. Discussions with lenders on the renewal of our revolving credit facility are well advanced, but at the
date of signing the financial statements the renewal has not been legally committed. The directors believe
that it is reasonable to assume that the renewal of revolving credit facility will become legally binding during
the summer 2025 and are therefore of the opinion that the group will have adequate resources to continue
in operational existence for the foreseeable future, being a period of at least 12 months from the date of
approval of the financial statements.
The group is part of a Whole Business Securitisation (“WBS”) Group of companies. The other companies in the
Securitisation Group (South East Water (Finance) Limited (SEWF) and South East Water (Holdings) Limited
(SEWH)) guarantee the funding activity of South East Water Limited (the company), and the company and
SEWH guarantee the funding activity of SEWF, which has historically raised debt finance for the company.
The Securitisation Group is required to comply with certain covenants, which include, amongst others:
►
Interest cover ratios
►
Gearing ratios
►
An obligation to manage the maturity profile of debt arrangements
►
An obligation to manage the proportion of future interest cost which is fixed and/or index-linked
The Securitisation Group complied with these covenants throughout the financial year.
The capital structure of the group as at 31 March 2025 consists of net debt and equity as follows:
2025
£000
2024
£000
Net debt (statutory basis – note 18) 1,395.4 1,348.4
Unamortised issue costs 5.7 5.1
Cash (36.1) (5.0)
Net debt (covenant basis) 1,365.0 1,348.5
Equity attributable to owners of the group 288.4 242.8
After the end of the financial year, in May 2025, shareholders injected £200 million of equity into the
company. This equity injection is not reflected in the table above.




Graphics
268 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements

21. Financial instruments – Fair values and risk management continued

Fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities
Fair value is the amount at which a financial instrument could be exchanged in an arm’s length transaction
between informed and willing parties.
The following tables provide a comparison by category of the carrying amount and the fair values of the
group’s financial assets and financial liabilities at 31 March 2025.
Notes
Book Value
2025
£000
Fair Value
2025
£000
Book Value
2024
£000
Fair Value
2024
£000
Financial assets at amortised cost
Trade and other receivables 16 44,547 44,547 43,794 43,794
Cash 17 36,072 36,072 4,986 4,986
80,619 80,619 48,780 48,780
Financial liabilities at amortised cost
Trade and other payables 20 92,990 92,525 66,057 65,727
Irredeemable debentures 18 981 853 981 758
Listed bonds 18 400,184 330,040 392,971 386,112
Index linked loans 18 578,488 504,536 510,271 507,723
Drawdown facility 18 68,984 70,650 96,973 97,143
Variable rate loan 18 119,140 118,773 119,393 120,335
Fixed rate loan notes 18 223,942 137,367 223,876 167,526
Lease liability 18 3,699 3,733 3,951 3,837
Amounts due to parent and group undertakings
20 168 167 1,261 1,255
Trade and other payables over 1 year 20 3,483 3,466 3,864 3,845
1,492,059 1,262,110 1,419,598 1,354,261
The net book value is considered to equate to the fair value for trade and other receivables due to the
short maturity of the amounts receivable. The fair value of trade and other payables and amounts due
to parent and group undertakings have been adjusted for the appropriate credit risk. The fair values of
irredeemable debentures and the lease liability has been calculated using the discounted cash flow method.
The calculation includes all future capital and interest payments discounted by an amount representing
credit risk and a further amount representing future inflation.
The fair value of the group’s other long-term debt, consisting of listed bonds, index linked loans, variable
rate loans and fixed rate loan notes have been calculated based on the expected future yields on each of the
debt instruments, except where a current market valuation is available.
Fair value hierarchy
The group uses the following hierarchy for determining and disclosing the fair value of financial instruments
by valuation technique:
►
Level 1: quoted (unadjusted) prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities
►
Level 2: other techniques for which all inputs with a significant effect on the recorded fair value are
observable, either directly or indirectly
►
Level 3: techniques which use inputs which have a significant effect on the recorded fair value that are
not based on observable market data



Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 269
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
21. Financial instruments – Fair values and risk management continued
The group held the following financial instruments which are not measured at fair value but fair value
disclosures are required:
31 March 2025
Total
£000
Level 1
£000
Level 2
£000
Level 3
£000
Fair value of financial liabilities at amortised cost
Trade and other payables 92,525 - 92,525 -
Irredeemable debentures 853 - 853 -
Listed bonds 330,040 - 330,040 -
Index linked loans 504,536 - 504,536 -
Drawdown facility 70,650 - 70,650 -
Variable rate loan 118,773 - 118,773 -
Fixed rate loan notes 137,367 - 137,367 -
Lease liability 3,733 - 3,733 -
Amounts due to parent and group undertakings 167 - 167 -
Trade and other payables over 1 year 3,466 - 3,466 -
Total fair value of financial liabilities at amortised cost 1,262,110 - 1,262,110 -
31 March 2024
Total
£000
Level 1
£000
Level 2
£000
Level 3
£000
Fair value of financial liabilities at amortised cost
Trade and other payables 65,727 - 65,727 -
Irredeemable debentures 758 - 758 -
Listed bonds 386,112 - 386,112 -
Index linked loans 507,723 - 507,723 -
Drawdown facility 97,143 - 97,143 -
Variable rate loan 120,335 - 120,335 -
Fixed rate loan notes 167,526 - 167,526 -
Lease liability 3,837 - 3,837 -
Amounts due to parent and group undertakings 1,255 - 1,255 -
Trade and other payables over 1 year 3,845 - 3,845 -
Total fair value of financial liabilities at amortised cost 1,354,261 - 1,354,261 -


Graphics
270 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
21. Financial instruments – Fair values and risk management continued
Maturity of financial instruments
The table below summarises the maturity profile of the group’s financial assets and liabilities based on
contractual undiscounted payments:
31 March 2025
Within 1 year
£000
1 – 2 years
£000
2 – 5 years
£000
Over 5 years
£000
Total
£000
Fixed rate
Fixed rate financial liabilities:
Irredeemable debentures 41 41 124 1,077 1,283
Listed bonds 9,268 9,268 184,537 - 203,073
Fixed rate loan notes 6,445 6,445 19,335 274,127 306,352
Total fixed rate financial liabilities 15,754 15,754 203,996 275,204 510,708
Floating rate
Floating rate financial assets:
Short-term financial assets 93,992 - - - 93,992
Cash 36,072 - - - 36,072
Total floating rate financial assets 130,064 - - - 130,064
Floating rate financial liabilities:
Short-term financial liabilities 93,158 - - - 93,158
Listed bonds 5,993 6,091 18,867 373,188 404,139
Index-linked loans 19,058 19,361 59,901 416,755 515,075
Variable rate loan 79,160 121,907 - - 201,067
Lease liability 500 664 1,475 1,513 4,152
Trade and other payables over 1 year - 3,483 - - 3,483
Total floating rate financial liabilities 197,869 151,506 80,243 791,456 1,221,074
31 March 2024
Within 1 year
£000
1 – 2 years
£000
2 – 5 years
£000
Over 5 years
£000
Total
£000
Fixed rate
Fixed rate financial liabilities:
Irredeemable debentures 41 41 124 1,078 1,284
Listed bonds 9,268 9,268 27,805 175,268 221,609
Fixed rate loan notes 6,445 6,445 19,335 274,127 306,352
Total fixed rate financial liabilities 15,754 15,754 47,264 450,473 529,245
Floating rate
Floating rate financial assets:
Short-term financial assets 91,779 - - - 91,779
Cash 4,986 - - - 4,986
Total floating rate financial assets 96,765 - - - 96,765
Floating rate financial liabilities:
Short-term financial liabilities 67,318 - - - 67,318
Listed bonds 5,871 6,003 18,798 402,034 432,706
Index-linked loans 16,744 17,079 53,241 351,901 438,965
Variable rate loan 218,794 - - - 218,794
Lease liability 463 662 1,499 1,867 4,491
Trade and other payables over 1 year - 3,864 - - 3,864
Total floating rate financial liabilities 309,190 27,608 73,538 755,802 1,166,138


Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 271
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
21. Financial instruments – Fair values and risk management continued
Borrowing facilities
The group has committed borrowing facilities of £201 million (2024: £196 million), of which £69 million
(2024: £97 million) was drawn down. Any drawdowns under these facilities are repayable in less than one
year. The capital and working capital facility of £125 million (2024: £125 million) expires in September 2026.
The DSR Liquidity Facility of £51 million (2024: £47 million) and the O&M Reserve Facility of £25 million
(2024: £24 million) expire in June 2025. The facilities were renewed in June 2025 for a further year at
£45 million for the DSR facility and £33 million for the O&M facility.
Items of income, expense, gains and losses
The net gains or losses of the different classes of financial instruments on the income statement are:
Note
2025
£000
2024
£000
Financial assets at amortised cost 8 2,490 1,711
Financial liabilities at amortised cost 8 (76,758) (102,151)
Financial assets due to impairment 16 (4,055) (5,714)
22. Deferred Income
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
As at 1 April 9,297 10,188
Received in the year 7,171 7,194
Released during the year (7,940) (8,085)
As at 31 March 8,528 9,297
Non-current 3,913 3,646
Current 4,615 5,651
8,528 9,297
Contributions received towards below ground assets are released to the income statement on completion
of the performance obligations within the contracts with customers.

Graphics
272 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
23. Retirement benefit schemes
Group and Company (hereafter referred to as “group” in this note)
The South East Water pension scheme “SEWPS” provides benefits to current and former group
employees. From 17 June 2011 onwards, benefits from the SEWPS have been provided solely on a defined
contribution basis.
The scheme was originally contracted-out under the Guaranteed Minimum Pension Test. From 6 April 1997,
after taking independent actuarial advice, the group decided to contract-out via the Protected Rights
Test. With effect from 6 April 2012, the Government removed the option for schemes to contract-out via a
Protected Rights basis. From 6 April 2012, the group decided to contract-out via a salary related basis.
The final salary defined benefit section of the scheme was closed to new entrants with effect from July 2002.
As a result of the merger of South East Water Limited and Mid Kent Water Limited in October 2006, the
group acquired the Mid Kent Group Pension Scheme “MKGPS”, which is a defined benefit scheme in the UK.
Both of the defined benefit schemes are separate funds that are legally separate from the group. The
trustees of the pension schemes are required by law to act in the interests of the funds and all relevant
stakeholders in the plans. The trustees of the pension funds are responsible for the investment policies with
regard to the assets of the funds.
On 31 March 2015 both of the group’s defined benefit schemes closed to further benefit accrual. This was
advised to the schemes’ members on 13 December 2012. From 31 March 2015 all active members became
deferred members and their accrued benefits will increase in line with statutory deferred revaluation. All
members were invited to join the group’s defined contribution scheme from 1 April 2015.
On 5 December 2022 the trustees of the MKGPS entered into an insurance transaction to fully insure the
pension scheme. The “buy-in” transaction involved the payment of a one-off premium by the pension
scheme to an insurance company. In return the insurance company will make regular payments to the
scheme exactly matching the insured benefit payments. There was no transfer of the retirement benefit
obligation which remains with the pension scheme. The insurance policy is an asset of the pension scheme
in place of cash and other investments previously held.
Following the buy-in a revised Schedule of Contributions was agreed between the company and the
trustees. No further deficit contributions are to be paid to MKGPS, although if additional funding is required
in a future period in respect of pension scheme expenses the trustees can request that the company pays
these. Deficit contributions that would previously have been paid to MKGPS have been diverted to SEWPS
until 31 March 2025.
On 12 December 2024 the trustees of the SEWPS entered into an insurance transaction to fully insure
the pension scheme. The “buy-in” transaction involved the payment of a one-off premium by the pension
scheme to an insurance company. In return the insurance company will make regular payments to the scheme
exactly matching the insured benefit payments. There is no transfer of the retirement benefit obligation
which remains with the pension scheme. The insurance policy is an asset of the pension scheme in place of
cash and other investments previously held.
Following the buy-in a revised Schedule of Contributions was agreed between the company and trustees.
No further deficit contributions are to be paid to SEWPS after 31 March 2025, although if additional funding
is required in a future period in respect of pension scheme expenses the trustees can request that the
company pays these.
The last full actuarial valuation of the SEWPS took place as at 31 March 2023. The next full actuarial valuation
will be performed as at 31 March 2026.


Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 273
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
23. Retirement benefit schemes continued
The group contribution rate for the SEWPS defined benefit pension scheme during the year was nil (2024:
nil) of pensionable remuneration plus an annual contribution of £7.0 million (2024: £6.6 million) in respect of
the deficit as at 31 March 2023. The group’s future annual contribution is expected to be £nil as the buy-in
transaction has ensured that the scheme’s liabilities are fully insured.
The last full actuarial valuation of the MKGPS took place as at 31 March 2023. The next full actuarial valuation
will be performed as at 31 March 2026.
The triennial valuation of the MKGPS adopted a different methodology in 2023 following the insurance
transaction in 2022. The valuation of the liabilities was taken as the valuation used by the insurers at the time
of the insurance transaction rather than the usual actuarial assumptions calculation. This does not affect
the net position of the scheme as the liabilities are matched with a corresponding asset, namely the value of
the insurance policy. The IAS19 valuation was based on the 2023 triennial valuation.
The group contribution towards the MKGPS defined benefit pension scheme during the year was nil (2024:
nil) of pensionable remuneration plus an annual contribution of £nil (2024: £nil million) in respect of the
deficit as at 31 March 2023. The group’s future annual contribution is expected to be £nil as the buy-in
transaction has ensured that the scheme’s liabilities are fully insured.
Following the Court of Appeal’s ruling on 25 July 2024 in the Virgin Media case regarding certain contracted-
out pension scheme benefits and the statutory requirements for making changes to those benefits, an
assessment has been undertaken to determine whether any of the changes made in either of the group’s
defined benefit schemes could be affected by the ruling. The ruling means that amendments made to
contracted out scheme rules would only be effective if the scheme had obtained actuarial advice regarding
the proposed amendments. If advice had not been received, the amendments could be set aside. The group
has undertaken a review of its defined benefit schemes and concluded that there are no expected liability
impacts for either scheme.
The group also has obligations to pay a number of former employees’ pensions on a defined benefit basis
which are not included in either of the pension schemes. These pensions are paid by the group directly.
The payments are treated as contributions for unfunded pensions in the tables below and are equal to
the benefits paid. The value of future obligations has been calculated on an actuarial basis and the liability
of £2.4 million (2024: £2.5 million) is recognised on the statement of financial position.


Graphics
274 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
23. Retirement benefit schemes continued
Defined contribution scheme
Pension costs recognised in the income statement for the defined contribution scheme were as follows:
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Defined contribution scheme 3,419 3,114
Defined benefit schemes
The major assumptions used for the actuarial valuations were:
SEW
Pensions
2025
%
SEW
Pensions
2024
%
MKW
Pensions
2025
%
MKW
Pensions
2024
%
Main assumptions
Rate of increase in pensions in payment 2.65 2.65 2.65 2.65
Rate of increase in deferred pensions 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70
Discount rate
5.70
4.85 5.70
4.85
RPI assumption 3.15 3.20 3.15 3.20
CPI assumption 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70
Life expectancies from age 65
Currently aged 65 – male 20.9 20.6 20.9 20.6
Currently aged 65 – female 23.5 23.2 23.5 23.2
Currently aged 45 – male
22.6 22.3 22.6 22.3
Currently aged 45 – female 25.5 25.2 25.5 25.2
The weighted average duration of the defined benefit obligation at the end of the year is 13 years
(2024: 14 years).
The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a reasonably possible change in the above key
assumptions, with all other variables held constant, on the schemes’ liabilities:
(Decrease)/
increase in
liabilities
£000
(Decrease)/
increase
%
0.1% decrease to the discount rate 1,782 1.1
0.1% increase to inflation 1,689 1.1
One year increase in life expectancy 5,561 3.1


Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 275
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
23. Retirement benefit schemes continued
The fair value of the assets in the schemes and the present value of the liabilities in the schemes were:
Group and Company
SEW
Pensions
£000
MKW
Pensions
£000
Total
£000
2025
Fair value of scheme assets
106,526
58,476
165,002
Present value of defined benefit obligations (100,827) (55,797) (156,624)
Surplus in the schemes 5,699 2,679 8,378
£000
Unfunded obligation 2025
Present value of unfunded obligations
(2,357)
Group and Company
SEW
Pensions
£000
MKW
Pensions
£000
Total
£000
2024
Fair value of scheme assets
131,924
67,173
199,097
Present value of defined benefit obligations (112,672) (63,411) (176,083)
Surplus in the schemes 19,252 3,762 23,014
£000
Unfunded obligation 2024
Present value of unfunded obligations
(2,493)
SEW Pension Scheme
Group and Company
Quoted
£000
Unquoted
£000
Total
£000 %
2025
Equities
-
97
97
0%
Cash 3,534 2,068 5,602 5%
Insured persons - 100,827 100,827 95%
Total fair value of assets 3,534 102,992 106,526 100%
SEW Pension Scheme
Group and Company
Quoted
£000
Unquoted
£000
Total
£000 %
2024
Equities
7,802
99
7,901
6%
Corporate bonds
-
62,656 62,656 47%
Government bonds 41,705 - 41,705 32%
Cash 14,692 603 15,295 12%
Insured persons - 4,367 4,367 3%
Total fair value of assets 64,199 67,725 131,924 100%


Graphics
276 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
23. Retirement benefit schemes continued
MKW Pension Scheme
Group and Company
Quoted
£000
Unquoted
£000
Total
£000 %
2025
Cash 2,659 20 2,679 5%
Insured persons - 55,797 55,797 95%
Total fair value of assets 2,659 55,817 58,476 100%
MKW Pension Scheme
Group and Company
Quoted
£000
Unquoted
£000
Total
£000 %
2024
Cash 3,507 255 3,762 6%
Insured persons - 63,411 63,411 94%
Total fair value of assets 3,507 63,666 67,173 100%
Analysis of amounts charged/(credited) to income statement:
Group and Company
SEW
Pensions
£000
MKW
Pensions
£000
Unfunded
Pensions
£000
Total
£000
2025
Net interest on net defined benefit asset (1,080) (161) 112 (1,129)
Administrative expenses 911 914 - 1,825
Total amount (credited)/charged to income statement
(169) 753 112 696
2024
Net interest on net defined benefit asset (1,106) (187) 112 (1,181)
Administrative expenses 596 361 - 957
Total amount charged/(credited) to income statement
(510) 174 112 (224)

Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 277
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
23. Retirement benefit schemes continued
Analysis of amounts recognised in the statement of comprehensive income:
Group and Company
SEW
Pensions
£000
MKW
Pensions
£000
Unfunded
Pensions
£000
Total
£000
2025
Return on schemes’ assets excluding interest income (30,207) (5,765) - (35,972)
Actuarial gain due to changes in financial assumptions
10,215 6,001 109 16,325
Actuarial loss due to changes in demographic assumptions
(511) (431) - (942)
Experience loss on obligation (240) (135) (212) (587)
Actuarial loss recognised in the statement of
comprehensive income
(20,743)
(330)
(103)
(21,176)
Cumulative actuarial losses (41,756) (38,590) (3,677) (84,023)
2024
Return on schemes’ assets excluding interest income (5,091) (2,894) - (7,985)
Actuarial loss due to changes in financial assumptions (891) (562) (29) (1,482)
Actuarial gain due to changes in demographic assumptions
3,648 2,164 66 5,878
Experience loss on obligation (5,362) 1,197 (261) (4,426)
Actuarial loss recognised in the statement of
comprehensive income
(7,696)
(95)
(224)
(8,015)
Cumulative actuarial losses (21,013) (38,260) (3,574) (62,847)
Reconciliation of defined benefit obligations:
Group and Company
SEW
Pensions
£000
MKW
Pensions
£000
Unfunded
Pensions
£000
Total
£000
2025
Opening defined benefit obligations 112,672 63,411 2,493 178,576
Interest cost 5,281 2,952 112 8,345
Actuarial (gain)/loss (9,464) (5,435) 103 (14,796)
Benefits paid (7,662) (5,131) (351) (13,144)
Closing defined benefit obligations 100,827 55,797 2,357 158,981
2024
Opening defined benefit obligations 112,692 68,171 2,482 183,345
Interest cost 5,276 3,183 113 8,572
Actuarial loss/(gain) 2,605 (2,799) 224 30
Benefits paid (7,901) (5,144) (326) (13,371)
Closing defined benefit obligations 112,672 63,411 2,493 178,576


Graphics
278 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
23. Retirement benefit schemes continued
Reconciliation of fair value of plans’ assets:
Group and Company
SEW
Pensions
£000
MKW
Pensions
£000
Total
£000
2025
Opening fair values of schemes’ assets 131,924 67,173 199,097
Interest income on assets 6,361 3,113 9,474
Return on scheme assets excluding interest income (30,207) (5,765) (35,972)
Contributions by employer 7,021 - 7,021
Administrative expenses (911) (914) (1,825)
Benefits paid (7,662) (5,131) (12,793)
Closing fair values of schemes’ assets 106,526 58,476 165,002
2024
Opening fair values of schemes’ assets 132,503 72,202 204,705
Interest income on assets 6,382 3,370 9,752
Return on scheme assets excluding interest income (5,091) (2,894) (7,985)
Contributions by employer 6,627 - 6,627
Administrative expenses (596) (361) (957)
Benefits paid (7,901) (5,144) (13,045)
Closing fair values of schemes’ assets 131,924 67,173 199,097
The Trust Deed provides South East Water Limited with an unconditional right to a refund of surplus assets
assuming the full settlement of plan liabilities in the event of a plan wind-up. Furthermore, in the ordinary
course of business the Trustee has no rights to unilaterally wind up or otherwise augment the benefits due
to members of the scheme. Based on these rights, any net surplus in the UK scheme is recognised in full.
There have been no amendments, curtailments or settlements during the year.

24. Share capital
Group and Company
Authorised
2025
Number
2025
£000
2024
Number
2024
£000
Shares treated as equity
Ordinary Shares shares of £1.00 each
175,000,000
175,000
100,000,000
100,000
Issued and fully paid
2025
Number
2025
£000
2024
Number
2024
£000
Ordinary Shares shares of £1.00 each
At 1 April
49,312,354
49,312
49,312,354
49,312
Issued during the period 75,000,000 75,000 - -
At 31 March 124,312,354 124,312 49,312,354 49,312
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 279
Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025
25. Analysis of amounts recognised in other comprehensive income
Group and Company
Accumulated
losses
£000
Year to 31 March 2025
Net actuarial loss on defined benefit pension schemes (21,176)
Deferred tax credit on net actuarial loss 5,294
(15,882)
Accumulated
losses
£000
Year to 31 March 2024
Net actuarial loss on defined benefit pension schemes (8,015)
Deferred tax credit on net actuarial loss 2,004
(6,011)
26. Movement in liabilities arising from financing activities
Group non-current loans and borrowings
Irredeemable
debenture
stock
£000
Listed bonds
£000
Fixed,
Variable,
Indexed
linked loans
and
lease liability
£000
Total
non-current
loans and
borrowings
£000
Balance 1 April 2023 981 380,461 817,059 1,198,501
Changes from other financing activities:
Indexation on index linked instruments - 12,349 39,942 52,291
Lease liability reclassification - - (453) (453)
Amortisation of issue costs - 161 480 641
Balance at 31 March 2024 981 392,971 857,028 1,250,980
Balance 1 April 2024 981 392,971 857,028 1,250,980
Changes from financing cash flows:
Index linked borrowing - - 50,000 50,000
Loan fees incurred - - (1,381) (1,381)
Changes from other financing activities:
Indexation on index linked instruments - 7,052 18,764 25,816
Lease liability reclassification - - (482) (482)
Lease revaluation - - 193 193
Amortisation of issue costs - 161 647 808
Balance at 31 March 2025 981 400,184 924,769 1,325,934


Graphics
280 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
26. Movement in liability arising from financing activities continued
Company non-current loans and borrowings
Irredeemable
debenture
stock
£000
Amounts due
to subsidiary
undertakings
£000
Fixed,
Variable,
Indexed
linked loans &
lease liability
£000
Total non-
current
loans and
borrowing
£000
Balance 1 April 2023 981 524,669 672,851 1,198,501
Changes from other financing activities:
Indexation on index linked instruments - 22,766 29,525 52,291
Lease liability reclassification - - (453) (453)
Amortisation of issue costs - 237 404 641
Balance at 31 March 2024 981 547,672 702,327 1,250,980
Balance 1 April 2024 981 547,672 702,327 1,250,980
Changes from financing cash flows:
Index linked borrowing - - 50,000 50,000
Loan fees incurred - - (1,381) (1,381)
Changes from other financing activities:
Indexation on index linked instruments - 12,605 13,211 25,816
Lease liability reclassification - - (482) (482)
Lease revaluation - - 193 193
Amortisation of issue costs - 237 571 808
Balance at 31 March 2025 981 560,514 764,439 1,325,934
Group & Company current loans and borrowings
Bank loans
and lease
liability
£000
Total current
loans and
borrowings
£000
Balance at 1 April 2023 30,520 30,520
Changes from financing cash flows:
Credit facility drawdowns 67,000 67,000
Lease capital payments (548) (548)
Changes from other financing activities:
Amortisation of issue costs 11 11
Lease liability reclassification 453 453
Balance at 31 March 2024 97,436 97,436
Balance 1 April 2024 97,436 97,436
Changes from financing cash flows:
Net credit facility repayments (28,000) (28,000)
Lease capital payments (445) (445)
Changes from other financing activities:
Amortisation of issue costs 11 11
Lease liability reclassification 482 482
Balance at 31 March 2025 69,484 69,484

Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 281





27. Capital commitments
Group and Company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Contracts placed for future capital expenditure not provided in the financial statements 64,605 82,140
All of the above capital commitments relate to Property, plant and equipment.
The overall reduction in the value of capital commitments is due to Butler WTW having a significantly lower
value committed, as the majority of work has been undertaken. Furthermore, some of our larger proposed
AMP 8 schemes have not reached full approval stage, the largest of which relates to Bewl WTW upgrade and
pumping station.

28. Contingent liabilities
Contingent liabilities are potential future outflows of cash which are either possible but not probable, or
probable and cannot be measured reliably.
Through the ordinary course of operations, the company is party to various contract disputes. The Directors
do not expect the ultimate resolution of any of these proceedings to have a material adverse effect on the
company’s results of operations, cash flows or financial position.
As discussed in the Annual Report on page 8, Ofwat launched an investigation into our supply resilience in
November 2023. The company has been cooperating fully with the investigation and has provided Ofwat
with a significant amount of additional information.
At this stage of the investigation it is unclear what the outcome will be. No liability has been provided for in
these financial statements, nor is it possible to reliably estimate any potential liability.


29. Obligations under operating leases
Group and Company Note
2025
£000
2024
£000
Lease payments under operating leases recognised as an expense
in the year
6
344
317

30. Events after the reporting date
In May 2025 a further equity injection by the company’s shareholder resulted in the issue of £200 million new
shares at a par value of £1 per share. The £200 million raised from the share issue will be used to reduce the
group’s gearing.

Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
282 South East Water Limited
2024/25 Group Annual Report and Financial Statements
31. Related party transactions
The group of companies into which results of the group are consolidated is that headed by HDF (UK) Holdings
Limited, a company registered in England and Wales.
Balances and transactions between the company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties of the
company, have been eliminated on consolidation and are not disclosed in this note. Details of transactions
between the group and other related parties are disclosed below.
31.1 Transactions with the group’s parent company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Opening balance as at 1 April - 5,260
Group relief paid - (5,260)
Closing balance as at 31 March - -
31.2 Other related party transactions
Other related party transactions are as follows:
Group’s ultimate parent company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Opening balance as at 1 April 1,071 4,383
Group relief paid (1,114) (3,290)
Audit fee reimbursement (145) (29)
Legal and professional fees (150) -
Other (104) 7
Closing balance as at 31 March (442) 1,071
Co-subsidiary of group’s ultimate parent company
2025
£000
2024
£000
Opening balance as at 1 April 132 132
Legal and professional fees (1) -
Closing balance as at 31 March 131 132
Key management compensation is disclosed in note 7 and discussed further in the remuneration report.

Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025

Graphics
Financial StatementsGovernanceStrategic Report
southeastwater.co.uk 283
32. Parent company and ultimate controlling parties
Utilities of Australia Pty Limited as Trustee for the Utilities Trust of Australia (“UTA”), NatWest Pension
Trustee Limited as Trustee for the NatWest Group Pension Fund (“NWPF”), Régime de Rentes du Mouvement
Desjardins (“RRMD”), Desjardins Financial Security Life Assurance Company (“DFSL”) and Certas Home and
Auto Insurance Company (“Certas”) are the company’s joint ultimate holding companies. UTA is resident
in Australia. NWPF is resident in the United Kingdom, RRMD, DFSL and Certas are resident in Canada. It is
the directors’ belief that there is no single ultimate controlling party and that the joint ultimate holding
companies control the company jointly.
The immediate parent company is South East Water (Holdings) Limited.
The largest and smallest group of companies into which results of the company are consolidated is that
headed by HDF (UK) Holdings Limited, a company which is incorporated in Great Britain and registered in
England and Wales. The consolidated financial statements of HDF (UK) Holdings Limited may be obtained
from the Company Secretary at the company’s registered office at Rocfort Road, Snodland, Kent, ME6 5AH.

Notes to the group financial statements
for the year ended 31 March 2025